110 files changed, 16459 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/78401-0.txt b/78401-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db6b3b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7252 @@
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 78401 ***
+
+
+
+
+                                                            MCWP3-11.3
+
+                       Scouting and Patrolling
+
+                            [Illustration]
+
+                          U.S. Marine Corps
+
+                            17 April 2000
+
+                                                     PCN 143 000075 00
+
+
+
+
+                            To Our Readers
+
+=Changes=: Readers of this publication are encouraged to submit
+suggestions and changes that will improve it. Recommendations may be
+sent directly to Commanding General, Marine Corps Combat Development
+Command, Doctrine Division (C 42), 3300 Russell Road, Suite 318A,
+Quantico, VA 22134-5021 or by fax to 703-784-2917 (DSN 278-2917)
+or by E-mail to =morgannc@mccdc.usmc.mil=. Recommendations should
+include the following information:
+
+   • Location of change
+        Publication number and title
+        Current page number
+        Paragraph number (if applicable)
+        Line number
+        Figure or table number (if applicable)
+
+   • Nature of change
+        Add, delete
+        Proposed new text, preferably double-spaced and typewritten
+
+   • Justification and/or source of change
+
+=Additional copies=: A printed copy of this publication may be
+obtained from Marine Corps Logistics Base, Albany, GA 31704-5001,
+by following the instructions in MCBul 5600, _Marine Corps
+Doctrinal Publications Status_. An electronic copy may be obtained
+from the Doctrine Division, MCCDC, world wide web home page
+which is found at the following universal reference locator:
+=http://www.doctrine.usmc.mil=.
+
+=Unless otherwise stated, whenever the masculine or feminine gender
+is used, both men and women are included.=
+
+
+
+
+                        DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY
+                Headquarters United States Marine Corps
+                       Washington, DC 20380-1776
+
+
+                                                         17 April 2000
+
+                               FOREWORD
+
+1. PURPOSE
+
+Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 3-11.3, _Scouting and
+Patrolling_, provides the doctrinal foundation and the tactics,
+techniques, and procedures for scouting and patrolling conducted
+by Marines from the fire team to the company level. Although the
+information focuses on infantry units, much of the information is
+also applicable to combat support units that are assigned patrolling
+missions.
+
+
+2. SCOPE
+
+MCWP 3-11.3 provides all Marines with the instructional material they
+need to build the skills necessary to become effective scouts and
+patrol team members. This publication provides the fundamentals of
+scouting and patrolling and their relationship to each other. It also
+addresses organizational structure of teams and patrols, the training
+required to develop teamwork, and reporting requirements.
+
+
+3. SUPERSESSION
+
+MCWP 3-11.3 supersedes Fleet Marine Force Manual (FMFM) 6-7,
+_Scouting and Patrolling_, dated 6 January 1989.
+
+
+4. CERTIFICATION
+
+Reviewed and approved this date.
+
+          BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS
+
+                     [Illustration: J. E. Rhodes]
+
+                             J. E. RHODES
+                 Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps
+                          Commanding General
+                Marine Corps Combat Development Command
+
+DISTRIBUTION: 143 000075 00
+
+
+
+
+                          TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+                           PART 1. SCOUTING
+
+  Chapter 1. Fundamentals of Scouting
+
+  1001  Purpose                                                    1-1
+  1002  Required Scouting Skills                                   1-1
+
+  Chapter 2. Terrain, Maps, and Direction
+
+  2001  Terrain Features                                           2-1
+  2002  The Lensatic Compass                                       2-1
+  2003  Stars, Sun, and Other Features                             2-5
+  2004  Range Determination                                        2-6
+
+  Chapter 3. Enemy Activity
+
+  3001  Estimating Enemy Strengths                                 3-1
+  3002  Interpreting Signs and Tracks                              3-1
+  3003  Knowing the Enemy                                          3-2
+
+  Chapter 4. Daylight Scouting
+
+  4001  Cover and Concealment                                      4-1
+  4002  Camouflage                                                 4-2
+  4003  Individual Movement                                        4-3
+  4004  Route Selection                                            4-5
+
+  Chapter 5. Night Scouting
+
+  5001  Night Vision                                               5-1
+  5002  Appearance of Objects                                      5-3
+  5003  Sounds                                                     5-3
+  5004  Smells and Touch                                           5-3
+  5005  Clothing and Weapons                                       5-3
+  5006  Concealment                                                5-3
+  5007  Aids to Night Scouting                                     5-4
+  5008  Aids to Night Movement                                     5-4
+  5009  Locating and Plotting the Enemy at Night                   5-6
+  50010 Routes of Movement                                         5-8
+
+  Chapter 6. Observing and Reporting
+
+  6001  Observation Posts                                          6-1
+  6002  Reporting                                                  6-2
+
+  Chapter 7. Scouting Fire Team
+
+  7001  Positioning                                                7-1
+  7002  Locating Enemy Positions                                   7-2
+  7003  Action With an Attacking Platoon                           7-2
+  7004  Action With an Enveloping Unit                             7-5
+
+
+                     PART 2. INFANTRY PATROLLING
+
+  Chapter 8. Fundamentals of Infantry Patrolling
+
+  8001  Definitions                                                8-1
+  8002  Relation of Patrolling to Scouting                         8-1
+  8003  Purpose                                                    8-1
+  8004  Types of Patrols                                           8-1
+  8005  Training                                                   8-2
+  8006  Keys to Successful Patrolling                              8-3
+
+  Chapter 9. Patrol Organization
+
+  9001  General Organization                                       9-1
+  9002  Task Organization                                          9-1
+
+  Chapter 10. Patrol Preparation
+
+  10001  Mission                                                  10-1
+  10002  Factors Influencing Patrol Size                          10-1
+  10003  Commander’s Duties                                       10-1
+  10004  Patrol Leader Duties                                     10-2
+
+  Chapter 11. Movement to and Return from the Objective Area
+
+  11001  Passage of Lines                                         11-1
+  11002  Organization for Movement                                11-1
+  11003  Control Measures for Movement                            11-4
+  11004  Precautions at Danger Areas                              11-5
+  11005  Hide                                                     11-6
+  11006  Immediate Actions Upon Enemy Contact                     11-6
+  11007  Patrol Leader’s Action in a Developing Situation        11-10
+  11008  Return From Objective Area                              11-10
+
+  Chapter 12. Reconnaissance Patrols
+
+  12001  General Missions                                         12-1
+  12002  Specific Missions                                        12-1
+  12003  Types of Reconnaissance                                  12-2
+  12004  Task Organization                                        12-2
+  12005  Size of Reconnaissance Patrols                           12-3
+  12006  Reconnaissance Equipment                                 12-3
+  12007  Reconnaissance Patrol Actions at the Objective Area      12-3
+
+  Chapter 13. Combat Patrols
+
+  13001  Task Organization                                        13-1
+  13002  Equipment                                                13-1
+  13003  Raid Patrols                                             13-1
+  13004  Contact Patrols                                          13-3
+  13005  Ambush Patrols                                           13-3
+  13006  Security Patrols                                         13-7
+  13007  Urban Patrols                                            13-8
+
+  Chapter 14. Information and Reports
+
+  14001  Reporting                                                14-1
+  14002  Captured Items                                           14-1
+  14003  Prisoners                                                14-2
+  14004  Patrol Report                                            14-2
+  14005  Patrol Critique                                          14-2
+
+  Appendix A. Patrol Warning Order                                 A-1
+
+  Appendix B. Patrol Order                                         B-1
+
+  Appendix C. Patrol Evaluation Checklist                          C-1
+
+  Appendix D. Ambush Formations                                    D-1
+
+  Appendix E. Acronyms                                             E-1
+
+  Appendix F. References                                           F-1
+
+
+
+
+                           PART 1. SCOUTING
+
+
+                 CHAPTER 1. FUNDAMENTALS OF SCOUTING
+
+     Scouting involves observing terrain and/or the enemy, and
+     accurately reporting those observations. Scouting requires
+     proficiency in the use of weapons, cover and concealment,
+     route selection, and skill in unobserved day or night
+     movement.
+
+
+1001. PURPOSE
+
+When an infantry unit is not actively fighting the enemy, it should
+be actively searching for the enemy, which is the primary purpose
+of scouting. The unit attempts to keep the enemy off balance while
+making preparations for further attacks. Physically locating and
+keeping the enemy off balance are normally accomplished by small
+units ranging from a two-person scouting party to a squad-size patrol.
+
+Infantrymen are sent out as scouts or as members of a patrol because
+the commander needs information about the enemy, terrain, and the
+location of friendly troops. The lives of the entire unit may depend
+upon the success or failure of a scout or patrol and the accuracy
+and timeliness of the report. The success of the scout or patrol
+will depend upon their training, preparation by the commander, and
+understanding their mission and the commander’s requirements.
+
+To wage combat successfully, a commander must have accurate,
+detailed, and timely information about the enemy, the terrain, and
+adjacent friendly units. Well-trained scouts and capably led patrols
+are among the most effective means the commander has for acquiring
+the information necessary to plan tactical actions and make decisions
+in execution.
+
+
+1002. REQUIRED SCOUTING SKILLS
+
+To be effective, a scout must be able to--
+
+   • Recognize terrain features.
+
+   • Read a map and determine direction.
+
+   • Practice and implement the principles of cover and concealment.
+
+   • Fully utilize movement and route selection.
+
+   • Know the enemy (estimate enemy unit composition and strength).
+
+   • Observe and report information accurately.
+
+   • Select routes and move through numerous types of terrain.
+
+
+
+
+               CHAPTER 2. TERRAIN, MAPS, AND DIRECTION
+
+
+     A scout must understand map symbols, identify elevations
+     from contour interval lines, scale distance on a map,
+     relate natural and man-made features shown on the map to
+     the actual features on the ground, plot a course from
+     one point to another, and locate his current position.
+     To relate a map to the actual terrain and its features,
+     a scout must be able to orient it to the ground using a
+     compass, two points, a watch, and the sun or the stars.
+
+
+2001. TERRAIN FEATURES
+
+Since the infantry works and fights on the ground, terrain ashore
+information that scouts gather and report on is of great importance.
+Hills, valleys, woods, and streams are the forms and growths commonly
+referred to as natural land features. Artificial or man-made features
+include houses, bridges, and railroads. Figure 2-1 shows some
+important terrain features.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-1. Natural and Artificial Terrain Features.]
+
+
+2002. THE LENSATIC COMPASS
+
+The best method of finding direction, during both day and night, is
+with a compass. The lensatic and M2 are the two types of compasses
+issued to infantry units. Both work on the same principle.
+
+The standard compass for general use in the Marine Corps is the
+pivot-mounted lensatic compass, so called because azimuths are read
+through a magnifying lens in the eyepiece. Figure 2-2, on page 2-2,
+shows the lensatic compass and its nomenclature. The meter graphic
+scale on the side of the compass is 1:50,000, which is the most
+used scale in military mapping. The graphic scale is useful in the
+field as a straightedge, an aid in orienting the map, and a means of
+reading map grid coordinates. The plastic dial is graduated in both
+degrees and mils. Numbers on the dial are printed in black. There
+are luminous markings on the bezel, floating dial, and on both ends
+of the sighting wire, plus a 3-degree bezel serration and clicking
+device that permit reading azimuths at night. The compass is carried
+in a nylon case that may be attached to the cartridge belt.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-2. Lensatic Compass.]
+
+Magnetic compasses are affected by the presence of iron or magnetic
+fields. Consequently, the scout should not be within the influence
+of local magnetic attraction while using a compass to determine
+direction. The rifle, pistol, and other metal objects must be laid
+aside when reading the compass. The minimum distances the scout
+should be from visible masses of iron and electrical fields of
+magnetism for the compass to provide accurate readings are provided
+below.
+
+                                    Minimum
+           Magnetic Fields         Distances
+                                   (meters)
+    High tension powerlines           60
+    Field guns                        20
+    Vehicles (wheeled or tracked)     20
+    Telephone and telegraph wires     10
+    Barbed wire                       10
+    Machine gun                        3
+    Rifle, pistol                      1
+
+
+Reading an Azimuth
+
+To read an azimuth to any point, the cover of the compass is raised
+to an angle of 90 degrees in relation to the index face, and the
+eyepiece is lifted to a 45-degree angle in relation to the bezel, or
+so the numbers on the dial can be seen. The thumb of either hand is
+placed in the thumb loop, the index finger extended along the side of
+the compass case, and the remainder of the hand closed. The closed
+hand and wrist are grasped with the other hand. The elbows are drawn
+in close to the body, forming a firm foundation for the compass. The
+eye is placed to the lens on the eyepiece. The compass is pointed at
+the object or point to which the azimuth is to be read. A sighting
+is taken through the sighting slot in the eyepiece, and the point is
+lined up with the sighting wire in the cover. The compass is held
+until the dial steadies; then the reading is taken through the lens
+of the eyepiece. This reading is the magnetic azimuth of the line
+from the observer to the point.
+
+
+Reading a Back Azimuth
+
+A back azimuth is the direction opposite the line of sight. If the
+azimuth is less than 180 degrees, the back azimuth is obtained by
+adding 180 degrees. If the azimuth is greater than 180 degrees, the
+back azimuth is obtained by subtracting 180 degrees. Back azimuths
+are used to determine a return route or to resection to determine a
+current position.
+
+
+Circumventing Obstacles
+
+When a scout is traveling on an azimuth and comes upon an
+obstacle--such as a contaminated area, minefield or swamp--the
+following steps (sometimes referred to as the _90-degree offset_
+method) is employed to go around or circumvent the obstacle and
+resume movement along the original azimuth (see fig. 2-3). The steps
+are as follows:
+
+1. Move up to the obstacle and make a full 90-degree turn to the
+right (or left).
+
+2. Walk beyond the obstacle, keeping track of the distance in paces
+or meters.
+
+3. Stand at the end of the obstacle, face in the original direction
+of march, and follow that azimuth until the obstacle has been passed.
+
+4. Make a 90-degree turn to the left (or right) and move the distance
+previously measured to return to the original line of march.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-3. Circumventing an Obstacle.]
+
+
+Following an Azimuth During the Day
+
+The eye is placed to the lens in the eyepiece and the compass moved
+until the desired azimuth reading is visible beneath the fixed
+index. Without moving the compass, the vision is shifted from the
+lens through the sighting slot in the eyepiece, and a sighting is
+taken out beyond the sighting wire in the cover. A prominent terrain
+feature on this line of sight is selected, the compass closed, and
+the landmark approached. When the scout reaches the landmark, the
+procedure is repeated.
+
+
+Following an Azimuth at Night
+
+It is necessary to prepare and set the compass before departing
+on a night movement because at night only the luminous parts of
+the compass can be seen. To prepare the compass for night use, the
+luminous parts must be fully charged by sunlight or artificial light,
+such as a flashlight. To set a compass--
+
+1. Move the compass so that the desired azimuth on the dial is
+directly under the index line on the lower glass.
+
+2. Rotate the upper movable glass so that the luminous line is
+directly above the north arrow of the dial.
+
+3. Set the compass for marching at night on the specified azimuth.
+
+                                  --OR--
+
+1. Face the general direction of movement.
+
+2. Line up the north arrow and the luminous line on the bezel with
+the luminous sighting dots.
+
+3. Hold the compass still with one hand and grip the knurled bezel
+ring with the other hand.
+
+4. Turn the bezel ring the prescribed number of clicks in the proper
+direction, remembering that each click equals 3 degrees. For example,
+to set an azimuth of 21 degrees, the bezel ring would be turned seven
+clicks to the left.
+
+5. Turn the whole compass until the north needle lines up with the
+luminous line. The compass is then set on the desired azimuth. The
+azimuth is the line formed by the two luminous sighting dots on the
+inside of the cover.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-4. Following a Night Azimuth.]
+
+To march on a preset azimuth during night movement, open the compass
+and move it so the north arrow is directly below the luminous line
+(see fig. 2-4). Move in the direction of the line formed by the two
+luminous sighting dots. It is necessary to refer to the compass more
+frequently at night than during the day. If stars are visible, find
+a prominent star along the azimuth of movement to use as a reference
+point. When the view of the sky is restricted by overcast conditions
+or vegetation, send a scout forward along the azimuth of movement to
+the limit of visibility. This scout is guided along the azimuth of
+movement by a stationary navigator. When the scout reaches the limit
+of visibility, the navigator moves to the scout’s location. This
+process is repeated until the destination is reached.
+
+A more rapid method for reaching the scout’s destination is to equip
+the navigator with a compass. The navigator can set the compass as
+explained earlier and the scout proceeds providing security 180
+degrees to the front on the specified azimuth, receiving right and
+left corrections from the navigator while both are on the move.
+The point scout must stay within visual range of the navigator. If
+available, a strip of white or luminous tape on the back of the point
+scout’s helmet will assist.
+
+
+Intersection
+
+Intersection is the location of an unknown point by successively
+occupying at least two, preferably three known positions and
+sightings on the unknown point. It is used to locate features not
+depicted on the map or not readily identifiable. To determine an
+intersection, perform the following steps (see fig. 2-5):
+
+1. Orient the map using the compass.
+
+2. Locate and mark your position on the map.
+
+3. Measure the magnetic azimuth to the unknown position; then convert
+to grid azimuth.
+
+4. Draw a line on the map from your position on this grid azimuth.
+
+5. Move to a second known position from which unknown point is
+visible. Locate this position on the map and again orient the map
+using the compass. The second unknown position should be a minimum of
+30 degrees offset from the first position.
+
+6. Repeat steps 4 and 5.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-5. Intersection.]
+
+To check accuracy, move to a third position and repeat steps 1
+through 4. Where the lines cross is the location of the unknown
+position. Using three lines, a triangle is sometimes formed--called
+the _triangle of error_--instead of an intersection. If the triangle
+is large, recheck your work to find the error. Do not assume that the
+position is at the center of the triangle.
+
+
+Resection
+
+Resection is the location of the user’s unknown position by sighting
+on two or three known features that are identifiable on the map. To
+determine a resection, perform the following steps (see fig. 2-6):
+
+1. Orient the map using the compass.
+
+2. Locate two or three known positions on the ground and mark them on
+the map.
+
+3. Measure the magnetic azimuth to a known position then convert to
+grid azimuth.
+
+4. Change the grid azimuth to a back azimuth and draw a line on the
+map from the known position back toward the unknown position.
+
+5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 to determine a second known position.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-6. Resection.]
+
+To check accuracy, repeat the steps above for a third known position.
+The intersection of the lines is your location. Using three lines, a
+triangle of error may be formed. If the triangle is large, recheck.
+
+
+2003. STARS, SUN, AND OTHER FEATURES
+
+In rare cases when a scout is without a compass, the following
+examples are alternate means to determine direction. When using
+constellations to determine direction, identify your location’s
+Temperate Zone. A Temperate Zone is the area between the tropics and
+the polar circles.
+
+At night, the stars provide an excellent means of maintaining a line
+of march. In the North Temperate Zone (north of the equator), the
+Big Dipper constellation is one key to determining direction of true
+north. It is made up of seven fairly bright stars in the shape of a
+dipper with a long curved handle (see fig. 2-7). The two stars that
+form the side of the cup farthest from the handle, used as pointers,
+are situated in the direction of a bright star that is about five
+times the distance between the two stars of the dipper cup. This
+bright star is the North Star and is directly over the North Pole.
+The pointers always designate the North Star, which is the direction
+of true north.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-7. Locating the North Pole.]
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-8. Locating the South Pole.]
+
+In the Southern Hemisphere, true south is determined in relation
+to the Southern Cross, a constellation composed of five stars. Two
+bright pointer stars in the vicinity of the Southern Cross serve as
+locators to help locate true south (see fig. 2-8). The outer four
+stars are fairly bright and form a cross. This cross is imagined as
+the frame of a kite. A straight tail, four and one half times as long
+as the length of the kite itself, is put on the kite using finger
+widths for a measuring stick. The end of this tail will be close to
+a position directly over the South Pole. Usually, it will not be
+possible to see a star in the immediate vicinity, because there is no
+bright star visible directly above the South Pole.
+
+During daylight hours, a watch and the sun can be used to determine
+direction within 8 degrees. In the North Temperate Zone, the watch is
+held horizontally, face up, and the hour hand pointed at the sun (see
+fig. 2-9). The north-south line and the direction of south can be
+found midway between the hour hand and the number 12, if the watch is
+set on standard time. If in daylight savings time, the direction of
+south is found midway between the hour hand and the number 1.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-9. Determining Direction by Watch and Sun
+  (North Temperate Zone).]
+
+In the South Temperate Zone, if the watch is set on standard time,
+the number 12 on the watch is pointed at the sun; if the watch is set
+on daylight savings time, the number 1 is pointed at the sun. North
+is midway between 12 (or 1) and the hour hand (see fig. 2-10).
+
+When laying in a north-south line, if any doubt exists as to which
+end of the line is north, remember that the sun is in the east before
+noon and in the west in the afternoon.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 2-10. Determining Direction by Watch and Sun
+  (South Temperate Zone).]
+
+In addition to the sun and stars, other methods a scout without a
+compass can use to determine direction include determining prevailing
+wind direction and using a mountain for orientation. By previous
+study of maps and photographs, a scout can keep informed of location
+and direction by using a distinctive edge of woods, a deep ravine
+or the direction of a stream’s flow. A scout should constantly
+evaluate and memorize both the immediate terrain and general area for
+prominent features and landmarks.
+
+
+2004. RANGE DETERMINATION
+
+Range determination is the method of finding the distance between
+an observer and an enemy target or an object. By accurate range
+determination, the members of a given unit can set their sights
+correctly and place effective fire on enemy targets. The degree of
+accuracy is dependent on several factors, such as terrain relief,
+time available, and experience of the observer.
+
+
+Mental Estimation
+
+A mental distance estimate is made using a known unit of measure.
+Distance is estimated to the nearest 100 meters by determining the
+number of known units of measure between the observer’s position
+and a target. For example, a football field, which is 100 yards,
+can be used as a known unit of measure for determining the distance
+between an observer’s position and a target. For longer distances,
+progressive estimation may be necessary. To do this, the observer
+determines the number of units of measure to an intermediate point
+and doubles the value. The observer should consider the effects in
+table 2-1 in estimating distances.
+
+
+                    Table 2-1. Effects to Consider
+                  in Mental Estimation of Distances.
+
+  +--------------------------------+-----------------------------+
+  |         Objects Appear         |     Objects Appear More     |
+  |             Nearer             |            Distant          |
+  +--------------------------------+-----------------------------+
+  | In bright light.               | In poor light or in fog.    |
+  +--------------------------------+-----------------------------+
+  | In clear air at high altitude. | Only a small part of the    |
+  |                                | object can be seen.         |
+  +--------------------------------+-----------------------------+
+  | The background is in contrast  | The background is similar   |
+  | with the color of the          | in color to that of the     |
+  | object.                        | object.                     |
+  +--------------------------------+-----------------------------+
+  | The observer is looking        | The observer is looking     |
+  | down from a height.            | over a depression, most of  |
+  |                                | which is visible.           |
+  +--------------------------------+-----------------------------+
+  | The observer is looking        | The observer is kneeling    |
+  | over a depression, most of     | or sitting, especially on a |
+  | which is hidden.               | hot day, when the ground    |
+  |                                | is moist.                   |
+  +--------------------------------+-----------------------------+
+  | The observer is looking        |                             |
+  | down a straight feature        |                             |
+  | such as a road.                |                             |
+  +--------------------------------+-----------------------------+
+  | The observer is looking        |                             |
+  | over water, snow, or a uniform |                             |
+  | surface such as a              |                             |
+  | cultivated field or desert.    |                             |
+  +--------------------------------+-----------------------------+
+
+
+Estimating in Good Visibility
+
+When visibility is good, distances can be estimated by using the
+appearance of tree trunks, branches, and foliage (as seen by the
+naked eye) in comparison with map data. Table 2-2 is a guide for
+wooded terrain. Table 2-3 is a guide for urban environments.
+
+
+Estimating From a Terrain Study
+
+The Marine should always use terrain/map analysis to assist in
+estimating distances. When the Marine is looking in a specific
+direction, the estimation of distance can be enhanced by studying
+the terrain and comparing it with the map. Particular emphasis
+should be given to color contrasts of terrain features seen along
+the observer-target line (OTL). For example, the distance across
+successive ridge lines or depressions in the distance may be
+identifiable by only slight changes of color to the eye. Different
+colors of grass might reveal a hidden terrain feature such as a
+stream.
+
+
+                    Table 2-2. Estimating Distance
+                          in Wooded Terrain.
+
+  +-----------+------------------------------------------------+
+  |  Distance |                                                |
+  |     in    |            Tree Description                    |
+  |   Meters  |                                                |
+  +-----------+------------------------------------------------+
+  |   1,000   | Trunk and main branches are visible. Foliage   |
+  |           | appears in cluster-like shape. Daylight may be |
+  |           | seen through the foliage.                      |
+  +-----------+------------------------------------------------+
+  |   2,000   | Trunk visible, main branches distinguishable,  |
+  |           | foliage appears as smooth surface. Outline of  |
+  |           | foliage of separate trees distinguishable.     |
+  +-----------+------------------------------------------------+
+  |   3,000   | Lower half of trunk visible. Branches blend    |
+  |           | with foliage. Foliage blends with adjoining    |
+  |           | trees.                                         |
+  +-----------+------------------------------------------------+
+  |   4,000   | Trunk and branches blend with foliage and      |
+  |           | appears as a continuous cluster, smooth in     |
+  |           | appearance. Movement of foliage due to wind    |
+  |           | cannot be detected.                            |
+  +-----------+------------------------------------------------+
+  | 5,000 and | Whole area covered by trees and appears        |
+  |  beyond   | smooth and dark.                               |
+  +-----------+------------------------------------------------+
+
+
+                    Table 2-3. Estimating Distance
+                           in Urban Terrain.
+
+      +---------------+-------------------------------------+
+      |  Distance in  |     Object Identified by the        |
+      |     Meters    |           Unaided Eye               |
+      +---------------+-------------------------------------+
+      |     1,000     | Lone tree trunk                     |
+      +---------------+-------------------------------------+
+      |     1,500     | Individuals and horsemen            |
+      +---------------+-------------------------------------+
+      |     3,000     | Chimneys on rooftops                |
+      +---------------+-------------------------------------+
+      |     4,000     | Windows in houses                   |
+      +---------------+-------------------------------------+
+      |  4,000–5,000  | Individual houses in populated area |
+      +---------------+-------------------------------------+
+      |  8,000–9,000  | Villages and individual houses      |
+      +---------------+-------------------------------------+
+      | 15,000–18,000 | Large houses, towers, and steeples  |
+      +---------------+-------------------------------------+
+
+
+
+
+                      CHAPTER 3. ENEMY ACTIVITY
+
+
+     A commander often acts on information furnished by scouts.
+     Therefore, scouts must aim at absolute accuracy in
+     reporting enemy activity. This chapter discusses estimating
+     enemy strengths, interpreting signs and tracks, and knowing
+     the enemy.
+
+
+3001. ESTIMATING ENEMY STRENGTHS
+
+If troops cannot be counted, their strength may be estimated by:
+noting the length of time it takes various types of moving columns to
+pass a given point, the area required of a unit in camp or bivouac,
+or the front on which they are deployed. When the ground is dry,
+infantry on the march raise a low, thick cloud of dust, and motor
+vehicles or mechanized units raise a thick, rapidly moving cloud.
+Additionally, through practice, a scout may gain information as to
+the strength and composition of enemy forces by listening to noises
+and observing lights, fires, and smoke. A scout gains valuable
+experience in estimating enemy strengths by observing friendly forces
+in camp, on the march, and deployed. The knowledge scouts gain
+during field exercises of the appearance and tactical dispositions
+of squads, platoons, companies, and larger units will be of great
+assistance in estimating the strength and composition of enemy units
+observed under various conditions.
+
+
+3002. INTERPRETING SIGNS AND TRACKS
+
+In addition to estimates made through direct observation, a scout
+may often be able to estimate size, composition, direction, rate of
+movement, condition, discipline, state of training, and morale of
+enemy forces through signs and tracks left behind.
+
+
+Signs
+
+The examination of vacated enemy positions provides valuable
+information. The size of a bivouac or defense area ordinarily
+indicates the number of enemy occupants. Clothing, ration containers,
+dumps, etc., further indicate the quantity of the departed enemy
+force. The condition of the bivouac area and amount of material
+abandoned give an indication of the enemy morale, training, and
+discipline. A well-policed area indicates good discipline. Rubbish,
+ration and smoking residue, and nonessential personal items of
+equipment adrift indicate a lower state of morale, training, and
+discipline. Stores and material left behind in good condition
+may indicate a hasty movement or withdrawal. Burned or destroyed
+materials indicate a deliberate, orderly withdrawal or movement.
+Letters, insignia, and other articles may reveal the identity of the
+enemy unit.
+
+In the case of a moving enemy, the distance between periodic halts
+indicates the rate of march if enemy habits relative to marches and
+halts are known. Condition of the halt areas indicates the state of
+morale, training, and discipline.
+
+The physical condition of enemy dead and wounded and their personal
+equipment and weapons are reported. The general condition and state
+of maintenance of destroyed or abandoned vehicles should also be
+reported.
+
+
+Tracks
+
+A track is a mark left on the ground by the passage of a person or
+object. Examination of tracks reveals information about the enemy.
+
+
+_Troops_
+
+A few tracks overlapping each other on both sides of a road or trail
+may indicate a patrol in staggered formation. A large number of
+tracks indicates troops in column formation. A large column will wear
+a dry road smooth and flat. In damp terrain, a freshly made track
+will have sharp edges; ordinarily, signs of moisture will disappear
+in about 15 minutes. A runner’s toes are dug into the ground; a
+walker’s footprint is fairly even.
+
+
+_Vehicles_
+
+The type of track indicates whether the vehicle is wheeled or
+tracked. A scout acquires the necessary experience to make the proper
+determination by observing vehicle tracks during training.
+
+The direction of travel can be determined by the way tracks pass
+across ruts, by impressions on the edges of holes in the ground,
+how water is splashed from puddles, or by the way grass, twigs, and
+branches are bent; for example--
+
+   • A vehicle (wheeled or tracked) entering a rut pushes dirt into
+     the rut and leaves an indentation on the exit side of the rut.
+
+   • A wheel going over holes in the ground leaves a deeper
+     impression on the edge toward the direction of travel.
+
+   • The side of a puddle with the greater splash indicates the
+     direction of travel of the vehicle.
+
+   • When traveling cross-country, the direction in which grass is
+     bent and/or twigs, branches, and bushes are broken indicates
+     direction of travel.
+
+A general rate of speed can be estimated by the amount of water or
+mud splattered. A fast-moving vehicle will throw larger amounts
+of water or mud a greater distance to the front and sides than a
+slow-moving vehicle, and it leaves a deeper impression on the exit
+edges of holes. The faster the travel, the deeper the impression.
+
+
+3003. KNOWING THE ENEMY
+
+A scout should learn as much as possible about enemy psychology,
+habits, organization, and tactics. The more knowledge gained about
+the enemy, particularly the enemy’s normal security measures, the
+better the scout’s chances are to observe and obtain accurate
+information with minimum risk to the mission’s success. Scouts gain
+much of this knowledge through experience, but they also gain a great
+deal of their preliminary information, particularly that pertaining
+to enemy organization and tactics, during training and may be updated
+by unit commanders and intelligence officers.
+
+
+
+
+                     CHAPTER 4. DAYLIGHT SCOUTING
+
+
+     A scout must be able to operate in all types of terrain
+     and under all conditions of visibility. He must be
+     thoroughly familiar with the principles for using cover and
+     concealment, camouflage, individual movement, and route
+     selection, both to and from the objective.
+
+
+4001. COVER AND CONCEALMENT
+
+Cover is protection from the fire of hostile weapons. Concealment
+is protection from observation or surveillance from hostile air
+and ground observation, but not from hostile fire. Both cover and
+concealment are divided into two main categories: natural and
+artificial. Natural cover includes small hills, ditches, rocks or
+vegetation. Fighting holes, bunkers, and brick walls are examples
+of artificial cover. Some features, such as buildings, provide
+both cover and concealment. In deciding whether to seek cover or
+concealment, a scout must make the best choice to complete the
+mission (see fig. 4-1).
+
+
+Concealment Principles
+
+Concealment principles are as follows:
+
+   • Remain motionless while observing. Anything in motion attracts
+     the eye.
+
+   • Use all available concealment.
+
+   • Observe from the prone position (it offers a low silhouette and
+     makes detection by the enemy difficult).
+
+   • Expose nothing that reflects light.
+
+   • Blend with the background because contrasting colors are
+     noticeable.
+
+   • Remain in the shade because moving shadows attract attention.
+
+   • Distort or change the regular outline of objects. Most military
+     objects have distinctive shapes that make obvious shadows and
+     silhouettes.
+
+   • Avoid the skyline. Figures on the skyline can be seen from great
+     distances and are easily identified by their outlines.
+
+
+Concealment Techniques
+
+Concealment techniques are as follows:
+
+   • When observing, the scout looks around an object’s side (unless
+     it is transparent) and prepares to fire, if necessary, around
+     the side of or, if possible, through an object.
+
+   • Looking or firing over an object can make the scout an easily
+     visible target for the enemy. If the scout must fire over the
+     top of concealment or cover, the outline of the head or helmet
+     should be broken or distorted.
+
+   • Upon the approach of an airplane, the scout takes a prone
+     position, turns face-down, and remains motionless. If surprised
+     by an airplane, the scout remains in place and does not look up.
+
+   • The scout covers exposed body parts such as the face, back of
+     the neck, and hands with grease paint, mud or other materials to
+     reduce sun reflection.
+
+   • Camouflage for equipment can be improvised from garnishing or
+     sandbags to prevent sun reflection.
+
+   • In snowy terrain, white overgarments are worn.
+
+   • The helmet cover outline should be distorted.
+
+  [Illustration:
+
+    CORRECT OBSERVING POSITION PRONE AROUND RIGHT SIDE OF TREE
+    FROM A DITCH OBSERVE OVER BROKEN EDGE WITH BACKGROUND
+    OBSERVE THRU BUSH IN PRONE POSITION
+    OBSERVE OVER A CREST AT A POINT WHERE IT IS BROKEN OR GRASSY
+    OBSERVE PRONE AROUND RIGHT SIDE OF ROCK
+    OBSERVE PRONE UNDER CROSSBAR OF FENCE
+
+  Figure 4-1. Correct Use of Cover.]
+
+
+4002. CAMOUFLAGE
+
+Camouflage is the use of concealment and disguise to minimize the
+possibility of detection and/or identification of troops, material,
+equipment, and installations. The purpose of camouflage is to provide
+concealment of military objects from enemy observation. Camouflage
+is also used to conceal an object by making it look like something
+else. A scout’s mission usually requires individual and equipment
+camouflage. If natural camouflage is not adequate, the position
+is camouflaged. In using camouflage, remember that objects are
+identified by their form (outline), shadow, texture, and color. The
+principal purpose of camouflage in the field is to prevent direct
+observation and recognition.
+
+
+Individual Camouflage
+
+Successful individual camouflage involves the ability to recognize
+and take advantage of all forms of natural and artificial concealment
+available (vegetation, soil, debris, etc.) and knowledge of the
+proper use of artificial camouflage materials.
+
+
+Aids to Individual Camouflage
+
+A scout must recognize the terrain’s dominant color and pattern and
+must change the appearance of clothing and equipment accordingly in
+order to blend and not contrast with the terrain (see fig. 4-2).
+
+The helmet is camouflaged by breaking up its shape, smooth surface,
+and shadow. Use of a helmet cover works best. In the absence of
+a helmet cover, mud can be irregularly blotched on the helmet to
+disguise its form and dull the surface. A helmet cover may be
+improvised from irregularly colored cloth or burlap to blend with the
+background. Foliage can be draped to prevent the visor of the helmet
+from casting a dark shadow across the face. Foliage should not stick
+up like plumes because any head movement will give away the position.
+
+A small, thin bush in the shadow of a large bush makes a good
+observation point. Lone trees, rocks, fence corners, and outstanding
+landmarks are easily picked up by the enemy as obvious observation
+posts.
+
+If camouflage clothing is not available, other available clothing can
+be attached in irregular splotches of appropriate colors.
+
+Exposed skin reflects light and attracts the enemy’s attention. Even
+very dark skin will reflect light because of its natural oil. The
+buddy system is recommended when applying camouflage. Standard Marine
+Corps issue camouflage face paint sticks are two toned:
+
+   • Loam and light green for light-skinned troops, in all but snow
+     regions.
+
+   • Sand and light green for dark-skinned troops.
+
+   • Loam and white for troops in snow-covered terrain.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 4-2. Avoid Contrasting Backgrounds.]
+
+Shiny areas (forehead, cheekbones, nose, and chin) are painted
+with a dark color. Shadow areas (around the eyes, under the nose,
+and under the chin) are painted with a light color. Skin that is
+exposed on the back of the neck and hands is painted with a two-color
+combination in an irregular pattern (see fig. 4-3).
+
+When standard issue face paint sticks are not available, burnt cork,
+charcoal or lamp black can be used to tone down exposed areas of skin.
+
+Mud is used only in an emergency because it changes color as it dries
+and may peel off, leaving the skin exposed. Since mud may contain
+harmful bacteria, mud should be washed off as soon as possible.
+
+  [Illustration:
+
+  SPLOTCHING
+  STRIPING
+  SPLOTCHING & STRIPING
+
+  Figure 4-3. Face Camouflage.]
+
+Any equipment that reflects light should be covered with a
+nonreflective material that aids in the concealment of the weapon
+(for example, black electrical tape or mud). The straight line of the
+rifle or other infantry weapons may be very conspicuous to an enemy
+observer. The barrel and hand guard should be wrapped with strips
+of contrasting colored cloth or tape to break the regular outline.
+Mud or dirt dulls the reflecting surface of the stock, barrel, and
+bayonet where coloring has been worn. Lamp black may also be used on
+metal parts. The function of the weapon must not impaired.
+
+If time, material, and surroundings permit, a ghillie suit should be
+constructed. (Refer to MCWP 3-15.3, _Scout Sniping_.)
+
+
+Aids to Camouflage a Position
+
+To successfully camouflage a position, the scout must remember to--
+
+   • Camouflage the position as soon as it is occupied.
+
+   • Avoid using too much material for camouflage. Even though
+     natural materials are used, too much may make the object and
+     its shadow stand out from its surroundings, thus attracting the
+     attention of a hostile observer.
+
+   • Inspect completed camouflage work from the enemy’s point of view
+     to check effectiveness.
+
+
+Continuous Camouflage
+
+Camouflage around and on the scout’s position must be maintained in
+a fresh condition as wilted and dead foliage can give the position
+away. If the mission dictates that the position should be occupied
+for longer periods, wilted foliage should be replaced during periods
+of reduced visibility.
+
+
+4003. INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT
+
+
+Principles
+
+The principles of individual movement are as follows:
+
+   • Scouts move from one concealed position to another. When not
+     changing positions, they remain motionless.
+
+   • The scout’s head is lifted slowly but steadily, without abrupt
+     movements, to search for a new position.
+
+   • Scouts select the next stopping place before moving and ensure
+     it is not contained by the enemy.
+
+   • Scouts change position on the run: springs up, runs with the
+     body bent low, zigzags, quickly drops to the ground slightly
+     to the right or left of the objective, then rolls or crawls to
+     the desired position. (Remember the phrase, “I’m up--he sees
+     me--I’m down.”)
+
+
+Rushing
+
+When starting from the prone position--
+
+   • Raise the head slowly and steadily and select a new position.
+
+   • Lower the head slowly, draw arms inward, cock right leg forward,
+     and prepare to rush.
+
+   • Use one movement to raise the body by straightening both arms.
+
+   • Spring to your feet, stepping off with the left foot.
+
+   • Bend forward as low as possible when running. Never advance
+     directly to the next position; always zigzag.
+
+When hitting the deck--
+
+   • Stop.
+
+   • Plant both feet in place.
+
+   • Drop quickly to the knees and slide the hand to the heel of the
+     rifle.
+
+   • Fall forward, breaking your fall with the butt of the rifle. (To
+     confuse the enemy, roll over after hitting the deck and roll
+     into firing position with feet, knees, and stomach flat on the
+     ground.)
+
+   • Keep head down if you do not intend to fire.
+
+When rolling over--
+
+   • Hit the deck and assume the prone position.
+
+   • Bring the rifle in close to the body, placing the rifle butt in
+     the crotch.
+
+   • Roll over swiftly to confuse any enemy observers as to final
+     intended location. Never reappear at the same place you went
+     down.
+
+
+Low Crawl
+
+The low crawl is used when--
+
+   • Cover and concealment are scarce.
+
+   • The enemy has good observation over the area in which the scout
+     is moving.
+
+   • Speed is not essential.
+
+To perform the low crawl, keep the body as flat as possible against
+the ground. Grasp the rifle sling at the upper sling swivel. Let the
+balance of the rifle rest on the forearm and let the butt of the
+rifle drag on the ground. Keep the muzzle off the ground.
+
+To start forward, push arms forward and pull right leg forward. To
+move forward, pull with arms and push with right leg. Change the
+pushing leg frequently to avoid fatigue.
+
+
+High Crawl
+
+The high crawl is used when--
+
+   • Cover and/or concealment are available.
+
+   • Poor visibility reduces enemy observation.
+
+   • Greater speed of movement is required.
+
+To perform the high crawl, keep body off the ground. Rest weight on
+forearms and lower legs. Cradle rifle in arms, keeping the muzzle off
+the ground. Keep knees well behind the buttocks to stay low.
+
+Move forward, alternately advancing right forearm and left knee; then
+left forearm and right knee.
+
+
+Movement Aids
+
+Aids to movement include--
+
+   • Carrying only necessities. Additional weight causes premature
+     fatigue and impedes free movement.
+
+   • Not disturbing birds or animals whose flight would betray your
+     presence. If birds or animals are alerted, remain motionless
+     under cover for a few minutes, as the enemy’s attention may also
+     be attracted.
+
+   • Moving during an incident that diverts attention, such as an
+     airplane flight, a distant disturbance or sudden bursts of fire.
+
+   • Fog, smoke, or even light haze offer concealment for movement;
+     however, the enemy may have thermoimagery and night vision
+     devices. Therefore, darkness and smoke cannot be used as easily.
+
+   • Following a stream or road by staying as far away from them as
+     possible while still keeping them in sight. Keep close to the
+     dune line when moving along a beach.
+
+   • When moving through tall grass or similar growth, move when the
+     wind blows, changing direction frequently. A straight route will
+     be more readily noticed.
+
+   • Whenever possible, avoid areas of soft ground so as not to leave
+     tracks.
+
+   • When crossing a road or water obstacle, choose crossing sites
+     where the enemy’s observation is restricted (an area in shadows
+     or near a bend) and cross rapidly.
+
+
+4004. ROUTE SELECTION
+
+
+Prior to Movement
+
+A scout and the immediate commander conduct a map reconnaissance
+before starting on a mission. This assists them in selecting the
+route according to available cover and concealment and any indicated
+enemy activity.
+
+Prior to and during the course of the mission, move to an observation
+point to visually reconnoiter the terrain for movement and select the
+tentative route. It may be necessary to make wide detours around open
+spaces or those containing enemy patrols or other enemy activity.
+
+Carefully study the country to be traversed and pay close attention
+to the general features, streams, ridges to be crossed, and their
+relation to the general direction to be taken (see fig. 4-4).
+
+Make notes of terrain features and landmarks along the proposed
+route and rely on notes for guidance (see fig. 4-5 on page 4-6).
+Additionally, determine the compass direction and readings for each
+change of direction at the start. Finally, learn the location of
+unit boundaries and observation/listening posts as well as general
+location of other friendly or scouting parties. Be sure to avoid
+man-made and natural obstacles as they will slow progress and overall
+success of the mission. If possible, use the local populace as a
+source of intelligence. When returning to friendly lines, avoid using
+the same route.
+
+
+En Route
+
+En route, the actual advance will be a series of movements from one
+observation point to the next. The distance and route will depend
+on cover and terrain. Assess the cover, terrain, and any enemy or
+civilian activity to determine whether or not to modify the approach
+or return routes. Unless the mission requires it, avoid danger
+areas (for example, houses, villages, potential assembly or bivouac
+areas, roads, and streams) that may give away your position by being
+observed by the enemy. When required to reconnoiter danger areas,
+choose a covered approach and return, and make entry or passage as
+quietly and quickly as possible. If part of a larger effort, the
+approach and return should be covered by observation and fires of the
+other members of the scouting party or patrol.
+
+  [Illustration:
+
+  STARTING POINT
+  CORRECT COVERED ROUTE
+  DIRECT ROUTE TO OBJECTIVE
+  OBJECTIVE
+
+  SCOUT TRAVELING BY DIRECT ROUTE WILL BE VISIBLE ON FORWARD SLOPES
+  OBJECTIVE
+
+  Figure 4-4. Choosing a Concealed Route of Advance from a Map.]
+
+
+Stream Crossings
+
+When the crossing does not appear to be held by the enemy, advance
+upon it rapidly. If there are two or more scouts, one crosses while
+the other(s) provide protection. Note the length, width, depth,
+and approaches to a crossing. Observe the condition of the road or
+trail that crosses the stream, and report on the suitability of the
+crossing for use by tracked and wheeled vehicles. If the crossing is
+under observation by enemy, seek another crossing site or dash across
+to avoid detection.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 4-5. Proposed Route Sketch.]
+
+
+
+
+                      CHAPTER 5. NIGHT SCOUTING
+
+
+     Night scouting presents many of the same problems
+     encountered in day operations--such as cover, concealment,
+     movement, and camouflage--as well as additional
+     considerations. Knowledge of human eye construction and
+     operation will enable maximum advantage under night
+     conditions or poor visibility.
+
+
+5001. NIGHT VISION
+
+Certain parts of the eye correspond to parts of a simple camera
+(see fig. 5-1). The lens focuses light entering the eye similar to
+a camera lens. The iris (colored part of eye) corresponds to the
+diaphragm of a camera, opening and closing to regulate the amount of
+light entering the eye through the pupil. The retina corresponds to
+camera film. Light rays strike the retina, form an image, and cause
+an impression to be transmitted to the brain through the optic nerve.
+In a camera, the image is formed and fixed on film.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 5-1. The Eye is Like a Camera.]
+
+The retina is composed of cone cells and rod cells, so-called
+because of their shapes. Cone cells distinguish color, shape, and
+sharp contrast. Because they are activated by light conditions, they
+are blind during periods of low illumination. Rod cells produce
+a chemical substance called visual purple that makes them active
+in darkness, low illumination or night conditions. Rod vision
+distinguishes black, white, shades of gray, and general outlines.
+
+
+Principles
+
+To effectively “see” at night, the principles of night vision dark
+adaptation, off-center vision, and scanning are applied.
+
+
+_Dark Adaptation_
+
+Allowing the eyes to become accustomed to low levels of illumination
+is called dark adaptation. It takes the rod cells about 30 minutes
+to produce enough visual purple to activate them and enable the eye
+to distinguish objects in dim light. This may also be accomplished
+by staying in a red-lighted area, or by wearing red goggles for 20
+minutes, followed by 10 minutes in darkness (which allows the pupils
+to open wide). This method saves valuable time by allowing Marines to
+be in a lighted area to receive orders, check equipment, or perform
+some other function before moving into darkness.
+
+
+_Off-Center Vision_
+
+The technique of focusing on an object without looking directly at
+it is called off-center vision. When looking directly at an object,
+the image is formed on the cone region, which is not sensitive at
+night (see fig. 5-2 on page 5-2). When looking slightly to the left,
+right, above or below an object, the image is formed on the area of
+the retina containing rod cells, which are sensitive in darkness. The
+most sensitive area varies in individuals, but is usually found by
+looking 6 to 10 degrees away from an object; in effect, out of the
+corner of the eye (see fig. 5-3 on page 5-2).
+
+
+_Scanning_
+
+Off-center vision used to observe an area or an object is called
+scanning. When using rod vision, the visual purple in the rod cells
+bleaches or blacks out in 4 to 10 seconds and the object observed
+disappears. As the visual purple in the rod cells in one area
+bleaches out, the eyes must slightly shift to use fresh rod cells.
+Eyes should be moved in short, abrupt, irregular movements over and
+around the target (see fig. 5-4).
+
+  [Illustration: LOOK DIRECTLY AT THE OBJECT SO THAT THE IMAGE IS
+  FORMED ON THE CONE REGION (YOUR DAY EYES)
+
+  Figure 5-2. Day Vision.]
+
+  [Illustration: CENTER OBJECT AT 12 O’CLOCK AND LOOK SLIGHTLY TOWARD
+  11 O’CLOCK OR 1 O’CLOCK]
+
+  [Illustration: LOOK SLIGHTLY AWAY FROM THE OBJECT SO THAT THE IMAGE
+  IS FORMED ON THE ROD REGION (YOUR NIGHT EYES)]
+
+  Figure 5-3. Night Vision.
+
+
+Preserving Night Vision
+
+Night vision is quickly destroyed if bright light is allowed to
+enter the eye. When entering a lighted area or when observing in a
+temporarily lighted area (illumination, flares), one eye should be
+closed and covered to preserve its night vision. When the light goes
+off, fades or the lighted area is exited, the night vision retained
+by the protected eye enables it to see until the other eye adapts to
+the darkness. Red light helps preserve night vision, but like white
+light, it can be observed at long distances.
+
+Factors that decrease night visual acuity include fatigue, lack of
+oxygen, long exposure to sunlight, alcohol, nicotine (within the past
+48 hours), and age. When night vision has been attained, straining
+will not improve effectiveness; however, practice identifying objects
+at night will improve perception.
+
+
+5002. APPEARANCE OF OBJECTS
+
+Darkness not only makes objects difficult to see but also changes
+their appearance, distorts size, and blots out details. A tree
+visible against the night sky appears smaller than in the daytime
+because the twigs at the end of branches cannot be seen. A scout must
+train to identify objects by block outlines at night and cannot rely
+on details visible in daylight. Binoculars enlarge objects or parts
+of objects otherwise too small to be seen and help identify objects
+already spotted. Night observation devices increase night visibility
+and should be used whenever possible.
+
+
+5003. SOUNDS
+
+At night, sounds become very important. By listening, a scout gains
+information about the enemy and by exercising care, keeps information
+from the enemy. A scout stops frequently to listen. Scouts must
+listen for long periods in perfect silence. Hearing is amplified with
+the mouth open; removing the helmet will reduce sound distortion.
+Sounds are transmitted a greater distance in wet weather and at night
+than in dry weather and in the daytime. By holding the ear close to
+the ground sounds of people walking and vehicles moving can be heard.
+Sound travels approximately 370 meters a second. When a flash from
+a fired weapon is observed, the range to the weapons can be easily
+estimated by counting the time interval between the flash and hearing
+the report. For example, counting to three (one thousand one, one
+thousand two, one thousand three), indicates the distance is 1,110
+meters. The cadence is determined by actual practice at known ranges.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 5-4. Scanning]
+
+
+5004. SMELLS AND TOUCH
+
+A scout’s sense of smell can warn of enemy fires, cooking, motor
+parks, gasoline and diesel engines, and bodies of water. A scout
+must feel and recognize objects in the dark, and adjust and operate
+equipment quietly by sense of touch.
+
+
+5005. CLOTHING AND WEAPONS
+
+All loose clothing must be secured (string or tape can be used) to
+prevent snagging on barbed wire, brambles, and brush. Helmet covers
+are worn to muffle sounds made by low branches.
+
+The belt buckle should be turned around to the side in order to move
+in a prone position without scraping the buckle against stones or
+hard surfaces. Identification tags can be taped together to prevent
+rattling. Hands, face, and neck can be blackened so skin does not
+reflect light or appear as white spots in the darkness. (Refer to
+para. 4002.)
+
+Scouts are normally armed with rifles. Rifle slings should be taped
+to prevent rattling. All weapons parts should be checked for glare
+elimination measures.
+
+
+5006. CONCEALMENT
+
+Although total darkness provides concealment, scouts must observe the
+same principles of concealment during moonlight conditions as in the
+daytime. Scouts should assume enemy employment of night observation
+devices and observe the principles of night movement such that
+presence will not be disclosed by noise when close to the enemy.
+
+
+5007. AIDS TO NIGHT SCOUTING
+
+Aids to night scouting include the following:
+
+   • Carry out scouting missions close to or within hostile positions
+     on dark or rainy nights.
+
+   • Stifle a threatening sneeze by pressing fingers upward against
+     the nostrils.
+
+   • Stifle a threatening cough by applying slight pressure with the
+     finger on the Adam’s apple.
+
+   • Stop a ringing sound that interferes with hearing by yawning.
+
+   • Speak softly rather than whispering if voice communication is
+     necessary.
+
+   • Move boldly and rapidly when taking advantage of any sound--such
+     as shelling, rustling wind or distant firing--to push forward if
+     firing is taking place.
+
+   • Avoid shell craters and depressions in damp weather conditions
+     if the enemy has employed chemical munitions.
+
+   • Move the eyes constantly; concentrating on one object too long
+     will strain them.
+
+   • Take notice of the enemy’s use of flares. When the enemy employs
+     flares, few enemy patrols are apt to be out; when flares are not
+     employed, the enemy’s patrols are likely to be numerous.
+
+   • Drop to a prone position upon hearing a flare being fired and
+     before it illuminates. Remain motionless while it is burning. If
+     open or moving when a flare bursts in the air, freeze or drop
+     quickly in the split second after the flare illuminates while
+     the enemy is blinded. You are an easy target for the enemy if
+     the flare bursts in the air or on the ground behind you. Never
+     look at a flare. If you activate a trip flare, drop to the
+     ground and crawl away from the illuminated area.
+
+   • Consider all patrols or individuals encountered as hostile
+     until proven friendly. If encountering someone, crouch low,
+     silhouetting the approaching person against the sky. At the same
+     time, make yourself an indistinct target in case the person
+     encountered is an enemy.
+
+   • Return fire only to avoid capture if fired on when close to
+     enemy positions.
+
+
+5008. AIDS TO NIGHT MOVEMENT
+
+Aids to night movement include the following:
+
+   • Move silently.
+
+   • Advance in stealthy legs. Each leg should follow some terrain
+     feature that serves as a guide. When there are no terrain
+     features to serve as guides, move in a straight or nearly
+     straight line from one defined point to another, or maintain
+     direction by using a compass.
+
+   • Avoid running, except in an emergency.
+
+   • Take advantage of sounds that may distract the enemy.
+
+   • Fall silently without making an outcry.
+
+
+Walking
+
+When walking at night--
+
+   • Place the heel down first. Balance the weight of the body on the
+     rear foot until a secure spot is found.
+
+   • Lift the forward foot high to clear any stiff grass, brush, or
+     other obstruction.
+
+   • Continue to balance body weight on the rear foot, lower the
+     forward foot gently, toe first, to explore the ground for
+     objects that might make noise. Step over fallen logs and
+     branches, not on them.
+
+   • Lower the heel of the forward foot slowly; gradually
+     transferring body weight to that foot.
+
+
+Creeping
+
+The low crawl and high crawl are not suitable at night when very near
+the enemy because an easily heard shuffling noise results. Creeping
+is the recommended method of movement:
+
+   • Creep at night on the hands and knees.
+
+   • Use your hands to feel for twigs, leaves or other substances
+     that might make a noise. Clear a spot to place your knee.
+     Keeping your hand at that spot, bring your knee forward until
+     it meets your hand. Then place your knee on the ground and
+     repeat the action with the other hand and knee.
+
+  [Illustration]
+
+   • Lay the rifle on the ground at your side and clear an area for
+     it. Lift the rifle up and move it forward. Movement is slow and
+     tedious, since it must be done silently.
+
+  [Illustration]
+
+
+Hitting the Deck at Night (Right-Handed Shooter)
+
+To safely hit the deck at night from the standing position--
+
+   • Advance your left leg, place the butt of the rifle in your right
+     armpit with the hand remaining on the pistol grip, and grasp it
+     with the right hand at the balance.
+
+  [Illustration]
+
+   • Quietly drop down on the right knee and left hand.
+
+  [Illustration]
+
+   • Move the left leg carefully to the rear, and then move the right
+     leg to the rear.
+
+  [Illustration]
+
+   • Lie flat on the ground, or take up a firing position if
+     necessary.
+
+  [Illustration]
+
+
+Wire Obstacles
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 5-5. Crossing Wire Silently at Night.]
+
+A mission often requires a scout to pass through and work behind
+enemy positions. To accomplish this, the scout must be able to
+quietly pass through enemy wire obstacles and cross trenches. Cutting
+a gap in wire is time-consuming. If possible, walk over the low bands
+of enemy wire and crawl under the high bands (see fig. 5-5). Avoid
+movement along wire barriers, as enemy covering fires are generally
+planned parallel to them to take advantage of canalization and
+enfilade fire.
+
+To step over low wire at night, crouch low to view the strands
+against the sky. Grasp the top strand with one hand; with the other
+hand, reach forward and feel for a clear spot for foot placement
+without stepping on other strands or any object apt to make a noise.
+Raise the body up, still grasping the top strand of wire. To avoid
+catching the foot in another strand, lift the foot up and over,
+passing it close to the hand grasping the wire.
+
+If a high wire obstacle is encountered at night and wire cutters are
+not available, pass under the wire with your back on the ground.
+Grasp the lowest strands in your hands and hold them clear of the
+body while you slide under them.
+
+When cutting wire and working solo, cut a wire near a post (see fig.
+5-6), then dispose of all but one loose end. Grasp the wire close to
+a post and cut between your hand and the post, muffling the sound and
+keeping the loose wire in your grasp. When cutting wire in tandem,
+one firmly holds the wire with the hands positioned close to the
+cutters, in order to muffle the sound and prevent the loose ends from
+flying back, while the other one cuts. In both instances, the loose
+ends of the wire are bent back to form a passage.
+
+  [Illustration:
+
+  WHEN TWO SCOUTS CUT WIRE TOGETHER, ONE HOLDS WIRE FIRMLY, CLOSE TO
+  CUTTERS, IN ORDER TO MUFFLE SOUND AND KEEP LOOSE WIRE FROM SNAPPING
+  BACK WHILE THE OTHER SCOUT CUTS.
+
+  IN CUTTING WIRE ALONE, A SCOUT GRASPS WIRE CLOSE TO A STAKE AND HIS
+  HAND, THUS MUFFLING SOUND AND KEEPING LOOSE WIRE IN HIS GRASP TO
+  PREVENT ITS SNAPPING BACK.
+
+  Figure 5-6. Cutting Wire Silently at Night.]
+
+Wrap a sandbag around the wire cutters and wire to deaden the sound.
+
+Do not cut a complete gap in the wire; cut only the bottom wire(s).
+Leave the top wire(s) intact to lessen the chance of discovery by the
+enemy.
+
+
+Crossing Trenches
+
+Before approaching a trench, wait outside the trench for a while
+and listen. Do not enter or cross a trench near its junction with a
+communication trench. Crawl silently up to the edge of the trench
+and look into it. Remove all loose dirt and rocks from the edge. If
+it is a narrow trench, spring up and jump across, sinking quietly to
+the ground on the other side and remaining there a moment to listen
+before proceeding. If the trench is wide, climb silently and slowly
+down into it and out the other side, using the revetment for support
+(see fig. 5-7). Do not enter enemy trenches unless it is absolutely
+necessary in order to accomplish the mission. Ordinarily, work is
+better accomplished from outside the trench. Sentries usually pay
+more attention to sounds in front of them; therefore, if it is
+necessary to enter a trench, cross it first at the place where enemy
+observation is restricted, then approach from the rear.
+
+  [Illustration:
+
+  CRAWL SILENTLY UP TO TRENCH AND LOOK IN. REMOVE ALL LOOSE DIRT AND
+  ROCKS FROM EDGE IF IT IS A NARROW TRENCH.
+
+  SPRING UP. LEAP ACROSS THE TRENCH LANDING ON ONE FOOT WITH THE OTHER
+  FOOT HELD BEHIND TO CATCH YOURSELF IN CASE YOU MISS THE EDGE OF THE
+  TRENCH IN JUMPING.
+
+  ON THE OTHER SIDE, DROP NOISELESSLY TO THE GROUND. LIE MOTIONLESS
+  AND LISTEN BEFORE PROCEEDING.
+
+  WIDE TRENCH
+
+  CLIMB SILENTLY DOWN ONE SIDE AND UP THE OTHER MAKING USE OF
+  REVETMENT FOR SUPPORT.
+
+  Figure 5-7. Crossing Trenches Silently at Night.]
+
+
+5009. LOCATING AND PLOTTING THE ENEMY AT NIGHT
+
+For night work, a scout must understand the use of a lensatic
+compass. (Refer to para. 2002.) Using the lensatic compass, the scout
+can guide the platoon into position, locate adjoining elements of the
+command, keep direction when on patrol, determine the location of
+gaps in the enemy wire and the position of enemy out guards.
+
+
+Locating Gaps in Enemy Wire
+
+When searching for gaps in enemy wire, at least two lensatic
+compasses are needed: one to register the gap in the wire and the
+other for navigation. When a gap in enemy wire is located, lie
+outside the gap, keeping a distance of 10 meters from the barbed
+wire. Sight with the lensatic compass on a prominent point on the
+skyline in line with the gap. In selecting the prominent point in
+the skyline, pick one that appears on the map (i.e., hill mass,
+house, road junction). If the only prominent point available is one
+not identifiable on a map (i.e., a tree, destroyed vehicle, enemy
+position), use it. The exact location of this point can be fixed the
+next day by visual reconnaissance of the area from an observation
+point. When the needle rests--
+
+   • Clamp it in place by lowering the eyepiece to the closed position
+
+   • Rotate the movable bezel ring until the luminous line is
+     directly over the north end of the needle. The azimuth of the
+     gap from the prominent point is now registered.
+
+The compass is carried back without further adjustment. The azimuth
+setting can be recorded later on a map (see fig 5-8).
+
+  [Illustration: LIE OUTSIDE OF GAP IN ENEMY’S WIRE AND SIGHT WITH
+  COMPASS ON A PROMINENT POINT ON THE SKYLINE BEHIND OWN LINES. ROTATE
+  THE LUMINOUS INDEX TO A POINT OVER THE NORTH END OF THE NEEDLE AND
+  RECORD THE AZIMUTH.
+
+  GAP IN THE ENEMY’S WIRE
+
+  Figure 5-8. Locating a Gap in Enemy Wire at Night.]
+
+
+Locating Enemy Out Guards
+
+At night, locate enemy guards by their sounds and failure to
+maintain light discipline. As sounds of the enemy are heard, and/or
+observations of the enemy made, shoot an azimuth with one compass.
+When the needle comes to rest, clamp the compass by lowering the
+eyepiece to the closed position.
+
+Note the time and nature of each sound, the estimated distance, and
+which compass was used to fix the location. Plot this data on a map
+then wait until the debrief to turn in the notes and compasses. See
+figure 5-9.
+
+  [Illustration: ADVANCE ON A KNOWN AZIMUTH, ARRIVING AT A KNOWN POINT
+  OUTSIDE THE ENEMY’S POSITION. LIE HERE UNTIL SOUNDS INDICATE POSITION
+  OF ONE OF THE ENEMY OUTGUARDS.
+
+  ENEMY OUTGUARD
+
+  Figure 5-9. Locating Enemy Outguards at Night.]
+
+
+50010. ROUTES OF MOVEMENT
+
+Prior to beginning a night mission, a scout studies the ground in
+detail from an observation point, air photos, and a map during
+daylight. The route of advance should be below the skyline. Avoid
+becoming a silhouette (see fig. 5-10).
+
+Unless the moon is bright, avoid, if possible, passing through woods,
+ditches, ravines, and brush, because noises of movement may lead to
+discovery. If the enemy is known to have night observation device
+capability, avoiding these kinds of terrain may not be possible. To
+avoid enemy ambushes, return by a different route from the advance
+and change routes on successive nights.
+
+  ~DAY~ (white arrows)
+  SCOUT COMES OVER THE HILL UNDER COVER OF WOODS
+  WORKS ON IN BRUSH HEDGE
+  MOVES BEHIND SCRUB ALONG FENCE
+  ENTERS BUSHES
+  CONTINUES IN COVER AFFORDED BY BANK AND BUSHES ALONG STREAM
+
+  [Illustration]
+
+  ~NIGHT~ (black arrows)
+  SCOUT AVOIDS WOODS ON ACCOUNT OF NOISE AND COMES OVER HILL IN LOW
+     PLACE
+  AVOIDS HEDGE AND COMES DOWN LOW OPEN DRAW
+  CONTINUES DOWN DRAW AVOIDING BUSHES.
+  AVOIDS BUSHES.
+  AVOIDING STREAM, BANKS, AND BUSHES GOES ON IN LOW GROUND WHERE
+     STREAM FLOWS.
+
+  [Illustration:
+  When moving at night without a compass, use the stars and objects
+     that appear silhouetted against the sky as your guide.]
+
+  Figure 5-10. Difference Between Correct Routes by Day or Night.
+
+
+
+
+                  CHAPTER 6. OBSERVING AND REPORTING
+
+
+     When sent out on a mission, a scout’s duties are to
+     observe and report. The first five chapters covered scout
+     protection measures and movement in enemy territory. This
+     chapter discusses performing the assigned mission and
+     reporting the mission after its completion.
+
+
+6001. OBSERVATION POSTS
+
+
+Positions
+
+The following guidelines apply to observation posts. See figure 6-1.
+
+   • When selecting observation posts, scouts should chose the least
+     prominent position.
+
+   • Scouts may occupy one or more observation posts.
+
+   • An observation post should not be manned for more than 24 hours.
+
+   • A selected observation post should be observed for 10 to 15
+     minutes to ensure it is not occupied.
+
+   • Scouts move to the chosen observation post by a concealed route.
+
+   • If the post is located on a hill, crawl to a position where the
+     skyline is broken.
+
+   • If a tree is used, the position should have a background so
+     as not to be silhouetted against the sky while climbing or
+     observing.
+
+   • When leaving the observation post, a different route from that
+     of the approach should be used.
+
+   • If a radio is used, its antenna should be located to provide
+     clear communication to the controlling commander but masked
+     from enemy observation and direction-finding equipment.
+     Upon departure, scouts should remove the antennae from the
+     observation post so as not to give away the position.
+
+  [Illustration:
+   OBSERVE DESIRED POSITION FROM A PLACE OF CONCEALMENT FOR SIGNS
+   OF HOSTILE OCCUPATION. APPROACH SELECTED POSITION BY A CONCEALED
+   ROUTE.
+
+  Figure 6-1. Method of Approaching an Observation Post.]
+
+
+Observing
+
+Using all senses available, be particularly alert for movement,
+objects, sounds, and smells inappropriate to the surroundings. While
+observing, avoid all unnecessary movement. If observing from a
+building, keep back from doors and windows.
+
+In daylight, look first at the ground nearest you. Begin observing
+close to your post and search a narrow strip 50 meters or less deep,
+going from right to left parallel to your front; then search from
+left to right a second and similar strip farther away but overlapping
+the first. Continue to observe until the entire field of view has
+been searched (see fig. 6-2 on page 6-2).
+
+At night, use a night observation device. If one is not available,
+search the horizon with short, jerky movements, and short pauses.
+Look a little to one side of an object and then to the other. Lower
+the head close to the ground to view the object more clearly. Use
+low-powered field glasses to increase sight range.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 6-2. Method of Searching Ground.]
+
+
+6002. REPORTING
+
+It is imperative that the scout accurately and completely report
+who, where, when, and what was observed to the proper authority upon
+mission completion. In most cases, a scout will not be equipped with
+a radio.
+
+
+Verbal Reports
+
+Verbal reports should be made when writing is impractical, when
+the information is not complicated or when the enemy is likely to
+intercept a messenger carrying a written message.
+
+
+Written Messages
+
+Written messages, preferred to verbal reports, are recorded in
+message book blanks issued for that purpose (see fig. 6-3) and
+delivered to a higher authority as soon as possible. The NATO spot
+report (SPOTREP) should be reviewed as the written message is a NATO
+format.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 6-3. Sample Field Message.]
+
+The message body is brief, accurate, and clear; facts and opinions
+are distinguished. If secondhand information is reported, its source
+is included. Reports include all information of value, first about
+the enemy, and then about the originator. Information about the enemy
+should cover--
+
+   • Size and/or strength.
+
+   • Actions or activity.
+
+   • Location and direction of movement.
+
+   • Unit identification. (The designation of the enemy unit may be
+     derived from unit markings, uniforms worn or through prisoner
+     interrogation.)
+
+   • Time of observation.
+
+   • Equipment and weapons.
+
+Messages are printed in block letters. Individual items of
+information are numbered and separated into paragraphs. If doubt
+exists as to message receipt by the commander, a summary of its
+contents is included in the next message. Information about the
+originator or writer should cover--
+
+   • Location at the time of enemy observation (reference to an
+     important terrain feature, by map coordinates, by the back
+     azimuth from each of two definitely located points, or the back
+     azimuth and distance from one known point).
+
+   • Intentions. (Remain in position? Continue on the mission? Take
+     other action?)
+
+The message is carefully reread and if possible read by another
+person to ensure understandability. If a messenger is used, the
+messenger must read and understand the message in order to answer any
+questions the commander might have.
+
+
+Sketch
+
+Information difficult to describe may be given accurately on a simple
+sketch. The sketch may give all the necessary information or it
+may be used to supplement a written message. A military sketch is
+generally one of two types: simple or panoramic. The simple sketch is
+easily made and read.
+
+Figure 6-4 shows a simple sketch that has been included in the
+message itself. The sketch may be on a separate sheet of paper, but
+all of the necessary information must be contained in either the
+sketch, the message or both.
+
+The panoramic sketch is a picture of the terrain’s elevation in
+perspective, as seen from one point of observation. Although a
+panoramic sketch is not difficult to create, skill and training are
+necessary to enhance usefulness. Figure 6-5 on page 6-4 illustrates
+how to make a panoramic sketch.
+
+
+Overlay
+
+The same information sent back to higher headquarters on the sketch
+may be sent on an overlay, if the sender and the person to whom the
+message is to be sent have copies of the same map. Figure 6-6 on page
+6-6 illustrates a simple overlay. The overlay is drawn on transparent
+paper as follows:
+
+   • Orient the map and place it on a hard, flat surface.
+
+   • Place the transparent paper over the part of the map of the
+     object or information to be transmitted and hold the paper in
+     this position.
+
+   • Orient the overlay to the map by tracing in the intersecting
+     grid lines at two opposite corners of the overlay. Write the
+     correct number designation on the overlay. The cross made by the
+     intersection is called a _tick mark_ and enables the receiver to
+     locate the exact area on the map covered by the overlay.
+
+   • Sketch the object seen or the information to be transmitted on
+     the tracing paper (the sheet on top of the map) in the exact
+     location it would appear on the map (the sheet underneath the
+     tracing paper). Explanatory notes are annotated in the overlay’s
+     margin, arrows point to the objectives.
+
+  [Illustration:
+    TREE CLUMP ON SMOKE HILL
+    071405 JULY 1999
+
+    FIND THE AZIMUTH AND ESTIMATE THE DISTANCE TO THE OBJECT
+
+    SAME FOR REFERENCE POINT SHOWN ON MAP
+
+  Figure 6-4. Making a Simple Sketch.]
+
+   • Indicate with an “X” and an appropriate explanation the position
+     from which the observer saw the object or obtained information.
+
+   • Include title and scale of the map from which the overlay was
+     made, date and hour the information was obtained, and signature
+     of the observer on the overlay in the lower right-hand corner.
+
+  [Illustration:
+
+    DRAW THE HORIZONTAL LINES OF A LANDSCAPE.
+    PUT IN THE PROMINENT POINTS.
+    TRENCHES IN WHEAT FIELD RED TANK AND BARN AZIMUTH 22°
+    PUT NOTES ABOVE SKETCH. PUT AZIMUTH FROM POSITION TO MOST PROMINENT
+      POINT IN THE SKETCH.
+    GIVE SKETCH A TITLE. SHOW WHERE IT WAS MADE, THE DATE AND TIME, AND
+      SIGN IT.
+    Tree Clump on Smoke Hill 071405 July 1999
+
+  Figure 6-5. Panoramic Sketch.]
+
+  [Illustration:
+    NOT TO SCALE
+    MAP EMMITSBURG SHEET
+    0800 5 OCTOBER 1999
+
+  Figure 6-6. Simple Overlay.]
+
+
+
+
+                    CHAPTER 7. Scouting Fire Teams
+
+
+     Upon completion of individual training, a Marine adapts
+     this training to the functioning of the unit. The basic
+     tactical unit for scouting is the fire team. Within the
+     fire team, scouts normally work in pairs to furnish
+     security and gather information. Information gathered by
+     the individual scouts is passed to the fire team leader.
+
+
+7001. POSITIONING
+
+When a rifle platoon in the approach march is not preceded by
+adjacent units (left, right, front, and rear), it employs its own
+scouting elements. The scouting element for a platoon is usually one
+fire team; however, an entire squad may be used.
+
+A fire team used as a scouting element is called a scouting fire team
+and is controlled by the platoon commander, assisted by the squad
+leader. A squad leader whose squad is providing the scouting fire
+teams normally marches near the platoon commander to assist in the
+control of the scouting fire teams.
+
+A scouting fire team moves aggressively to cover the front of the
+advancing platoon and to locate the enemy’s position(s). It generally
+moves in a wedge or skirmisher’s formation. Normally, a scouting fire
+team is deployed on a frontage of 50 to 75 meters (10 to 17 meters
+between each individual scout). The entire squad may be employed
+to cover a wider frontage. The platoon commander coordinates the
+movement of the scouting fire team(s) so as to protect the main body
+of the platoon from enemy fire from points within 400 to 600 meters
+away, or in close terrain from points within the limits of enemy
+observation.
+
+Scouting fire team(s) should have enough firepower to overcome
+resistance from small enemy advanced posts and patrols; the intent
+is to make enemy riflemen and machine gunners open fire and disclose
+their positions. Without scouts in advance, the platoon may move into
+areas where enemy fire may prevent further advance or maneuver and
+inflict heavy casualties (see fig. 7-1).
+
+Scouting fire teams are covered by the platoon or, when the platoon
+is masked, the fire team leader ensures individual scouts are
+maneuvered and coordinated so that the fire team covers its own
+advance. The fire team leader constantly watches for signals from the
+platoon commander and remains in visual contact at all times.
+
+The distance between the scouting fire team and the platoon is
+terrain-dependent. The scouting fire team should not be beyond
+visibility of the platoon. In open terrain, the platoon commander
+usually directs the scouting fire team to move by bounds along a
+succession of locations designated by the platoon commander as
+intermediate objectives.
+
+Individual scouts should advance as stealthily as possible, while
+remaining consistent with their mission of reconnaissance to the
+front, taking advantage of cover without delaying the advance. An
+occasional glimpse of scouts constantly advancing over a wide front
+can make the enemy uneasy. It is this activity, and not the target
+the scouts offer, that may cause the enemy to open fire and disclose
+its location.
+
+  [Illustration:
+   Figure 7-1. Position of Scouts Preceding an Attacking Platoon.]
+
+When fired upon, scouts must drop to cover and return fire only when
+necessary to complete the mission. If necessary, one scout reports
+back to the fire team leader who informs the platoon commander.
+
+
+7002. LOCATING ENEMY POSITIONS
+
+The key terrain of defensive positions are those points that afford
+extended observation over the ground where the attack must advance.
+The enemy will place machine guns and infantry to defend critical
+points.
+
+Members of a scouting fire team preceding an attacking platoon
+identify the probable enemy infantry and machine gun positions (see
+fig. 7-2). They use concealment and cover to conduct their advance in
+order to discover the exact location of enemy positions.
+
+
+7003. ACTION WITH AN ATTACKING PLATOON
+
+The scouting fire team reconnoiters to the front of the advancing
+platoon. As soon as the scouting fire team leader indicates the area
+is secure, the platoon advances and the scouting fire team moves
+forward. Squads within the platoon advance by bounds; at least one
+squad is positioned to support the other(s) by fire. Successive
+positions along the line of advance are selected and designated by
+the platoon commander as intermediate objectives, and reconnoitered
+by the scouting fire team before occupation. By conducting proper
+reconnaissance, surprise by the enemy or movement in the wrong
+direction may be prevented.
+
+
+Movement
+
+The distance between the scouting fire team and the front of the
+main body of the platoon is dependent on the mission, enemy, terrain
+and weather, troops and support available, and time available
+(METT-T). In close terrain, such as dense woods, the scouting fire
+team’s movements closely resemble those used for night operations.
+In approaching houses, woods, and villages, one scout of each pair
+covers the other while the latter reconnoiters (see fig. 7-3).
+
+A scouting fire team moves forward aggressively to cover the front of
+the advancing platoon, usually adopting either skirmisher’s or wedge
+formation in order to be prepared to go into action immediately and
+to cover a wide frontage of 50 to 75 meters.
+
+  [Illustration:
+    PICK OUT POSSIBLE POSITIONS THAT HAVE A GOOD FIELD OF FIRE,
+      INDICATED BY ↓ ↑ BELOW.
+    POSITIONS WHICH AFFORD THE ENEMY COVER ARE POSSIBLE MACHINEGUN
+      POSITIONS.
+    POSITIONS FROM WHICH FLANKING FIRE CAN BE DELIVERED ARE CONSIDERED
+      THE MOST DANGEROUS.
+
+  Figure 7-2. Assessing Probable Enemy Machine Gun Positions.]
+
+As a scouting fire team advances in open terrain, it is supported
+when possible by elements of the platoon; in close terrain, by
+mutual support within each fire team. Mutual support within the
+fire team is accomplished by the fire team leader and the automatic
+rifleman forming a team that supports by fire the advance of the
+rifleman and assistant automatic rifleman until they reach a location
+designated by the fire team leader. The rifleman and assistant
+automatic rifleman then support by fire the movement of the team
+leader and automatic rifleman. These successive points to which the
+sub elements of the fire team move are normally designated as fire
+team intermediate objectives by the fire team leader. The fire team
+leader sets as many fire team intermediate objectives as necessary
+to maintain mutual support within the team. This process is repeated
+until the team can be covered by other elements of the rifle platoon.
+
+A scouting fire team takes advantage of available cover and
+concealment without delaying its advance. The orders of the platoon
+commander govern the distance at which it precedes the platoon. The
+terrain and the probable position of the enemy affect the scouting
+fire team’s distance in front of the platoon. It may be as much as
+400 to 600 meters in advance of the platoon. In open terrain, the
+platoon commander usually directs that the scouting fire team move by
+bounds to a succession of intermediate objectives. In close terrain
+or conditions of limited visibility, the scouting fire team is
+normally ordered to precede the platoon at the limit of visibility,
+maintaining visual contact with the platoon commander.
+
+  [Illustration:
+  With platoon in woods, scouts reach open field and see house ahead.
+     They signal halt, meaning that the platoon should not advance
+     beyond this point.
+  Reconnaissance shows house to be clear. Scouts signal forward and
+     proceed.]
+
+  [Illustration:
+  Crossing open space, scout sees position from which machine gun may
+     sweep this area. He signals double time and points to the MG
+     position meaning this area is dangerous. From that point platoon
+     should hurry across.]
+
+  [Illustration:
+  Scout reconnoiters for a short distance into woods. Finding edge of
+     woods to be unoccupied, another scout returns to edge of woods
+     and signals forward. They both enter woods and wait for platoon
+     to close up.]
+
+  Figure 7-3. Conduct of Scouts Preceding a Platoon.
+
+
+Action in Woods
+
+When a scouting fire team is directed to advance over open ground
+to the edge of a woodline, two members of the team, preferably the
+rifleman and assistant automatic rifleman, reconnoiter inside the
+woodline while the remainder of the fire team covers them. It is not
+recommended they separate until finished with their reconnaissance of
+the far side of the danger area. Both members staying together can
+cover the same area using a zigzag reconnaissance and they are better
+equipped to overcome any opposition.
+
+In heavy underbrush and/or poor visibility, the rifleman and
+assistant automatic rifleman proceed into the woodline together for
+50 to 60 meters. The two then separate, searching out either flank to
+the first high ground or limits of observation, probably 50 to 100
+meters (see fig. 7-4 on page 7-4). After the initial search and out
+posting the limit of advance, the remaining scout signals the fire
+team forward.
+
+In light underbrush and/or good visibility, the assistant automatic
+rifleman remains at the edge of the woodline while the rifleman
+searches the woodline, (see fig. 7-5 on page 7-5). The rifleman
+searches the woodline in a zigzag pattern, reports back to the
+assistant automatic rifleman, then moves to an outpost position at
+the limit of advance. In turn, the fire team leader signals the
+platoon commander that it is safe for the platoon to move forward.
+
+The fire team leader then moves the remainder of the fire team into
+the woods, joining up with the forward scout manning the outpost. The
+scouting fire team occupies and holds a line 50 to 75 meters within
+the woods and observes toward the direction of movement until the
+platoon closes up. The scouting fire team leader awaits further word
+from the platoon commander before moving the team further into the
+woods.
+
+When directed, the scouting fire team leader moves the team forward
+until they reach the far edge of the woods. The team is held at the
+edge of the woods and the fire team leader notifies the platoon
+commander of the situation. The platoon commander moves the platoon
+to a position where it can cover the scouting fire team as it exits
+the woods and directs the team leader to move out and continue the
+scouting mission.
+
+  [Illustration:
+    A--Both scouts enter woodline.
+    B--Scouts separate.
+    C--Scouts link up; one scout stops and signals all clear to
+      the fire team leader. The other scout again advances into
+      the woods.
+    D--Outpost position of scout.
+
+  Figure 7-4. Searching Edge of a Woodline (Dense Underbrush/Poor
+     Visibility).]
+
+A scouting fire team passing through woods ahead of its unit
+maintains a distance allowing visual and oral communications. If an
+obstacle is encountered, reconnaissance to its front and flanks must
+be carried out. When advancing along a road or path, scouts precede
+the platoon to provide necessary protection and to prevent surprise
+fire on the platoon. When crossing a road or path, they reconnoiter
+well to the flanks before signaling “all clear” to the platoon.
+
+The scouting fire team will not exit the woods until the arrival of
+the platoon commander, who will then be given an opportunity to alter
+the disposition or direction of march. The point where the platoon
+exits the woods is considered a danger area where the platoon is
+vulnerable to enemy fire. The scouting fire team is sent ahead to
+reconnoiter the danger area, as well as the next area to be occupied
+by the platoon. They signal back whether conditions require a halt,
+an advance or a quick rush across the open area. The scouting fire
+team leader must be continually on the lookout for signals from the
+rear.
+
+
+Action Under Fire
+
+When a scouting fire team is fired upon, they immediately take cover,
+locate targets, and return fire. The scouting fire team leader then
+determines--
+
+   • Location of enemy (range and reference points).
+
+   • Extent of position (location of flanks).
+
+   • Types of positions (obstacles, bunkers, fighting holes,
+     etc.).
+
+   • Number of enemy.
+
+   • Enemy weapons (machine guns, mortars, tanks, etc.).
+
+The platoon commander assesses the situation as quickly as possible
+based on the limited information obtained. Usually the platoon
+commander brings up the remaining squads, sets up a base of fire,
+and assaults the enemy position. Should the enemy position prove too
+strong for the platoon, the platoon remains engaged with the enemy
+as a base of fire until the remainder of the company is committed to
+clear the enemy resistance.
+
+  [Illustration:
+    A--Both scouts enter woods. Assistant automatic rifleman
+      remains here and covers forward movement of rifleman.
+    B through G--Rifleman moves to these positions, stopping and
+      observing before moving to next position.
+    G to A--Rifleman reports results of his search to the
+      assistant automatic rifleman.
+    A to H--Rifleman moves to outpost position.
+
+  Figure 7-5. Searching Edge of a Woodline (Light Underbrush/Good
+     Visibility).]
+
+
+7004. ACTION WITH AN ENVELOPING UNIT
+
+When a platoon is given the mission to envelop an enemy position, a
+scouting fire team is employed for protection and reconnaissance in
+the same way as when the platoon is advancing in the approach march.
+
+
+
+
+                     PART 2. INFANTRY PATROLLING
+
+
+            CHAPTER 8. FUNDAMENTALS OF INFANTRY PATROLLING
+
+
+     This chapter begins Part 2 and provides basic information
+     about infantry patrols; specifically, their purpose,
+     types, and missions. Infantry patrol training is also
+     addressed and keys to successful patrolling are presented.
+     Subsequent chapters of this part cover patrol organization,
+     preparation, movement, and reconnaissance actions.
+
+
+8001. DEFINITIONS
+
+A patrol is a detachment of ground, sea or air forces sent out for
+the purpose of gathering information or carrying out a destructive,
+harassing, mopping-up or security mission (Joint Publication [JP]
+1-02). The mission to conduct a patrol may be given to a fire team,
+squad, platoon or company.
+
+
+8002. RELATION OF PATROLLING TO SCOUTING
+
+Each patrol member must be knowledgeable in the principles of
+scouting and maintain membership of a larger team. To develop the
+teamwork skills required among the members of a patrol, additional
+training beyond the basic principles is necessary to become a
+well-trained scout. A patrol member must respond quickly to the
+decisions and orders of the patrol leader. There must be complete
+confidence among all members of the patrol and the confidence that
+they, as a team, will be successful in their mission.
+
+
+8003. PURPOSE
+
+A commander must have current information about the enemy and the
+terrain in order to employ the unit effectively. Patrols are an
+important means of gaining this information and are used to destroy
+enemy installations, capture enemy personnel, perform security
+missions or prevent the enemy from gaining information. Modern
+warfare places a high premium on effective patrolling because units
+have larger areas of operations and can be threatened from all
+directions. As distances between units increase, more patrolling
+becomes necessary to prevent infiltration by guerrillas or small
+enemy units, as well as to maintain contact with friendly adjacent
+units. Active patrolling by numerous small groups is needed to
+locate the enemy and gather information on the enemy’s disposition,
+strength, morale, and weapons, as well as gather and confirm
+information about the terrain.
+
+
+8004. TYPES OF PATROLS
+
+
+Classification as to Mission
+
+
+_Reconnaissance Patrol_
+
+Reconnaissance patrols gather information about the enemy, terrain
+or resources. Relying on stealth rather than combat strength, they
+gather this information and fight only when necessary to complete
+the mission or to defend themselves. The distance covered by
+reconnaissance patrols varies based on the terrain and mission. The
+squad is ideally suited for reconnaissance patrol missions because of
+its relative small size and its experience of working together.
+
+
+_Combat Patrol_
+
+A combat patrol is a fighting patrol assigned missions that require
+engagement with the enemy in combat. Larger and more heavily armed
+than reconnaissance patrols, combat patrols have a mission to capture
+enemy documents, provide security, and capture or destroy enemy
+equipment and installations. Such action is ordinarily followed by
+a return to friendly positions. Regardless of the mission, the
+patrol reports any information concerning the enemy and terrain
+acquired during the accomplishment of the assigned mission. There
+are four types of combat patrols: raid, contact, ambush, and
+security (normally conducted by a Marine rifle platoon). A rifle
+platoon reinforced with crew-served weapons is normally considered
+the minimum size for contact, economy of force or ambush patrols.
+In some situations, such as the capture of a small enemy outpost,
+a rifle platoon could conduct a raid. However, a raid is a complex
+mission and, due to the organization of a raid force (command,
+reconnaissance, assault, support, security, and reserve elements), a
+rifle company is normally the smallest force assigned to a raid.
+
+
+Classification as to Means of Movement
+
+
+_Foot Patrols_
+
+Movement by foot is the most common means; however, there are
+inherent disadvantages. Foot patrols travel slowly and carry limited
+quantity and types of equipment and supplies. Range and area coverage
+is relatively restricted. Foot patrols also have apparent advantages
+in that they have fewer restrictions as to terrain that can be
+covered; are more difficult for the enemy to detect; provide thorough
+coverage within limits of range; and are generally not inhibited by
+weather.
+
+
+_Motorized Patrols_
+
+Where terrain and road networks permit, a motorized patrol overcomes
+the inherent disadvantages of the foot patrol. Mechanized forces
+require patrolling units that can keep pace with them. However,
+motorized patrols are restricted to certain types of terrain, and
+tend to bypass areas that may be advantageous to and occupied by
+enemy infantry.
+
+
+_Waterborne Patrols_
+
+Waterborne patrols move over seas, lakes, rivers and streams, canals,
+and other inland waterways. The water is either used as a medium of
+entry to an objective area or is the actual patrol route. Waterborne
+patrols are limited by the location of water routes in the terrain
+and tend to bypass areas that may be advantageous to and occupied by
+the enemy.
+
+
+_Helicopterborne Patrols_
+
+Where terrain is extremely difficult or the enemy situation precludes
+the use of vehicle or motorized patrols, helicopterborne patrols are
+a method or means to conduct a patrol.
+
+
+8005. TRAINING
+
+Training is essential to successful patrolling. Premature and
+unordered actions by members of the patrol destroy coordination and
+control. Leaders are trained to issue their orders calmly to inspire
+confidence and discipline, and to avoid misunderstanding. Patrol
+members must work together and fight as a team. Training should
+develop the following skills:
+
+   • Expertise in handling individual and special weapons, and
+     familiarity with enemy weapons that may be captured.
+
+   • Recognize camouflaged personnel, equipment, and defensive
+     positions; ability to pick up fleeting targets, fire the rifle
+     from any firing position.
+
+   • Understand fire discipline and, after weapon firing, immediately
+     change position (see fig. 8-1).
+
+   • Quick and accurate observation skills, and the ability to recall
+     and transmit clearly and briefly, both orally and in writing.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 8-1. Changing Position After Firing.]
+
+   • Recognize and quickly respond to improvised signals, visually or
+     by sound.
+
+   • Ability to swim with weapon and equipment.
+
+   • Use issued or improvised camouflage suits and garnish helmet
+     in order to blend with the surroundings. Smudge face, hands,
+     and any bright surfaces of weapons and equipment with some
+     substance, such as mud or charcoal, to prevent the reflection of
+     light.
+
+   • Silence self, equipment, and weapon.
+
+   • Use antimalarial and water purification tablets.
+
+   • Acclimation to temperature extremes.
+
+   • Develop a sense of direction and learn how to follow a course
+     by compass, stars, sun, flow of streams, prominent terrain
+     features, and by observing other natural phenomenon. Learn to
+     determine the distance traveled from a known point and to keep
+     a record of azimuths and the distance traveled on each azimuth
+     (dead reckoning).
+
+   • Call for and adjust indirect fire assets.
+
+   • Familiarization with all communications assets and the use of
+     field expedient antennae.
+
+
+8006. KEYS TO SUCCESSFUL PATROLLING
+
+Regardless of the category or means of conducting a patrol, the keys
+to successful patrolling are--
+
+   • Detailed planning. Every portion of the patrol must be planned,
+     all possible contingencies considered.
+
+   • Productive, realistic rehearsals. Each phase of the patrol is
+     rehearsed, beginning with actions in the objective area. Similar
+     terrain and environmental conditions are used when conducting
+     rehearsals.
+
+   • Thorough reconnaissance. Ideally, the patrol leader will
+     physically conduct a reconnaissance of the route and objective.
+     Photographs and/or maps will be used to supplement the
+     reconnaissance.
+
+   • Positive control. The patrol leader must maintain positive
+     control, this includes supervision during patrol preparations.
+
+   • All-around security. Security must be maintained at all times,
+     particularly near the end of the patrol where there is a natural
+     tendency to relax.
+
+
+
+
+                    CHAPTER 9. PATROL ORGANIZATION
+
+     Organizing a patrol is a two-step process: the general
+     organization of the entire patrol and the task organization
+     of various patrol elements. Normally, the nature of
+     patrolling does not permit long preparation periods and
+     rehearsals to specifically build a unit for each mission.
+     Accordingly, the patrol leader must combine unit integrity
+     considerations with proven concepts of patrol organization.
+
+
+9001. GENERAL ORGANIZATION
+
+The patrol leader establishes a patrol headquarters and elements to
+accomplish the mission.
+
+The headquarters is composed of the patrol leader and the personnel
+who provide support for the entire patrol, such as a forward
+observer, corpsman, and radio operator.
+
+The major subdivisions of reconnaissance and combat patrols are
+elements. The existing infantry structure (squads and fire teams)
+is reinforced as required. For example, a reinforced platoon tasked
+to conduct a combat patrol that will raid an enemy outpost could be
+organized as follows:
+
+   • Platoon headquarters (command element)
+    ◦ Patrol leader (platoon leader).
+    ◦ Assistant patrol leader (platoon sergeant).
+    ◦ Navigator.
+    ◦ Radio operator (company tactical net).
+    ◦ Radio operator (patrol tactical net).
+    ◦ Corpsman.
+
+   • The first squad (security element) provides security en route
+     to the objective area (the point, flank security, and rear
+     security) and at the objective area (the flanks and the
+     objective rally point).
+
+   • The second squad (support element) supports by fire for the
+     attack, covering fire for the withdrawal, and supporting
+     fires to cover the crossing of danger areas.
+
+   • The third squad (assault element) provides the assault force
+     to attack and seize the objective; searchers to clear the
+     objective; pacers, compass man, navigator, and the assistant
+     patrol leader en route and back from the objective area.
+
+Any attachments a patrol may have (i.e., demolition team, scout
+snipers, and machine gun squad) will be added to the element that
+supports its function. For example, the demolition personnel should
+go with the unit conducting the attack, and scout snipers and machine
+gunners should stay with the support squad.
+
+
+9002. TASK ORGANIZATION
+
+The preceding paragraphs described the elements necessary for a
+patrol to accomplish its mission. These elements reflect the internal
+functions or tasks required for the patrol to succeed. Depending on
+the METT-T, there are various methods of grouping these elements
+together. Task-organization is the further subdivision of patrol
+elements into teams that are required to perform essential tasks. In
+creating teams, unit integrity of infantry units should be maintained.
+
+The patrol is organized so each individual, team, and element is
+assigned a specific task, but capable and prepared to perform
+other tasks. This may not be possible for certain specialist tasks
+requiring a trained technician.
+
+
+
+
+                    CHAPTER 10. PATROL PREPARATION
+
+
+     For a patrol to succeed, all members must be well trained,
+     briefed, and rehearsed. The patrol leader must have a
+     complete understanding of the mission and a thorough
+     understanding of the enemy and friendly situations. The
+     patrol leader should make a complete reconnaissance of the
+     terrain to be covered (either visual or map), and must
+     issue an order to the patrol, supervise preparations, and
+     conduct rehearsals.
+
+
+10001. MISSION
+
+The mission assigned to a patrol must be clear and oriented toward
+one objective with a specific task and purpose. More than one primary
+objective or indefinite missions invites confusion, casualties, and
+failure.
+
+
+10002. FACTORS INFLUENCING PATROL SIZE
+
+The circumstances under which patrolling by infantry units is
+conducted make it necessary for combat patrols to be able to
+fight offensively, security patrols to defend themselves, and
+reconnaissance patrols to move quickly and only fight if necessary to
+break contact or defend themselves. The size of a patrol depends on
+METT-T.
+
+Generally, a patrol should contain the least number of members needed
+to accomplish the mission. Combat missions ordinarily require larger
+patrols than reconnaissance missions.
+
+
+10003. COMMANDER’S DUTIES
+
+
+Determining Patrol Requirements
+
+The need for conducting patrols derives from the commander’s stated
+mission (issued by higher level commander) and other specified
+and implied tasks (secondary or supporting efforts necessary to
+accomplish the stated mission). This requires analyzing the unit’s
+mission and determining the necessary reconnaissance and/or combat
+tasks that must be performed. By considering the mission, along
+with time available, the commander develops the overall concept of
+operations to include the patrol plan and the specific tasks for each
+patrol.
+
+
+Assigning Units
+
+When assigning patrol missions, maintaining the integrity of the
+existing unit while considering the skills and experience of the unit
+and its leader are critical factors to the infantry commander. To
+provide operational depth and equitable apportionment of hazardous
+assignments, the commander ensures that each of the subordinate
+leaders and units develops the skills and experience necessary to
+conduct successful patrols. Assignment of patrol units must consider
+the commander’s concept of operations as a whole and the plans for
+subsequent employment of assigned forces after completion of the
+assigned patrolling mission.
+
+
+Providing Adequate Time
+
+The commander must allow the patrol sufficient preparation time by
+completing the mission analysis, estimate, and preparation of orders.
+The commander should use warning orders to alert subordinates to
+possible requirements and afford them the opportunity for concurrent
+planning.
+
+
+Providing the Patrol Leader Information
+
+The following information should be provided:
+
+   • A simple, straightforward explanation of the mission,
+     particularly for night patrols.
+
+   • General routes (defined by checkpoints) or exact routes (defined
+     by avenues of approach or other terrain features) to follow.
+
+   • Enemy composition, disposition, and strength.
+
+   • Location and activities of friendly troops.
+
+   • Outposts or other security elements through which the patrol is
+     to pass.
+
+   • Terrain conditions.
+
+   • Missions and routes of other patrols.
+
+   • Time patrol is to depart and return.
+
+   • Method of reporting information while on patrol (radio,
+     messenger), place where messengers are to be sent, and place
+     where the patrol leader is to report upon completion of the
+     patrol.
+
+   • The challenge and password to be used for exiting and
+     re-entering friendly lines.
+
+   • Special instructions such as locations to be avoided and
+     essential elements of information higher headquarters is seeking.
+
+   • Report barrier/obstacle plan of friendly units if known;
+     support available from friendly unit (e.g., medical evacuation
+     [MEDEVAC], react force).
+
+   • Fire support available.
+
+
+Providing Special Skills and Equipment
+
+There will be situations when the unit assigned to conduct a patrol
+does not have the necessary technical skills or equipment organic to
+it to successfully accomplish the patrol mission. In these cases,
+additions (attachments) are made to the unit, such as--
+
+   • Machine gun and/or shoulder-launched, multipurpose assault
+     weapon (SMAW) team and/or squad.
+
+   • Forward observers (mortar/artillery).
+
+   • Radio operator(s).
+
+   • Combat engineers.
+
+   • Tracked vehicle crewman to assess the ability to traverse the
+     terrain.
+
+   • Corpsman.
+
+   • Other personnel (snipers, translators) as required.
+
+
+Providing Miscellaneous Support
+
+The commander must ensure that the patrol leader is provided with
+the food, water, ammunition, radios and batteries, maps, special
+clothing, and any other items required by the unit (including
+attachments) needed for the mission. Post-patrol support such as
+debriefings by intelligence personnel must also be planned.
+
+
+Reviewing the Patrol Leader’s Plan and Preparations
+
+Once the patrol leader receives the mission, conducts visual and/or
+map reconnaissance, and develops the plan, the commander confirms
+the patrol leader’s understanding of the mission and plan for
+accomplishing it. This discussion between the patrol leader and
+commander ensures that the patrol leader understands the commander’s
+intent and is properly prepared to provide the patrol leader an
+opportunity to ask for clarification or additional support, if
+required.
+
+
+Debriefing the Patrol
+
+Upon return of the patrol, the commander receives the patrol report
+at a debriefing attended by the patrol leader and all patrol members.
+The debriefing should be conducted as soon as possible following the
+patrol’s return, while information is still fresh in the minds of the
+patrol members. A patrol report, based on the information collected
+during the debrief, is generated and forwarded to the next higher
+commander.
+
+
+10004. PATROL LEADER DUTIES
+
+The patrol leader organizes and prepares the patrol by using the six
+troop-leading steps to make the best use of resources available.
+These steps are to--
+
+1. Begin planning.
+
+2. Arrange for reconnaissance and coordination.
+
+3. Make reconnaissance.
+
+4. Complete the plan.
+
+5. Issue the order.
+
+6. Supervise.
+
+
+Begin Planning
+
+The patrol leader begins by evaluating all factors affecting the
+mission. He looks for possible courses of action that lead to a
+decision, and then transforms this decision into an order. The first
+step includes making an initial assessment and decision on using
+available time, issuing a warning order and initial preparatory
+tasks, and initiating his estimate.
+
+The initial planning effort assesses the time, assistance, and
+information available, and plans the proper use of each. Time
+allowances include reconnaissance; completion of the estimate and
+order; troop preparation; and such briefings, rehearsals, and
+inspections as required before beginning the patrol.
+
+The patrol leader reviews the mission and the attachments and/or
+support available and decides what preparatory efforts must begin
+immediately. Proper use of subordinates to manage these initial tasks
+during this period reduces preparation time and frees the patrol
+leader for proper planning and reconnaissance. A warning order is
+issued using a modified five-paragraph order format (situation,
+mission, execution, administration and logistics, and command and
+signal [SMEAC]) as a checklist. (Refer to app. A for specific
+information that a patrol warning order should contain within each
+checklist item.)
+
+Once the initial preparations are set in motion, the patrol leader
+begins estimating by analyzing the mission; considering the friendly,
+enemy, and operating environments; considering each course of action
+available against what the enemy might do; comparing the courses of
+action in terms of mission accomplishment, capabilities, and probable
+casualties; and choosing one that becomes the basis for concept
+and order. While the patrol leader should use and organize notes,
+estimates must be done quickly and accurately, particularly for
+immediate situations. To organize thinking, the patrol leader uses
+METT-T, which consists of:
+
+   • Mission--the mission assigned to the patrol and how it relates
+     to the mission of the commander who is sending the patrol.
+
+   • Enemy--what is known or suspected of enemy presence and
+     capabilities, habits and characteristics, and fighting
+     techniques.
+
+   • Terrain and weather--including ground, vegetation, drainage,
+     weather, and visibility.
+
+   • Troops and support available--friendly situation and support
+     available.
+
+   • Time available--the constraints and impact of time on
+     preparation and mission accomplishment.
+
+The estimate begins with mission analysis, which is the most
+important part of the entire planning process. Here, the patrol
+leader considers the specified tasks of the mission assigned and
+identifies other significant actions (specified and implied tasks)
+that must be undertaken to accomplish the stated mission. These tasks
+are arranged in sequence of accomplishment. The tasks and sequence
+create the framework for developing courses of action for the patrol
+concept of operations.
+
+
+Arrange for Reconnaissance and Coordination
+
+The patrol leader arranges a personal reconnaissance to observe as
+far forward as possible and also coordinates with the appropriate
+commanders for the patrol’s “passage of lines” (see paragraph 11001
+for complete definition) and supporting fires. The patrol leader
+also coordinates with other patrol leaders who may be operating
+in the same or adjacent areas and requests that the commander
+assigning him the patrol mission coordinate the patrol action with
+adjacent commanders, local security, and night defensive fires, as
+appropriate. The patrol leader may delegate any or all of these
+arrangements to the assistant patrol leader if the patrol leader
+requires the time for planning.
+
+
+Make Reconnaissance and Complete the Estimate
+
+The patrol leader uses personal reconnaissance to answer questions
+that arise from the map reconnaissance and METT-T evaluation.
+Specific points include passage points, lanes through obstacles,
+locations of friendly listening posts and observation posts,
+possible approach and return routes, enemy positions (if any), and
+intermediate observation points on the way to the objective.
+
+In selecting approach and return routes, the patrol leader
+chooses routes that best use concealment and avoid opposition and
+obstacles. To lessen the chances of ambush by the enemy, the return
+trip is planned along a different route. In addition to personal
+reconnaissance and review of the map and aerial photographs, the
+advice of other patrol leaders who already are familiar with the
+terrain and the objective area should be considered.
+
+After compiling information about the situation and possible time
+constraint, the patrol leader completes an estimate. The first step
+is developing courses of action, each of which will provide for
+movement to the objective area, mission accomplishment, and the
+return, based on the tasks and their sequencing identified in mission
+analysis. While the eventual concept of operations is presented in
+order of occurrence, the patrol leader must develop the courses of
+action by either backward or forward planning. In situations where
+the objective is well defined and there is sufficient information
+to plan the action for mission accomplishment (reconnaissance or
+combat), the patrol leader begins the scheme for accomplishing the
+mission at the objective and then, planning backwards, considers the
+options for getting there and back.
+
+The following sections on movement to and return from the objective
+area, reconnaissance missions, and combat missions discuss methods
+and options available to the patrol leader in developing the courses
+of action. The principal variables between courses of action will be
+who, where, and how in the following:
+
+   • Patrol task organization.
+
+   • Routes to the objective area.
+
+   • Observation point(s) (reconnaissance patrol), ambush site, form
+     of maneuver, type of ambush (combat patrol), fire support plan.
+
+   • Return routes.
+
+The patrol leader then mentally considers the progress of each course
+of action (a map or simple sketch is a useful aid) against expected
+and unexpected enemy action. By comparing the options against each
+other and prospective enemy opposition, the patrol leader chooses the
+course of action that has the best chance of success. Included in
+this mental preview process is the time to determine the patrol plan
+for unexpected contingencies (enemy attack/counterattack, casualty
+handling). These contingency actions, together with the selected
+course of action, become the patrol concept of operations.
+
+Once the patrol leader determines the scheme of maneuver, the fire
+support required to accomplish the mission is addressed including
+the fire power organic to the patrol and what additional indirect
+fire support will have to be provided by other units. When planning
+for indirect fire support, the patrol leader considers the following
+questions:
+
+   • Will artillery, mortar, or close air support be required at the
+     objective area (combat patrols)?
+
+   • What artillery and mortar targets exist along the routes to and
+     from the objective area that can be employed by the patrol if it
+     encounters the enemy during movement (reconnaissance patrols and
+     combat patrols)?
+
+   • What additional fire support will be required to cover the
+     patrol’s movement from the objective area back to the friendly
+     area once the enemy is aware of the patrol’s actions at the
+     objective area (combat patrols)?
+
+The effect that casualties have upon the patrol depends upon many
+factors. Generally, more casualties can be expected in a combat
+patrol than in a reconnaissance patrol. A patrol may continue on to
+the objective carrying its casualties, send them back with a detail
+of Marines, abort the mission and return the entire patrol with the
+casualties, or call their parent unit for assistance.
+
+Some factors that determine what action the patrol leader takes
+are: patrol’s mission; unit’s standing operating procedure for
+handling wounded; number of casualties and nature of their injuries;
+availability of aid, helicopters or other means of casualty
+evacuation. Helicopter evacuation should only be used for the
+most serious casualties. For infantry units conducting patrols in
+proximity to the enemy, helicopter evacuation of casualties may
+compromise the patrol’s mission and force the patrol to return to
+friendly positions before the mission is completed.
+
+The patrol leader determines the requirement for nuclear, biological,
+and chemical (NBC) defense equipment. Gas masks should always be
+carried due to the availability of riot control agents (RCAs) to the
+enemy. If chemical or biological agents have been employed in the
+area that the patrol must pass through, protective garments will
+have to be worn by patrol members for part of or the entire patrol.
+Wearing extra clothing and carrying extra equipment affects the
+speed of the patrol’s movement. A contingency plan for post patrol
+decontamination must be developed.
+
+
+Complete the Plan
+
+At this point, the patrol leader has completed the basic thinking
+necessary for accomplishing the assigned mission. The patrol
+leader prepares the patrol order to spell out the details, assign
+tasks to subordinates, and explain the entire endeavor for ease of
+understanding by the other members of the patrol.
+
+
+Prepare the Order
+
+The patrol leader’s order contains more detailed information than
+discussed in the warning order. Orders follow the prescribed
+five-paragraph order format but contain greater detail. The patrol
+order is a modified 5-paragraph order; the major modifications are
+to paragraphs 3a and 3c. The format for the order is contained in
+appendix B.
+
+
+Issue the Order
+
+The patrol leader asks for a status report on the initial preparatory
+tasks assigned to subordinate leaders and specialists when the
+warning order was issued. When the patrol leader has completed
+planning and initial preparations have progressed to the point
+where the patrol order may be issued, the members of the patrol
+are assembled. Roll call is taken to ensure all patrol members are
+present, then the prepared order is issued. This will be the only
+opportunity for the patrol leader to issue detailed instructions. The
+mission, in particular, must be unmistakably clear so that once the
+patrol is committed, all subordinate leaders can act with unity of
+purpose.
+
+Whenever possible, the patrol leader should have a Marine, such as
+the navigator, build a terrain model using dirt, sand, twigs, etc.,
+explaining the concept of operations for movement to the objective
+area, actions at the objective area, and the return. Terrain models
+provide patrol members with a clear and simple layout of the area of
+operations and key terrain.
+
+
+Supervise
+
+Inspections and rehearsals, vital to proper preparation, are
+conducted even though the patrol leader and patrol members are well
+experienced in patrolling. Inspections determine the patrol’s state
+of physical and mental readiness.
+
+The patrol leader inspects before rehearsals to ensure completeness
+and correctness of uniform and equipment. The following areas are
+checked:
+
+   • Camouflage.
+
+   • Identification tags, Geneva Convention cards.
+
+   • Prescribed equipment, weapons, and ammunition are available and
+     serviceable.
+
+   • Tape and other items are used to “silence” equipment (prevent
+     noise produced during movement).
+
+   • Items that could provide information to the enemy (e.g., letters
+     and papers) remain behind.
+
+   • Unnecessary equipment and excess weight remain behind.
+
+The patrol leader questions each patrol member to ensure the
+following is known:
+
+   • The mission, planned routes (primary and alternate), and the
+     fire support plan of the patrol.
+
+   • The individual’s role: what to do and when to do it.
+
+   • What others are to do and how their actions impact.
+
+   • Challenges and passwords, codes, reporting times, radio call
+     signs, frequencies, and any other pertinent details.
+
+There is usually a period of time between final rehearsal and
+departure. The patrol leader reinspects just before departure to
+ensure all equipment is still in working order and the unit is ready
+to embark on the mission.
+
+Rehearsals ensure the operational proficiency of the patrol. Plans
+are checked and needed changes are made. The patrol leader verifies
+the suitability of equipment. It is through rehearsals that patrol
+members become thoroughly familiar with the actions to take during
+the patrol.
+
+If the patrol will operate at night, both day and night rehearsals
+are conducted. Terrain similar to that over which the patrol will
+operate is used. All actions are rehearsed. If time is limited, the
+most critical phases are rehearsed. Action at the objective is the
+most critical phase of the patrol and is always rehearsed.
+
+An effective method is to talk the patrol through each phase,
+describing the actions and having each member perform individual
+duties. When satisfied, the patrol leader walks the patrol through
+all phases of the patrol using only the signals and commands to be
+used during the actual conduct of the patrol. Rehearsals continue
+until the patrol is thoroughly familiar with the plan. The rehearsal
+is also used to test the soundness of the patrol order and patrol
+organization.
+
+After the rehearsal, the patrol leader makes final adjustments to
+the plan and patrol organization based on what was learned during
+the rehearsal and from other sources, such as the S-2 and adjacent
+patrols. When this is completed, the patrol leader issues final
+instructions to subordinate leaders noting any changes made in the
+patrol organization or plan. While the subordinate leaders are
+briefing the remainder of the patrol members, the patrol leader
+reports to the commander stating that the patrol is ready to begin
+the mission. The patrol leader also coordinates the location and time
+that the patrol can test fire all weapons prior to departure.
+
+
+
+
+      CHAPTER 11. MOVEMENT TO AND RETURN FROM THE OBJECTIVE AREA
+
+
+     This chapter provides guidance to patrol leaders for
+     movement to and return from the objective area. Action
+     in the objective area depends on whether the patrol is
+     assigned a reconnaissance mission, combat mission or
+     security mission. Chapters 12 and 13 provide detailed
+     guidance on these types of missions.
+
+
+11001. PASSAGE OF LINES
+
+A passage of lines is an operation in which a force moves forward or
+rearward through another force’s combat positions with the intention
+of moving into or out of contact with the enemy. (JP 1-02)
+
+During the initial preparation for the patrol, the patrol leader
+selects a patrol assembly area and reconnoiters the area of passage
+designated by the commander. In coordination with the unit commander
+responsible for the area of passage, the patrol leader identifies
+gaps or lanes in minefields and wire obstacles and locates local
+security elements through which the patrol will pass. The patrol
+leader also checks the route from the patrol assembly area to the
+passage point or contact point where the patrol will depart friendly
+lines. If possible, both the route to the passage point and the route
+through the frontlines should be concealed from the enemy’s view.
+
+The patrol leader also reconnoiters the area for return passage
+of lines and coordinates with the unit commander responsible for
+the area of passage for passage points and lanes as necessary. The
+patrol leader observes these points from the direction that the
+patrol will use upon return to friendly lines, if possible, to aid in
+recognition upon return. The patrol leader provides the forward unit
+with information about the size of the patrol, general route, and
+expected time of return. The manner of challenge and recognition of
+the returning patrol should be coordinated in detail.
+
+Upon return to friendly forward local security squads and/or
+frontlines, the patrol leader leaves the patrol in a covered position
+and moves forward with a radio operator and at least one Marine for
+security to make contact with the friendly unit in the manner agreed.
+After contact is made and recognized, the patrol leader rejoins the
+patrol and takes them to the passage point, personally checking in
+each member.
+
+
+11002. ORGANIZATION FOR MOVEMENT
+
+The patrol’s task organization establishes the elements and teams
+needed to accomplish the mission in the objective area and to and
+from the objective. The patrol leader determines the formation(s) in
+which the patrol moves to the objective area.
+
+
+Formations
+
+The proper use of patrol formations is critical to the patrol’s
+success. The squad and fire team formations described in FMFM 6-5
+(proposed MCWP 3-11.2), _Marine Rifle Squad_, also apply to infantry
+patrolling formations. Because the movement of the patrol must be
+concealed from the enemy, the patrol normally moves through terrain
+that provides concealment. Control of the patrol in this type of
+terrain is difficult; thus the column formation, which is easily
+controlled, is normally used. However, as various types of terrain
+are encountered, the patrol leader uses the same considerations
+in determining the appropriate formation used in other infantry
+operations.
+
+The standard squad and fire team formations are adaptable to a
+patrol. The patrol may change formations en route to match the
+situation and terrain. The patrol leader may have to sacrifice some
+control for better dispersion or give up some speed for greater
+stealth and more security. Other considerations include--
+
+   • Visibility, weather, terrain, and vegetation will influence
+     dispersion and control of individuals and units. These factors
+     may also affect the enemy; if visibility is good for the patrol,
+     it is also good for the enemy. Two pieces of luminous tape worn
+     on the back of the collar will aid in control and movement on
+     dark nights. The collar is turned down when near the enemy. The
+     tape can also be worn on the back of the cap, but should be
+     covered or removed when near the enemy.
+
+   • Preserving the integrity of fire units (fire teams and, if
+     attached, machine gun teams) is of primary importance. If team
+     members are detached from a machine-gun team, the unit integrity
+     is lost and effectiveness is reduced. The patrol leader must
+     also position fire units so as not to mask their fires.
+
+   • All-around defense of the patrol must not be sacrificed under
+     any circumstances. The conventional squad and platoon formations
+     provide adequate firepower in any direction required. When
+     attachments are made to the patrol, the attachments are
+     positioned within the formation to enhance the firepower of the
+     patrol. If a fire unit, such as a machine gun team or squad, is
+     attached, it is incorporated into the all-around defense of the
+     patrol by modifying the conventional formation (see fig. 11-1).
+     It is permissible to employ machine gun teams individually
+     during movement. However, assault rocket squads and teams should
+     be employed primarily as rifle fire units for movement. Firing
+     the SMAW or AT-4 from within a patrol formation can present a
+     serious back-blast danger to patrol members and should only be
+     fired on the patrol leader’s direction.
+
+   • Time allotted for mission accomplishment is also a major
+     consideration. In selecting the formations, the patrol leader
+     must consider the speed of the movement required to meet the
+     time constraints (if any) imposed on the patrol. If required to
+     meet a time schedule, a formation that permits rapid movement
+     should be used. Speed, however, must never be permitted to force
+     the patrol leader to make rash tactical decisions.
+
+
+Exercise of Control
+
+The patrol leader is positioned for best control over the patrol.
+The assistant patrol leader moves at or near the rear of the patrol.
+Other subordinate leaders move with their elements. All patrol
+members assist by staying alert and passing on signals and orders. A
+signal to halt may be given by any patrol member, but the signal to
+resume movement is given only by the patrol leader.
+
+Arm-and-hand signals are the primary means of communication within
+a patrol and should be used exclusively when near the enemy. All
+members must know the standard infantry signals (refer to FMFM 6-5),
+as well as any special signals required, and be alert to receive and
+pass them to other members.
+
+The patrol leader should speak just loudly enough to be heard. At
+night, or when close to the enemy, the patrol leader halts the patrol
+and has subordinate leaders come forward. They speak in a low voice
+and then pass the information to their subordinates by moving from
+member to member.
+
+  [Illustration:
+
+  Figure 11-1. Squad Patrol with Attached Mortar Forward Observer
+    Team and Machine Gun Squad.]
+
+Radios provide a means of positive control within a large patrol;
+however, radios should be used only when arm-and-hand signals or
+face-to-face contact between the patrol leader and subordinate
+leaders is impractical. When close to the enemy, words are spoken
+into the microphone with hands cupped over it in a low voice.
+
+Other sound signals may be used if the patrol leader is sure they
+serve the purpose intended. Planned sound signals are rehearsed
+before starting on the patrol. Sound signals used must be simple,
+natural sounds that are few in number and easily understood. Bird and
+animal calls are seldom satisfactory.
+
+Infrared equipment, such as the sniper scope and infrared filters for
+the flashlight, may be used as means of sending and receiving signals
+and maintaining control at night.
+
+Luminous tape may be used to assist in control at night. Small strips
+on the back of the cap or collar of patrol members aid in keeping
+visual contact with the front member. However, the luminous tape must
+be covered when near the enemy.
+
+An important aspect of control is accounting of personnel, especially
+after crossing danger areas, enemy contacts, halts, and exiting and
+re-entering friendly lines. The patrol leader may arrange for the
+last member to send up the count automatically after crossing danger
+areas, enemy contact, and halts. In large patrols or when moving in
+a formation other than a column, subordinate leaders check members
+and report the count to the patrol leader by the quickest method
+appropriate to the circumstances.
+
+
+Navigation
+
+One or more members are assigned as navigators for the patrol. Their
+function is to assist the patrol leader in maintaining direction by
+the use of the compass.
+
+The patrol leader assigns at least two members as pacers to keep
+track of the distance from point to point. The average of their count
+is used to approximate the distance traveled. Pacers are separated
+so they do not influence each other’s count. Pacers must know how to
+convert their own paces to meters.
+
+The route is divided into increments, with each increment starting
+at a recognizable point on the ground. The pacers begin their counts
+from zero at the beginning of each leg. This makes the pace count
+easier to keep and checks for accuracy.
+
+The pace count is sent forward when the patrol leader turns to the
+member behind and in a low voice says, “send up the pace” or uses
+the arm-and-hand signal of tapping his boot. This signal is passed
+to both pacers, who in turn send up the pace count in meters; for
+example, “two-hundred” or “one-seven-five.”
+
+Patrol members must understand that the counts of both pacers are
+sent forward. The patrol leader must know the counts of both men in
+order to check them.
+
+
+Security
+
+The patrol is dispersed consistent with control, visibility, cover,
+and concealment. Scouts are employed to the front, flanks, and rear
+of the patrol to provide security. For the patrol members traveling
+in the main body of the patrol, areas of responsibility are assigned
+to the front, flanks, and rear. Scouts are the eyes and ears of the
+patrol leader. They move when and where directed by the patrol leader
+and maintain contact with the patrol leader at all times, except when
+momentarily obscured by vegetation or other terrain features.
+
+
+_Front_
+
+Small patrols (squad size) may employ from one scout up to a fire
+team as the point, depending on the enemy situation, terrain, and
+route being followed by the patrol. Normally, squad-size patrols
+will use two scouts as the point. The point is responsible for
+investigating the route of advance immediately to the front of the
+patrol.
+
+The point moves as far ahead of the patrol as visibility and terrain
+permit. When visibility is good, the point may precede the main body
+by as much as 100 meters. The point travels right and left ahead of
+the patrol, searching the area over which the patrol will pass.
+
+The point maintains direction by knowledge of the general route to be
+followed and visual contact with the patrol leader. The patrol leader
+or the navigator ensures that the point is proceeding correctly.
+
+The point, which stays far enough ahead of the patrol to provide
+security, is not a trail breaker for the patrol. If the point loses
+contact with the patrol, the point waits for the main body to catch
+up or moves rearward if contact is not quickly regained.
+
+One of the navigators may be positioned with the point. One or more
+members works as the point while the other is the navigator.
+
+
+_Flank_
+
+Flank security for a patrol of squad size or less may be provided by
+using one or two members on either flank. If two scouts are assigned
+to a flank, one is positioned to observe the patrol leader and the
+other works farther out from the patrol. The scout who must observe
+the patrol leader remains within a maximum distance of 100 meters.
+The scout farther out remains in sight of the inside scout but
+normally does not move more than 20 or 25 meters away and remains
+prepared to relieve flank security regularly. Moving through dense
+woods or jungle may render the use of flank security impractical
+because of reduced visibility. In such cases, it moves with the
+patrol itself, but maintains observation to its assigned flanks.
+
+
+_Rear_
+
+A small patrol normally has only one rifleman assigned as rear
+security. An interval between the member assigned as rear security
+and the last Marine of the patrol is maintained at the limit of
+visibility, up to 50 meters. This member maintains rear security for
+the patrol by constantly observing to the rear.
+
+
+Halting
+
+Speed of movement is slower at night than in day patrols and reduces
+the danger of a Marine becoming separated from the patrol. The patrol
+occasionally halts to observe and listen for enemy activity; this
+is called a security halt. Upon signal, when reaching a danger area
+and periodically throughout movement en route, every member freezes
+in place, remains quiet, observes, and listens. It may be necessary
+to call a security halt just after departing friendly areas and just
+before entering friendly areas.
+
+The patrol may halt briefly to send a message, eat, rest, check
+direction, or make a reconnaissance. The area selected should provide
+adequate concealment and cover, as well as favor the defense.
+All-round security is established and the patrol leader ensures all
+members move out when the patrol resumes movement. (For extended
+halts, see paragraph 11005.)
+
+
+Infiltration
+
+The disposition of enemy forces may sometimes prevent a patrol from
+entering the enemy occupied area as a unit; however, pairs of scouts
+or fire teams may slip through without being discovered. (Refer to
+FMFM 6-5 for infiltration techniques and procedures).
+
+
+11003. CONTROL MEASURES FOR MOVEMENT
+
+
+Checkpoints
+
+A checkpoint is a predetermined point on the surface of the Earth
+used as a means of controlling movement, a registration target for
+fire adjustment or reference for location (JP 1-02). Checkpoints
+are a means of control between the parent unit and the patrol.
+These locations are decided upon and coordinated before the patrol
+leaves, so that both the patrol members and parent unit will know
+the patrol’s location when it reports in. The parent unit can follow
+the progress of the patrol without transmitting coordinates over the
+radio that the enemy could monitor.
+
+
+Rally Points
+
+A rally point is an easily identifiable point on the ground where
+units can reassemble and reorganize if they become dispersed (MCRP
+5-12C). It should provide cover and concealment, be defensible for at
+least a short time, and be easily recognized and known to all patrol
+members. All rally points are considered and identified as tentative
+rally points until they are occupied, found to be suitable, and
+designated as rally points by the patrol leader.
+
+
+_Initial Rally Point_
+
+The initial rally point is within friendly lines where the patrol
+can rally if it becomes separated before departing the friendly area
+or before reaching the first en route rally point. It may be the
+assembly area where the patrol waits while the patrol leader contacts
+the last friendly position through which the patrol will pass. The
+location of the initial rally point must be coordinated with the
+forward unit commander.
+
+
+_En route Rally Points_
+
+En route rally points are between the initial rally point and the
+objective rally point; and from the objective rally point back to the
+point where the patrol reenters friendly lines. They are determined
+as the patrol passes through a likely area that is suitable for a
+rally point.
+
+
+_Objective Rally Point_
+
+The objective rally point is located nearest the objective where the
+patrol makes final preparations prior to approaching the objective.
+It also serves as a location where the patrol reassembles after
+completing actions on the objective. The objective rally point must
+be suitable to accommodate those activities accomplished prior to
+actions on the objective. This position must provide the patrol
+concealment from enemy observation and, if possible, cover from
+enemy fires. It may be located short of, to a flank or beyond the
+objective. It should be out of sight, sound, and small-arms range
+of the objective area. The patrol leader’s reconnaissance of the
+objective is made from this position; it is the release point from
+which patrol elements and teams move to the objective to accomplish
+the mission.
+
+
+_Rally Point Selection_
+
+The patrol leader selects likely locations for tentative rally points
+during reconnaissance or map study. A tentative rally point must
+be confirmed and announced after examination proves suitability. A
+tentative initial rally point and a tentative objective rally point
+are always selected and identified in the patrol order. If necessary,
+the patrol leader selects additional rally points en route as
+suitable locations are reached. When the patrol reaches a danger area
+that cannot be bypassed, such as an open meadow or stream, the patrol
+leader selects a rally point on both the near and far side. If good
+locations are not available, the patrol leader designates the rally
+points in relation to the danger area. The patrol leader will say,
+for example, “50 meters this side of the trail” or “50 meters beyond
+the stream.”
+
+
+_Rally Point Use_
+
+The initial rally point and en route rally points are designated to
+enable the patrol to reassemble if it is unavoidably separated or
+dispersed. Identifying features are pointed out. The patrol leader
+ensures that the information is passed to all patrol members. When
+crossing a danger area, a near side rally point and a far side
+rendezvous point are designated. These rally points should only
+be used when all other methods of retaining control of the patrol
+have failed. The success of the patrol may be jeopardized if it is
+dispersed and cannot rally expeditiously.
+
+If the patrol has left the friendly area and becomes dispersed,
+patrol members return to the last designated rally point (the initial
+or an en route rally point) unless the patrol leader gives other
+instructions.
+
+As previously noted, the patrol leader selects two rally points at
+the near and far sides of danger areas that cannot be bypassed. If
+the patrol becomes separated or dispersed at a danger area, and there
+has been no enemy contact, the patrol should reassemble at the rally
+point on the far side of it. If, however, the patrol is separated or
+dispersed at a danger area as a result of enemy contact, members who
+have already crossed the danger area assemble and reorganize at the
+rally point on the far side; members who have not crossed assemble
+and reorganize at the rally point on the near side. In the absence of
+the patrol leader and unless directed otherwise, the senior member
+at the rally point on the near side takes charge, attempts to move
+the rallied patrol members to the rally point on the far side, and
+rejoins the remainder of the patrol.
+
+
+_Rally Point Actions_
+
+The patrol leader plans the actions to be taken at rally points and
+instructs the patrol accordingly in the patrol order. Planned actions
+at the initial rally point and en route rally points must provide
+for the continuation of the patrol as long as there is a reasonable
+chance to accomplish the mission. Plans for actions at rally points
+should provide for--
+
+   • Recognition signals for assembly at rally points.
+
+   • Minimum number of members and maximum amount of waiting time
+     required before the senior member at the rally point moves the
+     rallied patrol members onward toward the objective or returns to
+     friendly lines.
+
+   • Instructions for patrol members who find themselves alone at a
+     rally point.
+
+
+11004. PRECAUTIONS AT DANGER AREAS
+
+A danger area is any place where the patrol is vulnerable to enemy
+observation or fire (open areas, roads, trails, and obstacles such as
+barbed wire, minefields, rivers and streams, and lakes). Any known or
+suspected enemy position the patrol must pass is also a danger area.
+The patrol leader plans for crossing each danger area and includes
+these plans in the order.
+
+The patrol reconnoiters the near side of a danger area first, then
+the patrol leader sends scouts to reconnoiter the far side. Once the
+scouts report that the far side is clear of the enemy, the remainder
+of the patrol crosses the danger area. As each individual or group
+crosses the danger area, they are covered by those remaining and by
+those who have successfully crossed. Enemy obstacles are avoided
+since they are usually covered by fire.
+
+In crossing a river, the near bank is reconnoitered first; then the
+patrol is positioned to cover the far bank. Scouts are sent across
+to the far bank. After the far bank has been reconnoitered and the
+scouts report that it is clear of the enemy, the patrol crosses as
+rapidly as possible. This may be done individually or in pairs. If
+crossing the river requires swimming, the patrol uses improvised
+rafts to float equipment, weapons, and ammunition across. (Refer to
+MCRP 3-02C, _Water Survival Handbook_.)
+
+A road or trail is crossed at or near a bend or where the road is
+narrow. Observation is restricted and, if the enemy is present, the
+patrol is exposed as short a time as possible. The near side is
+reconnoitered first, then scouts are sent across to reconnoiter the
+far side. This includes reconnoitering the tentative rally point on
+the far side. Once the scouts report “all clear,” the remainder of
+the patrol crosses rapidly and quietly.
+
+If the patrol must pass close to an enemy position, it takes
+advantage of battlefield noises to cover the sounds of movement. If
+supporting fires are available, the patrol leader can call for them
+to divert the enemy’s attention as the patrol passes.
+
+
+11005. HIDE
+
+When a patrol is required to halt for an extended period in an area
+not protected by friendly troops, the patrol moves into a location
+which, by the nature of the surrounding terrain, provides passive
+security from enemy detection. Such an assembly area is termed a
+_hide_. To establish a hide--
+
+   • Cease all movement during daylight hours to avoid detection.
+
+   • Hide the patrol for an extended period while the patrol leader
+     conducts a detailed reconnaissance of the objective area.
+
+   • Rest and reorganize after extended movement.
+
+   • Reorganize after a patrol has infiltrated the enemy area in
+     small groups.
+
+The patrol leader’s plan must include tentative hide locations
+when the patrol’s mission dictates an extended halt within enemy
+areas. These tentative locations must be confirmed by actual ground
+reconnaissance prior to occupation by the patrol. The plan for a hide
+includes both passive and active security measures.
+
+Passive security measures are--
+
+   • Avoid built-up areas.
+
+   • Select an area remote from all human habitation.
+
+   • Avoid known or suspected enemy positions.
+
+   • Avoid ridge lines, topographic crests, valleys, lakes, and
+     streams.
+
+   • Avoid roads and trails.
+
+   • Avoid open woods and clearings.
+
+   • Select areas offering dense vegetation, preferably bushes and
+     trees that spread out close to the ground.
+
+Active security measures--
+
+   • Establish security covering all likely avenues of approach into
+     the site.
+
+   • Establish communications (wire, radio, signal, runner) with
+     posted security to provide early warning of enemy approach.
+
+   • Select an alternate area for occupation if the original hide is
+     compromised or found unsuitable.
+
+   • Plan for withdrawal in the event of discovery.
+
+   • Establish an alert plan with a certain percent of the personnel
+     awake at all times.
+
+   • Organize the elements of the patrol so necessary activities can
+     take place with a minimum amount of movement.
+
+The size of the area physically occupied by a patrol in a hide and
+the number of security posts required are governed by the terrain,
+quantity and quality of cover and concealment, and size of the patrol.
+
+If the situation permits, a hide can also be used as the final
+preparation position and/or objective rally point.
+
+
+11006. IMMEDIATE ACTIONS UPON ENEMY CONTACT
+
+A patrol may make contact with the enemy at any time. Contact may
+be through observation, a meeting engagement or ambush. Contact may
+be visual, in which the patrol sights the enemy but is not itself
+detected. When this is the case, the patrol leader can decide whether
+to make or avoid physical contact, basing his decision on the
+patrol’s assigned mission and capability to successfully engage the
+enemy unit.
+
+When a patrol’s assigned mission prohibits physical contact (except
+that necessary to accomplish the mission), its actions are defensive
+in nature. Physical contact, if unavoidable, is broken as quickly as
+possible and the patrol, if still capable, continues its mission.
+
+When a patrol’s assigned mission permits or requires it to seek
+or exploit opportunities for contact (as in the case of a combat
+patrol), its actions are offensive in nature, immediate, and positive.
+
+In patrolling, contacts (visual or physical) are often unexpected at
+very close ranges, and short in duration. Effective enemy fire often
+provides leaders little or no time to fully evaluate situations and
+issue orders. In these situations, immediate action provides a means
+for swiftly initiating positive offensive or defensive action, as
+appropriate.
+
+Two types of physical contact with the enemy are meeting engagement
+and ambush. Meeting engagement is a combat action that occurs
+when a moving force, incompletely deployed for battle, engages an
+enemy at an unexpected time and place. It is an accidental meeting
+where neither the enemy nor the patrol expect contact and are not
+specifically prepared to deal with it. An ambush is a surprise attack
+from a concealed position.
+
+
+Immediate Actions
+
+Immediate actions are designed to provide swift and positive small
+unit reaction to visual or physical contact with the enemy. They
+are simple courses of action in which all Marines are well trained.
+Minimal signals or commands are required and they are developed as
+needed for the combat situation. The signals can, in many cases, be
+initiated by any member of the unit. It is not feasible to attempt to
+design an immediate action drill to cover every possible situation.
+It is better to know the immediate action drill for each of a limited
+number of situations that may occur during a patrol. Arm-and-hand
+signals associated with immediate actions--such as FREEZE, ENEMY IN
+SIGHT, and HASTY AMBUSH RIGHT or LEFT--are contained in FMFM 6-5
+(proposed MCWP 3-11.2).
+
+
+_Immediate Halt_
+
+When the patrol detects the enemy but is not itself detected, the
+situation requires the immediate, in-place halt of the patrol. The
+first member visually detecting the enemy gives the silent signal for
+FREEZE. Every member halts in place, weapon at the ready, and remains
+absolutely motionless and quiet until further signals or orders are
+given.
+
+
+_Air Observation and/or Attack_
+
+These actions are designed to reduce the danger of detection from
+aircraft and casualties from air attack.
+
+When an enemy or unidentified aircraft that may detect the patrol is
+heard or observed, the appropriate immediate action drill is FREEZE.
+The first member hearing or sighting an aircraft that may be a threat
+signals FREEZE. Every member halts in place until the patrol leader
+identifies the aircraft and gives further signals or orders. Members
+of the patrol must not look up at the aircraft as sunlight can
+reflect off their faces even when camouflaged.
+
+When an aircraft detects a patrol and makes a low level attack, the
+immediate action drill air attack is used. The first member sighting
+an attacking aircraft shouts, “AIRCRAFT,” followed by the direction
+of the incoming attack: FRONT, LEFT, REAR or RIGHT. The patrol moves
+quickly into line formation, well spread out, at right angles to
+the aircraft’s direction of travel. As each member comes on line,
+the member hits the ground, using available cover, then positions
+the body perpendicular to the aircraft’s direction of travel, to
+present the shallowest target possible (see fig. 11-2 on page 11-8).
+Between attacks (if the aircraft returns or if more than one aircraft
+attacks), patrol members seek better cover. Attacking aircraft are
+fired upon only on command of the patrol leader.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure 11-2. Immediate Action, Air Attack.]
+
+
+_Meeting Engagement_
+
+=Hasty Ambush.= This immediate action is used to avoid contact and to
+prepare to initiate an unplanned ambush on the enemy. It may often
+be a subsequent action after the command freeze. When the signal
+HASTY AMBUSH is given (by the point member, patrol leader or another
+authorized patrol member), the entire patrol moves quickly to the
+right or left of the line of movement, as indicated by the signal,
+and takes up the best available concealed firing positions (see fig.
+11-3 on page 11-9). The patrol leader initiates the ambush by opening
+fire and shouting, “FIRE”; thus ensuring initiation of the ambush
+if the weapon misfires. If the patrol is detected before this, the
+first member aware of detection initiates the ambush by firing and
+shouting. The patrol leader may decide not to initiate the ambush
+in order to avoid contact unless the patrol is detected. When used
+as an offensive measure, the enemy is allowed to advance until he
+is in the most vulnerable position before the ambush is initiated.
+An alternate means for initiating the ambush is to designate an
+individual (for example, point or last member) to open fire when a
+certain portion of the enemy unit reaches or passes that member.
+
+  [Illustration:
+     • FREEZE is signaled by the individual who thinks he sees
+       or hears the enemy.
+     • Once the enemy is identified, the PL signals HASTY
+       AMBUSH if the situation permits.
+     • Patrol members move into a line formation stealthily,
+       avoiding detection.
+     • The PL or first man detected by the enemy initiates the
+       ambush. Remainder of patrol moves rapidly on line. The PL
+       conducts an immediate assault or breaks contact.
+     • The PL normally gives the signal to initiate the ambush
+       if the patrol is not detected. He wants to maintain
+       the option of using the hasty ambush offensively or
+       defensively.
+
+     LEGEND
+       LF LEFT FLANK SECURITY
+       RF RIGHT FLANK SECURITY
+       PT POINT MAN
+       RO RADIO MAN
+       X PATROL LEADER/SQUAD LEADER
+
+  Figure 11-3. Immediate Action, Hasty Ambush.]
+
+=Immediate Assault.= This immediate action drill is used defensively
+to make and quickly break undesired but unavoidable contact
+(including ambush) and offensively to decisively engage the enemy
+(including ambush). When used in a meeting engagement, members
+nearest the enemy open fire and shout, “CONTACT,” followed by the
+direction of the incoming attack: FRONT, LEFT, REAR or RIGHT. The
+patrol moves swiftly into line formation and assaults (see fig. 11-4).
+
+
+_Defensive Measures_
+
+When used defensively, the assault is stopped if the enemy withdraws
+and contact is broken quickly. If the enemy stands fast, the assault
+is carried through the enemy positions and movement is continued
+until contact is broken.
+
+
+_Offensive Measures_
+
+When used offensively, the enemy is decisively engaged. Escapees are
+pursued and destroyed until orders to break contact are given by the
+patrol leader. If the patrol is fired upon from beyond 50 meters, the
+patrol must break contact as quickly as possible and continue the
+mission. If it engages the enemy any longer than necessary to break
+contact, it may put the mission in jeopardy.
+
+
+_Fire and Maneuver_
+
+Fire and maneuver is one means to break contact. One portion of the
+patrol returns the enemy fire while another portion moves by bounds
+away from the enemy. Each portion of the patrol covers the other by
+fire until contact is broken by all.
+
+
+_Clock System_
+
+The clock system is another means to break contact. Twelve o’clock
+is the direction of movement of the patrol. The patrol leader shouts
+a direction and a distance. For example: “TEN O’CLOCK-TWO HUNDRED,”
+means the patrol should move in the direction of ten o’clock for 200
+meters. Patrol members keep their same relative positions as they
+move so the original formation is not disrupted. Subordinate leaders
+must be alert to ensure that the members of their elements and teams
+receive the collect order and move as directed.
+
+
+_Counter Ambush_
+
+When a patrol is ambushed, the immediate action drill used depends on
+whether the ambush is a near ambush (the enemy is within 50 meters
+of the patrol) or a far ambush (the enemy is beyond 50 meters of the
+patrol). Fifty meters is considered the limit from which the ambushed
+patrol can effectively launch an assault against the enemy.
+
+=Near Ambush.= In a near ambush, the killing zone is under very
+heavy, highly concentrated, close range fires. There is little time
+or space for members to maneuver or seek cover. The longer they
+remain in the killing zone, the greater the chance they will become
+casualties. Therefore, if members in the killing zone are attacked
+by a near ambush, they immediately assault without order or signal
+directly into the ambush position, occupy it, and continue the
+assault or break contact, as directed. This action moves them out of
+the killing zone, prevents other elements of the ambush from firing
+on them without firing on their own members, and provides positions
+from which other actions may be taken (see fig. 11-5 on page 11-10).
+Members not in the killing zone maneuver against the enemy as
+directed. The assault continues until all patrol members are outside
+of the killing zone.
+
+=Far Ambush.= In a far ambush, the killing zone is also under very
+heavy, highly concentrated fires, but from a greater range. This
+greater range provides members in the killing zone maneuver space
+and some opportunity to seek cover at a lesser risk of becoming a
+casualty. If attacked by a far ambush, members in the killing zone,
+without order or signal, immediately return fire, take the best
+available positions, and continue firing until directed otherwise.
+Members not in the killing zone maneuver against the ambush force,
+as directed (see fig. 11-6 on page 11-10). The assault is continued
+against the enemy or until the order to break contact is given.
+
+In each situation, the success of the counter ambush employed depends
+on the members being well trained in quickly recognizing the distance
+from which an ambush is initiated and well rehearsed in the proper
+reaction.
+
+  [Illustration:
+     • The individual patrol member in contact returns fire
+       and orients the patrol.
+     • The patrol rapidly deploys on line.
+     • Based on the PL’s estimate of the situation, the patrol
+       assaults the enemy or breaks contact.
+     • If the patrol is receiving effective fire, the patrol
+       will assault or break contact by fire and movement.
+
+   Figure 11-4. Immediate Action, Immediate Assault.]
+
+  [Illustration:
+     • Individuals caught In the killing zone of a near
+       ambush, without order of signal, immediately fire at
+       the enemy in order to achieve fire superiority and
+       aggressively assault through the position.
+     • The attack is continued to eliminate the ambush or
+       break contact as directed.
+
+  Figure 11-5. Near Ambush.]
+
+  [Illustration:
+     • Those caught in the killing zone of a far ambush,
+       return fire, get down, seek cover, and establish a base
+       of fire.
+     • Those not caught in the killing zone, deploy to support
+       those in the killing zone by fire and maneuver as
+       directed against the enemy.
+
+   Figure 11-6. Far Ambush.]
+
+11007. PATROL LEADER’S ACTION IN A DEVELOPING SITUATION
+
+While good patrolling depends on good planning, the patrol leader’s
+plan must be flexible. Every combat situation develops differently
+than expected, and the patrol leader must be ready to quickly adapt
+to the situation as it develops. One of the most difficult tasks in
+battle is to recognize the correct moment for making a decision.
+Generally, it is more difficult to determine the moment for making
+a decision than it is to formulate the decision itself. When the
+situation demands, decisions must be made promptly without waiting
+for more information. In a developing situation, the patrol leader
+should use the following questions as a guide for battlefield
+decisionmaking:
+
+   • How has the situation changed?
+
+   • How does the change affect mission accomplishment and the
+     immediate superior’s mission?
+
+   • Must a decision be made now?
+
+   • What are the options?
+
+   • Which option best serves the mission and the unit as a whole?
+
+   • Which option offers the greatest chance of success?
+
+
+11008. RETURN FROM OBJECTIVE AREA
+
+After performing actions in the objective area, the patrol
+reassembles at the objective rally point. This phase of the patrol
+is perhaps the most difficult and dangerous. Patrol members are
+experiencing fatigue, emotional letdown, and wounds; they may be low
+on water and ammunition. Above all, the enemy was likely alerted if
+not in pursuit. At this point, the patrol leader must move the patrol
+rapidly but carefully and maintain patrol security at a high level.
+In returning to friendly lines, the patrol neither uses nor travels
+near the same route used to get to the objective area. The enemy
+may have that route covered. For information on reentry of friendly
+lines, refer to paragraph 11001.
+
+
+
+
+                  CHAPTER 12. RECONNAISSANCE PATROLS
+
+
+     The commander needs accurate, timely information about
+     the enemy and the terrain the enemy controls to assist in
+     making tactical decisions. Reconnaissance patrols are one
+     of the most reliable means for obtaining this information.
+     These patrols engage the enemy only when necessary to
+     accomplish their mission or for protection. They generally
+     avoid combat, accomplish the mission by stealth, and do
+     not maintain contact with the unit that sent them out. A
+     reconnaissance patrol is capable of carrying the search for
+     information into the area occupied by enemy forces--usually
+     beyond the range of vision of friendly ground observation
+     posts--and examining objects and events at close range.
+
+
+12001. GENERAL MISSIONS
+
+General missions for reconnaissance patrols include gathering
+information about location and characteristics of friendly or hostile
+positions and installations, terrain (routes, stream crossings), and
+obstacles.
+
+
+12002. SPECIFIC MISSIONS
+
+
+Locate the Enemy
+
+Reconnaissance patrols try to determine the--
+
+   • Location of enemy forces, installations, and equipment.
+
+   • Identification of enemy units and equipment.
+
+   • Strength of enemy forces.
+
+   • Disposition of enemy forces.
+
+   • Movement of enemy personnel and equipment.
+
+   • New or special types of weapons.
+
+   • Presence of mechanized units.
+
+   • Unusual enemy activity.
+
+   • Presence of NBC equipment.
+
+
+Reconnaissance of Enemy Wire Obstacles
+
+A patrol with the mission of investigating enemy-emplaced wire
+obstacles employs a formation providing for all-around security and
+takes precautions against being observed by the enemy. The patrol
+leader and one Marine inspect each gap and establish its location
+by means of compass bearings to prominent objects in the rear of
+enemy or friendly positions or through the use of global positioning
+satellite receivers.
+
+
+Reconnaissance of Contaminated Areas
+
+A patrol with the mission of investigating a contaminated area
+reconnoiters and marks the area’s boundaries. Patrol members wear
+protective clothing and field protective masks. The patrol leader
+reports the extent of the area, the type of agent used, the terrain
+and vegetation and the method of marking the contaminated area. A
+sketch of the contaminated area, prepared by the patrol leader,
+should be included in the patrol report.
+
+
+Reconnaissance of Enemy Minefields
+
+Patrols assigned to reconnoiter enemy minefields are often composed
+of specially trained personnel. The type of mine is identified and
+the possibility of bypassing the area determined.
+
+
+Reconnaissance of Terrain
+
+The reconnaissance patrol is particularly suited for gathering
+information about the terrain within their area of operations. (Refer
+to MCRP 2-15.3B, _Reconnaissance Reports Guide_.) Commanders must
+know the location and condition of bridges, streams, and roads in
+order to make proper plans for the movement of troops. The following
+information should be obtained by a reconnaissance patrol assigned
+such missions:
+
+   • Bridges:
+    ◦ Maximum load capacity.
+    ◦ Material used in construction (wood, stone, concrete or
+        steel).
+    ◦ Material used for abutments (dirt, wood, masonry, concrete).
+    ◦ Type and number of supporting members of the bridge.
+    ◦ Condition and dimensions of bridge flooring.
+    ◦ Presence or absence of mines and demolition charges on the
+        bridge and at entrances/exits.
+    ◦ Terrain crossed (ravine, stream, road).
+    ◦ Primary use (rail, auto, foot).
+    ◦ Location and type of an alternate crossing if bridge is
+        unusable.
+
+   • Streams and fords:
+    ◦ Width and depth of stream.
+    ◦ Composition of the bottom (mud, sand, gravel, rock).
+    ◦ Speed of current in miles per hour.
+    ◦ Composition and gradient of banks.
+    ◦ Surrounding terrain and vegetation cover.
+
+   • Roads:
+    ◦ Width.
+    ◦ Composition of surface.
+    ◦ Condition.
+    ◦ Road blocks.
+    ◦ Gradient/degrees of slopes.
+    ◦ Curves (location and length).
+    ◦ Ditch and culvert locations.
+    ◦ Primary use and frequency of use.
+
+
+12003. TYPES OF RECONNAISSANCE
+
+
+Route
+
+Route reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain detailed
+information of a specified route and all terrain from which the
+enemy could influence movement along that route. (Refer to MCRP
+5-12C.) It is also described as a form of reconnaissance focused
+along a specific line of communications--such as a road, railway, or
+waterway--to provide new or updated information on route conditions
+and activities along the route. (Refer to MCRP 5-12A, _Operational
+Terms and Graphics_.)
+
+A route reconnaissance normally precedes the movement of forces.
+It provides detailed information about a specific route and the
+surrounding terrain that could be used to influence movement along
+that route. Considerations include trafficability, danger areas,
+critical points, vehicle weight and size limitations, and locations
+for friendly obstacle emplacement.
+
+The objective area is normally defined by a line of departure, a
+route, and a limit of advance.
+
+
+Area
+
+An area reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain detailed
+information concerning the terrain or enemy activity within a
+prescribed area such as a town, ridge line, woods or other features
+critical to operations. (Refer to MCRP 5-12C.) An area reconnaissance
+could also be made of a single point, such as a bridge or
+installation. (Refer to MCRP 5-12A.)
+
+Emphasis is placed on reaching the area without being detected. Enemy
+situations encountered en route are developed only enough to allow
+the reconnoitering unit to report and bypass.
+
+
+Zone
+
+A zone reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain detailed
+information concerning all routes, obstacles (to include chemical or
+radiological contamination), terrain, and enemy forces within a zone
+defined by boundaries. A zone reconnaissance is normally assigned
+when the enemy situation is vague or when information concerning
+cross-country trafficability is desired. (Refer to MCRP 5-12C.)
+
+The commander specifies specific routes or areas of interest within
+the zone. The zone to be reconnoitered usually is defined by a line
+of departure, lateral boundaries, and a limit of advance.
+
+
+12004. TASK ORGANIZATION
+
+A reconnaissance patrol is organized around the current structure of
+the Marine rifle squad with one or more of the squad’s fire teams
+assigned as the reconnaissance element to reconnoiter or maintain
+surveillance over the objective. At least one fire team acts as a
+security element whose functions are to--
+
+• Secure the objective rally point (see para. 11003).
+
+• Give early warning of enemy approach.
+
+• Protect the reconnaissance unit.
+
+Reinforcing the squad is based on METT-T. If two squads are required,
+then the mission should be assigned to a platoon.
+
+A company may send a reconnaissance patrol to specifically
+reconnoiter a given area (a riverbed or a bridge), or to maintain
+surveillance on a particular streambed for the next four nights.
+Reconnaissance patrols perform three basic functions en route to and
+from the objective:
+
+• Provide control.
+
+• Provide security while moving and in the objective area.
+
+• Conduct reconnaissance or surveillance.
+
+Depending on the size of the reconnaissance patrol, an element
+must be tasked to reconnoiter the area or zone. In the case of a
+surveillance mission, two teams are recommended to share the same
+task (so one could lay up and rest, while the other lays low and
+hides to maintain strict silence and no movement while surveillance
+is being maintained on the objective). Whatever the case, each unit
+that has a surveillance mission or reconnaissance mission must be
+thoroughly briefed as to what essential elements of information are
+to be collected as well as their location in the objective area.
+
+The patrol should be organized with one or two fire teams to actually
+conduct the reconnaissance mission and the remaining fire team to
+provide security. Each fire team should be prepared to assume either
+mission. A small area reconnaissance patrol needs only one fire team
+for the assigned mission. A patrol with a wider area reconnaissance
+mission should use two fire teams to physically conduct the mission
+and one fire team for cover and/or security.
+
+The security element for a reconnaissance patrol should be organized
+to cover the likely avenue of approach into the objective area, to
+protect the units conducting the reconnaissance, and to cover the
+objective rally point.
+
+The variations of the special organization for reconnaissance patrols
+illustrate the patrol leader’s flexibility in organizing the patrol
+to meet mission requirements. The patrol leader is not limited to the
+variations reflected herein but can choose any special organization
+as long as that task organization accommodates the requirement for
+command and control, reconnaissance, and security.
+
+
+12005. SIZE OF RECONNAISSANCE PATROLS
+
+A reconnaissance patrol should be kept to the minimum number of
+personnel required to accomplish the mission. A mission requiring
+a patrol to remain away from its unit for a considerable period
+of time, or one requiring a patrol to send back information by
+messenger, increases the size of the patrol. Reconnaissance patrols
+seldom exceed a squad in strength. Unit integrity should be preserved
+whenever possible. Intelligence personnel, interpreters, and other
+specialists, such as radio operators or engineers, are assigned to a
+patrol if the particular mission requires.
+
+
+12006. RECONNAISSANCE EQUIPMENT
+
+Patrol members are armed and equipped as necessary for accomplishing
+the mission. The automatic rifle in each fire team provides a degree
+of sustained firepower in case of enemy contact. The patrol should
+have at least two: pairs of binoculars, pairs of wire cutters, maps,
+compasses, and watches. Night observation equipment may be used.
+Pencils and small notebooks are carried so notes and sketches can
+be made. A message book with message blanks and overlay paper is
+mandatory.
+
+
+12007. RECONNAISSANCE PATROL ACTIONS AT THE OBJECTIVE AREA
+
+
+Route
+
+The patrol leader halts and conceals the patrol near the objective
+area in the final preparation position. The patrol leader then
+conducts leader’s reconnaissance to confirm the plan for positioning
+the security teams and employing units assigned to the reconnaissance
+mission. The patrol leader returns to the patrol and positions the
+security to provide early warning of enemy approach and secure the
+objective rally point. The reconnaissance unit(s) then reconnoiters
+the objective area (route). The reconnaissance unit may move to
+several positions, along or adjacent to the specific route, in
+order to conduct a thorough reconnaissance. After completing the
+reconnaissance, each reconnaissance team moves to the objective
+rally point and reports to the patrol leader. The patrol then returns
+to friendly lines and the leader makes a full report.
+
+
+Area
+
+The patrol leader halts and conceals the patrol near the objective
+area in the final preparation position. The patrol leader then
+conducts leader’s reconnaissance to pinpoint the objective and
+confirm the plan for positioning the security teams and employing
+units assigned the reconnaissance mission. The patrol leader
+returns to the patrol and positions security to provide early
+warning of enemy approach and secure the objective rally point. The
+reconnaissance unit(s) then reconnoiters the objective area. The
+reconnaissance unit may move to several positions, perhaps making
+a circle around the objective area, in order to conduct a thorough
+reconnaissance. When the reconnaissance is completed, the patrol
+leader assembles the patrol and tells members what has been observed
+and heard. Other patrol members contribute observations. The patrol
+then returns to friendly lines and the patrol leader makes a full
+report.
+
+
+Zone
+
+The patrol leader halts the patrol at the final preparation position,
+confirms the plan, and conducts leader’s reconnaissance. The patrol
+leader positions the security team and sends out the reconnaissance
+team. When the entire patrol is used to reconnoiter the zone, it
+provides its own security. After completing the reconnaissance, each
+reconnaissance team moves to the objective rally point and reports to
+the patrol leader. The patrol then returns to friendly lines.
+
+
+
+
+                      CHAPTER 13. COMBAT PATROLS
+
+
+     Combat patrols are assigned missions that usually include
+     engaging the enemy. They are fighting patrols. Every combat
+     patrol has a secondary mission: gaining information about
+     the enemy and terrain. Combat patrols are employed in both
+     offensive and defensive combat operations and they assist
+     the parent unit in accomplishing its mission by inflicting
+     damage on the enemy; establishing and/or maintaining
+     contact with friendly and enemy forces; denying the enemy
+     access to key terrain; and probing enemy positions to
+     determine the nature and extent of enemy presence.
+
+
+13001. TASK ORGANIZATION
+
+A combat patrol is organized around the current structure of the
+Marine rifle platoon. A combat patrol leader should use the unit’s
+normal organization (fire team, squad, and platoon) in assigning
+functions, patrol missions, and chain of command. Combat patrols must
+be able to perform the following four basic functions en route to and
+from the objective:
+
+   • Provide control.
+
+   • Provide security.
+
+   • Provide support by fire.
+
+   • Attack or assault the objective.
+
+A rifle platoon could task-organize as a combat patrol as follows:
+
+   • Platoon headquarters (patrol headquarters).
+
+   • First squad (security).
+
+   • Second squad (support).
+
+   • Third squad (assault).
+
+Every combat patrol must--
+
+   • Provide a control mechanism in the form of a headquarters.
+
+   • Designate a unit (a fire team or squad) to provide security
+     while moving en route to the objective or while at the
+     objective. At the objective area, this unit isolates the
+     objective area, secures the objective rally point, and covers
+     the withdrawal.
+
+   • Designate a unit to act as support. This unit provides the base
+     of fire in the attack or covers withdrawals or advances.
+
+   • Designate a unit(s) to conduct the attack or assault. This
+     unit(s) engages the enemy at the objective area by fire and
+     maneuver or movement. It also operates immediately in the
+     objective area (searching, demolition, prisoners of war, etc.).
+     Paragraph 9001 outlines the general organization of combat
+     patrols. As in the case with reconnaissance patrols, the task
+     organization of a combat patrol depends on the specific mission
+     assigned. If any special requirements are generated because of
+     the specific mission, the patrol is task-organized to fit the
+     needs of the mission.
+
+
+13002. EQUIPMENT
+
+Combat patrols are armed and equipped as necessary for accomplishing
+the mission. In addition to binoculars, wire cutters, compasses, and
+other equipment generally common to all patrols, it usually carries
+a high proportion of automatic weapons and grenades. Communications
+with higher headquarters is important as success of the mission may
+depend on being able to call for supporting fires. Also, internal
+radio communications with the units and teams may be useful. However,
+the patrol must not be so overburdened with equipment as to impede
+movement or mission accomplishment.
+
+
+13003. RAID PATROLS
+
+A raid is a surprise attack on an enemy force or installation with
+the attacking force withdrawing after accomplishing its mission.
+Raids destroy or capture enemy personnel or equipment, destroy
+installations, or free friendly personnel who have been captured by
+the enemy. Patrolling techniques are used in planning and when moving
+to and from the objective. (Refer to MCWP 3-41.2, _Raids_.) Surprise,
+firepower, and violence of action are the keys to a successful raid.
+Patrols achieve surprise by attacking--
+
+   • When the enemy is least prepared (e.g., during periods of poor
+     visibility such as darkness, rain, fog, or snow).
+
+   • From an unexpected direction. (This might be accomplished by
+     approaching through a swamp or other seemingly impassable
+     terrain.)
+
+   • With concentration of firepower at critical points within the
+     objective.
+
+
+Planning
+
+A successful raid requires detailed planning. The leader of a combat
+patrol engaged in raiding must anticipate probable situations and
+decide upon definite courses of action to meet them. Rehearsals are
+imperative.
+
+A raid patrol conducts such missions as destroying an enemy outpost
+or seizing prisoners from an observation post or lightly defended
+position.
+
+While preparing for the mission, the patrol leader requests fire
+support required for the accomplishment of the mission. If practical,
+artillery and mortars should be employed to isolate the objective to
+prevent movement of enemy reinforcements into the area.
+
+
+Execution
+
+The leader’s plan must be detailed and complete. All of the
+considerations outlined in chapter 11 must be covered. Patrol
+formations must provide for ease of control and all-around security
+while moving to and from the objective area and provide for rapid
+and coordinated deployment of the various units once the objective
+area is reached. The leader’s plan usually includes the encirclement
+of the hostile position--either physically or by fire--in order to
+isolate it during the assault.
+
+The final simultaneous assault against the objective develops when
+enemy defensive fires at the objective are suppressed by either
+friendly fire superiority or surprise. The assault is covered by the
+fire of the unit assigned the function of support by fire.
+
+Grenades, SMAWs, and demolitions are most effective for clearing
+bunkers.
+
+Security units are posted to isolate the objective. The patrol leader
+signals them when the withdrawal begins. As a minimum, security is on
+each flank and to the rear (at the objective rally point).
+
+
+Actions at the Objective
+
+The patrol leader halts the patrol near the objective at the final
+preparation position. Security is established and the leader’s
+reconnaissance is made with appropriate subordinate leaders. When
+the leaders return to the patrol, they confirm previous plans or
+announce any changes. Movements are arranged so all units reach their
+positions simultaneously. This improves the patrol’s capability for
+decisive action, if prematurely detected by the enemy.
+
+The teams of the security element move to positions to secure
+the objective rally point, give early warning of enemy approach,
+block avenues of approach into--and prevent enemy escape from--the
+objective area. As the assault element moves into position, the
+security element informs the patrol leader of all enemy activity,
+firing only if detected or on the patrol leader’s order. Once the
+assault element commences action, the security element prevents enemy
+entry into or escape from the objective area. The security element
+covers the withdrawal of the assault element (and support element, if
+employed) to the objective rally point, withdrawing only upon order
+or prearranged signal.
+
+As the assault element approaches the objective, it deploys early
+enough to permit immediate assault if detected by the enemy. Each
+team uses stealth while moving into proper position. On command,
+or if one or more of the assault element is detected and fired
+upon by the enemy, the support element opens fire to neutralize
+the objective, then ceases or shifts fire according to prearranged
+plans and signals. As supporting fires cease or shift, the assault
+element assaults the objective. Demolition, search, and other teams
+are protected by the assault element while they work. On order, the
+assault element withdraws to the objective rally point.
+
+If a support element is employed, its leader deploys teams to provide
+fire support for the assault element. Each member of the support
+element must know the scheme of maneuver to be used by the assault
+element, specific targets or areas to be neutralized by fire, and the
+signals that will be employed to commence, shift, and cease fires.
+The support element withdraws on order of the patrol leader. At the
+objective rally point, the patrol leader quickly reorganizes the
+patrol and begins the return movement to friendly lines.
+
+
+13004. CONTACT PATROLS
+
+
+General
+
+Contact patrols establish and/or maintain contact to the front,
+flanks or rear by--
+
+   • Establishing contact with an enemy force when the definite
+     location of the force is unknown.
+
+   • Maintaining contact with enemy forces through direct and/or
+     indirect fires, or observation.
+
+   • Avoiding decisive engagement with the enemy.
+
+
+Task Organization and Equipment
+
+Task organization and equipment depend on the known enemy situation
+and anticipated enemy contact. A patrol sent out to establish contact
+with an enemy force is organized, armed, and equipped to overcome
+resistance of light screening forces in order to gain contact with
+the main enemy force. It is not organized and equipped to engage the
+main enemy forces in combat. Communication is paramount; radios must
+be reliable over the entire distance covered.
+
+
+Actions at the Objective
+
+The patrol leader selects a series of objectives. Once an objective
+is reached, the patrol leader initiates a planned set of actions in
+order to establish and maintain contact with the enemy. These plans
+and actions are guided by the missions to establish or maintain
+contact--not to engage in decisive combat. Contact with the enemy is
+maintained for the purposes of surveillance, applying pressure, and
+preventing seizure of the initiative. If the contact patrol becomes
+decisively engaged with the enemy, many of the tasks originally
+assigned to the patrol cannot be accomplished, since the enemy has
+seized the initiative and friendly forces are not forced to react.
+
+
+13005. AMBUSH PATROLS
+
+
+General
+
+An ambush is a surprise attack from a concealed position upon a
+moving or temporarily halted target. It is one of the oldest and most
+effective types of military actions. Ambush patrols conduct ambushes
+of enemy patrols, resupply columns, and convoys. The intent of an
+ambush is to place the enemy in a dilemma where staying in the kill
+zone or attempting to move out of it prove equally lethal. The ambush
+may include an assault to close with and decisively engage the enemy,
+or the attack may be by fire only.
+
+
+Purpose of Ambushes
+
+Ambushes are executed for the general purpose of reducing the
+enemy’s overall combat effectiveness and for the specific purpose of
+destroying its units. The cumulative effect of many small ambushes on
+enemy units lowers enemy troop morale and harasses the enemy force as
+a whole.
+
+Destruction is the primary purpose of an ambush because loss of men
+killed or captured, and loss of equipment and supplies destroyed or
+captured, reduces the overall combat effectiveness of the enemy.
+
+Harassment, though less apparent than physical damage, is a secondary
+purpose of ambushes. Frequent ambushes force the enemy to divert men
+from other missions to guard convoys, troop movements, and carrying
+parties. When enemy patrols fail to accomplish their mission because
+they are ambushed, the enemy is deprived of valuable information. A
+series of successful ambushes causes the enemy to be less aggressive
+and more defensive minded. His men become apprehensive, overly
+cautious, reluctant to go on patrols, seek to avoid night operations,
+are more subject to confusion and panic if ambushed, and in general,
+decline in effectiveness.
+
+
+Classification of Ambushes
+
+A _deliberate ambush_ is one in which prior information about the
+enemy permits detailed planning before the patrol departs for the
+ambush site. Information needed to plan a deliberate ambush includes
+the size, composition, and organization of the force to be ambushed;
+how the force operates; and the time it will pass certain points or
+areas. A deliberate ambush may be planned for such targets as--
+
+   • Any force if sufficient prior information is known.
+
+   • Enemy patrols that establish patterns by frequent use of the
+     same routes or habitually depart and re-enter their own areas at
+     the same point.
+
+   • Logistic columns.
+
+   • Troop movements.
+
+An _ambush of opportunity_ is conducted when available information
+does not permit detailed planning before the patrol departs. This
+is the type of ambush that an infantry unit normally conducts. An
+ambush of opportunity should not be confused with a hasty ambush.
+An ambush of opportunity is a planned ambush; a hasty ambush is an
+immediate action. In planning for an ambush of opportunity, the
+patrol must be prepared to execute any of several courses of action
+based on the types of targets that may be ambushed and must rehearse
+prior to departure. The course of action taken is determined when the
+opportunity for ambush arises.
+
+The patrol leader may be directed to reconnoiter an area for a
+suitable ambush site, set up at the site selected, and execute an
+ambush against the first profitable target that appears.
+
+The patrol may depart just after dark, move to a specific point,
+observe until a designated time, ambush the first profitable target
+after that time, and return before daylight.
+
+A _hasty ambush_ is an immediate action where the patrol makes visual
+contact with an enemy force and has time to establish an ambush
+without being detected. The actions for a hasty ambush must be well
+rehearsed and accomplished through the use of hand and arm signals
+given from the patrol leader.
+
+
+Types of Ambushes
+
+There are two types of ambushes: point and area. The _point ambush_
+is one where forces are deployed to attack along a single killing
+zone. The _area ambush_ is one where forces are deployed as multiple
+related point ambushes.
+
+A point ambush, whether independent or part of an area ambush, is
+positioned along the enemy’s expected route of approach. Formation
+of the forces conducting the ambush is important because, to a great
+extent, the formation determines whether a point ambush is able to
+deliver the heavy volume of highly concentrated fire necessary to
+isolate, trap, and destroy the enemy.
+
+The ambush formation to be used is determined by careful
+consideration of possible formations and the advantages and
+disadvantages of each in relation to--
+
+   • Terrain.
+
+   • Visibility.
+
+   • Forces.
+
+   • Weapons and equipment.
+
+   • Ease or difficulty of control.
+
+   • Target to be attacked.
+
+   • Combat situation.
+
+For a detailed discussion of ambush formation, see appendix D.
+
+
+Ambush Operation Terms
+
+The _ambush site_ is the location where an ambush is established.
+
+The _killing zone_ is that portion of an ambush site where fires
+are concentrated to trap, isolate, and destroy the target. On
+little-traveled roads, an obstacle placed in a defile, in the woods,
+on a bridge or on a steep upgrade can be used effectively to force
+vehicles to halt, and thus render the occupants vulnerable to attack.
+Antitank mines may be emplaced and the occupants of the wrecked
+vehicle killed or captured while still dazed by the explosion.
+
+A _near ambush_ is a point ambush where the attacking force is
+located within reasonable assaulting distance of the killing zone (50
+meters is a guide). A near ambush is most often conducted in close
+terrain, such as a jungle or heavy woods.
+
+A _far ambush_ is a point ambush where the attack force is located
+beyond reasonable assaulting distance of the killing zone (beyond
+50 meters is a guide). A far ambush may be more appropriate in open
+terrain offering good fields of fire or when the target will be
+attacked by fire only.
+
+
+Factors for a Successful Ambush Patrol
+
+There are many factors that give the ambush its best chance of
+success. The ideal situation would be to position the ambush on
+favorable terrain and have detailed planning completed beforehand.
+
+The patrol leader of an ambush looks for the most favorable
+terrain in which the enemy is canalized between two obstacles with
+limited opportunity to attack or escape. Suitable areas include
+defiles, small clearings, bends in trails, and steep grades. Dense
+undergrowth adjacent to the ambush site permits observation from
+concealed positions. The ambush patrol should have maximum cover and
+concealment, not only for the firing positions, but for the routes
+of withdrawal. The enemy should be in an area offering as little
+protection from fire as possible. Favorable fields of fire include
+stretches of road, trail or open ground of at least 100 meters for
+machine guns and 15 meters for rifle fire and grenades. The ambush
+site can be improved by constructing obstacles--such as felled trees,
+wire, land mines, or booby traps--to impede the enemy.
+
+
+_Planning_
+
+A deliberate ambush or an ambush of opportunity requires thorough
+planning.
+
+A deliberate ambush plan is based on extensive knowledge of the enemy
+and terrain, and is planned and rehearsed in great detail. A physical
+reconnaissance of the ambush site is made during the preparation
+phase and information gained is incorporated into the plan. All
+likely immediate actions of the enemy when ambushed are examined.
+Planned counteractions are developed and rehearsed.
+
+In planning an ambush of opportunity, any available information on
+the enemy and terrain is used. A tentative plan for the ambush that
+incorporates all anticipated actions is developed and rehearsed.
+However, the bulk of planning is done concurrently during the patrol
+leader’s reconnaissance of the prospective ambush site. In a rapidly
+developing situation, hasty ambush immediate action is employed.
+
+The route and ambush site considerations apply to both deliberate
+ambushes and ambushes of opportunity. A primary route that allows the
+patrol to enter the ambush site from the rear is planned. Entering
+the prospective killing zone is avoided. If the killing zone must
+be entered to place mines or explosives, care is taken to remove
+any tracks and signs that might alert the enemy and compromise the
+ambush. If mines or explosives are to be placed on the far side of
+the ambush site, or if the appearance of the site from the enemy’s
+viewpoint is to be checked, a wide detour is made around the killing
+zone. Care is taken to remove any tracks that might reveal the
+ambush. An alternate route from the ambush site to the objective
+rally point, as in other patrols, is planned.
+
+Maps and aerial photographs are used to carefully analyze the
+terrain. When possible, an on-the-ground reconnaissance of the ambush
+site is made prior to occupation. Obvious ambush sites are avoided as
+the element of surprise is even more difficult to achieve in these
+areas. An ambush site must provide for--
+
+   • Favorable fields of fire.
+
+   • Occupation and preparation of concealed positions.
+
+   • Canalization of the target into the killing zone. (An ideal
+     killing zone restricts the enemy on all sides, confining him
+     to an area where he can be quickly and completely destroyed.
+     Natural obstacles, such as cliffs, streams, embankments, or
+     steep grades, are used whenever possible to force vehicles to
+     slow down. Man-made obstacles, such as barbed wire, mines, and
+     craters in the roads, are used to supplement natural obstacles.)
+
+   • Covered routes of withdrawal that enable the ambush force to
+     break contact.
+
+   • Avoidance of enemy pursuit by fire.
+
+
+_Occupation of Ambush Site_
+
+The surrounding area is searched for enemy patrols prior to
+occupation of the ambush site. Ambush formations are used to
+physically deploy the patrol in a manner to inflict maximum
+destruction upon the enemy and to provide maximum security to the
+patrol. Ambush formations are contained in appendix D.
+
+
+_Positions_
+
+The patrol is moved into the ambush site from the objective rally
+point. Security is positioned first to prevent surprise while the
+ambush is being established. Automatic weapons are then positioned so
+each can fire along the entire killing zone. If this is not possible,
+overlapping sectors of fire are provided to cover the entire killing
+zone. The patrol leader then selects his position, located so he
+can tell when to initiate the ambush. Riflemen and grenadiers are
+positioned and sectors of fire are assigned to cover any dead space
+left by the automatic weapons. The patrol leader sets a time by which
+positions are to be prepared. Patrol members clear fields of fire and
+prepare positions in that order, with attention to camouflage for
+both.
+
+
+_Suitable Objective Rally Point_
+
+An easily located objective rally point is selected and made known to
+all patrol members. The objective rally point is located far enough
+from the ambush site so that it will not be overrun if the enemy
+assaults the ambush. Routes of withdrawal to the objective rally
+point are reconnoitered. Situation permitting, each man walks the
+route he is to use and picks out checkpoints. When the ambush is to
+be executed at night, each man must be able to follow his route in
+the dark. After the ambush has been executed, and the search of the
+killing zone completed, the patrol is withdrawn quickly but quietly,
+on signal, to the objective rally point where it reorganizes for
+the return march. If the ambush was not successful and the patrol
+is pursued, withdrawal may be by bounds. The last group may arm
+mines, previously placed along the withdrawal route, to further delay
+pursuit.
+
+
+_Local Security_
+
+Security must be maintained. Security elements do not usually
+participate in the initial attack, but protect the rear and flanks,
+and cover the withdrawal.
+
+
+_Patience_
+
+The Marines of the ambush force must control themselves so that the
+ambush is not compromised. Patience and self-discipline are exercised
+by remaining still and quiet while waiting for the target to appear,
+particularly if the patrol occupies the ambush site well ahead of the
+arrival of the enemy. Patience is necessary so as not to alert the
+enemy to the presence of the ambush.
+
+
+_Surprise_
+
+Surprise must be achieved, or the attack is not an ambush. If
+complete surprise cannot be achieved, it must be so nearly complete
+that the target is not aware of the ambush until too late for
+effective reaction. Surprise is achieved by careful planning,
+preparation, and execution so that targets are attacked when, where,
+and in a way for which they are least prepared.
+
+
+_Coordinated Fires_
+
+Properly timed and delivered fires contribute heavily to the
+achievement of surprise, as well as to destruction of the enemy. The
+lifting or shifting of fires must be equally precise; otherwise,
+the assault is delayed and the enemy has an opportunity to recover
+and react. All weapons, mines, and demolitions are positioned and
+all fires, including those of available artillery and mortars, are
+coordinated to achieve the following results:
+
+   • Isolation of the killing zone to prevent the enemy’s escape or
+     reinforcement.
+
+   • Surprise delivery of a large volume of highly concentrated fires
+     into the killing zone.
+
+
+_Control_
+
+Close control of the patrol is maintained during movement to,
+occupation of, and withdrawal from the ambush site. This is best
+achieved through rehearsals and establishment and maintenance of good
+communications. When the enemy approaches, the temptation to open
+fire before the signal is given is resisted. The patrol leader must
+effectively control all elements of the ambush force. Control is most
+critical at the time the enemy approaches the killing zone. Control
+measures must provide for--
+
+   • Early warning of enemy approach.
+
+   • Fire control. Withhold fire until the enemy has moved into the
+     killing zone, then open fire at the proper time.
+
+   • Initiation of appropriate action, if the ambush is prematurely
+     detected. Individual patrol members must be prepared to react if
+     detected by the enemy prior to the initiation of the ambush.
+
+   • Timely and orderly withdrawal of the ambush force from the
+     ambush site and movement to the objective rally point.
+
+It is important to remember that an ambush patrol should have four
+distinct signals: one to open fire (with an alternate signal to open
+fire to be used at the same time as the primary); a signal to cease
+fire or shift fire; a signal to assault or search the killing zone;
+and a signal to withdraw. The signal to open fire should meet two
+criteria: first, it should be the firing of a weapon that will kill
+the enemy; secondly, it should be a weapon reliable in any weather
+condition. A good primary signal is a Claymore mine, and an alternate
+signal would be a closed bolt weapon (M16A2). Open bolt weapons
+(M240G, M249) should not be relied upon to initiate an ambush.
+
+
+Execution of an Ambush
+
+The manner in which the patrol executes an ambush depends primarily
+on whether the ambush’s purpose is harassment or destruction. To a
+lesser degree, the execution of the ambush is determined by whether
+the ambush is deliberate or an ambush of opportunity.
+
+When the primary purpose is harassment, the patrol seals off the
+area with security teams to prevent enemy reinforcement and escape.
+Maximum damage is inflicted with demolitions and automatic weapons
+fire. The patrol delivers a very heavy volume of fire for a short
+time and withdraws quickly and quietly. The patrol avoids being seen
+by the enemy.
+
+When the primary purpose of the patrol is destruction, the area is
+sealed off with security units. Maximum damage is inflicted with
+demolitions, antitank weapons, and automatic weapons fire from the
+support team or element. When these fires cease or shift, an assault
+is launched into the killing zone with heavy fire and violence to
+complete destruction. The assault unit provides security, while
+designated teams search and/or capture personnel and destroy vehicles
+and equipment. On the patrol leader’s command, or by prearranged
+signal, all units withdraw to the objective rally point and move out
+quickly.
+
+When the patrol’s primary purpose is to obtain supplies or capture
+equipment, security units seal off the area. Demolitions and weapons
+are used to disable vehicles. The assault unit must use care to
+ensure its fire does not damage the desired supplies or equipment.
+Designated teams secure the desired items; other teams then destroy
+enemy vehicles and equipment.
+
+The most successful ambush is one where the attacker is deployed and
+concealed in such a way that the enemy will unknowingly be surrounded
+by fire. The usual method is for the attackers to deploy themselves
+along a trail or route the enemy will travel. The enemy is permitted
+to pass by the center of the attacker’s force so that the attack can
+be made from the front, flank, and/or rear. One or two men are posted
+well forward and to the rear along the route to prevent any enemy
+from escaping. All fires should be delivered simultaneously on a
+prearranged signal.
+
+An effective method of luring the enemy is for an ambushing patrol
+to cut communication or electrical wire. The patrol then deploys and
+ambushes the line repair crew when it arrives. Since the line crew
+may be protected by riflemen, the attackers must be careful to engage
+the entire party.
+
+Vehicles and foot personnel moving on well-established transportation
+routes can sometimes be captured by altering or moving directional
+signs so as to divert the enemy into an area where he can be more
+readily attacked. The attack can best be accomplished at an obstacle,
+such as a stream or gully, that forces the enemy to stop or slow down.
+
+After the enemy has been ambushed and destroyed, the unit quickly
+withdraws over a prearranged route to the objective rally point.
+Speed is very important, since the noise of the ambush could alert
+other nearby enemy units.
+
+
+13006. SECURITY PATROLS
+
+
+General
+
+Security patrols are assigned missions that may or may not require
+them to engage the enemy. They are used in proximity to defensive
+positions, on the flanks of advancing units or in rear areas.
+Purposes of security patrols are to detect infiltration by the enemy,
+destroy infiltrators, and protect against surprise and ambush.
+
+In any situation where there is a threat of attack, such as a rear
+area threatened by guerrillas or a facility that is under threat of a
+terrorist attack, all Marines, not just the infantry, must know how
+to conduct a security patrol.
+
+In just the offensive operations, infantry units provide security
+patrols to screen their flanks, areas, and routes. Whereas, in
+defensive operations, security patrols are used to prevent the enemy
+from infiltrating an area, detect and destroy infiltrators, and
+prevent surprise attacks. In rear areas, particularly when there is
+guerrilla or terrorist threat, the requirement to conduct security
+patrols increases for all Marine air-ground task force (MAGTF) units
+ashore, particularly aviation and combat service support units.
+
+
+Task Organization and Equipment
+
+Generally, a Marine rifle squad or similar sized organization is
+considered ideal for security patrols. Communications are important
+to higher headquarters so that they receive information from the
+patrol; and communications are important to the patrol to request
+fire support, etc. The radio the patrol carries must have the range
+necessary for higher headquarters to be able to receive transmissions
+from anywhere along the patrol route, and the patrol must have a
+secondary means of reporting (i.e., flare signals upon contact).
+
+
+Patrol Procedures
+
+All of the procedures presented in previous sections are to be used
+in security patrols.
+
+
+Patrol Planning
+
+Security patrol planning includes--
+
+   • Rehearsing prior to departing friendly lines.
+
+   • Maintaining communications.
+
+   • Support by organic weapons.
+
+   • Reinforced if necessary.
+
+   • Using varied routes and never establishing a routine pattern.
+
+   • Staying within proximity of friendly units.
+
+
+Patrol Techniques
+
+Within rear areas, an irregular pattern of patrol is established
+and changed daily. Outside of friendly lines it would be prudent to
+establish a definite preplanned route for the patrol, of which all
+adjacent units know the route. The parent unit commander establishes
+frequent checkpoints for control. If checkpoints are designated, the
+patrol leader treats them as individual objectives to be searched and
+cleared.
+
+The patrol has a definite plan as to what to do if contact with enemy
+is made, how to break contact, how to defend itself, and how to call
+for supporting fires. It is imperative that patrol members know what
+to do if they become split or separated; i.e., location of rally
+points and how to be recovered.
+
+
+13007. URBAN PATROLS
+
+
+General
+
+As national strategy continues to focus on regional vice global
+conflicts, the Marine Corps will continue to conduct urban operations
+in various operational environments. Cities and towns are often the
+center of economic and political power and are therefore extremely
+vulnerable to urban insurgent activities and violence. The lessons
+learned from recent operations in Somalia, as well as experiences
+gained by British forces in Northern Ireland, provide the foundations
+of urban patrolling.
+
+
+_Enemy Forces_
+
+Enemy forces in urbanized areas range from organized military forces
+to low intensity engagements with insurgents, such as terrorists
+or local gangs. For Marine Corps doctrine and tactics, techniques,
+and procedures (TTP) for dealing with the higher intensity threat
+in urbanized areas, refer to MCWP 3-35.3, _Military Operations on
+Urbanized Terrain_.
+
+
+_Common Threat Tactics_
+
+Cities provide cover and concealment for both friendly forces and
+enemy forces. However, enemy forces generally find active support
+only in certain areas of the town or city. The urban-based insurgent
+or terrorist usually lives in a friendly community or in one where
+the people are too frightened to withhold support or inform anyone
+about the situation. The insurgent or terrorist normally maintains
+close contact with leaders and others friendly to the cause. The
+enemy will often have efficient communication and intelligence
+systems, sometimes involving women and children to provide cover for
+its activities.
+
+The urban insurgent normally cannot, like his rural counterpart,
+establish bases and recruit large military units. He is generally an
+individual or a member of a relatively small group. He relies on the
+cover afforded by the city’s populace and terrorizing them to coerce
+loyalty or support.
+
+Urbanized areas tend to give the insurgent and/or terrorist many
+opportunities to initiate action and gain advantage. The normal
+presence of large numbers of people in cities provides the foe an
+opportunity to mass crowds quickly and manipulate demonstrations
+easily. The presence of women and children during mass demonstrations
+may restrict the courses of action available to friendly forces.
+Major incidents stemming from overreaction or excessive use of
+force by friendly forces may provide the insurgent with propaganda
+material. Publicity is easily gained in an urbanized area because
+major incidents can’t be completely concealed from the local
+population. Insurgent successes can be exploited to discredit the
+ability of host nation police, friendly forces, and the civil
+government, and gain recognition for the insurgents’ cause.
+
+The urban insurgent or terrorist can usually be expected to operate
+more boldly than his rural counterpart. This is reflected in the
+enemy’s tactics. A single sniper or bomber may be the norm in the
+urbanized area, whereas the rural threat is generally the more
+conventional ambush. In urbanized areas, explosive devices can be
+easily emplaced and used effectively against large groups or select
+individuals. Enemy forces may be expected to employ the following
+tactics in urbanized areas:
+
+   • Using local communications, such as radio and newspapers, for
+     propaganda purposes.
+
+   • Disrupting industry and public services through strikes and
+     sabotage.
+
+   • Generating widespread disturbances designed to stretch the
+     resources of the security force.
+
+   • Creating incidents or massing crowds in order to lure the patrol
+     or reaction force into a trap.
+
+   • Provoking security forces in the hope that they may react
+     improperly, therefore discrediting the security force by means
+     of propaganda.
+
+   • Sniping at roadblocks, outposts, sentries, and patrols.
+
+   • Attacking friendly bases with rockets and mortars.
+
+   • Planting explosive devices, either against specific targets or
+     indiscriminately, to cause confusion and destruction, and lower
+     public morale and confidence.
+
+   • Using ambush patrols.
+
+   • Firing on friendly helicopters.
+
+
+_Principles of Urban Patrolling_
+
+Patrolling in an urban environment often presents conditions
+considerably different and often more complex than those encountered
+in rural and less inhabited areas. While the principles of
+patrolling are still relevant in an urban situation, the nature of
+urban patrolling has led to the development of six specific urban
+patrolling principles. They are--
+
+1. =Depth.= The restrictive, canalizing nature of urbanized terrain
+usually limits a patrol’s ability to disperse laterally. To prevent
+the patrol from bunching up, patrols normally maintain dispersion
+along the length of a patrol formation.
+
+2. =Mutual Support.= The positioning of units in-depth within
+the patrol enables one unit to cover another unit’s movement and
+facilitates immediate action during various situations. Aircraft,
+vehicles, and snipers also provide good mutual support.
+
+3. =Deception and Pattern Avoidance.= Deception and pattern avoidance
+are normally a planning consideration of the headquarters directing
+the entire patrolling plan. By varying patrol routes, durations,
+and departure times, hostile actions commonly used against urban
+patrols--such as enemy ambushes, and roadblocks--are more difficult
+to plan and may be preempted.
+
+4. =Intra-patrol Communication.= Elements of an urban patrol must
+have the means to communicate with each other. Ideally, each
+element will possess a radio enabling it to remain in continuous
+communication that facilitates rapid response and reporting to higher
+headquarters, reaction force coordination, and coordination of
+actions with other patrols or fire support agencies.
+
+5. =Establishment of a Reaction Force.= The nature of urbanized
+terrain (its compartmentalization) makes urban patrols more
+vulnerable to a wider range of hostile actions. The requirement for
+immediate, coordinated reinforcement of a patrol is best satisfied
+by employment of an established reaction force. The reaction force
+requires superior mobility (relative to the enemy’s) and fire support
+to be effective for this task.
+
+6. =Three-Dimensional Threat.= Patrolling in an urban environment
+requires constant attention to its three-dimensional aspect; hostile
+actions can originate from rooftops, streets, subsurface levels or
+combinations of all levels at once.
+
+
+Classification of Urban Patrols
+
+
+_Mission_
+
+The vast majority of urban patrols are overt in nature, with their
+presence readily apparent to the local populace. Most urban patrols
+are combat vice reconnaissance patrols. The vast majority of urban
+patrols are security patrols. However, units may be assigned
+secondary tasks of reconnoitering specific or general areas along the
+patrol routes.
+
+Raids normally involve a swift penetration of an objective to secure
+information, confuse the enemy or destroy installations. Raids
+include a planned withdrawal upon completion of the assigned mission.
+
+
+_Movement_
+
+Means of movement are as follows:
+
+   • Dismounted: movement on foot.
+
+   • Vehicular: movement by motorized, mechanized or armored vehicle.
+
+   • Helicopterborne: movement by helicopter, however,
+     helicopterborne patrols will usually involve dismounted or
+     vehicular movement after patrol insertion.
+
+   • Combination: movement using a combination of methods.
+
+
+_Task-Organization_
+
+Units task-organize to meet the specific requirements of the mission
+and situation. The Marine rifle squad is ideally suited for urban
+patrolling and can easily integrate attached specialists required
+by specific missions. Specialists who may accompany urban patrols
+include--
+
+   • Interrogator-translator team (ITT) and counterintelligence team
+     (CIT) Marines.
+
+   • Explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) personnel.
+
+   • Members of host nation or allied military forces.
+
+   • Interpreters.
+
+   • Local community leaders.
+
+   • Local law enforcement officers.
+
+   • Public affairs personnel escorting media representatives.
+
+
+_Dismounted Patrol Organization_
+
+Patrols should maintain unit integrity (fire team and/or squad) in
+organizing elements for an urban patrol. Similar to reconnaissance
+patrols, the vulnerability of urban patrols necessitates that all
+elements must provide for their own security in addition to the
+combat aspect of the mission. Combined assault and security teams are
+an effective method to organize for all-around security.
+
+
+Urban Patrol Base Operations
+
+Urban patrols may operate from an established patrol base that may
+be located within the unit’s assigned area of operations or an area
+designated for a patrol. The patrol base should be located in a
+building used exclusively for this purpose. Patrol bases may also be
+located within a larger site that houses other agencies, such as a
+higher headquarters’ command echelon.
+
+If located within a larger site, the patrol base will be included in
+the overall facility security plan. If isolated, the patrol base must
+consider the following security factors:
+
+   • External security:
+    ◦ Barrier plan.
+    ◦ Sentry posts.
+    ◦ Local security patrols.
+
+   • Internal security:
+    ◦ Covered positions for all Marines.
+    ◦ Contingency plan for hostile actions against patrol base.
+
+
+The Reaction Force
+
+The high probability of an urban patrol becoming involved in a
+hostile or volatile incident requires the establishment of a
+dedicated reaction force for rapid reinforcement, support or
+extraction of the patrol. Ideally, the reaction force is--
+
+   • Large enough and task-organized in a manner that it can meet and
+     quickly defeat the expected threat. Reaction forces are normally
+     tiered with a lead element (normally one-third of the unit’s
+     size) and a main body force (the other remaining two-thirds
+     of the force). Reaction force response times routinely are
+     determined in advance by higher headquarters.
+
+   • Ready to respond immediately.
+
+   • Motorized or mechanized and supported by close air support and
+     other fire support.
+
+   • Familiar with the area of operations.
+
+   • Briefed on the patrol’s plans and monitors the status of patrols
+     in progress.
+
+   • Task-organized to be multimission capable.
+
+   • Able to communicate with the higher headquarters, fire support
+     assets, patrol base, and the patrol.
+
+   • Controlled by higher headquarters, once employed.
+
+
+Patrol Preparation
+
+
+_Planning_
+
+Higher headquarters will--
+
+   • Designate the area for patrol.
+
+   • Provide intelligence briefs and updates.
+
+   • Ensure liaison with allied forces and the civilian populace.
+
+   • Provide special equipment and personnel required for the mission
+     (scout snipers, public affairs officer, interpreters, etc.)
+
+   • Provide urban maps, photos, terrain models as required.
+
+   • Consider deception and pattern avoidance when issuing mission.
+
+   • Prescribe rules of engagement (ROE).
+
+
+_Intelligence Brief_
+
+An intelligence brief is conducted by the S-2 officer or
+representative prior to a patrol conducting its mission. The brief
+addresses the situation relevant to the specific patrol (e.g.,
+routes, areas, updated enemy situations).
+
+
+_Coordination_
+
+Higher headquarters will effect liaison with adjacent and allied
+forces, as well as civil authorities and other agencies, having
+a possible effect on the patrol. The patrolling unit generally
+follows the same procedures as those used during patrol planning and
+execution in a jungle or forest environment.
+
+
+_The Urban Patrol Order or Warning Order_
+
+The Urban Patrol or Warning Orders use the same format and
+considerations as noted in this publication for patrolling. They rely
+heavily on a detailed terrain model, photographs, and subterranean
+construction to ensure complete understanding of the plan.
+
+
+_Rehearsals_
+
+The limited size of the patrol base usually precludes the need for
+full-scale rehearsals. Immediate action drills, such as crossing
+danger areas, are rehearsed in as much detail as possible, despite
+the limited available space.
+
+
+_Inspections_
+
+Initial and final inspections are conducted in the same manner as
+other patrols. Attached personnel must be fully integrated into
+the patrol and familiar with the plan and unit standing operating
+procedures (SOPs).
+
+
+Conducting an Urban Patrol
+
+
+_Movement_
+
+Individual and unit movement considerations are generally the same
+as those for other patrols. However, urban environments require
+consideration of additional factors. Because of these factors, an
+urban patrol leader should--
+
+   • Ensure that each movement within a patrol takes place under the
+     observation or cover of another individual or element of the
+     patrol.
+
+   • Know where cover can be taken in the event of a hostile incident
+     or action.
+
+   • Be prepared for contact with civilians, especially children,
+     during the patrol and be aware that they may intentionally
+     attempt to distract patrol members.
+
+   • Expect the presence of vehicles (both moving and stationary)
+     along the patrol route.
+
+   • Expect members of the patrol to be approached by dogs and what
+     action to take if threatened.
+
+
+_Patrol Formations_
+
+=Squad-sized Patrols.= The need for immediate fire power outweighs
+the dangers of becoming canalized. In contrast to other types of
+patrols, the headquarters element of an urban patrol will normally
+locate at the lead of the patrol column. This allows the patrol
+leader greater flexibility through control of two combined assault
+and security (A&S) teams. The leaders of these elements tactically
+stagger their members on each side of the road (see fig. 13-1 on page
+13-12).
+
+A&S teams follow in trace of the headquarters element and maintain
+unit integrity on separate sides of the street. One unit will remain
+slightly to the rear to create a staggered interval between Marines
+on either side of the street. This allows A&S teams to take lateral
+routes in support of headquarters element without having to cross a
+street to do so.
+
+  [Illustration:
+    DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT -------->
+
+   Figure 13-1. Squad-sized Dismounted Urban Patrol Formation.]
+
+=Platoon-sized Patrols.= Squads will generally travel abreast of each
+other, moving along parallel routes. The interval between squad-sized
+units and/or teams is situation-dependent, but is usually between 100
+and 150 meters (roughly two city blocks; this often prevents visual
+contact between the units). The intent is to create less of a target
+to an aggressor, yet still allow the patrol to quickly react to an
+incident. Individuals within units or teams will move in a staggered
+column as in a squad-sized patrol. (See figure 13-2, which is located
+on page 13-13).
+
+  [Illustration:
+
+   Figure 13-2. Platoon-sized Dismounted Urban Patrol Formations.]
+
+
+_Night_
+
+Night patrols will generally be at least squad-sized and will
+generally use the same formation as that for day patrols. At night,
+it may be necessary to close distances between individuals or
+elements to maintain control. Consideration should be given to the
+use of night vision devices and thermal weapons sights.
+
+
+_Navigation, Control, and Security Measures_
+
+The patrol leader is ultimately responsible for the navigation. The
+headquarters element normally functions as the base unit during
+movement. The designated navigator is normally assigned from within
+the headquarters element. City maps are often inaccurate or outdated;
+however, when used with aerial photographs and other navigational
+aids, they can be effective for urban navigation.
+
+Checkpoints and phase lines should be related to major streets
+(alleys, buildings, bridges) for easy identification. Arrival at
+checkpoints and crossing of phase lines should be relayed to higher
+headquarters using established brevity or codewords. A detailed
+patrol overlay is issued to both the reaction force and higher
+headquarters to keep them advised of routes and control measures
+used. A terrain model should be maintained at higher headquarters to
+aid in supervision and control of the patrol.
+
+The use of camouflage should be limited to avoid frightening and
+confusing the local populace. The often overt nature of urban patrols
+may negate the need for camouflage. Patrols are sometimes deployed
+to show force presence and usually move on the urban street in plain
+view.
+
+During daylight, patrols will routinely vary their rate of movement
+ranging from short halts to brief periods of double-timing. The
+British term for this urban patrolling technique is _hard-targeting_,
+meaning it makes the patrol harder for an enemy to target. Altering
+the rate of movement is intended to frustrate the enemy’s ability to
+coordinate an attack or ambush against a targeted patrol.
+
+Patrols should use short security halts, with Marines taking up
+mutually supporting firing positions. Marines must always work in
+pairs, ensuring mutual support. The last Marine in the element will
+provide rear security, but stays in his buddy’s sight.
+
+
+_Individual Tasks_
+
+Individuals may be assigned collateral tasks performed throughout
+the patrol that may increase the patrol’s situational awareness.
+Individual tasks may include--
+
+   • Vehicle spotter: looks for suspicious or known insurgent
+     vehicles.
+
+   • Personnel spotter: observes and attempts to recognize previously
+     identified enemy in crowds.
+
+   • Talker: attempts to gain information from casual conversations
+     with the local populace. (Talkers are usually subordinate
+     leaders or Marines with foreign language skills.)
+
+   • Searcher: conducts physical searches of vehicles and personnel
+     while other patrol members provide cover and security.
+
+   • Marksman: engages point targets when the tactical situation does
+     not permit massed or high volume fire. Other patrol members
+     provide security to cover the marksman’s engagement.
+
+
+_Departure of Friendly Lines_
+
+Urban patrols must vary their departure times to prevent being
+ambushed while exiting the patrol base.
+
+Individual elements will usually depart exits at staggered times and
+at different movement rates, especially where sentries cannot provide
+cover. (This technique is used when the environment adjacent to the
+patrol base is dangerous.)
+
+Once an element has exited friendly lines, a short halt is conducted
+in a predetermined, covered initial rally point 50 to 100 meters from
+the base. This ensures all elements are in position before the patrol
+continues.
+
+Exit points, routes from the base, departure techniques, and
+locations of IRPs should be varied constantly to avoid setting a
+pattern. This pattern avoidance may also include using vehicles to
+insert patrols away from the urban patrol base and employing empty
+vehicles as part of a deception plan.
+
+
+_Danger Areas_
+
+Urban patrols may encounter hundreds of danger areas during a
+single patrol. The three-dimensional threat requires keen situation
+awareness by every patrol member. Many danger areas can be dealt with
+simply by avoidance, while others require an adjustment of patrol
+formation, movement rate, etc. In the urban environment, places to be
+treated as danger areas are points that pose a major threat to the
+patrol, such as local political and religious headquarters, weapons
+containment areas, roads and routes that canalize movement and direct
+fire, and any area with a history of repeated contact.
+
+Near and far side rally points are designated and briefed during the
+issuance of the patrol order. Squad-sized formations may use the A&S
+teams to provide flank security for the headquarters element and for
+each other. The headquarters element identifies the danger area and
+takes up a position on the near side of intersection. Individuals
+provide all-around security (see fig. 13-3 on page 13-14).
+
+Two Marines (one from each A&S team) are designated to move through
+the headquarters element and establish respective firing positions
+on the near side of the danger area covering the patrol’s near side
+flanks. They are followed by a second pair (again, one Marine from
+each A&S team) that moves across to the far side of the danger area
+and establishes respective firing positions covering the patrol’s far
+side flanks (see fig. 13-4 on page 13-14).
+
+     [Illustration: DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT -------->
+
+     Figure 13-3. Approaching Danger Area.]
+
+     [Illustration: DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT -------->
+
+     Figure 13-4. Securing Flanks.]
+
+Once near and far side flank security is established, the
+headquarters element moves across to the far side of danger area (see
+fig. 13-5 on page 13-15).
+
+The remaining A&S team members then cross the danger area and join
+the headquarters element on the far side (see fig. 13-6 on page
+13-15).
+
+     [Illustration: Figure 13-5. HQ Element Moves Through.]
+
+     [Illustration: DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT -------->
+
+     Figure 13-6. A&S Elements Move Through.]
+
+     [Illustration: DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT -------->
+
+     Figure 13-7. Patrol Resumes Movement Along Intended Route.]
+
+Once the trail A&S team members cross the danger area, they take
+up rear security and cover the movements of the near and far side
+flank security teams as they return to their positions in the patrol
+formation. The near side security team should collapse back first,
+followed by their far side counterparts. The patrol then resumes its
+advance away from the danger area (see fig. 13-7).
+
+
+Interaction with Local Populace
+
+Urban patrols must interact with the local populace. Patrols are at
+first a novelty to the civilians but can quickly become an unwelcome
+intrusion. The movement of the patrol must be fast enough to prevent
+the enemy from massing their fires upon it, but deliberate enough
+to ensure adequate security and mutual support. Patrol members must
+realize that they are usually the only Marines the local populace
+will encounter and that an inappropriate gesture, comment or act
+could lead to the deterioration of rapport between U.S. forces
+and the general population. Marines must remember that the vast
+majority of the individuals with whom they come in contact will be
+noncombatants attempting to survive in trying political, economic,
+and social situations.
+
+Hostile incidents often seem to occur spontaneously, but there are
+usually indications that can alert Marines to imminent danger. The
+most obvious are the sudden alteration of normal routines, patterns,
+and attitudes of the local populace or other unusual activity. Some
+examples include--
+
+   • Observers on rooftops, in windows, etc., who are obviously
+     tracking the patrol.
+
+   • The unusual absence of pedestrian traffic and people on porches.
+
+   • Stores, markets or street vendors closed suddenly or without
+     explanation.
+
+   • Changes in civilian attitude toward patrol members.
+
+   • Unknown individuals or vehicles in the patrol area.
+
+   • Unfamiliar vehicles parked in the patrol area (possible car
+     bomb).
+
+   • Roadblocks.
+
+   • Children throwing rocks at patrols to possibly draw the patrol’s
+     attention away from a more serious danger, such as a deliberate
+     ambush.
+
+   • Vehicles riding unusually low due to overloading (possibly
+     ferrying people, weapons, explosives).
+
+   • Agitators trying to provoke an incident with patrol members.
+
+   • Absence of the usual stray dogs (dogs are adept at sensing
+     danger and avoiding it).
+
+   • Anti-American graffiti suddenly appearing in the patrol area.
+
+   • Pictures of enemy leaders and martyrs posted in the patrol area.
+
+   • Civilian workers failing to appear at U.S. or friendly bases.
+
+   • Normal deliveries and pick-ups conducted late or early without
+     reason.
+
+   • Sudden change of civilian sentiment in newspaper articles, radio
+     broadcasts or other media.
+
+   • Women and children leaving to live elsewhere.
+
+
+Immediate Actions Upon Enemy Contact
+
+
+_Reaction to Sniping_
+
+Snipings are often executed from a single firing point, but
+coordinated snipings delivered from multiple points are not uncommon.
+
+Patrol element or team leaders should constantly try to identify
+likely firing points and anticipate their own reactions to a possible
+shooting. Normally, snipers in an urban environment have a detailed
+withdrawal plan. Once a patrol comes into contact with a sniper, the
+patrol leader must immediately assess the situation and maneuver
+his patrol accordingly. The patrol’s mission, location, size, ROE,
+and location of the threat often determine whether the patrol will
+attempt to neutralize the targeted sniper. If the patrol leader
+decides to kill or capture the sniper, he uses planned and rehearsed
+immediate actions to maneuver and counter the sniper’s assault. The
+goal is to kill the sniper or cut off his escape and capture him.
+There are three immediate reactions to neutralizing a sniper: initial
+contact, immediate follow-up, and subsequent follow-up.
+
+=Initial Contact.= The initial contact is made when the sniper fires
+the first shot. The patrol must react immediately and positively
+to get behind the firing position in order to kill or capture the
+gunman. The period of contact ends when the gunman is killed or
+captured, or the patrol element or team leader on the scene ends it.
+The following technique is the same for both squad- and platoon-sized
+patrols:
+
+   • The element or team in contact attempts to identify the firing
+     position and maneuvers designated marksman into position to
+     return well-aimed and controlled fire. Other members of the
+     patrol take up positions to cover the marksman’s engagement.
+
+   • The patrol element or team leader in contact sends initial
+     contact report to the patrol leader, who notifies higher
+     headquarters.
+
+   • The element or team leader in contact determines appropriate
+     cut-off positions and relays them to flanking elements or teams.
+
+   • The patrol element or team leader in contact continues to
+     observe the firing point, but does not enter it due to the
+     possibility of booby traps. Flank elements or teams set up along
+     likely escape routes.
+
+   • The incident ends when either the sniper ceases fire or is
+     neutralized.
+
+=Immediate Follow-Up.= Regardless of the fate of the gunman,
+isolation of the firing point is necessary to prevent reinforcement
+and preserve forensic evidence (scent, spent casings, etc.). If not
+under fire, members of the patrol element or team cordon off the area
+surrounding the firing point. Flanking elements or teams maintain
+their positions and prevent civilians from entering the area. The
+patrol leader moves to link-up with the element or team in contact
+(if not his own), and makes an estimate of the situation. The patrol
+leader sends a SPOTREP to higher headquarters.
+
+=Subsequent Follow-Up.= The aim of the subsequent follow-up is to use
+follow-on forces to clear the building of remaining resistance or to
+obtain evidence that can be used to capture the gunman. The patrol
+leader establishes a position where he can brief arriving units
+(reaction force commander, S-2 representative, EOD personnel, etc.).
+Once the arriving units have been briefed, recommendations are made
+to higher headquarters via radio. No one is allowed into the cordon
+without the patrol leader’s approval.
+
+
+_Reaction to Becoming Decisively Engaged_
+
+If a patrol becomes decisively engaged from numerous firing
+positions, the following immediate action should be taken:
+
+   • All patrol members move to available cover and return accurate
+     fire on identified firing points.
+
+   • The patrol leader assesses the situation and makes a decision to
+     either request the reaction force or break contact.
+
+   • If the reaction force is requested, the patrol will maintain its
+     position until the reaction force arrives. The patrol should
+     use fire and maneuver to gain better tactical positioning and
+     support the arrival of the reaction force. When the reaction
+     force arrives, its commander may decide to either clear occupied
+     buildings or cover the patrol during its extract.
+
+
+_Reaction to Bomb Threat or Discovery_
+
+The use of command-detonated explosive devices is a common ambush
+tactic employed by a terrorist or insurgent in an urban environment.
+The appropriate response to a reported threat or an actual discovery
+generally involves four steps (known as the four Cs)--
+
+1. The patrol leader =CONFIRMS= the presence of the suspicious item.
+
+2. Without touching or moving anything suspicious, patrol elements
+or teams =CLEAR= the immediate danger area to a minimum of 100
+meters. The area is cleared from the suspected device outward, inform
+civilians as to the reason for evacuation.
+
+3. A&S teams establish a =CORDON= to secure the cleared area. Avenues
+of approach are cordoned off to keep people out and to protect EOD or
+engineer personnel clearing the device. The assistant patrol leader
+acts as the cordon commander and informs the patrol leader when the
+cordon is secure. An effective cordon technique is to tape off the
+area with engineer tape, creating both a physical and psychological
+boundary.
+
+4. =CONTROL= of the area is maintained throughout the bomb clearing
+operation by the patrol leader. The patrol leader sends a report to
+a superior concerning details of the device (if known) and the area
+affected. The patrol leader coordinates with arriving personnel (EOD,
+engineers, etc.). The patrol leader maintains communication with
+the assistant patrol leader and keeps the Marines informed of the
+progress of the clearing operation.
+
+
+_Reaction to a Bomb Detonation_
+
+Bombs may be used by an insurgent as a means of initiating an
+ambush on mounted or dismounted patrols, in which case the actions
+for decisive engagement apply. Immediate action in response to an
+isolated explosion is similar to that used in reaction to a sniping
+and breaks down into the same three phases:
+
+=Initial Contact.= The patrol leader attempts to identify the likely
+initiation point and sends an initial contact report to higher
+headquarters. If the bomb was command-detonated, the patrol leader
+sends his A&S teams deep to cut off the bombers’ escape routes. Any
+casualties are moved a minimum of 100 meters from explosion and out
+of the line of sight to it.
+
+=Immediate Follow-Up.= The A&S teams may need to maneuver to
+positions behind the likely initiation point to cut off escape. Once
+in position, personnel checks are conducted and any suspects are
+detained. The patrol leader coordinates requests for required support
+(MEDEVAC, reaction force, etc.).
+
+=Subsequent Follow-Up.= Due to the possibility of secondary
+detonations, the four Cs (confirm, clear, cordon, and control) can be
+conducted as in reaction to a bomb discovery or bomb threat.
+
+
+_Civil Disturbances_
+
+Urban patrols must prepare to react to spontaneous aggression by
+the local populace. In many cases, civil disturbances are organized
+by the enemy to draw dismounted patrols into a targeted area, or
+to distract them from enemy activity occurring elsewhere. Civil
+disturbances are generally divided into two categories: minor
+aggressive actions, and full-scale rioting.
+
+_Minor aggressive actions_ are activities characterized by
+rock-throwing or use of devices such as Molotov cocktails and may
+either be directed at the patrol or take place between different
+ethnic factions of the population. Minor aggressive actions are
+normally spontaneous in nature and may have minimal or limited
+objectives for the insurgents.
+
+_Full-scale rioting_ events are usually in response to another major
+event or incident that may enflame the populace. Full-scale riots are
+well-planned and orchestrated, with clear objectives or targets in
+mind. At times, patrols will need to attempt to maintain control of
+a civil disturbance situation; however, dismounted and mobile small
+unit patrols should generally avoid potential flashpoints. Procedures
+to handle civil disturbances are as follows:
+
+   • The patrol leader reports the incident to headquarters and
+     attempts to diffuse the crowd by talking to crowd leaders.
+
+   • If the patrol leader determines the size of the disturbance is
+     too large for the force to handle, the patrol should move away
+     from the disturbance to a safer, more remote covered area and
+     occupy positions to observe and report the situation to higher
+     headquarters. To prevent the patrol from being pursued by the
+     crowd, the patrol should move quickly and change direction,
+     often at road junctions, to gain distance from it.
+
+Patrol members should maintain dispersion to create a more difficult
+target. They should face the crowd at all times to see and avoid any
+projectiles thrown. Individual self-discipline must be maintained
+throughout the disturbance. Marines charging into the crowd or
+throwing objects back at the crowd will only worsen the situation.
+If pursued or trapped, the patrol leader may consider using riot
+control agents (combat support, pepper gas, etc.) to disperse or
+slow a crowd’s movement. The use of riot control agents must be
+authorized under the established ROE. If the patrol leader believes
+the situation is deteriorating beyond the patrol’s ability to control
+it, the patrol leader should request the reaction force, which may be
+better equipped to handle a large riot or mob.
+
+
+_Break Contact_
+
+As with patrols in rural areas, the patrol leader may be forced to
+break contact as a result of decisive engagement with the enemy. On
+the basis of his estimate of the situation, the patrol leader will
+normally break contact in one of the following ways:
+
+   • As a patrol, with elements providing cover for movement as
+     defined by clock direction and distance.
+
+   • As individual units/teams taking separate routes out of the
+     area, then linking up at a designated rally point a safe
+     distance away from the engagement.
+
+As in any contact with enemy forces, smoke may be employed to screen
+movement. Fire support agencies can be utilized to suppress targets;
+riot control agents can be employed to disrupt enemy movement.
+
+
+Reentry of Friendly Lines
+
+The reentry of a dismounted patrol into an urban patrol base is no
+different from that of a patrol conducted in a rural area. The same
+planning considerations and control methods apply.
+
+
+Missions Related to Urban Patrolling
+
+
+_House Calls_
+
+House calls missions are usually part of a coordinated effort to
+collect information within the area of operations. They involve
+obtaining up-to-date information on particular houses and occupants.
+When possible, local police should accompany patrols to do the actual
+talking to the occupants. If this is not possible, a technique that
+may be used by an urban patrol is--
+
+   • A&S elements move to provide cover around the target house.
+
+   • The headquarters element provides security just outside the
+     house.
+
+   • The patrol leader and one Marine for security enter the house,
+     if invited. If not invited, they talk to the occupants on
+     the doorstep. Patience and tact are required in requesting
+     information. An interpreter should be present when language
+     differences exist.
+
+
+_Vehicle Checkpoints_
+
+Urban terrorists or insurgents commonly use vehicles to transport
+personnel, weapons, explosives, and equipment. Civilian vehicles are
+often used for these purposes, creating the requirement to check as
+many vehicles as possible. While permanent, fortified checkpoints
+may be conducted along approaches into an urbanized area, dismounted
+patrols can be employed to establish hasty vehicle checkpoints to
+stop vehicles and to keep the enemy off-guard. The two common types
+of vehicle checkpoints patrols establish are hasty and deliberate.
+
+_Hasty checkpoints_ are deployed anywhere based upon the decision of
+the patrol leader. Patrols must not set patterns through the frequent
+use of the same sites.
+
+_Deliberate checkpoints_ are tasked by higher headquarters to achieve
+a specific purpose. Time and locations are carefully considered to
+avoid setting patterns.
+
+The general layout for a squad-sized, two-way dismounted checkpoint
+is depicted in figure 13-8 on page 13-20. The technique is as follows:
+
+   • The A&S teams are positioned stealthily in blocking positions on
+     both sides of the road.
+
+   • Both the patrol leader and assistant patrol leader act as
+     “talkers” for each direction of traffic (with local police or
+     interrogator or translator Marines acting as interpreters) while
+     a two-man team from the headquarters element physically searches
+     the vehicles.
+
+   • Obstacles or parked vehicles may be employed to create a
+     staggered roadblock in center of the checkpoint to slow
+     approaching vehicles.
+
+   • The checkpoint location should be sited so that approaching
+     vehicles cannot see it until they have passed a security team,
+     and they have no escape route then available.
+
+   • Signs announcing the checkpoint should be displayed a safe
+     distance from the search area for safety to both drivers and
+     Marines.
+
+   • Normally higher headquarters will issue criteria that determines
+     which vehicles are searched, but random checks of cars should
+     normally be made as well. While the vehicle is being searched
+     the driver should accompany the searcher around the vehicle.
+
+   [Illustration:
+     ~VEHICLE CHECKPOINT EQUIPMENT~
+        STOP SIGNS
+        BARRIERS
+        RADIOS AND WIRE PHONES
+        CONCERTINA WIRE
+        LIGHTS
+        SURVEILLANCE EQUIPMENT
+        FLEX CUFFS
+        MEGAPHONES
+        WHISTLES
+
+     DISMOUNTED SQUAD-SIZE HASTY URBAN CHECKPOINT
+
+   Figure 13-8. Dismounted Squad-sized Hasty Urban Vehicle Checkpoint.]
+
+   • Vehicle occupants should be made to exit the vehicle and then
+     searched. Whenever possible, women should be searched by female
+     police or female Marines.
+
+   • All patrol members should conduct themselves with courtesy
+     and politeness. If nothing is found, an apology for the
+     inconvenience is recommended.
+
+   • A hasty vehicle checkpoint should not be conducted any longer
+     than 30 minutes for security reasons.
+
+   • The ROE should dictate whether or not action should be taken
+     against vehicles that fail to stop at the checkpoint. Failure of
+     a vehicle to stop does not automatically give authorization to
+     fire.
+
+
+_Observation Posts_
+
+Urban observation posts are established to provide extended security,
+not only for patrol bases but also for patrols operating within the
+observation post’s sector of observation. Observation posts can be
+established in conjunction with sniper operations and for providing
+overwatch for patrols operating within their sector of observation.
+Observation posts are normally positioned on dominating terrain or in
+buildings outside the patrol base itself.
+
+Insertion to the observation posts and conduct of observation may
+be either overt or clandestine in nature. Overt observation posts
+usually will be hardened positions to increase security. A patrol
+provides cover while the observation post is being inserted. A
+clandestine observation post relies on stealth of insertion and
+occupation for protection. It is normally positioned in abandoned
+buildings to cover sectors of observation that overt observation
+posts cannot. Because of their nature, clandestine observation posts
+are difficult to successfully establish and should not be manned
+for an extended period of time. Orders establishing observation
+posts (and patrols) must address the method of extraction as well as
+actions upon compromise/attack.
+
+
+_Cordon and Search_
+
+The cordon and search mission involves isolating a predesignated area
+by cordoning it off and systematically searching for enemy personnel,
+weapons, supplies, explosives or communications equipment. While
+large-scale cordon and search operations are planned and rehearsed
+in advance and normally entail extensive coordination with local law
+enforcement agencies, a squad-sized urban patrol may often conduct a
+cordon and search of a point target--searching one house or building
+identified by intelligence as a possible weapons cache.
+
+The basic principle of a search of a populated area is to conduct
+it with limited inconvenience to the population. The populace may
+be inconvenienced to the point where they will discourage urban
+guerillas or insurgents from remaining in the area, but not to the
+point that they will assist the enemy as a result of the search.
+
+Upon receiving intelligence that warrants the searching of a building
+or a specific tasking from higher headquarters, A&S elements of the
+patrol move to establish an inner cordon around the target building
+to seal it off, with the primary intent of preventing movement out of
+the targeted building.
+
+On order, the designated reaction force deploys to establish an outer
+cordon, oriented outward some distance from the inner cordon and
+covering routes leading into the area in order to prevent outside
+interference/reinforcement. The reaction force maintains a reserve
+to reinforce either cordon or react to unfolding events (civil
+disturbance in response to the operation).
+
+Once the cordons have been established, the patrol leader, with
+the assistance of local police or interpreters, informs the local
+populace that a building is about to be searched, that a house curfew
+is in effect (if permitted by higher headquarters), and that all
+occupants should remain indoors. Occupants of the target house are
+instructed to gather at a central location to stay out of the way of
+the search party.
+
+The headquarters element, having linked up with any required
+assistance (explosive ordnance disposal (EOD), ITT, etc.) now acts
+as the search party and accompanies local police. A female searcher
+should be included in the party, if necessary.
+
+Occupants are searched and screened first for possible enemy
+personnel. Apprehended persons are evacuated as soon as possible.
+
+The head of the household should accompany the search party
+throughout the operation to be able to counter incriminating evidence
+and possible accusations of theft and looting against Marines. If
+possible, a prominent member of the local community should act as a
+witness.
+
+Buildings are best searched from top to bottom. Ideally, the search
+is conducted with the assistance of combat engineers using mine
+detectors to locate hidden arms and ammunition.
+
+If the targeted building is empty or the occupant refuses entry,
+it may be necessary to forcefully enter the premises to conduct a
+search of the dwelling. If an unoccupied house containing property
+is searched, arrangements should be made with the local community to
+secure it until its occupants return. Unnecessary force and damage to
+property should be avoided during the search.
+
+
+Motorized Urban Patrols
+
+The advantages of motorized urban patrols is their ability to
+capitalize on the speed, mobility, and protection offered by various
+vehicles. They may be motorized, mechanized or armored vehicles or
+a combination. Generally, motorized urban patrols possess greater
+combat power than dismounted patrols and can cover larger areas
+faster than dismounted patrols.
+
+The disadvantages of motorized urban patrols is that they are
+restricted to roads and are vulnerable to ambush by the enemy. They
+are also restricted in their ability to interact with the local
+populace.
+
+Motorized patrols are generally organized in the same manner as
+dismounted patrols (see fig. 13-9). Unit integrity is maintained when
+assigning personnel to specific vehicles.
+
+The urban patrolling principles apply to motorized patrols in much
+the same manner as dismounted patrols. Mutual support and depth
+are achieved by maintaining constant observation between vehicles
+and coordinating support with any dismounted patrols in the area.
+All-around security is achieved through the use of constant
+observation as well as the vehicle’s mobility and firepower. Positive
+communications between units or teams are maintained through vehicle
+radios. Patrol routes and speeds are varied to promote deception or
+pattern avoidance.
+
+  DRIVER                 DRIVER                 DRIVER
+  TEAM LDR/VEHICLE CDR   PATROL LDR             TEAM LDR/VEHICLE CDR
+  GUNNER                 TEAM LDR/VEHICLE CDR   GUNNER
+  A-GUNNER               GUNNER                 A-GUNNER
+                         A-GUNNER
+
+  A & S TEAM A           HQ UNIT                A & S TEAM B
+  [Illustration]         [Illustration]        [Illustration]
+
+  Figure 13-9. Organization of a Squad-sized Motorized Patrol.
+
+The canalizing nature of streets and alleys force vehicular
+patrols to use a traveling overwatch movement technique to reduce
+vulnerability to ambushes. All vehicles travel at a moderate rate of
+speed with the lead vehicle stopping only to investigate potential
+danger areas. If vehicles must stop in danger areas, designated crew
+members will dismount to provide security. The gunner will remain at
+the ready and in the turret while the driver remains in the driver’s
+seat with the vehicle running.
+
+Vehicles should move at a high rate of speed only when responding to
+an incident. At all other times, vehicle speed should be between 15
+to 20 mph to allow for quick reaction and good observation. Distances
+between vehicles should be approximately 50 meters (one half to
+one city block) or such that visual contact and mutual support are
+ensured. Particular care is taken at major road junctions and other
+danger areas to ensure individual vehicles do not become isolated.
+
+Vehicles with doors removed generally enhance observation and overall
+security, yet expose Marines to thrown objects, theft and concealment.
+
+
+
+
+                 CHAPTER 14. INFORMATION AND REPORTS
+
+
+     It is necessary that patrol leaders and all patrol members
+     be trained in observing and reporting their observations
+     accurately. The leader of a patrol should have all members
+     of the patrol immediately signal or report any information
+     obtained. These reports should not be restricted to
+     information about the enemy, but should also include
+     information about the terrain, such as newly discovered
+     roads, trails, swamps, and streams. The leader includes
+     all information in the report to the officer dispatching
+     the patrol. (Refer to MCRP 2-15.3, _Reconnaissance Reports
+     Guide_, for detailed report formats.)
+
+
+14001. REPORTING
+
+The officer dispatching the patrol instructs the patrol leader on
+whether and when messages are to be sent back during the patrol and
+what communication means to use. Messages may be oral or written.
+They must be accurate, clear, and complete. Every message should
+answer the question what, where, and when. For a detailed discussion
+on reporting, see paragraph 6002.
+
+
+Verbal Messages
+
+A patrol leader sending a verbal message should make it simple,
+brief, and avoid using numbers and names. The messenger should
+accurately repeat the message back to the patrol leader before
+leaving.
+
+
+Written Messages
+
+In preparing written messages, the patrol leader must distinguish
+between fact and opinion. Information about the enemy should include:
+strength; armament and equipment; actions; location and direction
+of movement; unit destination, if known; time enemy was observed;
+and the patrol’s location when the observation was made. Use of an
+overlay or sketch may often simplify the message.
+
+
+Messengers
+
+A messenger team is given exact instructions as to where to deliver
+the message and the route to take. Any information obtained along
+the route should be reported at the time the message is delivered.
+Messengers must be given all practical assistance. If in danger of
+capture, the messenger immediately destroys the message.
+
+
+Radio and Signals
+
+If the patrol is provided with a radio, a definite radio schedule
+for checking in must be arranged before departure of the patrol. The
+patrol leader takes every precaution to ensure that codes and copies
+of messages are not captured by the enemy. If a close reconnaissance
+of enemy lines is required, the radio should be left in a concealed
+location at a safe distance from the enemy. Once a report is sent
+by radio, the patrol should immediately leave the area to avoid the
+possibility of detection by enemy locating devices. Pyrotechnics
+(flares, colored smoke, grenades) and air-ground panels may also be
+used by patrols for reporting information by a prearranged signal.
+
+
+SALUTE Report
+
+Information must be reported as quickly, accurately, and as
+completely as possible. An established method to remember how and
+what to report about the enemy is to use the acronym SALUTE:
+
+       =S=ize
+       =A=ctivity
+       =L=ocation
+       =U=nit
+       =T=ime
+       =E=quipment
+
+An example of such a report is: “Seven enemy soldiers, unit unknown,
+traveling SW, crossed road junction on BLACK RIDGE at 211300 August
+carrying one machine gun and one rocket launcher.”
+
+
+14002. CAPTURED ITEMS
+
+Every patrol should make a practice of searching enemy casualties,
+prisoners, and installations first for booby traps, then for
+equipment, papers, maps, messages, orders, diaries, and codes.
+Search techniques should be practiced often in order to reduce the
+time exposed to potentially dangerous situations. Items found are
+collected by the patrol leader and turned in with the patrol report.
+The items found are marked as to time and place of capture. When
+possible, captured items should be linked to a specific prisoner who
+possessed the items or to the place where the items were found. When
+this is done, the enemy prisoner of war tag and item tag are marked
+accordingly. The patrol leader must impress upon the members of the
+patrol the importance of turning in all documents and equipment.
+Furthermore, the patrol leader must ensure all information gathered
+by the patrol is quickly disseminated.
+
+
+14003. PRISONERS
+
+A patrol normally does not capture prisoners unless required by the
+mission. If prisoners are taken, the “5S and T” rule applies. This
+memory aid stands for: search, segregate, silence, speed, safeguard,
+and tag.
+
+=Search.= Prisoners are body-searched thoroughly for weapons and
+documents as soon as they have been captured. This search must
+include the helmet, body armor, and gas mask. These items are left
+with the prisoner for protection until the patrol is completed.
+Weapons, equipment, and documents are tagged and immediately sent to
+the patrol leader.
+
+=Segregate.= Prisoners are segregated into isolated groups: officers,
+noncommissioned officers (NCOs), privates, deserters, and civilians.
+By segregating prisoners, it makes it more difficult for leaders to
+organize escapes and issue orders to subordinates.
+
+=Silence.= Silence is essential. Do not allow prisoners to talk to
+each other.
+
+=Speed.= Speed is required in getting prisoners to the commander who
+dispatched the patrol. Timely information secured from prisoners is
+essential.
+
+=Safeguard.= Prisoners are safeguarded as they are moved. They are
+restrained, but not abused. If the patrol will soon reach friendly
+positions, prisoners are not given cigarettes, food or water until
+they have been questioned by interrogators. If the patrol will not
+return to a friendly position for a lengthy time, the prisoners are
+given food, water and medical aid.
+
+=Tag.= Equipment and personal effects recovered from prisoners are
+tagged so that they may later be matched back to specific individuals.
+
+
+14004. PATROL REPORT
+
+Every patrol leader makes a report when the patrol returns. Unless
+otherwise directed, the report is made to the person ordering the
+patrol. If the situation permits, the report is written and supported
+by overlays and/or sketches. The patrol leader’s report should be a
+complete account of everything of military importance observed or
+encountered by the patrol while on the assigned mission. It should
+include the following information:
+
+   • Size and composition of patrol.
+
+   • Tasks and purpose (mission).
+
+   • Time of departure.
+
+   • Time of return.
+
+   • Routes, out and back (show by sketch, azimuth, trace on map).
+
+   • Terrain (general description to include any man-made or natural
+     obstacles and critical terrain features which, if occupied by
+     either enemy or friendly forces, would allow them to control the
+     surrounding area).
+
+   • Enemy (size, activity, location, unit, time, equipment).
+
+   • Any map corrections (show on map).
+
+   • Miscellaneous information not covered elsewhere in report.
+
+   • Results of enemy encounters.
+
+   • Condition of patrol, including disposition of any dead or
+     wounded.
+
+   • Conclusion and recommendations.
+
+
+14005. PATROL CRITIQUE
+
+After the patrol has rested and eaten, the patrol leader should hold
+a critique. Constructive criticism is made. It is an excellent time
+to prepare for future patrols by going over lessons learned as a
+result of the patrol.
+
+
+
+
+                   APPENDIX A. PATROL WARNING ORDER
+
+     The warning order is issued as soon as practical with all
+     available information included to assist patrol members in
+     preparation.
+
+
+1. ~Situation.~ Friendly and enemy situation information
+necessary for initial preparation.
+
+2. ~Mission.~ Statement of what the patrol is to accomplish,
+and the purpose for accomplishing it. When, how, and where will be
+discussed in the patrol order.
+
+3. ~Execution~
+
+  a. ~Task Organization.~ General patrol organization and
+     assignment of responsibilities if known; otherwise, promulgate
+     in the patrol order.
+
+  b. ~Tasks.~ Alert subordinate leaders to patrol tasks (e.g.,
+     stream crossing, helicopter rappelling, demolitions) requiring
+     preparation prior to departure.
+
+  c. ~Coordinating Instructions~
+
+     (1) Time schedule and location for individual preparation,
+     rest, briefings, inspection, rehearsal, and departure.
+
+     (2) Time, place, uniform, and equipment for receiving the
+     patrol order.
+
+     (3) Tasks for subordinate leaders to direct and supervise
+     the initial preparation which may include drawing
+     ammunition, rations, and special equipment; conducting
+     immediate action drills or other necessary individual or
+     unit training; meeting and briefing attachment personnel;
+     reconnoitering the area for passage of lines; and
+     coordinating with the necessary unit leaders.
+
+     (4) Preliminary guidance to specialists and key individuals
+     regarding their roles and organization within the patrol.
+
+  4. ~Administration and Logistics~
+
+     a. Individual uniform, equipment, weapons, and prescribed
+     load of rations, water, and ammunition.
+
+     b. Crew-served weapons (if required) and guidance regarding
+     distribution of weapons and ammunition during movement.
+
+     c. Special equipment requirements (wire cutters,
+     demolitions, radios, flashlights, infrared equipment,
+     mines, binoculars) and their distribution during movement.
+
+     d. Restricted or prohibited items.
+
+  5. ~Command and Signal~
+
+     a. Designation of assistant patrol leader and his role in
+     preparation.
+
+     b. Designation of navigators and radio operators (if
+     required).
+
+     c. Brief outline of patrol leader’s schedule for
+     preparation, and where he can be reached.
+
+
+
+
+
+                       APPENDIX B. PATROL ORDER
+
+
+     A patrol order follows a warning order. Any of the
+     following subjects that have been addressed in the
+     warning order may be omitted with the exception of the
+     mission statement. A patrol order is more detailed than a
+     5-paragraph squad order in that a great deal of attention
+     is given to individual duties.
+
+     The patrol order also provides orientation information,
+     both enemy and friendly, that impacts the patrol and enemy
+     forces. This information can include, but is not limited
+     to, weather, terrain, visibility, NBC considerations, local
+     population situation, terrain model and/or map orientation,
+     and behavior.
+
+
+  1. ~Situation~
+    a. ~Enemy Forces~
+      (1) Composition, disposition, and strength are based on size,
+          activity, location, unit, time, and equipment (SALUTE).
+      (2) Capabilities and limitations to defend, reinforce, attack,
+          withdraw, and delay (DRAW-D).
+      (3) Enemy’s most probable course of action.
+    b. ~Friendly Forces~
+      (1) Mission of next higher unit (task and commander’s intent).
+      (2) Adjacent unit missions (task and intent). Also identify
+          left, front, right, and rear.
+    c. ~Attachments and Detachments.~ (date and time effective).
+
+  2. ~Mission.~ The mission is the task to be accomplished,
+        and its purpose (who, what, where, when, and why). For
+        patrols, specify if the mission or time has priority.
+
+  3. ~Execution~
+    a. ~Commander’s Intent and Concept of Operations~
+      (1) Commander’s intent.
+      (2) The concept of operations tells the where, how, and who and
+        lays out the patrol leader’s general scheme of maneuver and
+        fire support plan. It outlines the following:
+        (a) Task organization of the patrol.
+        (b) Movement to the objective area, to include navigation
+            method.
+        (c) Actions in the objective area.
+        (d) The return movement, to include navigation method.
+        (e) Use of supporting forces (including illumination, if
+            required).
+    b. ~Subordinate Element Missions.~ Subordinate element
+        missions (task and purpose) are assigned to elements, teams,
+        and individuals, as required.
+    c. ~Coordinating Instructions.~ This paragraph contains
+        instructions common to two or more elements, coordinating
+        details, and control measures applicable to the patrol as a
+        whole. At a minimum, it includes--
+      (1) Time of assembly in the assembly area.
+      (2) Time of inspections and rehearsals (if not already
+          conducted).
+      (3) Time of departure and estimated time of return.
+      (4) Location of departure and reentry of friendly lines and the
+          actions associated with departure and reentry.
+      (5) Details on the primary and alternate routes to and from the
+          objective area.
+      (6) Details on formations and order of movement.
+      (7) Rally points and actions at rally points.
+      (8) Final preparation position and actions at this position.
+      (9) Objective rally point and actions at this point.
+      (10) Actions at danger areas.
+      (11) Actions in the event of enemy contact.
+      (12) Details on actions in the objective area not covered
+           elsewhere.
+      (13) Estimated time of patrol debriefing upon return.
+
+  4. ~Administration and Logistics~
+    a. Changes/additions to uniform, equipment, and prescribed loads
+       from that given in the warning order.
+    b. Instructions for handling wounded and prisoners.
+
+  5. ~Command and Signal~
+    a. ~Command Relationships.~ Identify key leaders and chain
+       of command.
+    b. ~Signal.~ Challenge and password, arm and hand signals,
+       special signals, and radio frequencies and call signs.
+
+
+
+
+               APPENDIX C. PATROL EVALUATION CHECKLIST
+
+
+     This appendix provides a comprehensive checklist of
+     critical patrolling steps, techniques, and procedures to
+     aid unit leaders to critique patrol performance during
+     training. Unit leaders may use the list as they observe the
+     performance of a patrol to provide the patrol leader with a
+     detailed analysis of the performance.
+
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |                      Warning Order                         |Yes|No |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL ensure all patrol members were present before    |   |   |
+  | issuing the warning order?                                 |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL issue a brief statement on the enemy situation?  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL issue a brief statement on the friendly          |   |   |
+  | situation?                                                 |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL state the mission in a clear, positive manner?   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL list all members of the patrol including         |   |   |
+  | attachments?                                               |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the chain of command for the patrol covered fully?      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Were all members of the patrol assigned positions and duties|   |   |
+  | in particular squads and teams?                            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Were all the necessary individual duties assigned?          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL follow established principles in organizing the  |   |   |
+  | patrol into squads and teams?                              |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was each patrol member assigned a particular weapon to      |   |   |
+  | carry on patrol?                                           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL list all special equipment needed to accomplish  |   |   |
+  | the mission?                                               |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was required special equipment assigned to the proper       |   |   |
+  | element to carry?                                          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL select uniform and equipment common to all based |   |   |
+  | on METT-T?                                                 |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |            Coordination with Adjacent Units                        |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL coordinate with other patrols operating to the   |   |   |
+  | right and left?                                            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the route out and back coordinated?                     |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the time of departure and return coordinated?           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Were call signs and frequencies coordinated?                |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was a signal for the FPF coordinated so as not to approach  |   |   |
+  | friendly lines during this time?                           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |            Coordination With Front Line Units                      |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the coordinator pass the size of the patrol?            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the time of departure and return coordinated?           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the coordinator give a general area of operations for   |   |   |
+  | the patrol?                                                |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the coordinator ask for information on known or         |   |   |
+  | suspected enemy positions and/or obstacles?                |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the coordinator ask about information on the latest     |   |   |
+  | enemy activity?                                            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the coordinator ask for detailed information on friendly|   |   |
+  | fire support available and the unit’s barrier plan?        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the location of the IRP established and coordinated?    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the coordinator ask the forward unit to monitor their   |   |   |
+  | patrol frequency?                                          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the current challenge and password confirmed?           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the coordinator request that all information coordinated|   |   |
+  | be passed on to any relieving unit?                        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |                       Patrol Order                                 |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=General=                                                           |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL check to ensure all patrol members were present  |   |   |
+  | before issuing the patrol order?                           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL issue the patrol order in a forceful, confident  |   |   |
+  | manner?                                                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL make maximum use of available visual aids in     |   |   |
+  | issuing the patrol order (i.e., terrain model, sand table, |   |   |
+  | map board, chalkboard)?                                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL issue the patrol order in correct sequence?      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL issue the entire patrol order without allowing   |   |   |
+  | interruptions by patrol members?                           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL adequately answer all questions asked by patrol  |   |   |
+  | members?                                                   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did paragraph 1a (Enemy Situation) include=--              |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |A weather forecast for the period of operation?             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |A description of the terrain over which the patrol was to   |   |   |
+  | operate?                                                   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Identification or description of enemy units known to be in |   |   |
+  | the area of operations?                                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Known locations of enemy units?                             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Recent activity of enemy units?                             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Strength of enemy units in the operating area?              |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did paragraph 1b (Friendly Situation) include=--           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Mission of the next higher unit?                            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Locations, missions, and planned actions of units on right  |   |   |
+  | and left?                                                  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Fire support available to support the patrol (as per the    |   |   |
+  | coordination)?                                             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Missions and routes of other patrols operating in the       |   |   |
+  | immediate area?                                            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did paragraph 1c (Commander’s Intent) include=--           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |All views and ideas of what the commander wants to be       |   |   |
+  | accomplished?                                              |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |The final result desired by the commander?                  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did paragraph 1c (Attachments and Detachments) include=--  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |All attachments to patrol and effective time of attachment? |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |All detachments from patrol and effective time of           |   |   |
+  | detachment?                                                |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did paragraph 2 (Mission) include, at a minimum=--         |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Who was to conduct the patrol?                              |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |What the patrol was tasked to do (i.e., conduct a point     |   |   |
+  | recon patrol)?                                             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Where the action was to take place?                         |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Why the action was to take place (i.e., the purpose)?       |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did paragraph 3a (Commander’s Intent and Concept of        |   |   |
+  | Operations) include=--                                     |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |A complete concept of operations?                           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |A detailed description of the mission of elements?          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |A detailed description of the mission of teams?             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |A detailed description of the duties of specific individuals|   |   |
+  | (i.e., navigator,compass man, pace man, corpsman, APL)?    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Time of departure and time of return?                       |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Type of formations and order of movement to be used?        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Description of the route and alternate routes(s) to include |   |   |
+  | azimuths and distances between checkpoints as a minimum?   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Techniques to be used in the departure from friendly areas? |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Techniques to be used for the reentry into friendly areas?  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Location of the IRP and a tentative ORP, to include grid    |   |   |
+  | coordinates and recognizable terrain features?             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Method for designating and passing rally points?            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Actions to be taken at rally points if their use became     |   |   |
+  | necessary?                                                 |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Actions to be taken in the event of enemy contact?          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Actions to be taken at danger areas?                        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Complete, detailed description of actions to be taken at    |   |   |
+  | the objective?                                             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Times and locations for rehearsals and the order of         |   |   |
+  | priority for rehearsals?                                   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Times and locations for inspections and the methods of      |   |   |
+  | conduct (to include uniform and equipment to be worn       |   |   |
+  | and/or carried)?                                           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Where, when, and by whom the debriefing is to be conducted? |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did paragraph 4 (Administration and Logistics) include=--  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Rations to be carried or reference to the warning order if  |   |   |
+  | there is no change?                                        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Arms and ammunition to be carried or reference to the       |   |   |
+  | warning order if there  is no change?                      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Uniform and equipment to be worn and carried or reference   |   |   |
+  | to the warning order if there is no change?                |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Method for handling wounded or dead?                        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Method for handling prisoners?                              |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did paragraph 5a (Signal) include=--                       |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Complete description of all signals, code words,            |   |   |
+  | frequencies, and call signs to be used within the patrol?  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Were signals adequate?                                      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Radio call signs to be used?                                |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Primary and alternate frequencies to be used?               |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Call signs and frequencies to be used with other units in   |   |   |
+  | the area of operations (if applicable)?                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Required reports to be transmitted to higher headquarters,  |   |   |
+  | along with occasions for reporting?                        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Code words and brevity codes to be used between the patrol  |   |   |
+  | and higher headquarters?                                   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Current challenge and password to be used in friendly held  |   |   |
+  | areas?                                                     |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Current challenge and password to be used forward of FEBA?  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did paragraph 5b (Command) include=--                      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Chain of command or reference to the warning order if there |   |   |
+  |  is no change?                                             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Location of the PL during all stages of operation?          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Location of the APL during all stages of operation?         |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |                   Inspection Rehearsal                             |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=General=                                                   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL adequately use the allotted inspection time?     |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the inspection conducted in an orderly manner?          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=During the inspection, did the PL check the following=:    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Completeness and correctness of uniform?                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Completeness of all equipment necessary to accomplish the   |   |   |
+  | mission?                                                   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Operational condition of equipment?                         |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Did the PL question members to ensure they knew=--         |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |The mission of the patrol?                                  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |The concept of operations?                                  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Their individual duties and responsibilities?               |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Chain of command and succession?                            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Duties and responsibilities of key personnel?               |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL utilize the rehearsal area to conform as much as |   |   |
+  | possible to area of operations?                            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |=Were the following major actions rehearsed=:               |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Actions at the objective?                                   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Actions at danger areas?                                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Actions on enemy contacts?                                  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Departure and reentry of friendly lines?                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL critique each action after it had been rehearsed?|   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Were interpatrol communications and control measures checked|   |   |
+  | at rehearsal?                                              |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL maintain control of the patrol during the        |   |   |
+  | rehearsal?                                                 |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |                         Movement                                   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL use proper formations for movement?              |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL adequately control the point team?               |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL check the compass men?                           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the PL aware of his position at all times?              |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was light and noise discipline enforced?                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the rate of movement appropriate for the mission?       |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL make full use of pace?                           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL make full use of count?                          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was proper security maintained during movement?             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL select and pass proper rallying points?          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL ensure that all members knew location of rallying|   |   |
+  | points?                                                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL properly use arm and hand signals?               |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL recognize and halt the patrol a safe distance    |   |   |
+  | from a danger area?                                        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |If the PL conducted a map check, did he conduct it properly |   |   |
+  | (light discipline, security, etc.)                         |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did designated individuals reconnoiter the far side of a    |   |   |
+  | danger area properly?                                      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Were support teams emplaced properly?                       |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL use a proper formation in crossing the danger    |   |   |
+  | area?                                                      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Were reports made on enemy contact and at checkpoints?      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |                 Actions on Enemy Contact                           |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL halt patrol a safe distance from a tentative ORP?|   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL issue an adequate frag order before departing to |   |   |
+  | look for a tentative ORP?                                  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL take appropriate personnel to look for the ORP?  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL select a suitable ORP?                           |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL secure the site adequately?                      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the patrol occupy the ORP as stated in the patrol order |   |   |
+  | or subsequent frag order?                                  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the patrol occupy the ORP in an orderly manner?         |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL maintain control of the patrol during occupation |   |   |
+  | of the ORP?                                                |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL issue a satisfactory contingency plan to the APL |   |   |
+  | before departing on a leader’s recon?                      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL take appropriate personnel on a leader’s recon?  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL maintain or ensure that the patrol leader had    |   |   |
+  | communications with the patrol?                            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the patrol avoid being detected by the enemy during the |   |   |
+  | leader’s recon?                                            |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |If contact was made, did the PL take appropriate action?    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was security maintained during the leader’s recon?          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL ensure the objective was kept under surveillance?|   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Were appropriate orders given to surveillance teams?        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |If a leader recon proved a tentative ORP unsuitable, did    |   |   |
+  | the PL move the ORP?                                       |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was a satisfactory leader’s recon conducted?                |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the ORP move conducted in a satisfactory and orderly    |   |   |
+  | manner?                                                    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |On return to the ORP, did the PL issue appropriate frag     |   |   |
+  | order and allow enough time for dissemination?             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |                   Actions at Objective                             |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL issue a frag order for action at the objective?  |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was security emplaced prior to the teams departing from     |   |   |
+  | the ORP?                                                   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL employ the terrain at the objective to the best  |   |   |
+  | advantage?                                                 |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was stealth maintained while moving into the objective?     |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL exercise positive control of squads, teams, and  |   |   |
+  |  individuals at the objective?                             |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Were actions at the objective in accordance with the        |   |   |
+  | details outlined in the patrol order?                      |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the PL make use of supporting arms at the objective?    |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was the action at the objective successful?                 |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was withdrawal from the objective accomplished quickly and  |   |   |
+  | orderly?                                                   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did units withdraw according to the details reflected in    |   |   |
+  | the patrol order?                                          |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Was reorganization at the ORP completed in an expeditious   |   |   |
+  | and orderly manner?                                        |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+  |Did the patrol withdraw from the ORP quickly and quietly?   |   |   |
+  +------------------------------------------------------------+---+---+
+
+
+
+
+                    APPENDIX D. AMBUSH FORMATIONS
+
+
+Formations discussed here are identified by names which correspond to
+the general pattern formed on the ground by deployment of the assault
+element.
+
+
+Line Formation
+
+The assault element is deployed generally parallel to the route of
+movement of the enemy. This positions the assault element parallel
+to the long axis of the killing zone and subjects the target to
+heavy flanking fire. The size of the force which can be trapped in
+the killing zone is limited by the area the assault element can
+effectively cover. The enemy is trapped in the killing zone by
+natural obstacles, mines, demolitions, and direct fires. (See fig.
+D-1.)
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-1. Line Formation (Harassing or
+    Destruction Ambush).]
+
+A disadvantage of the line formation is the chance that lateral
+dispersion of the target may be too great for effective coverage. The
+line formation is appropriate in close terrain that restricts enemy
+maneuver, and in open terrain where one flank is protected by natural
+obstacles or can be protected by mines and demolitions. Similar
+obstacles can be placed between the attack force and the killing zone
+to provide protection from possible enemy counter attack. When an
+ambush is deployed in this manner, access lanes are left so that the
+enemy can be assaulted. (See fig. D-2.)
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-2. Line Formation (Access Lanes for
+    Assault of Target).]
+
+The main advantage of the line formation is its relative ease of
+control under all conditions of visibility.
+
+
+L Formation
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-3. “L” Formation (Destruction Ambush).]
+
+The “L” shaped formation is a variation of the line formation.
+This formation is very flexible because it can be established on a
+straight stretch of a trail or road (see fig. D-3) or at a sharp bend
+in a trail or a road (See fig. D-4 on page D-2). The long side of the
+assault element is parallel to the killing zone and delivers flanking
+fire. The short side of the attack force is at the end of, and at
+right angles to, the killing zone and delivers enfilading fire that
+interlocks with fire from the long side. When appropriate, fire from
+the short side can be shifted to parallel the long side if the enemy
+attempts to assault or escape in the opposite direction. In addition,
+the short side prevents escape and reinforcement. (See fig. D-5.)
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-4. “L” Formation (Bend of Trail or Stream).]
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-5. “L” Formation.]
+
+
+“Z” Formation
+
+The “Z” shaped formation is another variation of the line formation.
+
+The assault element is deployed as in the “L” formation, but with an
+additional side so that the formation resembles a “Z”. (See fig. D-6).
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-6. “Z” Formation.]
+
+The additional wing may serve any of the following purposes:
+
+   • To engage an enemy force attempting to relieve or
+       reinforce the enemy unit engaged in the kill zone.
+
+   • To seal the end of the killing zone.
+
+   • To restrict a flank.
+
+   • To prevent an envelopment.
+
+
+“T” Formation
+
+In the “T” shaped formation, the assault element is deployed across
+(perpendicular to) the enemy’s route of movement so that its position
+forms the crossing of a “T” at the top. (See fig. D-7.)
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-7. “T” Formation.]
+
+This formation can be used day or night to establish an ambush to
+interdict movement through open areas that are hard to seal off.
+
+A small force can use the “T” formation to harass, slow, and
+disorganize a larger force. When the lead elements of the enemy are
+engaged, they will normally attempt to maneuver right or left to
+close with the ambush. Mines and other obstacles placed to the flanks
+of the killing zones slow the enemy’s movements and permit the ambush
+force to deliver heavy fire and withdraw without becoming decisively
+engaged.
+
+The “T” formation can be used to interdict small groups attempting
+night movement across open areas. For example, the assault element
+is deployed along an avenue of approach with every second man facing
+the opposite direction. The attack of the enemy approaching from
+either direction requires only that every second man may shift to the
+opposite side of the formation. Each man fires only to his front and
+only when the enemy is at a very close range. Attack is by fire only
+and each man keeps the enemy under fire as long as it remains to his
+front.
+
+If the enemy attempts to escape in either direction along the killing
+zone, each Marine takes the enemy under fire as the enemy comes into
+the Marine’s sector of fire. The “T” formation is very effective at
+halting infiltration. But it has one chief disadvantage; there is a
+possibility that the ambush will engage a superior force at night
+while spread out. (See fig. D-8.)
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-8. “T” Formation (Target Approaching from
+    Either Direction).]
+
+
+The “V” Formation
+
+The “V” shaped formation is deployed along both sides of the enemy’s
+route of movement so that it forms a “V”; care is taken to ensure
+that neither group (within the “V”) fires into the other.
+
+This formation subjects the enemy to both enfilading and interlocking
+fire. The “V” formation is best suited for fairly open terrain but
+can also be used in close terrain. When established in close terrain,
+the legs of the “V” close in as the lead element of the enemy force
+approaches the apex of the “V”, and opens fire at a close range.
+
+Here, even more than in open terrain, all movement and fire must
+be carefully coordinated and controlled to ensure that the fire of
+one wing does not endanger the other wing. The wider separation of
+forces makes this formation difficult to control, and there are few
+sites that favor its use. Its main advantage is that it is difficult
+for the enemy to detect the ambush until it is well into the killing
+zone. (See figs. D-9 and D-10.)
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-9. “V” Formation (Open Terrain).]
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-10. “V” Formation (Close Terrain).]
+
+
+Triangle Formation
+
+The triangle is a variation of the “V” formation and can be varied in
+three ways:
+
+
+Closed Triangle Formation
+
+(See fig. D-11.) The assault element is deployed in three teams,
+positioned so that they form a triangle (or closed “V”). An automatic
+weapon is placed at each point of the triangle and positioned so that
+it can be shifted quickly to interlock with either of the others. Men
+are positioned so that their sectors of fire overlap. Mortars may be
+positioned inside the triangle.
+
+  [Illustration: Figure D-11. Closed Triangle Formation
+    (Night Ambush).]
+
+When deployed in this manner, the triangle ambush is used to
+interdict night movement through open areas. When enemy approach is
+likely to be from any direction, this formation provides all-around
+security, and security forces are deployed only when they can be
+positioned so that if detected by an approaching enemy, they will
+not compromise the ambush. Attack is by fire only, and the enemy is
+allowed to approach within close range before fire is initiated.
+
+The advantages of the closed triangle formation are ease of control,
+all-around security, and the enemy can be brought under the fire of
+at least two automatic weapons, regardless of the direction they
+approach.
+
+Disadvantages are that it requires a force of platoon size or larger
+to reduce the danger of being overrun by an unexpectedly large force
+and that one or more sides of the triangle may come under enfilade
+fire. The lack of dispersion, particularly at the points, increases
+the danger from enemy mortar fire.
+
+
+Open Triangle Harassing Formation
+
+This variation of the triangle ambush enables a small force to
+harass, slow, and inflict heavy casualties upon a large force without
+itself being decisively engaged. The assault element is deployed
+in three teams, positioned so that each team becomes a corner of a
+triangle containing the killing zone. (See fig. D-12.)
+
+     TARGET IS THINLY SURROUNDED.      [Illustration]
+     FIRST TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+
+     TARGET ATTACKS. TEAM WITHDRAWS.   [Illustration]
+     SECOND GROUP OPENS FIRE.
+
+     TARGET SHIFTS ATTACK. SECOND      [Illustration]
+     GROUP WITHDRAWS. THIRD TEAM
+     OPENS FIRE.
+
+     TARGET SHIFTS ATTACK.             [Illustration]
+     THIRD TEAM WITHDRAWS.
+
+     TARGET IS PULLED APART.           [Illustration]
+     SUFFERS LOSSES, BUT AMBUSH
+     FORCES NOT DECISIVELY ENGAGED.
+
+                Figure D-12. Open Triangle Formation.
+
+When the enemy enters the killing zone, the team to the enemy’s front
+opens fire on the leading element. When the enemy counterattacks, the
+group withdraws and the team on the enemy’s flank opens fire. When
+this team is attacked, the team to the opposite flank opens fire.
+This process is repeated until the enemy is pulled apart. Each team
+reoccupies its position, if possible, and continues to inflict the
+maximum damage possible without becoming decisively engaged.
+
+
+Open Triangle Destruction Formation
+
+The assault element is again deployed in three teams, positioned
+so that each team is a point of the triangle, 200 to 300 meters
+apart. The killing zone is the area within the triangle. The enemy is
+allowed to enter the killing zone; the nearest team attacks by fire.
+As the enemy attempts to maneuver or withdraw, the other teams open
+fire. One or more teams, as directed, assault or maneuver to envelop
+or destroy the enemy. (See fig. D-13 on page D-6.)
+
+     200-300 METERS BETWEEN TEAMS.     [Illustration]
+
+     TARGET ENTERS KILLING ZONE.       [Illustration]
+     NEAREST TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+
+     TARGET ATTEMPTS TO MANEUVER OR    [Illustration]
+     ESCAPE. NEAREST TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+
+     EACH TEAM ATTACKS AS THE TARGET   [Illustration]
+     ATTEMPTS TO MANEUVER OR ESCAPES.
+
+     ONE OR MORE TEAMS MAY ASSAULT     [Illustration]
+     TO ENVELOP OR DESTROY THE
+     TARGET.
+
+      Figure D-13. Open Triangle Formation (Destruction Ambush).
+
+This formation is suitable for platoon-size or larger ambush forces.
+A smaller force would be in too great a danger of being overrun.
+Another disadvantage is that control, in assaulting or maneuvering,
+is very difficult. Very close coordination and control are necessary
+to ensure that assaulting or maneuvering teams are not fired on by
+another team. The ambush site must be a fairly level open area that
+provides concealment around its border for the ambush force.
+
+
+The Box Formation
+
+The “box” formation is similar in purpose to the open triangle
+ambush. The assault element is deployed in four teams, positioned so
+that each team becomes a corner of a square or rectangle containing
+the killing zone. It can be used for a harassing or destruction
+ambush in the same manner as the variations of the open triangle
+formation. (See figs. D-14 on page D-7 and D-15 on page D-8.)
+
+     TARGET IS THINLY SURROUNDED,      [Illustration]
+     ONE TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+
+     TARGET ATTACKS, TEAM WITHDRAWS.   [Illustration]
+     A REAR TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+
+     TARGET SHIFTS ATTACK. TEAM        [Illustration]
+     WITHDRAWS. SECOND FORWARD TEAM
+     OPENS FIRE.
+
+     TARGET AGAIN SHIFTS ATTACK.       [Illustration]
+     TEAM WITHDRAWS. SECOND REAR
+     TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+
+     TARGET ATTACKS AND IS PULLED      [Illustration]
+     APART. SUFFERS LOSSES. AMBUSH
+     FORCES NOT DECISIVELY ENGAGED.
+
+            Figure D-14. Box Formation (Harassing Ambush).
+
+
+     200-300 METERS BETWEEN TEAMS.     [Illustration]
+
+     TARGET ENTERS KILLING ZONE.       [Illustration]
+     NEAREST TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+
+     TARGET ATTEMPTS TO MANEUVER OR    [Illustration]
+     ESCAPE. NEAREST TEAM OPENS
+     FIRE.
+
+     SUCCESSIVE TEAMS ATTACK AS        [Illustration]
+     TARGET ATTEMPTS TO MANEUVER OR
+     ESCAPE.
+
+     ONE OR MORE TEAMS MAY ASSAULT TO  [Illustration]
+     ENVELOP OR DESTROY THE TARGET.
+
+           Figure D-15. Box Formation (Destruction Ambush).
+
+
+
+
+                         APPENDIX E. ACRONYMS
+
+
+  A&S                                          assault and security
+
+  CIT                                      counterintelligence team
+
+  EOD                                   explosive ordnance disposal
+
+  ITT                                  interrogator-translator team
+
+  MAGTF                                Marine air-ground task force
+  MEDEVAC                                        medical evacuation
+  METT-T                        mission, enemy, terrain and weather,
+                                       troops and support available
+
+  NBC                                 nuclear, biological, chemical
+  NCO                                      noncommissioned  officer
+
+  OTL                                        overserver-target line
+
+  RCA                                           riot control agents
+  ROE                                           rules of engagement
+
+  SMAW                shoulder-launched multipurpose assault weapon
+  SMEAC               situation, mission, execution, administration
+                              and logistics, and command and signal
+  SOP                                 standing operating procedures
+  SPOTREP                                               spot report
+
+  TTP                           tactics, techniques, and procedures
+
+
+
+
+                        APPENDIX F. REFERENCES
+
+
+  =Joint Publication (JP)=
+
+  1-02                DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms
+
+
+  =Fleet Marine Force Manual (FMFM)=
+
+  6-5                        Marine Rifle Squad (proposed MCWP 3-11.2)
+
+
+  =Marine Corps Warfighting Publications (MCWP)=
+
+  3-15.3                             Scout Sniping (under development)
+  3-35.3               Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT)
+  3-41.2                                     Raids (under development)
+
+
+  =Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRP)=
+
+  2-15.3A      Reconnaissance Patrol Leader’s Planning Handbook (under
+                                                           development)
+  2-15.3B                                 Reconnaissance Reports Guide
+  3-02C          Water Survival Handbook (under development, currently
+                              exists as Fleet Marine Force Manual 0-13)
+  5-12A                                 Operational Terms and Graphics
+  5-12C      Marine Corps Supplement to the DOD Dictionary of Military
+                                                  and Associated Terms
+
+
+
+
+Transcriber’s Note:
+
+Words and phrases in italics are surrounded by underscores, _like
+this_; in bold are surrounded by equal signs, =like this=; underlined
+are surrounded by tildes, ~like this~. The case of the title for
+Chapter 7 title was adjusted for consistency with remaining chapters.
+Extraneous punctuation was removed; where missing or unprinted,
+expected punctuation was added. Misspelled words were corrected. Line
+spacing was adjusted to context. In Chapter 13 and Appendix D, some
+illustrations were moved to be closer to the text that references
+them.
+
+The email address and website address provided in the 'To Our
+Readers' section are no longer valid.
+
+The following were changed:
+
+  Changed ‘deleted’ to ‘detected’ in Table 2-2.
+  Added word ‘a’ to ‘columns to pass a given point’ in Section 3001.
+  Changed ‘PI’ to ‘PL’ in Figure 11-3.
+  Deleted word ‘a’ from 'advantages of a motorized urban patrols’ in
+    Chapter 13.
+
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 78401 ***
diff --git a/78401-h/78401-h.htm b/78401-h/78401-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b427f68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/78401-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,9191 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html>
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+    <meta charset="UTF-8">
+    <meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1">
+    <meta name="format-detection" content="telephone=no,date=no,address=no,email=no,url=no">
+    <title>
+      Scouting and Patrolling | Project Gutenberg
+    </title>
+    <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover">
+    <style>
+
+body {
+    margin-left: 10%;
+    margin-right: 10%;
+}
+
+h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+    text-indent: 0em;
+    clear: both;
+    font-weight: bold;
+    page-break-before: avoid;}
+h1 {  margin: .75em 5% 1.5em;
+      font-size: 180%;
+      text-align: center;
+      font-family: sans-serif;}
+h2 { /* internal headers */
+      margin: 1em 5% 1em;
+      font-size: 160%;
+      text-align: center;
+      font-family: sans-serif;}
+h3 { margin: 1em 5% 1em; /* chapter titles */
+      font-size: 140%;
+      text-align: center;
+      font-family: sans-serif;}
+h4 { margin: .5em 0; /* section titles */
+      font-size: 110%;
+      text-align: left;
+      font-family: sans-serif;}
+    .h4head {
+        margin: .5em 0;
+        text-align: left;
+        font-family: sans-serif;
+        font-size: 110%; }
+h5 { margin: 1.5em 0 .5em 0; /* subsection titles */
+      font-size: 100%;
+      text-align: left;
+      font-family: sans-serif;}
+
+.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} /* use with h2 for epubs */
+
+.break {page-break-before: always;} /* for epubs */
+
+div.chapter {page-break-before: always;
+             margin-top: 4em;}
+
+/* paragraph formatting */
+p { text-indent: 0;
+    margin-top: .75em;
+    text-align: justify;
+    margin-bottom: .75em;
+}
+p.hanging {margin-left: 1em;
+           text-indent: -1em;}
+.p0       {margin-top: 0;}
+.p1       {margin-top: 1em;}
+.p2       {margin-top: 2em;}
+.center   {text-align: center;
+           text-indent: 0em;}
+.right    {text-align: right;}
+.narrow {line-height: 95%;}
+.indent5 {margin-left: 5%;}
+.indent10 {margin-left: 10%;}
+.indent15 {margin-left: 15%;}
+.indent50 {margin-left: 50%;}
+/* Font styling */
+.smcap  {font-style: normal; font-variant: small-caps;}
+.allsmcap {font-variant: small-caps; text-transform: lowercase;}
+em {font-style: italic;}
+dfn {font-style: italic;}
+.small {font-size: 90%;}
+.smaller {font-size: 83%;}
+.muchsmaller {font-size: 75%;}
+.xxs {font-size: 50%;}
+.muchlarger {font-size: 160%;}
+.strong {font-weight: bold;}
+.u {text-decoration: underline;}
+.sansserif {font-family: sans-serif;}
+
+/* Links */
+a:visited {text-decoration:none; color: red;}
+a:link {text-decoration:none;}
+
+/* Rules */
+hr {border: .2em solid black;
+    clear: both;
+}
+
+hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%; border: thin solid black;}
+@media print { hr.chap {display: none; visibility: hidden;} }
+hr.full {width: 100%; margin-left: 0; margin-right: 0;  border: thin solid black;}
+hr.sectop {width: 100%; margin: 2em 0 0 0;}
+hr.secbot {width: 100%; margin: 0 0 2em 0;}
+
+ul { list-style-type: none;}
+ul.index { list-style-type: none;}
+li.ifrst {
+    margin-top: 1em;
+    text-indent: -2em;
+    padding-left: 1em;
+}
+li  {
+    margin-top: .5em;
+    text-indent: -1em;
+    padding-left: 1em;
+}
+li.isub0 {
+    text-indent: -2em;
+    padding: 0 0 0 6em;
+}
+
+li.isub1 {
+    text-indent: -2em;
+    padding-left: 2em;
+}
+li.isub2 {
+    text-indent: -2em;
+    padding-left: 3em;
+}
+
+/* parallel pages for Figure 11-3 */
+div.parallel-page {page-break-before: always; clear: both;}
+.left-page {padding: 0; margin: auto; float: left; width: 49%;}
+.right-page {padding: 0; margin: auto; float: right; width: 49%;}
+
+
+/* Tables */
+table {
+    margin-left: auto;
+    margin-right: auto;
+}
+
+.tdl      {text-align: left;}
+.tdr      {text-align: right;}
+.tdc      {text-align: center;}
+.pad1 {padding: 1em 0 1em 0;} /* used in TOC, extra pad top and bottom */
+.pad2 {padding: 0 0 0 2em;} /* extra pad left */
+.pad3 {padding: 0 0 1em 0;}
+.pad4 {padding: 0 1.5em 0 0;}
+.pad5 {padding: 0 1em;}
+.vlb {vertical-align: bottom;}
+.vlt {vertical-align: top;}
+.t   {border-top: solid thin;}
+.l   {border-left: solid thin;}
+.r   {border-right: solid thin;}
+.b   {border-bottom: solid thin;}
+
+.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+    /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+    position: absolute;
+    left: 92%;
+    font-size: small;
+    text-align: right;
+    font-style: normal;
+    font-weight: normal;
+    font-variant: normal;
+    text-indent: 0;
+} /* page numbers */
+
+blockquote {
+    margin-top: 0;
+    margin-bottom: 0;
+    margin-left: 10%;
+    margin-right: 10%;
+}
+
+figcaption   {font-weight: bold; font-size: 85%; font-family: sansserif;}
+figcaption p {margin-top: 0; margin-bottom: .2em; text-align: inherit;font-weight: bold; font-family: sansserif;}
+figcaption.lt {font-size: 76%; text-align: left;}
+/* Images */
+img {
+    max-width: 100%;
+    height: auto;
+}
+img.w100 {width: 100%;}
+
+.figcenter {
+    margin: 1.5em auto;
+    text-align: center;
+    page-break-inside: avoid;
+    max-width: 100%;
+}
+
+.figright {
+    float: right;
+    clear: right;
+    margin-left: 1em;
+    margin-bottom: 1em;
+    margin-top: 1em;
+    margin-right: 0;
+    padding: 0;
+    text-align: center;
+    page-break-inside: avoid;
+    max-width: 100%;
+}
+.x-ebookmaker .figright {float: right;}
+
+/* Transcriber's notes */
+.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA;
+    color: black;
+    font-size:small;
+    padding:0.5em;
+    margin-bottom:5em;
+    font-family:sans-serif, serif;
+}
+
+a { border:none; text-decoration:none; font-variant:normal; }
+abbr { border:none; text-decoration:none; font-variant:normal; }
+
+.box   {border: solid .2em;
+       /* border-style: double; eliminate above line to use this one*/
+        margin-left: 2%;
+        margin-right: 2%;
+        padding: 2em 1em;}
+
+/* Illustration classes */
+.illowp20 {width: 20%; margin-top: 4em; margin-bottom: 3em;} /*logo*/
+.illowp21 {width: 21%;}
+.illowp30 {width: 30%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp30 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp40 {width: 40%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp40 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp48 {width: 48%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp48 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp50 {width: 50%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp50 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp51 {width: 51%;}
+.illowp53 {width: 53%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp53 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp54 {width: 54%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp54 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp55 {width: 55%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp55 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp57 {width: 57%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp57 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp62 {width: 62%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp62 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp67 {width: 67%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp67 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp68 {width: 68%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp68 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp70 {width: 70%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp70 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp80 {width: 80%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp80 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp92 {width: 92%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp92 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp93 {width: 93%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp93 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp98 {width: 98%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp98 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp100 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp63 {width: 63%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp63 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp42 {width: 42%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp42 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp65 {width: 65%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp65 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp60 {width: 60%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp60 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp77 {width: 77%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp77 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp34 {width: 34%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp34 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp75 {width: 75%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp75 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp73 {width: 73%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp73 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp83 {width: 83%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp83 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp71 {width: 71%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp71 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp46 {width: 46%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp46 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp59 {width: 59%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp59 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp97 {width: 97%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp97 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp91 {width: 91%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp91 {width: 100%;}
+.illowp88 {width: 88%;}
+.x-ebookmaker .illowp88 {width: 100%;}
+    </style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<div style='text-align:center'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 78401 ***</div>
+
+<p class="right">
+<b>MCWP3-11.3</b>
+</p>
+
+<hr class="full">
+<h1>Scouting and Patrolling</h1>
+<hr class="full">
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp20" id="usmc_logo" style="max-width: 21.375em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/usmc_logo.jpg" alt="Marine Corps logo.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr class="p2 full">
+<p class="center"><b>U.S. Marine Corps</b></p>
+<p class="center smaller">17 April 2000</p>
+  <p class="p2 right smaller">
+  PCN 143 000075 00
+</p>
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter small">
+<div class="box">
+<p class="center">
+To Our Readers
+</p>
+
+<p><b>Changes</b>: Readers of this publication are encouraged to submit suggestions and changes that
+will improve it. Recommendations may be sent directly to Commanding General, Marine
+Corps Combat Development Command, Doctrine Division (C 42), 3300 Russell Road, Suite
+318A, Quantico, VA 22134-5021 or by fax to 703-784-2917 (DSN 278-2917) or by E-mail to
+<a id="notvalid1"></a><b>morgannc@mccdc.usmc.mil</b>. Recommendations should include the following information:</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+  <li class="ifrst">• Location of change</li>
+  <li class="isub2">Publication number and title</li>
+  <li class="isub2">Current page number</li>
+  <li class="isub2">Paragraph number (if applicable)</li>
+  <li class="isub2">Line number</li>
+  <li class="isub2">Figure or table number (if applicable)</li>
+
+  <li class="ifrst">• Nature of change</li>
+  <li class="isub2">Add, delete</li>
+  <li class="isub2">Proposed new text, preferably double-spaced and typewritten</li>
+
+  <li class="ifrst">• Justification and/or source of change</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p><b>Additional copies</b>: A printed copy of this publication may be obtained from Marine Corps
+Logistics Base, Albany, GA 31704-5001, by following the instructions in MCBul 5600,
+<cite>Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications Status</cite>. An electronic copy may be obtained from the
+Doctrine Division, MCCDC, world wide web home page which is found at the following universal
+reference locator: <a id="notvalid2"></a><b>http:&#8203;//&#8203;www.doctrine.usmc.mil</b>.</p>
+</div><!--end box-->
+<blockquote>
+<p class="p2 center"><b>Unless otherwise stated, whenever the masculine or feminine gender is
+used, both men and women are included.</b></p>
+</blockquote>
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p class="center">
+DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY<br>
+Headquarters United States Marine Corps<br>
+Washington, DC 20380-1776
+</p>
+</div>
+
+<p class="p2 right">
+  17 April 2000
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+FOREWORD
+</p>
+
+<p class="p1">1. PURPOSE</p>
+
+<p>Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 3-11.3, <cite>Scouting and Patrolling</cite>,
+provides the doctrinal foundation and the tactics, techniques, and procedures for
+scouting and patrolling conducted by Marines from the fire team to the company level.
+Although the information focuses on infantry units, much of the information is also
+applicable to combat support units that are assigned patrolling missions.</p>
+
+<p class="p1">2. SCOPE</p>
+
+<p>MCWP 3-11.3 provides all Marines with the instructional material they need to build
+the skills necessary to become effective scouts and patrol team members. This
+publication provides the fundamentals of scouting and patrolling and their relationship
+to each other. It also addresses organizational structure of teams and patrols, the
+training required to develop teamwork, and reporting requirements.</p>
+
+<p class="p1">3. SUPERSESSION</p>
+
+<p>MCWP 3-11.3 supersedes Fleet Marine Force Manual (FMFM) 6-7, <cite>Scouting and
+Patrolling</cite>, dated 6 January 1989.</p>
+
+<p class="p1">4. CERTIFICATION</p>
+
+<p>Reviewed and approved this date.</p>
+
+<p class="p2 center">
+BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS</p>
+<br>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp21" id="signature" style="max-width: 31.25em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/signature.jpg" alt="Picture of J. E. Rhodes' signature.">
+</figure>
+<br>
+<p class="p0 center">J. E. RHODES<br>
+Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps<br>
+Commanding General<br>
+Marine Corps Combat Development Command
+</p>
+
+<p class="p2">DISTRIBUTION: 143 000075 00</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+ <h2 style="display: none; visibility: hidden;">Table of Contents</h2>
+  <p class="center muchlarger sansserif smcap">
+   <b>Table of Contents</b>
+  </p>
+<table>
+<colgroup>
+<col style="width: 10%;">
+<col style="width: 80%;">
+<col style="width: 10%;">
+</colgroup>
+<tr><td class="tdc pad1 sansserif smcap" colspan="3"><b>Part 1. Scouting</b></td></tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad3" colspan="2">Chapter 1. Fundamentals of Scouting</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">1001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Purpose</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec1001">1-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">1002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Required Scouting Skills</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec1002">1-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 2. Terrain, Maps, and Direction</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">2001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Terrain Features</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec2001">2-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">2002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">The Lensatic Compass</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec2002">2-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">2003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Stars, Sun, and Other Features</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec2003">2-5</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">2004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Range Determination</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec2004">2-6</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 3. Enemy Activity</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">3001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Estimating Enemy Strengths</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec3001">3-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">3002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Interpreting Signs and Tracks</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec3002">3-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">3003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Knowing the Enemy</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec3003">3-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 4. Daylight Scouting</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">4001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Cover and Concealment</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec4001">4-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">4002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Camouflage</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec4002">4-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">4003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Individual Movement</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec4003">4-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">4004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Route Selection</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec4004">4-5</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 5. Night Scouting</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Night Vision</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec5001">5-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Appearance of Objects</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec5002">5-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Sounds</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec5003">5-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Smells and Touch</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec5004">5-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5005</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Clothing and Weapons</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec5005">5-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5006</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Concealment</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec5006">5-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5007</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Aids to Night Scouting</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec5007">5-4</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5008</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Aids to Night Movement</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec5008">5-4</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5009</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Locating and Plotting the Enemy at Night</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec5009">5-6</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">50010</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Routes of Movement</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec50010">5-8</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 6. Observing and Reporting</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">6001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Observation Posts</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec6001">6-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">6002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Reporting</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec6002">6-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 7. Scouting Fire Team</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">7001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Positioning</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec7001">7-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">7002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Locating Enemy Positions</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec7002">7-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">7003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Action With an Attacking Platoon</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec7003">7-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">7004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Action With an Enveloping Unit</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec7004">7-5</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdc pad1 sansserif smcap" colspan="3"><b>Part 2. Infantry Patrolling</b></td></tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad3" colspan="2">Chapter 8. Fundamentals of Infantry Patrolling</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">8001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Definitions</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec8001">8-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">8002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Relation of Patrolling to Scouting</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec8002">8-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">8003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Purpose</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec8003">8-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">8004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Types of Patrols</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec8004">8-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">8005</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Training</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec8005">8-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">8006</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Keys to Successful Patrolling</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec8006">8-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 9. Patrol Organization</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">9001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">General Organization</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec9001">9-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">9002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Task Organization</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec9002">9-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 10. Patrol Preparation</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">10001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Mission</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec10001">10-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">10002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Factors Influencing Patrol Size</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec10002">10-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">10003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Commander’s Duties</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec10003">10-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">10004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Patrol Leader Duties</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec10004">10-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 11. Movement to and Return from the Objective Area</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">11001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Passage of Lines</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec11001">11-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">11002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Organization for Movement</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec11002">11-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">11003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Control Measures for Movement</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec11003">11-4</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">11004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Precautions at Danger Areas</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec11004">11-5</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">11005</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Hide</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec11005">11-6</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">11006</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Immediate Actions Upon Enemy Contact</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec11006">11-6</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">11007</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Patrol Leader’s Action in a Developing Situation</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec11007">11-10</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">11008</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Return From Objective Area</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec11008">11-10</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 12. Reconnaissance Patrols</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">12001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">General Missions</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec12001">12-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">12002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Specific Missions</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec12002">12-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">12003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Types of Reconnaissance</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec12003">12-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">12004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Task Organization</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec12004">12-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">12005</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Size of Reconnaissance Patrols</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec12005">12-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">12006</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Reconnaissance Equipment</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec12006">12-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">12007</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Reconnaissance Patrol Actions at the Objective Area</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec12007">12-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 13. Combat Patrols</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">13001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Task Organization</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec13001">13-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">13002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Equipment</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec13002">13-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">13003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Raid Patrols</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec13003">13-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">13004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Contact Patrols</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec13004">13-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">13005</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Ambush Patrols</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec13005">13-3</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">13006</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Security Patrols</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec13006">13-7</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">13007</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Urban Patrols</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec13007">13-8</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Chapter 14. Information and Reports</td>
+    <td></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">14001</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Reporting</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec14001">14-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">14002</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Captured Items</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec14002">14-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">14003</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Prisoners</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec14003">14-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">14004</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Patrol Report</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec14004">14-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">14005</td>
+    <td class="tdl pad2 vlt">Patrol Critique</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad2 vlb"><a href="#sec14005">14-2</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad1" colspan="2">Appendix A. Patrol Warning Order</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad1 vlb"><a href="#AppxA">A-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad3" colspan="2">Appendix B. Patrol Order</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad3 vlb"><a href="#AppxB">B-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad3" colspan="2">Appendix C. Patrol Evaluation Checklist</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad3 vlb"><a href="#AppxC">C-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad3" colspan="2">Appendix D. Ambush Formations</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad3 vlb"><a href="#AppxD">D-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad3" colspan="2">Appendix E. Acronyms</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad3 vlb"><a href="#AppxE">E-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl pad3" colspan="2">Appendix F. References</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad3 vlb"><a href="#AppxF">F-1</a></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+</div>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_101"></span></p>
+  <h2 class="nobreak" id="Part_1_Scouting">
+    <span class="smcap">Part 1. Scouting</span>
+  </h2>
+</div>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_1_Fundamentals_of_Scouting">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 1. Fundamentals of Scouting</span>
+  </h3>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>Scouting involves observing terrain and/or the enemy, and accurately reporting
+those observations. Scouting requires proficiency in the use of weapons, cover
+and concealment, route selection, and skill in unobserved day or night movement.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec1001">1001. PURPOSE</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>When an infantry unit is not actively fighting the
+enemy, it should be actively searching for the enemy,
+which is the primary purpose of scouting. The unit
+attempts to keep the enemy off balance while making
+preparations for further attacks. Physically locating
+and keeping the enemy off balance are normally
+accomplished by small units ranging from a two-person
+scouting party to a squad-size patrol.</p>
+
+<p>Infantrymen are sent out as scouts or as members of a
+patrol because the commander needs information
+about the enemy, terrain, and the location of friendly
+troops. The lives of the entire unit may depend upon
+the success or failure of a scout or patrol and the
+accuracy and timeliness of the report. The success of
+the scout or patrol will depend upon their training,
+preparation by the commander, and understanding
+their mission and the commander’s requirements.</p>
+
+<p>To wage combat successfully, a commander must
+have accurate, detailed, and timely information about
+the enemy, the terrain, and adjacent friendly units.
+Well-trained scouts and capably led patrols are among
+the most effective means the commander has for
+acquiring the information necessary to plan tactical
+actions and make decisions in execution.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec1002">1002. REQUIRED SCOUTING SKILLS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>To be effective, a scout must be able to&#x2060;—</p>
+
+
+<ul>
+<li>• Recognize terrain features.</li>
+
+<li>• Read a map and determine direction.</li>
+
+<li>• Practice and implement the principles of cover and
+concealment.</li>
+
+<li>• Fully utilize movement and route selection.</li>
+
+<li>• Know the enemy (estimate enemy unit composition
+and strength).</li>
+
+<li>• Observe and report information accurately.</li>
+
+<li>• Select routes and move through numerous types of
+terrain.</li>
+</ul>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_201"></span></p>
+
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_2_Terrain_Maps_and_Direction">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 2. Terrain, Maps, and Direction</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>A scout must understand map symbols, identify elevations from contour interval
+lines, scale distance on a map, relate natural and man-made features shown on the
+map to the actual features on the ground, plot a course from one point to another,
+and locate his current position. To relate a map to the actual terrain and its
+features, a scout must be able to orient it to the ground using a compass, two
+points, a watch, and the sun or the stars.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec2001">2001. TERRAIN FEATURES</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Since the infantry works and fights on the ground,
+terrain ashore information that scouts gather and
+report on is of great importance. Hills, valleys, woods,
+and streams are the forms and growths commonly
+referred to as natural land features. Artificial or man-made
+features include houses, bridges, and railroads.
+Figure 2-1 shows some important terrain features.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_02-1" style="max-width: 62.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-1.jpg" alt="Sketch of terrain with a mountain peak and saddle ridge in the distance, a railroad track proceeding from foreground towards the hills, a bluff, an abrupt slope, a valley with roads, ravine, crossroads, gentle slopes, ditches, a river with flow direction indicated by an arrow and river banks.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-1. Natural and Artificial Terrain Features.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec2002">2002. THE LENSATIC COMPASS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The best method of finding direction, during both day
+and night, is with a compass. The lensatic and M2 are
+the two types of compasses issued to infantry units.
+Both work on the same principle.</p>
+
+<p>The standard compass for general use in the Marine
+Corps is the pivot-mounted lensatic compass, so called
+because azimuths are read through a magnifying lens
+in the eyepiece. <a href="#i_02-2">Figure 2-2</a>, on page 2-2, shows the
+lensatic compass and its nomenclature. The meter
+graphic scale on the side of the compass is 1:50,000,
+which is the most used scale in military mapping. The
+graphic scale is useful in the field as a straightedge, an
+aid in orienting the map, and a means of reading map
+grid coordinates. The plastic dial is graduated in both
+degrees and mils. Numbers on the dial are printed in
+black. There are luminous markings on the bezel,
+floating dial, and on both ends of the sighting wire,
+plus a 3-degree bezel serration and clicking device that
+permit reading azimuths at night. The compass is
+carried in a nylon case that may be attached to the
+cartridge belt.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp71" id="i_02-2" style="max-width: 62.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-2.jpg" alt="Sketch of a lensatic compass identifying luminous sighting dots, luminous arrow, index line, sighting slot, lens, thumb loop, bezel ring, graduated straight edge and sighting wire.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-2. Lensatic Compass.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>Magnetic compasses are affected by the presence of
+iron or magnetic fields. Consequently, the scout
+should not be within the influence of local magnetic
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_202"></span>attraction while using a compass to determine direction.
+The rifle, pistol, and other metal objects must be
+laid aside when reading the compass. The minimum
+distances the scout should be from visible masses of
+iron and electrical fields of magnetism for the compass
+to provide accurate readings are provided below.</p>
+
+<table>
+<tr><td class="tdc"><b>Magnetic Fields</b></td>
+<td class="tdc"><b>Minimum<br>Distances<br>(meters)</b></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">High tension powerlines</td>
+<td class="tdr pad4">60</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">Field guns</td>
+<td class="tdr pad4">20</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">Vehicles (wheeled or tracked)</td>
+<td class="tdr pad4">20</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">Telephone and telegraph wires</td>
+<td class="tdr pad4">10</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">Barbed wire</td>
+<td class="tdr pad4">10</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">Machine gun</td>
+<td class="tdr pad4">3</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">Rifle, pistol</td>
+<td class="tdr pad4">1</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+<br>
+
+<h5>Reading an Azimuth</h5>
+
+<p>To read an azimuth to any point, the cover of the
+compass is raised to an angle of 90 degrees in relation
+to the index face, and the eyepiece is lifted to a 45-degree
+angle in relation to the bezel, or so the numbers
+on the dial can be seen. The thumb of either hand is
+placed in the thumb loop, the index finger extended
+along the side of the compass case, and the remainder
+of the hand closed. The closed hand and wrist are
+grasped with the other hand. The elbows are drawn in
+close to the body, forming a firm foundation for the
+compass. The eye is placed to the lens on the eyepiece.
+The compass is pointed at the object or point to which
+the azimuth is to be read. A sighting is taken through
+the sighting slot in the eyepiece, and the point is lined
+up with the sighting wire in the cover. The compass is
+held until the dial steadies; then the reading is taken
+through the lens of the eyepiece. This reading is the
+magnetic azimuth of the line from the observer to the
+point.</p>
+
+<h5>Reading a Back Azimuth</h5>
+
+<p>A back azimuth is the direction opposite the line of
+sight. If the azimuth is less than 180 degrees, the back
+azimuth is obtained by adding 180 degrees. If the
+azimuth is greater than 180 degrees, the back azimuth
+is obtained by subtracting 180 degrees. Back azimuths
+are used to determine a return route or to resection to
+determine a current position.</p>
+
+<h5>Circumventing Obstacles</h5>
+
+<p>When a scout is traveling on an azimuth and comes
+upon an obstacle—such as a contaminated area,
+minefield or swamp—the following steps (sometimes
+referred to as the <dfn>90-degree offset</dfn> method) is employed
+to go around or circumvent the obstacle and
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_203"></span>resume movement along the original azimuth (see <a href="#i_02-3a">fig.
+2-3</a>). The steps are as follows:</p>
+
+<div class="sansserif smaller">
+<p>1. Move up to the obstacle and make a full 90-degree
+turn to the right (or left).</p>
+
+<p>2. Walk beyond the obstacle, keeping track of the
+distance in paces or meters.</p>
+
+<p>3. Stand at the end of the obstacle, face in the
+original direction of march, and follow that azimuth
+until the obstacle has been passed.</p>
+
+<p>4. Make a 90-degree turn to the left (or right) and
+move the distance previously measured to return to
+the original line of march.</p>
+</div>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp93" id="i_02-3a" style="max-width: 60.8125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-3a.jpg" alt="Sketch of a ditch with a line and directional arrows showing method of avoiding the ditch as described in paragraphs 1–4, above.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-3. Circumventing an Obstacle.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h5>Following an Azimuth During the Day</h5>
+
+<p>The eye is placed to the lens in the eyepiece and the
+compass moved until the desired azimuth reading is
+visible beneath the fixed index. Without moving the
+compass, the vision is shifted from the lens through
+the sighting slot in the eyepiece, and a sighting is taken
+out beyond the sighting wire in the cover. A prominent
+terrain feature on this line of sight is selected, the compass
+closed, and the landmark approached. When the
+scout reaches the landmark, the procedure is repeated.</p>
+
+<h5>Following an Azimuth at Night</h5>
+
+<p>It is necessary to prepare and set the compass before
+departing on a night movement because at night only
+the luminous parts of the compass can be seen. To
+prepare the compass for night use, the luminous parts
+must be fully charged by sunlight or artificial light,
+such as a flashlight. To set a compass&#x2060;—</p>
+
+
+<div class="sansserif smaller">
+<p>1. Move the compass so that the desired azimuth
+on the dial is directly under the index line on the
+lower glass.</p>
+
+<p>2. Rotate the upper movable glass so that the
+luminous line is directly above the north arrow of the
+dial.</p>
+
+<p>3. Set the compass for marching at night on the
+specified azimuth.</p>
+
+<p class="center">—OR&#x2060;—</p>
+
+
+<p>1. Face the general direction of movement.</p>
+
+<p>2. Line up the north arrow and the luminous line on
+the bezel with the luminous sighting dots.</p>
+
+<p>3. Hold the compass still with one hand and grip the
+knurled bezel ring with the other hand.</p>
+
+<p>4. Turn the bezel ring the prescribed number of
+clicks in the proper direction, remembering that
+each click equals 3 degrees. For example, to set an
+azimuth of 21 degrees, the bezel ring would be
+turned seven clicks to the left.</p>
+
+<p>5. Turn the whole compass until the north needle
+lines up with the luminous line. The compass is then
+set on the desired azimuth. The azimuth is the line
+formed by the two luminous sighting dots on the
+inside of the cover.</p>
+</div>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp62" id="i_02-3b" style="max-width: 48.125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-3b.jpg" alt="Sketch of a vertical line indicating North and an azimuth of movement at an angle of 51° eastward; silhouette of a troop walking along the line toward the destination object.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-4. Following a Night Azimuth.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>To march on a preset azimuth during night movement,
+open the compass and move it so the north arrow is
+directly below the luminous line (see <a href="#i_02-3b">fig. 2-4</a>). Move
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_204"></span>in the direction of the line formed by the two luminous
+sighting dots. It is necessary to refer to the compass
+more frequently at night than during the day. If stars
+are visible, find a prominent star along the azimuth of
+movement to use as a reference point. When the view
+of the sky is restricted by overcast conditions or vegetation,
+send a scout forward along the azimuth of
+movement to the limit of visibility. This scout is guided
+along the azimuth of movement by a stationary navigator.
+When the scout reaches the limit of visibility,
+the navigator moves to the scout’s location. This process
+is repeated until the destination is reached.</p>
+
+<p>A more rapid method for reaching the scout’s
+destination is to equip the navigator with a compass.
+The navigator can set the compass as explained earlier
+and the scout proceeds providing security 180 degrees
+to the front on the specified azimuth, receiving right
+and left corrections from the navigator while both are
+on the move. The point scout must stay within visual
+range of the navigator. If available, a strip of white or
+luminous tape on the back of the point scout’s helmet
+will assist.</p>
+
+<h5>Intersection</h5>
+
+<p>Intersection is the location of an unknown point by
+successively occupying at least two, preferably three
+known positions and sightings on the unknown point.
+It is used to locate features not depicted on the map or
+not readily identifiable. To determine an intersection,
+perform the following steps (see <a href="#i_02-4">fig. 2-5</a>):</p>
+
+<div class="sansserif smaller">
+<p>1. Orient the map using the compass.</p>
+
+<p>2. Locate and mark your position on the map.</p>
+
+<p>3. Measure the magnetic azimuth to the unknown
+position; then convert to grid azimuth.</p>
+
+<p>4. Draw a line on the map from your position on this
+grid azimuth.</p>
+
+<p>5. Move to a second known position from which
+unknown point is visible. Locate this position on the
+map and again orient the map using the compass.
+The second unknown position should be a minimum
+of 30 degrees offset from the first position.</p>
+
+<p>6. Repeat steps 4 and 5.</p>
+</div>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp53" id="i_02-4" style="max-width: 54.625em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-4.jpg" alt="Sketch of a topographical map showing known positions and lines intersecting them to determine location of an unknown point.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-5. Intersection.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>To check accuracy, move to a third position and repeat
+steps 1 through 4. Where the lines cross is the
+location of the unknown position. Using three lines, a
+triangle is sometimes formed—called the <dfn>triangle of
+error</dfn>—instead of an intersection. If the triangle is
+large, recheck your work to find the error. Do not
+assume that the position is at the center of the triangle.</p>
+
+<h5>Resection</h5>
+
+<p>Resection is the location of the user’s unknown
+position by sighting on two or three known features
+that are identifiable on the map. To determine a
+resection, perform the following steps (see <a href="#i_02-5a">fig. 2-6</a>):</p>
+
+<div class="sansserif smaller">
+<p>1. Orient the map using the compass.</p>
+
+<p>2. Locate two or three known positions on the
+ground and mark them on the map.</p>
+
+<p>3. Measure the magnetic azimuth to a known
+position then convert to grid azimuth.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_205"></span></p>
+
+<p>4. Change the grid azimuth to a back azimuth and
+draw a line on the map from the known position
+back toward the unknown position.</p>
+
+<p>5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 to determine a second
+known position.</p>
+</div>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp54" id="i_02-5a" style="max-width: 54.25em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-5a.jpg" alt="Sketch of a topographical map showing identifiable features with known positions; lines intersecting them will determine location of the viewer (troop), as described in paragraphs 1-5, immediately preceding.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-6. Resection.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>To check accuracy, repeat the steps above for a third
+known position. The intersection of the lines is your
+location. Using three lines, a triangle of error may be
+formed. If the triangle is large, recheck.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec2003">2003. STARS, SUN, AND OTHER
+FEATURES</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>In rare cases when a scout is without a compass, the
+following examples are alternate means to determine
+direction. When using constellations to determine
+direction, identify your location’s Temperate Zone. A
+Temperate Zone is the area between the tropics and
+the polar circles.</p>
+
+<p>At night, the stars provide an excellent means of
+maintaining a line of march. In the North Temperate
+Zone (north of the equator), the Big Dipper constellation
+is one key to determining direction of true north.
+It is made up of seven fairly bright stars in the shape of
+a dipper with a long curved handle (see <a href="#i_02-5b">fig. 2-7</a>). The
+two stars that form the side of the cup farthest from the
+handle, used as pointers, are situated in the direction of
+a bright star that is about five times the distance
+between the two stars of the dipper cup. This bright
+star is the North Star and is directly over the North
+Pole. The pointers always designate the North Star,
+which is the direction of true north.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp80" id="i_02-5b" style="max-width: 62.1875em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-5b.jpg" alt="Sketch of the Ursa Major constellation with an imaginary dotted line from the far point of the dipper to the North Star, which is directly above the North Pole.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-7. Locating the North Pole.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp80" id="i_02-5c" style="max-width: 65.6875em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-5c.jpg" alt="Sketch of Southern Cross constellation with a dotted line drawn diagonally across the center of the constellation and extending 4½ times that width towards the south; endpoint of the line is directly above the South Pole.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-8. Locating the South Pole.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>In the Southern Hemisphere, true south is determined
+in relation to the Southern Cross, a constellation
+composed of five stars. Two bright pointer stars in the
+vicinity of the Southern Cross serve as locators to help
+locate true south (see <a href="#i_02-5c">fig. 2-8</a>). The outer four stars are
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_206"></span>fairly bright and form a cross. This cross is imagined
+as the frame of a kite. A straight tail, four and one half
+times as long as the length of the kite itself, is put on
+the kite using finger widths for a measuring stick. The
+end of this tail will be close to a position directly over
+the South Pole. Usually, it will not be possible to see a
+star in the immediate vicinity, because there is no
+bright star visible directly above the South Pole.</p>
+
+<p>During daylight hours, a watch and the sun can be
+used to determine direction within 8 degrees. In the
+North Temperate Zone, the watch is held horizontally,
+face up, and the hour hand pointed at the sun (see <a href="#i_02-6a">fig.
+2-9</a>). The north-south line and the direction of south
+can be found midway between the hour hand and the
+number 12, if the watch is set on standard time. If in
+daylight savings time, the direction of south is found
+midway between the hour hand and the number 1.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp50" id="i_02-6a" style="max-width: 47.125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-6a.jpg" alt="Sketch of an analog watch with the hour-hand pointing towards the sun; north-south line is midway between the sun and number 12 on the watch face.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-9. Determining Direction by Watch and
+    Sun (North Temperate Zone).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>In the South Temperate Zone, if the watch is set on
+standard time, the number 12 on the watch is pointed
+at the sun; if the watch is set on daylight savings time,
+the number 1 is pointed at the sun. North is midway
+between 12 (or 1) and the hour hand (see <a href="#i_02-6b">fig. 2-10</a>).</p>
+
+<p>When laying in a north-south line, if any doubt exists
+as to which end of the line is north, remember that the
+sun is in the east before noon and in the west in the
+afternoon.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp50" id="i_02-6b" style="max-width: 52.875em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_02-6b.jpg" alt="Sketch of an analog watch with the clock face number 12 pointing towards the sun and the hour hand pointing towards the number 8; the north-south line is midway between the sun and hour hand on the clock face.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 2-10. Determining Direction by Watch and
+    Sun (South Temperate Zone).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>In addition to the sun and stars, other methods a scout
+without a compass can use to determine direction
+include determining prevailing wind direction and
+using a mountain for orientation. By previous study of
+maps and photographs, a scout can keep informed of
+location and direction by using a distinctive edge of
+woods, a deep ravine or the direction of a stream’s
+flow. A scout should constantly evaluate and
+memorize both the immediate terrain and general area
+for prominent features and landmarks.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec2004">2004. RANGE DETERMINATION</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Range determination is the method of finding the
+distance between an observer and an enemy target or
+an object. By accurate range determination, the
+members of a given unit can set their sights correctly
+and place effective fire on enemy targets. The degree
+of accuracy is dependent on several factors, such as
+terrain relief, time available, and experience of the
+observer.</p>
+
+<h5>Mental Estimation</h5>
+
+<p>A mental distance estimate is made using a known unit
+of measure. Distance is estimated to the nearest 100
+meters by determining the number of known units of
+measure between the observer’s position and a target.
+For example, a football field, which is 100 yards, can
+be used as a known unit of measure for determining
+the distance between an observer’s position and a
+target. For longer distances, progressive estimation
+may be necessary. To do this, the observer determines
+the number of units of measure to an intermediate
+point and doubles the value. The observer should
+consider the effects in table 2-1 in estimating distances.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_207"></span></p>
+
+<p class="p2 center sansserif"><b>Table 2-1. Effects to Consider
+in Mental Estimation of Distances.</b>
+</p>
+
+<table class="sansserif smaller">
+<tr>
+<th class="l t">Objects Appear Nearer</th>
+<th class="l t r">Objects Appear More Distant</th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl l t">In bright light.</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">In poor light or in fog.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl vlt l t">In clear air at high altitude.</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Only a small part of the object can be seen.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl vlt l t">The background is in contrast with the color of the object.</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">The background is similar in color to that of the object.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl vlt l t">The observer is looking down from a height.</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">The observer is looking over a depression, most of which is visible.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl vlt l t">The observer is looking over a depression, most of which is hidden.</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">The observer is kneeling or sitting, especially on a hot day, when the ground is moist.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl l t">The observer is looking down a straight feature such as a road.</td>
+<td class="l t r"></td>
+</tr><tr>
+<td class="tdl l t b">The observer is looking over water, snow, or a uniform surface such as a cultivated field or desert.</td>
+<td class="l t r b"></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<h5>Estimating in Good Visibility</h5>
+
+<p>When visibility is good, distances can be estimated by
+using the appearance of tree trunks, branches, and
+foliage (as seen by the naked eye) in comparison with
+map data. <a href="#table2-2">Table 2-2</a> is a guide for wooded terrain.
+<a href="#table2-3">Table 2-3</a> is a guide for urban environments.</p>
+
+<h5>Estimating From a Terrain Study</h5>
+
+<p>The Marine should always use terrain/map analysis to
+assist in estimating distances. When the Marine is
+looking in a specific direction, the estimation of
+distance can be enhanced by studying the terrain and
+comparing it with the map. Particular emphasis should
+be given to color contrasts of terrain features seen
+along the observer-target line (OTL). For example, the
+distance across successive ridge lines or depressions in
+the distance may be identifiable by only slight changes
+of color to the eye. Different colors of grass might
+reveal a hidden terrain feature such as a stream.</p>
+
+<p class="p2 center sansserif" id="table2-2">
+<b>Table 2-2. Estimating Distance in Wooded Terrain.</b>
+</p>
+
+<table class="sansserif smaller">
+<tr>
+<th class="l t">Distance<br>in<br>Meters</th>
+<th class="l t r">Tree Description</th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc vlt l t">1,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Trunk and main branches are visible. Foliage appears in cluster-like shape. Daylight may be seen through the foliage.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc vlt l t">2,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Trunk visible, main branches distinguishable, foliage appears as smooth surface. Outline of foliage of separate trees distinguishable.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc vlt l t">3,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Lower half of trunk visible. Branches blend with foliage. Foliage blends with adjoining trees.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc vlt l t">4,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Trunk and branches blend with foliage and appears as a continuous cluster, smooth in appearance. Movement of foliage due to wind cannot be detected.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc vlt l t b">5,000 and<br>beyond</td>
+<td class="tdl vlt l t r b">Whole area covered by trees and appears smooth and dark.</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p class="p2 center sansserif" id="table2-3">
+<b>Table 2-3. Estimating Distance
+in Urban Terrain.</b>
+</p>
+
+<table class="sansserif smaller">
+<tr>
+<th class="l t">Distance in<br>Meters</th>
+<th class="tdl l t r">Object Identified by the Unaided Eye</th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc t l">1,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Lone tree trunk</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc t l">1,500</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Individuals and horsemen</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc t l">3,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Chimneys on rooftops</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc t l">4,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Windows in houses</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc t l">4,000–5,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Individual houses in populated area</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc t l">8,000–9,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r">Villages and individual houses</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc t l b">15,000–18,000</td>
+<td class="tdl l t r b">Large houses, towers, and steeples</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_301"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_3_Enemy_Activity">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 3. Enemy Activity</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>A commander often acts on information furnished by scouts. Therefore, scouts
+must aim at absolute accuracy in reporting enemy activity. This chapter discusses
+estimating enemy strengths, interpreting signs and tracks, and knowing the
+enemy.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec3001">3001. ESTIMATING ENEMY STRENGTHS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>If troops cannot be counted, their strength may be
+estimated by: noting the length of time it takes various
+types of moving <a id="chg2"></a>columns to pass a given point, the area
+required of a unit in camp or bivouac, or the front on
+which they are deployed. When the ground is dry,
+infantry on the march raise a low, thick cloud of dust,
+and motor vehicles or mechanized units raise a
+thick, rapidly moving cloud. Additionally, through
+practice, a scout may gain information as to the
+strength and composition of enemy forces by listening
+to noises and observing lights, fires, and smoke. A
+scout gains valuable experience in estimating enemy
+strengths by observing friendly forces in camp, on the
+march, and deployed. The knowledge scouts gain
+during field exercises of the appearance and tactical
+dispositions of squads, platoons, companies, and
+larger units will be of great assistance in estimating the
+strength and composition of enemy units observed
+under various conditions.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec3002">3002. INTERPRETING SIGNS AND TRACKS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>In addition to estimates made through direct observation,
+a scout may often be able to estimate size,
+composition, direction, rate of movement, condition,
+discipline, state of training, and morale of enemy
+forces through signs and tracks left behind.</p>
+
+<h5>Signs</h5>
+
+<p>The examination of vacated enemy positions provides
+valuable information. The size of a bivouac or defense
+area ordinarily indicates the number of enemy
+occupants. Clothing, ration containers, dumps, etc.,
+further indicate the quantity of the departed enemy
+force. The condition of the bivouac area and amount of
+material abandoned give an indication of the enemy
+morale, training, and discipline. A well-policed area
+indicates good discipline. Rubbish, ration and
+smoking residue, and nonessential personal items of
+equipment adrift indicate a lower state of morale,
+training, and discipline. Stores and material left behind
+in good condition may indicate a hasty movement or
+withdrawal. Burned or destroyed materials indicate a
+deliberate, orderly withdrawal or movement. Letters,
+insignia, and other articles may reveal the identity of
+the enemy unit.</p>
+
+<p>In the case of a moving enemy, the distance between
+periodic halts indicates the rate of march if enemy
+habits relative to marches and halts are known. Condition
+of the halt areas indicates the state of morale,
+training, and discipline.</p>
+
+<p>The physical condition of enemy dead and wounded
+and their personal equipment and weapons are
+reported. The general condition and state of maintenance
+of destroyed or abandoned vehicles should
+also be reported.</p>
+
+<h5>Tracks</h5>
+
+<p>A track is a mark left on the ground by the passage of a
+person or object. Examination of tracks reveals information
+about the enemy.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Troops</i></h5>
+
+<p>A few tracks overlapping each other on both sides of a
+road or trail may indicate a patrol in staggered
+formation. A large number of tracks indicates troops in
+column formation. A large column will wear a dry
+road smooth and flat. In damp terrain, a freshly made
+track will have sharp edges; ordinarily, signs of
+moisture will disappear in about 15 minutes. A runner’s
+toes are dug into the ground; a walker’s footprint
+is fairly even.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Vehicles</i></h5>
+
+<p>The type of track indicates whether the vehicle is
+wheeled or tracked. A scout acquires the necessary
+experience to make the proper determination by
+observing vehicle tracks during training.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_302"></span></p>
+
+<p>The direction of travel can be determined by the way
+tracks pass across ruts, by impressions on the edges of
+holes in the ground, how water is splashed from
+puddles, or by the way grass, twigs, and branches are
+bent; for example&#x2060;—</p>
+
+
+<p class="hanging">• A vehicle (wheeled or tracked) entering a rut pushes
+dirt into the rut and leaves an indentation on the exit
+side of the rut.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• A wheel going over holes in the ground leaves a
+deeper impression on the edge toward the direction
+of travel.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The side of a puddle with the greater splash
+indicates the direction of travel of the vehicle.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• When traveling cross-country, the direction in
+which grass is bent and/or twigs, branches, and
+bushes are broken indicates direction of travel.</p>
+
+<p>A general rate of speed can be estimated by the
+amount of water or mud splattered. A fast-moving
+vehicle will throw larger amounts of water or mud a
+greater distance to the front and sides than a slow-moving
+vehicle, and it leaves a deeper impression on
+the exit edges of holes. The faster the travel, the
+deeper the impression.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec3003">3003. KNOWING THE ENEMY</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A scout should learn as much as possible about enemy
+psychology, habits, organization, and tactics. The
+more knowledge gained about the enemy, particularly
+the enemy’s normal security measures, the better the
+scout’s chances are to observe and obtain accurate
+information with minimum risk to the mission’s
+success. Scouts gain much of this knowledge through
+experience, but they also gain a great deal of their
+preliminary information, particularly that pertaining to
+enemy organization and tactics, during training and
+may be updated by unit commanders and intelligence
+officers.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_401"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_4_Daylight_Scouting">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 4. Daylight Scouting</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>A scout must be able to operate in all types of terrain and under all conditions of
+visibility. He must be thoroughly familiar with the principles for using cover and
+concealment, camouflage, individual movement, and route selection, both to and
+from the objective.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec4001">4001. COVER AND CONCEALMENT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Cover is protection from the fire of hostile weapons.
+Concealment is protection from observation or
+surveillance from hostile air and ground observation,
+but not from hostile fire. Both cover and concealment
+are divided into two main categories: natural and
+artificial. Natural cover includes small hills, ditches,
+rocks or vegetation. Fighting holes, bunkers, and brick
+walls are examples of artificial cover. Some features,
+such as buildings, provide both cover and concealment.
+In deciding whether to seek cover or concealment,
+a scout must make the best choice to complete
+the mission (<a href="#i_04-1">see fig. 4-1</a>).</p>
+
+<h5>Concealment Principles</h5>
+
+<p>Concealment principles are as follows:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Remain motionless while observing. Anything in
+motion attracts the eye.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Use all available concealment.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Observe from the prone position (it offers a low silhouette
+and makes detection by the enemy difficult).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Expose nothing that reflects light.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Blend with the background because contrasting
+colors are noticeable.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Remain in the shade because moving shadows
+attract attention.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Distort or change the regular outline of objects.
+Most military objects have distinctive shapes that
+make obvious shadows and silhouettes.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoid the skyline. Figures on the skyline can be
+seen from great distances and are easily identified
+by their outlines.</p>
+
+<h5>Concealment Techniques</h5>
+
+<p>Concealment techniques are as follows:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• When observing, the scout looks around an object’s
+side (unless it is transparent) and prepares to fire, if
+necessary, around the side of or, if possible, through
+an object.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Looking or firing over an object can make the scout
+an easily visible target for the enemy. If the scout
+must fire over the top of concealment or cover, the
+outline of the head or helmet should be broken or
+distorted.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Upon the approach of an airplane, the scout takes a
+prone position, turns face-down, and remains motionless.
+If surprised by an airplane, the scout remains
+in place and does not look up.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The scout covers exposed body parts such as the
+face, back of the neck, and hands with grease paint,
+mud or other materials to reduce sun reflection.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Camouflage for equipment can be improvised from
+garnishing or sandbags to prevent sun reflection.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• In snowy terrain, white overgarments are worn.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The helmet cover outline should be distorted.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp51" id="i_04-1" style="max-width: 43.0em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_04-1.jpg" alt="Six sketches arranged vertically: the top shows a scout prone on the ground using a tree as cover for his observations; the second shows the head of a scout in a ditch, observing over a broken edge; the third shows the head of a scout in a prone position observing through a bush; the fourth shows the head of a scout observing over a crest at a point where it is broken or grassy; the fifth shows a prone observation point around the right side of a rock; the bottom shows use of a fence crossbar as cover for observation from a prone position.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 4-1. Correct Use of Cover.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_402"></span></p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec4002">4002. CAMOUFLAGE</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Camouflage is the use of concealment and disguise to
+minimize the possibility of detection and/or identification
+of troops, material, equipment, and installations.
+The purpose of camouflage is to provide concealment
+of military objects from enemy observation. Camouflage
+is also used to conceal an object by making it
+look like something else. A scout’s mission usually requires
+individual and equipment camouflage. If natural
+camouflage is not adequate, the position is camouflaged.
+In using camouflage, remember that objects
+are identified by their form (outline), shadow, texture,
+and color. The principal purpose of camouflage in the
+field is to prevent direct observation and recognition.</p>
+
+<h5>Individual Camouflage</h5>
+
+<p>Successful individual camouflage involves the ability
+to recognize and take advantage of all forms of natural
+and artificial concealment available (vegetation, soil,
+debris, etc.) and knowledge of the proper use of artificial
+camouflage materials.</p>
+
+<h5>Aids to Individual Camouflage</h5>
+
+<p>A scout must recognize the terrain’s dominant color
+and pattern and must change the appearance of
+clothing and equipment accordingly in order to blend
+and not contrast with the terrain (see <a href="#i_04-2">fig. 4-2</a>).</p>
+
+<p>The helmet is camouflaged by breaking up its shape,
+smooth surface, and shadow. Use of a helmet cover
+works best. In the absence of a helmet cover, mud can
+be irregularly blotched on the helmet to disguise its
+form and dull the surface. A helmet cover may be
+improvised from irregularly colored cloth or burlap to
+blend with the background. Foliage can be draped to
+prevent the visor of the helmet from casting a dark
+shadow across the face. Foliage should not stick up
+like plumes because any head movement will give
+away the position.</p>
+
+<p>A small, thin bush in the shadow of a large bush makes
+a good observation point. Lone trees, rocks, fence corners,
+and outstanding landmarks are easily picked up
+by the enemy as obvious observation posts.</p>
+
+<p>If camouflage clothing is not available, other available
+clothing can be attached in irregular splotches of
+appropriate colors.</p>
+
+<p>Exposed skin reflects light and attracts the enemy’s attention.
+Even very dark skin will reflect light because
+of its natural oil. The buddy system is recommended
+when applying camouflage. Standard Marine Corps
+issue camouflage face paint sticks are two toned:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Loam and light green for light-skinned troops, in all
+but snow regions.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Sand and light green for dark-skinned troops.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Loam and white for troops in snow-covered terrain.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp50" id="i_04-2" style="max-width: 59.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_04-2.jpg" alt="Sketch of two images of a troop wearing a camouflage uniform aiming a rifle; in the first the troop is seated against a white background; in the second the troop is shown blended into the background of a wooded area.">
+    <figcaption class="sansserif">
+     Figure 4-2. Avoid Contrasting Backgrounds.
+    </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>Shiny areas (forehead, cheekbones, nose, and chin) are
+painted with a dark color. Shadow areas (around the
+eyes, under the nose, and under the chin) are painted
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_403"></span>with a light color. Skin that is exposed on the back of
+the neck and hands is painted with a two-color combination
+in an irregular pattern (see <a href="#i_04-3a">fig. 4-3</a>).</p>
+
+<p>When standard issue face paint sticks are not available,
+burnt cork, charcoal or lamp black can be used to
+tone down exposed areas of skin.</p>
+
+<p>Mud is used only in an emergency because it changes
+color as it dries and may peel off, leaving the skin
+exposed. Since mud may contain harmful bacteria,
+mud should be washed off as soon as possible.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp40" id="i_04-3a" style="max-width: 39.5625em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_04-3a.jpg" alt="Sketch of a face with face paint in splotches.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif smaller">
+    SPLOTCHING
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp40" id="i_04-3b" style="max-width: 39.5625em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_04-3b.jpg" alt="Sketch of a face with face paint in diagonal stripes.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif smaller">
+    STRIPING
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp40" id="i_04-3c" style="max-width: 39.5625em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_04-3c.jpg" alt="Sketch of a face with face paint using both splotching and striping techniques; the Figure 4-3 caption applies to all three of the above images.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif smaller">
+    SPLOTCHING &amp; STRIPING<br><br>
+    Figure 4-3. Face Camouflage.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p class="p1">Any equipment that reflects light should be covered
+with a nonreflective material that aids in the concealment
+of the weapon (for example, black electrical
+tape or mud). The straight line of the rifle or other
+infantry weapons may be very conspicuous to an
+enemy observer. The barrel and hand guard should be
+wrapped with strips of contrasting colored cloth or
+tape to break the regular outline. Mud or dirt dulls the
+reflecting surface of the stock, barrel, and bayonet
+where coloring has been worn. Lamp black may also
+be used on metal parts. The function of the weapon
+must not impaired.</p>
+
+<p>If time, material, and surroundings permit, a ghillie
+suit should be constructed. (Refer to MCWP 3-15.3,
+<cite>Scout Sniping</cite>.)</p>
+
+<h5>Aids to Camouflage a Position</h5>
+
+<p>To successfully camouflage a position, the scout must
+remember to&#x2060;—</p>
+
+
+<p class="hanging">• Camouflage the position as soon as it is occupied.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoid using too much material for camouflage.
+Even though natural materials are used, too much
+may make the object and its shadow stand out from
+its surroundings, thus attracting the attention of a
+hostile observer.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Inspect completed camouflage work from the enemy’s
+point of view to check effectiveness.</p>
+
+<h5>Continuous Camouflage</h5>
+
+<p>Camouflage around and on the scout’s position must
+be maintained in a fresh condition as wilted and dead
+foliage can give the position away. If the mission
+dictates that the position should be occupied for longer
+periods, wilted foliage should be replaced during
+periods of reduced visibility.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec4003">4003. INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>Principles</h5>
+
+<p>The principles of individual movement are as follows:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Scouts move from one concealed position to another.
+When not changing positions, they remain
+motionless.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The scout’s head is lifted slowly but steadily, without
+abrupt movements, to search for a new position.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Scouts select the next stopping place before moving
+and ensure it is not contained by the enemy.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Scouts change position on the run: springs up, runs
+with the body bent low, zigzags, quickly drops to
+the ground slightly to the right or left of the objective,
+then rolls or crawls to the desired position.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_404"></span>(Remember the phrase, “I’m up—he sees me—I’m
+down.”)</p>
+
+<h5>Rushing</h5>
+
+<p>When starting from the prone position&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Raise the head slowly and steadily and select a new
+position.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Lower the head slowly, draw arms inward, cock
+right leg forward, and prepare to rush.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Use one movement to raise the body by straightening
+both arms.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Spring to your feet, stepping off with the left foot.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Bend forward as low as possible when running.
+Never advance directly to the next position; always
+zigzag.</p>
+
+<p>When hitting the deck&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Stop.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Plant both feet in place.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Drop quickly to the knees and slide the hand to the
+heel of the rifle.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Fall forward, breaking your fall with the butt of the
+rifle. (To confuse the enemy, roll over after hitting
+the deck and roll into firing position with feet,
+knees, and stomach flat on the ground.)</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Keep head down if you do not intend to fire.</p>
+
+<p>When rolling over&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Hit the deck and assume the prone position.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Bring the rifle in close to the body, placing the rifle
+butt in the crotch.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Roll over swiftly to confuse any enemy observers as
+to final intended location. Never reappear at the
+same place you went down.</p>
+
+<h5>Low Crawl</h5>
+
+<p>The low crawl is used when&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Cover and concealment are scarce.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The enemy has good observation over the area in
+which the scout is moving.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Speed is not essential.</p>
+
+<p>To perform the low crawl, keep the body as flat as
+possible against the ground. Grasp the rifle sling at the
+upper sling swivel. Let the balance of the rifle rest on
+the forearm and let the butt of the rifle drag on the
+ground. Keep the muzzle off the ground.</p>
+
+<p>To start forward, push arms forward and pull right leg
+forward. To move forward, pull with arms and push
+with right leg. Change the pushing leg frequently to
+avoid fatigue.</p>
+
+<h5>High Crawl</h5>
+
+<p>The high crawl is used when&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Cover and/or concealment are available.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Poor visibility reduces enemy observation.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Greater speed of movement is required.</p>
+
+<p>To perform the high crawl, keep body off the ground.
+Rest weight on forearms and lower legs. Cradle rifle in
+arms, keeping the muzzle off the ground. Keep knees
+well behind the buttocks to stay low.</p>
+
+<p>Move forward, alternately advancing right forearm
+and left knee; then left forearm and right knee.</p>
+
+<h5>Movement Aids</h5>
+
+<p>Aids to movement include&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Carrying only necessities. Additional weight causes
+premature fatigue and impedes free movement.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Not disturbing birds or animals whose flight would
+betray your presence. If birds or animals are alerted,
+remain motionless under cover for a few minutes,
+as the enemy’s attention may also be attracted.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Moving during an incident that diverts attention,
+such as an airplane flight, a distant disturbance or
+sudden bursts of fire.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Fog, smoke, or even light haze offer concealment
+for movement; however, the enemy may have
+thermoimagery and night vision devices. Therefore,
+darkness and smoke cannot be used as easily.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Following a stream or road by staying as far away
+from them as possible while still keeping them in
+sight. Keep close to the dune line when moving
+along a beach.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• When moving through tall grass or similar growth,
+move when the wind blows, changing direction
+frequently. A straight route will be more readily
+noticed.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Whenever possible, avoid areas of soft ground so as
+not to leave tracks.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_405"></span></p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• When crossing a road or water obstacle, choose
+crossing sites where the enemy’s observation is restricted
+(an area in shadows or near a bend) and
+cross rapidly.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec4004">4004. ROUTE SELECTION</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>Prior to Movement</h5>
+
+<p>A scout and the immediate commander conduct a map
+reconnaissance before starting on a mission. This
+assists them in selecting the route according to available
+cover and concealment and any indicated enemy
+activity.</p>
+
+<p>Prior to and during the course of the mission, move to
+an observation point to visually reconnoiter the terrain
+for movement and select the tentative route. It may be
+necessary to make wide detours around open spaces or
+those containing enemy patrols or other enemy
+activity.</p>
+
+<p>Carefully study the country to be traversed and pay
+close attention to the general features, streams, ridges
+to be crossed, and their relation to the general direction
+to be taken (see <a href="#i_04-4a">fig. 4-4</a>).</p>
+
+<p>Make notes of terrain features and landmarks along
+the proposed route and rely on notes for guidance (see
+<a href="#i_04-6">fig. 4-5</a> on page 4-6). Additionally, determine the
+compass direction and readings for each change of
+direction at the start. Finally, learn the location of unit
+boundaries and observation/listening posts as well as
+general location of other friendly or scouting parties.
+Be sure to avoid man-made and natural obstacles as
+they will slow progress and overall success of the
+mission. If possible, use the local populace as a source
+of intelligence. When returning to friendly lines, avoid
+using the same route.</p>
+
+<h5>En Route</h5>
+
+<p>En route, the actual advance will be a series of movements
+from one observation point to the next. The
+distance and route will depend on cover and terrain.
+Assess the cover, terrain, and any enemy or civilian
+activity to determine whether or not to modify the
+approach or return routes. Unless the mission requires
+it, avoid danger areas (for example, houses, villages,
+potential assembly or bivouac areas, roads, and
+streams) that may give away your position by being
+observed by the enemy. When required to reconnoiter
+danger areas, choose a covered approach and return,
+and make entry or passage as quietly and quickly as
+possible. If part of a larger effort, the approach and
+return should be covered by observation and fires of
+the other members of the scouting party or patrol.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp71" id="i_04-4a" style="max-width: 31.25em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_04-4a.jpg" alt="An overhead map view of terrain with elevation changes, and tree features marked; a dashed line shows the direct route from the starting point to the objective; an arrow line shows an indirect route using terrain features for cover.">
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_04-4b" style="max-width: 31.25em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_04-4b.jpg" alt="A landscape view of the above map with a dotted line that shows how a scout traveling on the direct route would be visible on the forward slopes to the objective point.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 4-4. Choosing a Concealed Route
+    of Advance from a Map.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h5>Stream Crossings</h5>
+
+<p>When the crossing does not appear to be held by the
+enemy, advance upon it rapidly. If there are two or
+more scouts, one crosses while the other(s) provide
+protection. Note the length, width, depth, and approaches
+to a crossing. Observe the condition of the
+road or trail that crosses the stream, and report on the
+suitability of the crossing for use by tracked and
+wheeled vehicles. If the crossing is under observation
+by enemy, seek another crossing site or dash across to
+avoid detection.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_406"></span></p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp70" id="i_04-6" style="max-width: 58.625em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_04-6.jpg" alt="Sketch of a hypothetical route using arrows, azimuth degree turns, distances for each segment and landmarks at each turn.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 4-5. Proposed Route Sketch.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_501"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_5_Night_Scouting">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 5. Night Scouting</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>Night scouting presents many of the same problems encountered in day
+operations—such as cover, concealment, movement, and camouflage—as well as
+additional considerations. Knowledge of human eye construction and operation
+will enable maximum advantage under night conditions or poor visibility.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec5001">5001. NIGHT VISION</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Certain parts of the eye correspond to parts of a simple
+camera (see <a href="#i_05-1">fig. 5-1</a>). The lens focuses light entering
+the eye similar to a camera lens. The iris (colored part
+of eye) corresponds to the diaphragm of a camera,
+opening and closing to regulate the amount of light
+entering the eye through the pupil. The retina corresponds
+to camera film. Light rays strike the retina,
+form an image, and cause an impression to be transmitted
+to the brain through the optic nerve. In a
+camera, the image is formed and fixed on film.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp67" id="i_05-1" style="max-width: 61.1875em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-1.jpg" alt="Sketch of the cross-section of a human eye and one of a simple camera; the eye sketch shows the pupil, iris (camera diaphragm), lens, and retina (camera film) with rod and cone regions for night and vision, respectively; the camera sketch is a rectangle with an opening on one side identified as the diaphragm (iris), a lens on the inside of the opening, and a roll of film (retina) stretched across the opposite end of the interior of the rectangle.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 5-1. The Eye is Like a Camera.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>The retina is composed of cone cells and rod cells, so-called
+because of their shapes. Cone cells distinguish
+color, shape, and sharp contrast. Because they are
+activated by light conditions, they are blind during
+periods of low illumination. Rod cells produce a
+chemical substance called visual purple that makes
+them active in darkness, low illumination or night
+conditions. Rod vision distinguishes black, white,
+shades of gray, and general outlines.</p>
+
+<h5>Principles</h5>
+
+<p>To effectively “see” at night, the principles of night vision
+dark adaptation, off-center vision, and scanning
+are applied.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Dark Adaptation</i></h5>
+
+<p>Allowing the eyes to become accustomed to low levels
+of illumination is called dark adaptation. It takes the
+rod cells about 30 minutes to produce enough visual
+purple to activate them and enable the eye to
+distinguish objects in dim light. This may also be
+accomplished by staying in a red-lighted area, or by
+wearing red goggles for 20 minutes, followed by 10
+minutes in darkness (which allows the pupils to open
+wide). This method saves valuable time by allowing
+Marines to be in a lighted area to receive orders, check
+equipment, or perform some other function before
+moving into darkness.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Off-Center Vision</i></h5>
+
+<p>The technique of focusing on an object without
+looking directly at it is called off-center vision. When
+looking directly at an object, the image is formed on
+the cone region, which is not sensitive at night (see <a href="#i_05-2a">fig.
+5-2</a> on page 5-2). When looking slightly to the left,
+right, above or below an object, the image is formed
+on the area of the retina containing rod cells, which are
+sensitive in darkness. The most sensitive area varies in
+individuals, but is usually found by looking 6 to 10
+degrees away from an object; in effect, out of the
+corner of the eye (see <a href="#i_05-2b_1">fig. 5-3</a> on page 5-2).</p>
+
+<h5><i>Scanning</i></h5>
+
+<p>Off-center vision used to observe an area or an object
+is called scanning. When using rod vision, the visual
+purple in the rod cells bleaches or blacks out in 4 to 10
+seconds and the object observed disappears. As the
+visual purple in the rod cells in one area bleaches out,
+the eyes must slightly shift to use fresh rod cells. Eyes
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_502"></span>should be moved in short, abrupt, irregular movements
+over and around the target (see <a href="#i_05-3">fig. 5-4</a>).</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_05-2a" style="max-width: 102.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-2a.jpg" alt="Sketch of the cross-section of a human eye looking at a tank in the distance; lines are drawn from the upper and lower edges of the tank crossing each other at the lens of the eye, projecting the image of the tank on the cone region of the retina.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    <span class="allsmcap">LOOK DIRECTLY AT THE OBJECT SO THAT THE IMAGE IS FORMED ON THE CONE REGION (YOUR DAY EYES)</span><br><br>
+    Figure 5-2. Day Vision.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_05-2b_1" style="max-width: 106.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-2b_1.jpg" alt="Overhead view of a cross-section of the human eye with dotted lines drawn from the edges of the arc of line of sight (11:00 to 1:00) through the lens of the eye, projected onto the rod region of the retina.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    <span class="allsmcap">CENTER OBJECT AT 12 O’CLOCK AND LOOK SLIGHTLY TOWARD 11 O’CLOCK OR 1 O’CLOCK</span>
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_05-2b_2" style="max-width: 107.125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-2b_2.jpg" alt="Sketch of an overhead cross-section of the human eye and the dotted line of sight above the object being viewed, projecting the image onto the rod region of the retina.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    <span class="allsmcap">LOOK SLIGHTLY AWAY FROM THE OBJECT SO THAT THE IMAGE IS FORMED ON THE
+    ROD REGION (YOUR NIGHT EYES)</span>
+    <br><br>
+    Figure 5-3. Night Vision.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h5>Preserving Night Vision</h5>
+
+<p>Night vision is quickly destroyed if bright light is
+allowed to enter the eye. When entering a lighted area
+or when observing in a temporarily lighted area (illumination,
+flares), one eye should be closed and
+covered to preserve its night vision. When the light
+goes off, fades or the lighted area is exited, the night
+vision retained by the protected eye enables it to see
+until the other eye adapts to the darkness. Red light
+helps preserve night vision, but like white light, it can
+be observed at long distances.</p>
+
+<p>Factors that decrease night visual acuity include
+fatigue, lack of oxygen, long exposure to sunlight,
+alcohol, nicotine (within the past 48 hours), and age.
+When night vision has been attained, straining will not
+improve effectiveness; however, practice identifying
+objects at night will improve perception.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_503"></span></p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec5002">5002. APPEARANCE OF OBJECTS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Darkness not only makes objects difficult to see but
+also changes their appearance, distorts size, and blots
+out details. A tree visible against the night sky appears
+smaller than in the daytime because the twigs at the
+end of branches cannot be seen. A scout must train to
+identify objects by block outlines at night and cannot
+rely on details visible in daylight. Binoculars enlarge
+objects or parts of objects otherwise too small to be
+seen and help identify objects already spotted. Night
+observation devices increase night visibility and
+should be used whenever possible.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec5003">5003. SOUNDS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>At night, sounds become very important. By listening,
+a scout gains information about the enemy and by
+exercising care, keeps information from the enemy. A
+scout stops frequently to listen. Scouts must listen for
+long periods in perfect silence. Hearing is amplified
+with the mouth open; removing the helmet will reduce
+sound distortion. Sounds are transmitted a greater
+distance in wet weather and at night than in dry
+weather and in the daytime. By holding the ear close to
+the ground sounds of people walking and vehicles
+moving can be heard. Sound travels approximately
+370 meters a second. When a flash from a fired
+weapon is observed, the range to the weapons can be
+easily estimated by counting the time interval between
+the flash and hearing the report. For example, counting
+to three (one thousand one, one thousand two, one
+thousand three), indicates the distance is 1,110 meters.
+The cadence is determined by actual practice at known
+ranges.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp57" id="i_05-3" style="max-width: 55.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-3.jpg" alt="Sketch of the head and shoulders from the rear of soldier wearing camouflage. Arrows move in an S route to indicate the view of the soldier, as he scans left and right, passing a tree to ultimately see a tank.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 5-4. Scanning
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec5004">5004. SMELLS AND TOUCH</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A scout’s sense of smell can warn of enemy fires,
+cooking, motor parks, gasoline and diesel engines, and
+bodies of water. A scout must feel and recognize
+objects in the dark, and adjust and operate equipment
+quietly by sense of touch.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec5005">5005. CLOTHING AND WEAPONS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>All loose clothing must be secured (string or tape can
+be used) to prevent snagging on barbed wire,
+brambles, and brush. Helmet covers are worn to
+muffle sounds made by low branches.</p>
+
+<p>The belt buckle should be turned around to the side in
+order to move in a prone position without scraping the
+buckle against stones or hard surfaces. Identification
+tags can be taped together to prevent rattling. Hands,
+face, and neck can be blackened so skin does not
+reflect light or appear as white spots in the darkness.
+(Refer to <a href="#sec4002">para. 4002</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>Scouts are normally armed with rifles. Rifle slings
+should be taped to prevent rattling. All weapons parts
+should be checked for glare elimination measures.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec5006">5006. CONCEALMENT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Although total darkness provides concealment, scouts
+must observe the same principles of concealment
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_504"></span>during moonlight conditions as in the daytime. Scouts
+should assume enemy employment of night observation
+devices and observe the principles of night
+movement such that presence will not be disclosed by
+noise when close to the enemy.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec5007">5007. AIDS TO NIGHT SCOUTING</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Aids to night scouting include the following:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Carry out scouting missions close to or within
+hostile positions on dark or rainy nights.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Stifle a threatening sneeze by pressing fingers upward
+against the nostrils.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Stifle a threatening cough by applying slight pressure
+with the finger on the Adam’s apple.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Stop a ringing sound that interferes with hearing by
+yawning.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Speak softly rather than whispering if voice communication
+is necessary.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Move boldly and rapidly when taking advantage of
+any sound—such as shelling, rustling wind or distant
+firing—to push forward if firing is taking place.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoid shell craters and depressions in damp
+weather conditions if the enemy has employed
+chemical munitions.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Move the eyes constantly; concentrating on one
+object too long will strain them.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Take notice of the enemy’s use of flares. When the
+enemy employs flares, few enemy patrols are apt to
+be out; when flares are not employed, the enemy’s
+patrols are likely to be numerous.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Drop to a prone position upon hearing a flare being
+fired and before it illuminates. Remain motionless
+while it is burning. If open or moving when a flare
+bursts in the air, freeze or drop quickly in the split
+second after the flare illuminates while the enemy is
+blinded. You are an easy target for the enemy if the
+flare bursts in the air or on the ground behind you.
+Never look at a flare. If you activate a trip flare,
+drop to the ground and crawl away from the illuminated
+area.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Consider all patrols or individuals encountered as
+hostile until proven friendly. If encountering
+someone, crouch low, silhouetting the approaching
+person against the sky. At the same time, make
+yourself an indistinct target in case the person
+encountered is an enemy.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Return fire only to avoid capture if fired on when
+close to enemy positions.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec5008">5008. AIDS TO NIGHT MOVEMENT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Aids to night movement include the following:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Move silently.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Advance in stealthy legs. Each leg should follow
+some terrain feature that serves as a guide. When
+there are no terrain features to serve as guides,
+move in a straight or nearly straight line from one
+defined point to another, or maintain direction by
+using a compass.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoid running, except in an emergency.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Take advantage of sounds that may distract the
+enemy.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Fall silently without making an outcry.</p>
+
+<h5>Walking</h5>
+
+<p>When walking at night&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Place the heel down first. Balance the weight of the
+body on the rear foot until a secure spot is found.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Lift the forward foot high to clear any stiff grass,
+brush, or other obstruction.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Continue to balance body weight on the rear foot,
+lower the forward foot gently, toe first, to explore
+the ground for objects that might make noise. Step
+over fallen logs and branches, not on them.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Lower the heel of the forward foot slowly; gradually
+transferring body weight to that foot.</p>
+
+<h5>Creeping</h5>
+
+<p>The low crawl and high crawl are not suitable at night
+when very near the enemy because an easily heard
+shuffling noise results. Creeping is the recommended
+method of movement:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Creep at night on the hands and knees.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Use your hands to feel for twigs, leaves or other
+substances that might make a noise. Clear a spot to
+place your knee. Keeping your hand at that spot,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_505"></span>bring your knee forward until it meets your hand.
+Then place your knee on the ground and repeat the
+action with the other hand and knee.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp50" id="i_05-5a" style="max-width: 39.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-5a.jpg" alt="Sketch of a soldier in camouflage creeping on hands and knees with a rifle near his right hand.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Lay the rifle on the ground at your side and clear an
+area for it. Lift the rifle up and move it forward.
+Movement is slow and tedious, since it must be
+done silently.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp50" id="i_05-5b" style="max-width: 38.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-5b.jpg" alt="Sketch of a soldier in camouflage crawling on hands and knees holding a rifle with his right hand.">
+</figure>
+
+<h5>Hitting the Deck at Night (Right-Handed
+Shooter)</h5>
+
+<p>To safely hit the deck at night from the standing
+position&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<figure class="figright illowp30" id="i_05-5c" style="max-width: 27.375em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-5c.jpg" alt="Sketch of a soldier in camouflage, knees slightly bent, left hand extended downwards, carrying a rifle in his right hand with the stock under his armpit, preparing to kneel.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Advance your left leg, place
+the butt of the rifle in your
+right armpit with the hand
+remaining on the pistol grip,
+and grasp it with the right
+hand at the balance.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Quietly drop down on the
+right knee and left hand.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp50" id="i_05-5d" style="max-width: 34.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-5d.jpg" alt="Sketch of a soldier in camouflage with left knee on the ground, right hand holding rifle with right elbow resting on right knee, left hand extended to ground for balance.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Move the left leg carefully to the rear, and then
+move the right leg to the rear.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp80" id="i_05-5e" style="max-width: 48.375em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-5e.jpg" alt="Sketch of a soldier in camouflage lying on his left side, resting on his left forearm, looking left, holding rifle in right arm in preparation for shooting.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Lie flat on the ground, or take up a firing position if
+necessary.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp80" id="i_05-5f" style="max-width: 49.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-5f.jpg" alt="Sketch of a soldier in camouflage prone on the ground, aiming rifle to fire.">
+</figure>
+
+<h5>Wire Obstacles</h5>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp55" id="i_05-5g" style="max-width: 51.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-5g.jpg" alt="Two sketches of a soldier in camouflage. The upper sketch shows the soldier approaching a wire fence. The lower image shows the soldier crawling under a wire fence.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 5-5. Crossing Wire Silently at Night.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>A mission often requires a scout to pass through and
+work behind enemy positions. To accomplish this, the
+scout must be able to quietly pass through enemy wire
+obstacles and cross trenches. Cutting a gap in wire is
+time-consuming. If possible, walk over the low bands
+of enemy wire and crawl under the high bands (see <a href="#i_05-5g">fig.
+5-5</a>). Avoid movement along wire barriers, as enemy
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_506"></span>covering fires are generally planned parallel to them to
+take advantage of canalization and enfilade fire.</p>
+
+<p>To step over low wire at night, crouch low to view the
+strands against the sky. Grasp the top strand with one
+hand; with the other hand, reach forward and feel for a
+clear spot for foot placement without stepping on other
+strands or any object apt to make a noise. Raise the
+body up, still grasping the top strand of wire. To avoid
+catching the foot in another strand, lift the foot up and
+over, passing it close to the hand grasping the wire.</p>
+
+<p>If a high wire obstacle is encountered at night and wire
+cutters are not available, pass under the wire with your
+back on the ground. Grasp the lowest strands in your
+hands and hold them clear of the body while you slide
+under them.</p>
+
+<p>When cutting wire and working solo, cut a wire near a
+post (see <a href="#i_05-6a">fig. 5-6</a>), then dispose of all but one loose
+end. Grasp the wire close to a post and cut between
+your hand and the post, muffling the sound and
+keeping the loose wire in your grasp. When cutting
+wire in tandem, one firmly holds the wire with the
+hands positioned close to the cutters, in order to muffle
+the sound and prevent the loose ends from flying back,
+while the other one cuts. In both instances, the loose
+ends of the wire are bent back to form a passage.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp59" id="i_05-6a" style="max-width: 45.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-6a.jpg" alt="WHEN TWO SCOUTS CUT WIRE TOGETHER, ONE HOLDS WIRE FIRMLY, CLOSE TO CUTTERS, IN ORDER TO MUFFLE SOUND AND KEEP LOOSE WIRE FROM SNAPPING BACK WHILE THE OTHER SCOUT CUTS.">
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp59" id="i_05-6b" style="max-width: 45.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-6b.jpg" alt="IN CUTTING WIRE ALONE, A SCOUT GRASPS WIRE CLOSE TO A STAKE AND HIS HAND, THUS MUFFLING SOUND AND KEEPING LOOSE WIRE IN HIS GRASP TO PREVENT ITS SNAPPING BACK.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 5-6. Cutting Wire Silently at Night.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>Wrap a sandbag around the wire cutters and wire to
+deaden the sound.</p>
+
+<p>Do not cut a complete gap in the wire; cut only the
+bottom wire(s). Leave the top wire(s) intact to lessen
+the chance of discovery by the enemy.</p>
+
+<h5>Crossing Trenches</h5>
+
+<p>Before approaching a trench, wait outside the trench
+for a while and listen. Do not enter or cross a trench
+near its junction with a communication trench. Crawl
+silently up to the edge of the trench and look into it.
+Remove all loose dirt and rocks from the edge. If it is a
+narrow trench, spring up and jump across, sinking
+quietly to the ground on the other side and remaining
+there a moment to listen before proceeding. If the
+trench is wide, climb silently and slowly down into it
+and out the other side, using the revetment for support
+(see <a href="#fig_5-7">fig. 5-7</a>). Do not enter enemy trenches unless it is
+absolutely necessary in order to accomplish the
+mission. Ordinarily, work is better accomplished from
+outside the trench. Sentries usually pay more attention
+to sounds in front of them; therefore, if it is necessary
+to enter a trench, cross it first at the place where enemy
+observation is restricted, then approach from the rear.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp46" id="fig_5-7" style="max-width: 54.6875em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-7a.jpg" alt="Three actions sketched in one image. In the top section, a scout crawls silently up to a trench and looks in. If it is a narrow trench, he removes all loose dirt and rocks from the edge. In the middle section, the scout springs up and leaps across the trench, landing on one foot with the other behind to catch himself in case he misses the edge of the trench. Across the trench, the scout drops noiselessly to the ground and lies motionless before proceeding. In the bottom portion, for a wide trench, the scout climbs silently down one side and up the other making use of revetment for support.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 5-7. Crossing Trenches Silently at Night.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec5009">5009. LOCATING AND PLOTTING THE ENEMY AT NIGHT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>For night work, a scout must understand the use of a
+lensatic compass. (Refer to <a href="#sec2002">para. 2002</a>.) Using the
+lensatic compass, the scout can guide the platoon into
+position, locate adjoining elements of the command,
+keep direction when on patrol, determine the location
+of gaps in the enemy wire and the position of enemy
+out guards.</p>
+
+<h5>Locating Gaps in Enemy Wire</h5>
+
+<p>When searching for gaps in enemy wire, at least two
+lensatic compasses are needed: one to register the gap
+in the wire and the other for navigation. When a gap in
+enemy wire is located, lie outside the gap, keeping a
+distance of 10 meters from the barbed wire. Sight with
+the lensatic compass on a prominent point on the
+skyline in line with the gap. In selecting the prominent
+point in the skyline, pick one that appears on the map
+(i.e., hill mass, house, road junction). If the only
+prominent point available is one not identifiable on a
+map (i.e., a tree, destroyed vehicle, enemy position),
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_507"></span>use it. The exact location of this point can be fixed the
+next day by visual reconnaissance of the area from an
+observation point. When the needle rests&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Clamp it in place by lowering the eyepiece to the
+closed position</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Rotate the movable bezel ring until the luminous
+line is directly over the north end of the needle. The
+azimuth of the gap from the prominent point is now
+registered.</p>
+
+<p>The compass is carried back without further adjustment.
+The azimuth setting can be recorded later on a
+map (see <a href="#i_05-8">fig 5-8</a>).</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp50" id="i_05-8" style="max-width: 43.875em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-8.jpg" alt="Sketch of a soldier lying prone on the ground in a gap between sections of enemy wire on either side. He aims the sight of the compass on a prominent point on the skyline behind his own lines. He rotates the luminous index to a point over the north end of the needle and records the azimuth.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 5-8. Locating a Gap in Enemy Wire at Night.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h5>Locating Enemy Out Guards</h5>
+
+<p>At night, locate enemy guards by their sounds and
+failure to maintain light discipline. As sounds of the
+enemy are heard, and/or observations of the enemy
+made, shoot an azimuth with one compass. When the
+needle comes to rest, clamp the compass by lowering
+the eyepiece to the closed position.</p>
+
+<p>Note the time and nature of each sound, the estimated
+distance, and which compass was used to fix the location.
+Plot this data on a map then wait until the debrief
+to turn in the notes and compasses. See <a href="#i_05-9">figure 5-9</a>.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp54" id="i_05-9" style="max-width: 46.125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-9.jpg" alt="Sketch of a scout lying prone on the ground at a known point outside the enemy's position. He fixes his azimuth when sounds indicate the position of the enemy. In the lower right corner of the image is a sketch of a lensatic compass pointing in the same direction as the enemy outguard.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 5-9. Locating Enemy Outguards at Night.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p class="center strong sansserif"></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_508"></span></p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec50010">50010. ROUTES OF MOVEMENT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Prior to beginning a night mission, a scout studies the
+ground in detail from an observation point, air photos,
+and a map during daylight. The route of advance
+should be below the skyline. Avoid becoming a
+silhouette (see <a href="#i_05-10">fig. 5-10</a>).</p>
+
+<p>Unless the moon is bright, avoid, if possible, passing
+through woods, ditches, ravines, and brush, because
+noises of movement may lead to discovery. If the
+enemy is known to have night observation device
+capability, avoiding these kinds of terrain may not be
+possible. To avoid enemy ambushes, return by a different
+route from the advance and change routes on
+successive nights.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp48" id="i_05-10" style="max-width: 43.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_05-10.jpg" alt="There are two sketches in this image. The top is a view of a hillside at the skyline, with woods, brush, fence, and bushes on the left side, descending to a stream with grass in the foreground. On the right side is an open draw with little cover. On the left, white arrows trace the route of the scout coming over the hill in daylight under cover of the woods; the route works past the brush hedge, behind the scrub next to the fence, enters the bushes and continues to the bank of the river. On the right, black arrows show the route of the scout at night time, avoiding the woods and hedge to reduce noise, proceeding down the draw and advancing to the stream. The second sketch is of a skyline at night, identifying left to right: a steeple, house, trees, dead trees, stakes, ruins and jagged crests. For night missions without a compass, the stars and the silhouetted landmarks should be used as a guide.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 5-10. Difference Between Correct Routes by Day or Night.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_601"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_6_Observing_and_Reporting">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 6. Observing and Reporting</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>When sent out on a mission, a scout’s duties are to observe and report. The first
+five chapters covered scout protection measures and movement in enemy territory.
+This chapter discusses performing the assigned mission and reporting the
+mission after its completion.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec6001">6001. OBSERVATION POSTS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>Positions</h5>
+
+<p>The following guidelines apply to observation posts.
+See <a href="#i_06-1">figure 6-1</a>.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• When selecting observation posts, scouts should
+chose the least prominent position.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Scouts may occupy one or more observation posts.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• An observation post should not be manned for more
+than 24 hours.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• A selected observation post should be observed for
+10 to 15 minutes to ensure it is not occupied.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Scouts move to the chosen observation post by a
+concealed route.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• If the post is located on a hill, crawl to a position
+where the skyline is broken.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• If a tree is used, the position should have a background
+so as not to be silhouetted against the sky
+while climbing or observing.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• When leaving the observation post, a different route
+from that of the approach should be used.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• If a radio is used, its antenna should be located to
+provide clear communication to the controlling
+commander but masked from enemy observation
+and direction-finding equipment. Upon departure,
+scouts should remove the antennae from the observation
+post so as not to give away the position.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp59" id="i_06-1" style="max-width: 43.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_06-1.jpg" alt="Sketch of a landscape with a silhouetted figure in the lower center standing behind a tree. In front of him are various shrubs, trees, a stream, and fence; behind the fence is an open, rocky escarpment with trees at the top of the bluff, which is the desired observation post. The scout looks for evidence of hostile occupation. White arrows show the route of the scout to the post, using native cover, as discussed in the preceding guidelines.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 6-1. Method of Approaching an Observation Post.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h5>Observing</h5>
+
+<p>Using all senses available, be particularly alert for
+movement, objects, sounds, and smells inappropriate
+to the surroundings. While observing, avoid all unnecessary
+movement. If observing from a building,
+keep back from doors and windows.</p>
+
+<p>In daylight, look first at the ground nearest you. Begin
+observing close to your post and search a narrow strip
+50 meters or less deep, going from right to left parallel
+to your front; then search from left to right a second
+and similar strip farther away but overlapping the first.
+Continue to observe until the entire field of view has
+been searched (see <a href="#i_06-2a">fig. 6-2</a> on page 6-2).</p>
+
+<p>At night, use a night observation device. If one is not
+available, search the horizon with short, jerky
+movements, and short pauses. Look a little to one side
+of an object and then to the other. Lower the head
+close to the ground to view the object more clearly.
+Use low-powered field glasses to increase sight range.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_602"></span></p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp54" id="i_06-2a" style="max-width: 59.375em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_06-2a.jpg" alt="Sketch of a scout at the bottom of the image, lying on the ground facing the distant skyline. Various terrain features include open field, brush, a few trees, and at the horizon a barn and silo. Dotted lines in sequential arcs indicate 50 meters from the scout, 100 meters, 150 meters and 200 meters. A dashed line from the scout to the 50 meter zone indicates the direction the scout is looking.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 6-2. Method of Searching Ground.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec6002">6002. REPORTING</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>It is imperative that the scout accurately and
+completely report who, where, when, and what was
+observed to the proper authority upon mission
+completion. In most cases, a scout will not be equipped
+with a radio.</p>
+
+<h5>Verbal Reports</h5>
+
+<p>Verbal reports should be made when writing is
+impractical, when the information is not complicated
+or when the enemy is likely to intercept a messenger
+carrying a written message.</p>
+
+<h5>Written Messages</h5>
+
+<p>Written messages, preferred to verbal reports, are
+recorded in message book blanks issued for that
+purpose (see <a href="#i_06-2b">fig. 6-3</a>) and delivered to a higher
+authority as soon as possible. The NATO spot report
+(SPOTREP) should be reviewed as the written message
+is a NATO format.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp68" id="i_06-2b" style="max-width: 61.1875em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_06-2b.jpg" alt="Sketch of a form completed by hand using NATO spot report format discussed in the text. On the top line, upper left, are the letters Z, O, P, R, with the 'P' circled; in the upper center section, the date and time are given, '080850W Aug 88'; at the upper right the report is from '1st SQD 1st PLT Co B 1/7'. The second line reads 'TO: C.O. B Co 1/7'; the third lines lists classifications: 'TOPSEC, SECRET, CONF and UNCLAS' with the last circled; below is the body of the message that reads: '1. REIN EN CO, 2. MOVING, 3. 347623 DIR SW, 4. UNK, 5. 0745 880808, 6. 4 82 MM MORTARS AND 4 HEAVY MACHINE GUNS, 7. MY LOC: 339590, 8. WILL REMAIN IN POS.' At the bottom, the form is signed by R. D. Bassett Sgt USMC.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 6-3. Sample Field Message.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>The message body is brief, accurate, and clear; facts
+and opinions are distinguished. If secondhand information
+is reported, its source is included. Reports include
+all information of value, first about the enemy,
+and then about the originator. Information about the
+enemy should cover&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Size and/or strength.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Actions or activity.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Location and direction of movement.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Unit identification. (The designation of the enemy
+unit may be derived from unit markings, uniforms
+worn or through prisoner interrogation.)</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Time of observation.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Equipment and weapons.</p>
+
+<p>Messages are printed in block letters. Individual items
+of information are numbered and separated into
+paragraphs. If doubt exists as to message receipt by the
+commander, a summary of its contents is included in
+the next message. Information about the originator or
+writer should cover&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Location at the time of enemy observation (reference
+to an important terrain feature, by map coordinates,
+by the back azimuth from each of two
+definitely located points, or the back azimuth and
+distance from one known point).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Intentions. (Remain in position? Continue on the
+mission? Take other action?)</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_603"></span></p>
+
+<p>The message is carefully reread and if possible read by
+another person to ensure understandability. If a
+messenger is used, the messenger must read and
+understand the message in order to answer any
+questions the commander might have.</p>
+
+<h5>Sketch</h5>
+
+<p>Information difficult to describe may be given
+accurately on a simple sketch. The sketch may give all
+the necessary information or it may be used to
+supplement a written message. A military sketch is
+generally one of two types: simple or panoramic. The
+simple sketch is easily made and read.</p>
+
+<p><a href="#i_06-3">Figure 6-4</a> shows a simple sketch that has been
+included in the message itself. The sketch may be on a
+separate sheet of paper, but all of the necessary
+information must be contained in either the sketch, the
+message or both.</p>
+
+<p>The panoramic sketch is a picture of the terrain’s
+elevation in perspective, as seen from one point of
+observation. Although a panoramic sketch is not
+difficult to create, skill and training are necessary to
+enhance usefulness. <a href="#i_06-4a">Figure 6-5</a> on page 6-4 illustrates
+how to make a panoramic sketch.</p>
+
+<h5>Overlay</h5>
+
+<p>The same information sent back to higher headquarters
+on the sketch may be sent on an overlay, if the
+sender and the person to whom the message is to be
+sent have copies of the same map. <a href="#i_06-3">Figure 6-6</a> on page
+6-6 illustrates a simple overlay. The overlay is drawn
+on transparent paper as follows:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Orient the map and place it on a hard, flat surface.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Place the transparent paper over the part of the map
+of the object or information to be transmitted and
+hold the paper in this position.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Orient the overlay to the map by tracing in the
+intersecting grid lines at two opposite corners of the
+overlay. Write the correct number designation on
+the overlay. The cross made by the intersection is
+called a <dfn>tick mark</dfn> and enables the receiver to locate
+the exact area on the map covered by the overlay.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Sketch the object seen or the information to be
+transmitted on the tracing paper (the sheet on top of
+the map) in the exact location it would appear on
+the map (the sheet underneath the tracing paper). Explanatory notes are annotated in the overlay’s
+margin, arrows point to the objectives.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp42" id="i_06-3" style="max-width: 35.3125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_06-3.jpg" alt="Two-part sketch entitled at the top 'TREE CLUMP ON SMOKE HILL 071405 JULY 1999'. A map below the title includes a box at upper left identified as 'RED BARN ON HILL 406'; box at upper right identified as 'WHITE HOUSE WITH SMALL OUTBUILDINGS'; and at lower right a ragged circle indicating a tree with an 'X' beside it, showing the scout's position. From his position are arrows pointing to the two buildings with azimuth direction and distance for each. Below the map is a sketch showing the same information. The scout is lying prone on the ground behind a large tree in the foreground. Arrows corresponding to the arrows on the upper map point to the barn and house on the skyline in the distance. Next to the scout is this text: FIND THE AZIMUTH AND ESTIMATE THE DISTANCE TO THE OBJECT.">
+ <figcaption class="sansserif">
+Figure 6-4. Making a Simple Sketch.
+ </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Indicate with an “X” and an appropriate explanation
+the position from which the observer saw the object
+or obtained information.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Include title and scale of the map from which the
+overlay was made, date and hour the information
+was obtained, and signature of the observer on the
+overlay in the lower right-hand corner.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_604"></span></p>
+<br>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_06-4a" style="max-width: 38.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_06-4a.jpg" alt="First of a 4-part sketch showing an outline of the horizon and shape of a hillside.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    DRAW THE HORIZONTAL LINES
+    OF A LANDSCAPE.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+<hr class="full">
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_06-4b" style="max-width: 38.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_06-4b.jpg" alt="Second of 4-part sketch adding to the first sketch two buildings, a tower, and two clumps of trees.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    PUT IN THE PROMINENT POINTS.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+<hr class="full">
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_06-4c" style="max-width: 38.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_06-4c.jpg" alt="Third of 4-part sketch, adding notes above the prominent points: TRENCHES IN WHEAT FIELD, RED TANK AND BARN, AZIMUTH 22°.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    PUT NOTES ABOVE SKETCH. PUT
+    AZIMUTH FROM POSITION TO MOST
+    PROMINENT POINT IN THE SKETCH.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+<hr class="full">
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_06-4d" style="max-width: 38.375em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_06-4d.jpg" alt="Fourth of 4-part sketch adding title at the bottom of the sketch: 'Tree Clump on Smoke Hill 071405 July 1999' signed 'Bob Wilder'.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    GIVE SKETCH A TITLE. SHOW
+    WHERE IT WAS MADE, THE DATE
+    AND TIME, AND SIGN IT.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p class="center sansserif strong">Figure 6-5. Panoramic Sketch.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_605"></span></p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp65" id="i_06-5" style="max-width: 54.375em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_06-5.jpg" alt="Overlay sketch identifies items with scout's comments. In the upper left, a crenellation with X's and note: '1 ENEMY PLATOON CONSTRUCTING TRENCH AND BARBED WIRE'. Below and left is a black square with a flag icon, with note: '6 ENEMY TRUCKS WENT NORTH AND 2 WENT SOUTH BETWEEN 0700 AND 0800'. Near the truck icon is a circle with an arrow and note: 'I BELIEVE A MACHINEGUN IS LOCATED HERE'. At the lower left is a cross hatch with the number 40 at the northeast and 56 at the southeast ends.  In the upper right is a cross hatch with the number 41 at the northeast and 59 at the southeast ends. Below that is a T-intersection identified '535-D'. An X in the center is marked: 'MY POSITION WHEN MAKING OVERLAY'. Slightly below and to the right are two parallel lines with 'V' at each end identified as 'SOLIDLY BUILT CEMENT BRIDGE'. Below the bridge is a note: 'FORK BETWEEN BRIDGE AND STREAM, WATER IS 2 FEET DEEP, GRAVEL BOTTOM, SLOPING BANKS'. In the lower right corner is note: 'NOT TO SCALE, MAP EMMITSBURG SHEET, 0800 5 OCTOBER 1999', signed 'Bob Wilder'.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 6-6. Simple Overlay.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_701"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_7_Scouting_Fire_Teams">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 7.</span> Scouting Fire Teams
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>Upon completion of individual training, a Marine adapts this training to the
+functioning of the unit. The basic tactical unit for scouting is the fire team. Within
+the fire team, scouts normally work in pairs to furnish security and gather
+information. Information gathered by the individual scouts is passed to the fire
+team leader.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec7001">7001. POSITIONING</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>When a rifle platoon in the approach march is not
+preceded by adjacent units (left, right, front, and rear),
+it employs its own scouting elements. The scouting
+element for a platoon is usually one fire team; however,
+an entire squad may be used.</p>
+
+<p>A fire team used as a scouting element is called a
+scouting fire team and is controlled by the platoon
+commander, assisted by the squad leader. A squad
+leader whose squad is providing the scouting fire
+teams normally marches near the platoon commander
+to assist in the control of the scouting fire teams.</p>
+
+<p>A scouting fire team moves aggressively to cover the
+front of the advancing platoon and to locate the
+enemy’s position(s). It generally moves in a wedge or
+skirmisher’s formation. Normally, a scouting fire team
+is deployed on a frontage of 50 to 75 meters (10 to 17
+meters between each individual scout). The entire
+squad may be employed to cover a wider frontage. The
+platoon commander coordinates the movement of the
+scouting fire team(s) so as to protect the main body of
+the platoon from enemy fire from points within 400 to
+600 meters away, or in close terrain from points within
+the limits of enemy observation.</p>
+
+<p>Scouting fire team(s) should have enough firepower to
+overcome resistance from small enemy advanced posts
+and patrols; the intent is to make enemy riflemen and
+machine gunners open fire and disclose their positions.
+Without scouts in advance, the platoon may move into
+areas where enemy fire may prevent further advance
+or maneuver and inflict heavy casualties (see <a href="#i_07-1">fig. 7-1</a>).</p>
+
+<p>Scouting fire teams are covered by the platoon or,
+when the platoon is masked, the fire team leader
+ensures individual scouts are maneuvered and coordinated
+so that the fire team covers its own advance.
+The fire team leader constantly watches for signals
+from the platoon commander and remains in visual
+contact at all times.</p>
+
+<p>The distance between the scouting fire team and the
+platoon is terrain-dependent. The scouting fire team
+should not be beyond visibility of the platoon. In open
+terrain, the platoon commander usually directs the
+scouting fire team to move by bounds along a
+succession of locations designated by the platoon
+commander as intermediate objectives.</p>
+
+<p>Individual scouts should advance as stealthily as
+possible, while remaining consistent with their mission
+of reconnaissance to the front, taking advantage
+of cover without delaying the advance. An occasional
+glimpse of scouts constantly advancing over a wide
+front can make the enemy uneasy. It is this activity,
+and not the target the scouts offer, that may cause the
+enemy to open fire and disclose its location.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp60" id="i_07-1" style="max-width: 58.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_07-1.jpg" alt="Sketch of a landscape. A fence runs across the lower left corner. Just beyond are sketches of platoon members walking, in groups of four, one group to the left and the other to the right. Mid distance in the sketch is a smaller icon of the platoon commander between two large clumps of bushes. Beyond the commander is another fence extending across the sketch. In the far distance beyond the fence are four tiny icons of scouts across the landscape. At the horizon are indistinct trees and a skyline of hills.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 7-1. Position of Scouts Preceding
+    an Attacking Platoon.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>When fired upon, scouts must drop to cover and return
+fire only when necessary to complete the mission. If
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_702"></span>necessary, one scout reports back to the fire team
+leader who informs the platoon commander.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec7002">7002. LOCATING ENEMY POSITIONS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The key terrain of defensive positions are those points
+that afford extended observation over the ground
+where the attack must advance. The enemy will place
+machine guns and infantry to defend critical points.</p>
+
+<p>Members of a scouting fire team preceding an attacking
+platoon identify the probable enemy infantry and
+machine gun positions (see <a href="#i_07-2a">fig. 7-2</a>). They use concealment
+and cover to conduct their advance in order
+to discover the exact location of enemy positions.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec7003">7003. ACTION WITH AN ATTACKING PLATOON</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The scouting fire team reconnoiters to the front of the
+advancing platoon. As soon as the scouting fire team
+leader indicates the area is secure, the platoon
+advances and the scouting fire team moves forward.
+Squads within the platoon advance by bounds; at least
+one squad is positioned to support the other(s) by fire.
+Successive positions along the line of advance are
+selected and designated by the platoon commander as
+intermediate objectives, and reconnoitered by the
+scouting fire team before occupation. By conducting
+proper reconnaissance, surprise by the enemy or
+movement in the wrong direction may be prevented.</p>
+
+<h5>Movement</h5>
+
+<p>The distance between the scouting fire team and the
+front of the main body of the platoon is dependent on
+the mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and
+support available, and time available (METT-T). In
+close terrain, such as dense woods, the scouting fire
+team’s movements closely resemble those used for
+night operations. In approaching houses, woods, and
+villages, one scout of each pair covers the other while
+the latter reconnoiters (see <a href="#i_07-3a">fig. 7-3</a>).</p>
+
+<p>A scouting fire team moves forward aggressively to
+cover the front of the advancing platoon, usually
+adopting either skirmisher’s or wedge formation in
+order to be prepared to go into action immediately and
+to cover a wide frontage of 50 to 75 meters.</p>
+
+<br>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_07-2a" style="max-width: 35.375em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    PICK OUT POSSIBLE POSITIONS THAT HAVE A GOOD
+    FIELD OF FIRE, INDICATED BY ↓ ↑ BELOW.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_07-2a.jpg" alt="First of three sketches showing the same landscape. A fence is in the foreground, a scout is lying prone under the fence at the left; there are two bushes immediately beyond the fence. A stream runs from the lower right corner to the horizon in the center. At the upper right horizon is a clump of trees; beside the trees are several buildings.  A low wall is near the end of the stream at the center of the sketch.  A tall tree is to the immediate left of the stream and a bluff left of that.  Finally, a clump of trees extends from the bluff to the left edge of the sketch. There are arrows pointing to the trees and buildings at the horizon (both the clumps and the singleton), the top of the bluff, the low wall, and at the depression formed by the stream bed. These positions have good visibility.">
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_07-2b" style="max-width: 35.25em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    POSITIONS WHICH AFFORD THE ENEMY COVER ARE
+    POSSIBLE MACHINEGUN POSITIONS.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_07-2b.jpg" alt="The same landscape as seen in the previous sketch now only has arrows pointing to the clumps of trees and buildings at the horizon, and to the low wall.  These areas provide cover, making them suitable for machine guns, while the previously-marked positions are too exposed.">
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_07-2c" style="max-width: 35.375em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    POSITIONS FROM WHICH FLANKING FIRE CAN BE
+    DELIVERED ARE CONSIDERED THE MOST DANGEROUS.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_07-2c.jpg" alt="The same landscape as seen in the previous sketch now only has arrows pointing to the clumps of trees at the horizon.  These positions are more dangerous than the buildings or low wall because they are to the sides and allow an enemy to fire on the flanks.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="center sansserif strong smaller">Figure 7-2. Assessing Probable Enemy Machine
+Gun Positions.</p>
+
+<p>As a scouting fire team advances in open terrain, it is
+supported when possible by elements of the platoon;
+in close terrain, by mutual support within each fire
+team. Mutual support within the fire team is accomplished
+by the fire team leader and the automatic
+rifleman forming a team that supports by fire the
+advance of the rifleman and assistant automatic
+rifleman until they reach a location designated by the
+fire team leader. The rifleman and assistant automatic
+rifleman then support by fire the movement of the
+team leader and automatic rifleman. These successive
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_703"></span>points to which the sub elements of the fire team move
+are normally designated as fire team intermediate
+objectives by the fire team leader. The fire team leader
+sets as many fire team intermediate objectives as
+necessary to maintain mutual support within the team.
+This process is repeated until the team can be covered
+by other elements of the rifle platoon.</p>
+
+<p>A scouting fire team takes advantage of available
+cover and concealment without delaying its advance.
+The orders of the platoon commander govern the
+distance at which it precedes the platoon. The terrain
+and the probable position of the enemy affect the
+scouting fire team’s distance in front of the platoon. It
+may be as much as 400 to 600 meters in advance of the
+platoon. In open terrain, the platoon commander
+usually directs that the scouting fire team move by
+bounds to a succession of intermediate objectives. In
+close terrain or conditions of limited visibility, the
+scouting fire team is normally ordered to precede the
+platoon at the limit of visibility, maintaining visual
+contact with the platoon commander.</p>
+
+
+<table id="i_07-3a">
+<colgroup>
+<col style="width: 65%;">
+<col style="width: 35%;">
+</colgroup>
+
+<tr><td><img class="w100" src="images/i_07-3a.jpg" alt="Scouts in field."></td>
+
+<td class="tdl sansserif muchsmaller">With platoon in
+woods, scouts
+reach open field
+and see house
+ahead. They signal
+halt, meaning that
+the platoon should
+not advance
+beyond this point.<br>
+<br>
+Reconnaissance
+shows house to be
+clear. Scouts
+signal forward
+and proceed.</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<table>
+<colgroup>
+<col style="width: 35%;">
+<col style="width: 65%;">
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl sansserif muchsmaller">Crossing open space,
+scout sees position
+from which machine gun
+may sweep this
+area. He signals
+double time and
+points to the MG
+position meaning this
+area is dangerous.
+From that point
+platoon should hurry across.</td>
+
+<td><img class="w100" src="images/i_07-3b.jpg" alt="Scouts signaling."></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<table>
+<colgroup>
+<col style="width: 65%;">
+<col style="width: 35%;">
+</colgroup>
+<tr>
+<td><img class="w100" src="images/i_07-3c.jpg" alt="Scout in woods."></td>
+
+<td class="tdl sansserif muchsmaller">Scout reconnoiters
+for a short distance
+into woods. Finding
+edge of woods to be
+unoccupied, another
+scout returns to
+edge of woods and
+signals forward.
+They both enter
+woods and wait for
+platoon to close up.</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p class="center strong sansserif smaller">Figure 7-3. Conduct of Scouts Preceding a Platoon.</p>
+
+<h5>Action in Woods</h5>
+
+<p>When a scouting fire team is directed to advance over
+open ground to the edge of a woodline, two members
+of the team, preferably the rifleman and assistant
+automatic rifleman, reconnoiter inside the woodline
+while the remainder of the fire team covers them. It is
+not recommended they separate until finished with
+their reconnaissance of the far side of the danger area.
+Both members staying together can cover the same
+area using a zigzag reconnaissance and they are better
+equipped to overcome any opposition.</p>
+
+<p>In heavy underbrush and/or poor visibility, the
+rifleman and assistant automatic rifleman proceed into
+the woodline together for 50 to 60 meters. The two
+then separate, searching out either flank to the first
+high ground or limits of observation, probably 50 to
+100 meters (see <a href="#i_07-4">fig. 7-4</a> on page 7-4). After the initial
+search and out posting the limit of advance, the remaining
+scout signals the fire team forward.</p>
+
+<p>In light underbrush and/or good visibility, the assistant
+automatic rifleman remains at the edge of the
+woodline while the rifleman searches the woodline,
+(see <a href="#i_07-5">fig. 7-5</a> on page 7-5). The rifleman searches the
+woodline in a zigzag pattern, reports back to the
+assistant automatic rifleman, then moves to an outpost
+position at the limit of advance. In turn, the fire team
+leader signals the platoon commander that it is safe for
+the platoon to move forward.</p>
+
+<p>The fire team leader then moves the remainder of the
+fire team into the woods, joining up with the forward
+scout manning the outpost. The scouting fire team
+occupies and holds a line 50 to 75 meters within the
+woods and observes toward the direction of movement
+until the platoon closes up. The scouting fire team
+leader awaits further word from the platoon commander
+before moving the team further into the
+woods.</p>
+
+<p>When directed, the scouting fire team leader moves the
+team forward until they reach the far edge of the
+woods. The team is held at the edge of the woods and
+the fire team leader notifies the platoon commander of
+the situation. The platoon commander moves the
+platoon to a position where it can cover the scouting
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_704"></span>fire team as it exits the woods and directs the team
+leader to move out and continue the scouting mission.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_07-4" style="max-width: 60.8125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_07-4.jpg" alt="Sketch of the woods, indicated by two grey asymmetrical clumps, a route of travel using lines with arrows forming two side-by-side boxes surrounding the clumps of trees, and more amorphous grey clumps of woods outside and between the two boxes. Point A is identified at the lower right corner of the left box. Route proceeds 50-60 meters to the top of the box, to Point B. Route proceeds 50-60 meters to the left, turns 90 degrees to the left, proceeds 50-60 meters to the lower left corner, and turns left again, passing Point A. Point C is at the lower left corner of the right box; route of travel is upwards to the upper left corner of the right box, identified as Point D. Route proceeds to the right 50–60 meters, makes a right turn, proceeds to the lower right corner of the square, turns right to return to Point C, then turns right again, ending at Point D, at the top left corner of the right box.">
+</figure>
+<div class="indent50">
+  <p class="hanging sansserif muchsmaller strong">
+    A—Both scouts enter woodline.</p>
+  <p class="hanging sansserif muchsmaller strong">
+    B—Scouts separate.</p>
+  <p class="hanging sansserif muchsmaller strong">
+    C—Scouts link up; one scout stops and
+    signals all clear to the fire team leader.
+    The other scout again advances into
+    the woods.</p>
+  <p class="hanging sansserif muchsmaller strong">
+    D—Outpost position of scout.
+</p>
+</div>
+<p class="center sansserif small strong">Figure 7-4. Searching Edge of a Woodline (Dense Underbrush/Poor Visibility).</p>
+
+<p>A scouting fire team passing through woods ahead of
+its unit maintains a distance allowing visual and oral
+communications. If an obstacle is encountered,
+reconnaissance to its front and flanks must be carried
+out. When advancing along a road or path, scouts
+precede the platoon to provide necessary protection
+and to prevent surprise fire on the platoon. When
+crossing a road or path, they reconnoiter well to the
+flanks before signaling “all clear” to the platoon.</p>
+
+<p>The scouting fire team will not exit the woods until the
+arrival of the platoon commander, who will then be
+given an opportunity to alter the disposition or
+direction of march. The point where the platoon exits
+the woods is considered a danger area where the
+platoon is vulnerable to enemy fire. The scouting fire
+team is sent ahead to reconnoiter the danger area, as
+well as the next area to be occupied by the platoon.
+They signal back whether conditions require a halt, an
+advance or a quick rush across the open area. The
+scouting fire team leader must be continually on the
+lookout for signals from the rear.</p>
+
+<h5>Action Under Fire</h5>
+
+<p>When a scouting fire team is fired upon, they immediately
+take cover, locate targets, and return fire.
+The scouting fire team leader then determines&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Location of enemy (range and reference points).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Extent of position (location of flanks).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Types of positions (obstacles, bunkers, fighting
+holes, etc.).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Number of enemy.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Enemy weapons (machine guns, mortars, tanks,
+etc.).</p>
+
+<p>The platoon commander assesses the situation as
+quickly as possible based on the limited information
+obtained. Usually the platoon commander brings up
+the remaining squads, sets up a base of fire, and assaults
+the enemy position. Should the enemy position
+prove too strong for the platoon, the platoon remains
+engaged with the enemy as a base of fire until the remainder
+of the company is committed to clear the
+enemy resistance.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_705"></span></p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp77" id="i_07-5" style="max-width: 39.3125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_07-5.jpg" alt="Sketch showing route of travel to clear a woods. Trees are marked with asymmetrical clumps of grey, scattered over the sketch. Route of travel is indicated by arrows, starting at Point A at the bottom center of the sketch. From Point A, arrow points to left and upwards to Point B at left side of sketch; from Point B, right and upwards to right side of sketch to Point C; left and upwards to top left side of sketch to Point D; straight across 100–120 meters the right to Point E at the upper right corner of the sketch. From there, downwards and left to Point F, which is between Points B and D, then downwards and right to Point G, which is below Point C, returning downwards and left to Point A. From Point A, straight upwards 100–120 meters to Point H, at the top center of the sketch, between Points D and E.">
+</figure>
+
+<div class="indent15">
+<p class="hanging sansserif muchsmaller strong">A—Both scouts enter woods. Assistant
+automatic rifleman remains here and
+covers forward movement of rifleman.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging sansserif muchsmaller strong">B through G—Rifleman moves to these
+positions, stopping and observing
+before moving to next position.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging sansserif muchsmaller strong">G to A—Rifleman reports results of his
+search to the assistant automatic
+rifleman.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging sansserif muchsmaller strong">A to H—Rifleman moves to outpost
+position.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p class="center sansserif small strong">Figure 7-5. Searching Edge of a Woodline (Light
+Underbrush/Good Visibility).</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec7004">7004. ACTION WITH AN ENVELOPING UNIT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>When a platoon is given the mission to envelop an
+enemy position, a scouting fire team is employed for
+protection and reconnaissance in the same way as
+when the platoon is advancing in the approach march.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_801"></span></p>
+  <h2 class="nobreak" id="Part_2_Infantry_Patrolling">
+    <span class="smcap">Part 2. Infantry Patrolling</span>
+  </h2>
+
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_8_Fundamentals_of_Infantry_Patrolling">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 8. Fundamentals of Infantry Patrolling</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>This chapter begins Part 2 and provides basic information about infantry patrols;
+specifically, their purpose, types, and missions. Infantry patrol training is also
+addressed and keys to successful patrolling are presented. Subsequent chapters of
+this part cover patrol organization, preparation, movement, and reconnaissance
+actions.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec8001">8001. DEFINITIONS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A patrol is a detachment of ground, sea or air forces
+sent out for the purpose of gathering information or
+carrying out a destructive, harassing, mopping-up or
+security mission (Joint Publication [JP] 1-02). The
+mission to conduct a patrol may be given to a fire
+team, squad, platoon or company.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec8002">8002. RELATION OF PATROLLING TO SCOUTING</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Each patrol member must be knowledgeable in the
+principles of scouting and maintain membership of a
+larger team. To develop the teamwork skills required
+among the members of a patrol, additional training
+beyond the basic principles is necessary to become a
+well-trained scout. A patrol member must respond
+quickly to the decisions and orders of the patrol leader.
+There must be complete confidence among all
+members of the patrol and the confidence that they, as
+a team, will be successful in their mission.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec8003">8003. PURPOSE</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A commander must have current information about
+the enemy and the terrain in order to employ the unit
+effectively. Patrols are an important means of gaining
+this information and are used to destroy enemy
+installations, capture enemy personnel, perform
+security missions or prevent the enemy from gaining
+information. Modern warfare places a high premium
+on effective patrolling because units have larger areas
+of operations and can be threatened from all
+directions. As distances between units increase, more
+patrolling becomes necessary to prevent infiltration by
+guerrillas or small enemy units, as well as to maintain
+contact with friendly adjacent units. Active patrolling
+by numerous small groups is needed to locate the
+enemy and gather information on the enemy’s
+disposition, strength, morale, and weapons, as well as
+gather and confirm information about the terrain.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec8004">8004. TYPES OF PATROLS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>Classification as to Mission</h5>
+
+<h5><i>Reconnaissance Patrol</i></h5>
+
+<p>Reconnaissance patrols gather information about the
+enemy, terrain or resources. Relying on stealth rather
+than combat strength, they gather this information and
+fight only when necessary to complete the mission or
+to defend themselves. The distance covered by reconnaissance
+patrols varies based on the terrain and
+mission. The squad is ideally suited for reconnaissance
+patrol missions because of its relative small size and
+its experience of working together.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Combat Patrol</i></h5>
+
+<p>A combat patrol is a fighting patrol assigned missions
+that require engagement with the enemy in combat.
+Larger and more heavily armed than reconnaissance
+patrols, combat patrols have a mission to capture
+enemy documents, provide security, and capture or
+destroy enemy equipment and installations. Such
+action is ordinarily followed by a return to friendly
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_802"></span>positions. Regardless of the mission, the patrol reports
+any information concerning the enemy and terrain
+acquired during the accomplishment of the assigned
+mission. There are four types of combat patrols: raid,
+contact, ambush, and security (normally conducted by
+a Marine rifle platoon). A rifle platoon reinforced with
+crew-served weapons is normally considered the
+minimum size for contact, economy of force or
+ambush patrols. In some situations, such as the capture
+of a small enemy outpost, a rifle platoon could conduct
+a raid. However, a raid is a complex mission and, due
+to the organization of a raid force (command, reconnaissance,
+assault, support, security, and reserve elements),
+a rifle company is normally the smallest force
+assigned to a raid.</p>
+
+<h5>Classification as to Means of Movement</h5>
+
+<h5><i>Foot Patrols</i></h5>
+
+<p>Movement by foot is the most common means;
+however, there are inherent disadvantages. Foot
+patrols travel slowly and carry limited quantity and
+types of equipment and supplies. Range and area
+coverage is relatively restricted. Foot patrols also have
+apparent advantages in that they have fewer
+restrictions as to terrain that can be covered; are more
+difficult for the enemy to detect; provide thorough
+coverage within limits of range; and are generally not
+inhibited by weather.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Motorized Patrols</i></h5>
+
+<p>Where terrain and road networks permit, a motorized
+patrol overcomes the inherent disadvantages of the
+foot patrol. Mechanized forces require patrolling units
+that can keep pace with them. However, motorized
+patrols are restricted to certain types of terrain, and
+tend to bypass areas that may be advantageous to and
+occupied by enemy infantry.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Waterborne Patrols</i></h5>
+
+<p>Waterborne patrols move over seas, lakes, rivers and
+streams, canals, and other inland waterways. The
+water is either used as a medium of entry to an
+objective area or is the actual patrol route. Waterborne
+patrols are limited by the location of water routes in
+the terrain and tend to bypass areas that may be
+advantageous to and occupied by the enemy.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Helicopterborne Patrols</i></h5>
+
+<p>Where terrain is extremely difficult or the enemy
+situation precludes the use of vehicle or motorized
+patrols, helicopterborne patrols are a method or means
+to conduct a patrol.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec8005">8005. TRAINING</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Training is essential to successful patrolling.
+Premature and unordered actions by members of the
+patrol destroy coordination and control. Leaders are
+trained to issue their orders calmly to inspire
+confidence and discipline, and to avoid misunderstanding.
+Patrol members must work together and
+fight as a team. Training should develop the following
+skills:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Expertise in handling individual and special
+weapons, and familiarity with enemy weapons that
+may be captured.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Recognize camouflaged personnel, equipment, and
+defensive positions; ability to pick up fleeting
+targets, fire the rifle from any firing position.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Understand fire discipline and, after weapon firing,
+immediately change position (see <a href="#i_08-2">fig. 8-1</a>).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Quick and accurate observation skills, and the
+ability to recall and transmit clearly and briefly,
+both orally and in writing.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_08-2" style="max-width: 70.25em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_08-2.jpg" alt="Sketch showing scout changing positions after firing. Dark silhouette, identified with a 1 inside a circle, is seated to left of sketch in front of a boulder, firing into the woods on the right. Figure of a scout in camouflage, identified with a 2 inside a circle, is prone the foreground aiming weapon toward the woods at right of the sketch.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 8-1. Changing Position After Firing.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_803"></span></p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Recognize and quickly respond to improvised
+signals, visually or by sound.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Ability to swim with weapon and equipment.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Use issued or improvised camouflage suits and
+garnish helmet in order to blend with the surroundings.
+Smudge face, hands, and any bright surfaces
+of weapons and equipment with some substance,
+such as mud or charcoal, to prevent the reflection of
+light.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Silence self, equipment, and weapon.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Use antimalarial and water purification tablets.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Acclimation to temperature extremes.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Develop a sense of direction and learn how to
+follow a course by compass, stars, sun, flow of
+streams, prominent terrain features, and by
+observing other natural phenomenon. Learn to
+determine the distance traveled from a known point
+and to keep a record of azimuths and the distance
+traveled on each azimuth (dead reckoning).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Call for and adjust indirect fire assets.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Familiarization with all communications assets and
+the use of field expedient antennae.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec8006">8006. KEYS TO SUCCESSFUL PATROLLING</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Regardless of the category or means of conducting a
+patrol, the keys to successful patrolling are&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Detailed planning. Every portion of the patrol must
+be planned, all possible contingencies considered.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Productive, realistic rehearsals. Each phase of the
+patrol is rehearsed, beginning with actions in the
+objective area. Similar terrain and environmental
+conditions are used when conducting rehearsals.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Thorough reconnaissance. Ideally, the patrol leader
+will physically conduct a reconnaissance of the
+route and objective. Photographs and/or maps will
+be used to supplement the reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Positive control. The patrol leader must maintain
+positive control, this includes supervision during
+patrol preparations.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• All-around security. Security must be maintained at
+all times, particularly near the end of the patrol
+where there is a natural tendency to relax.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_901"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_9_Patrol_Organization">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 9. Patrol Organization</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>Organizing a patrol is a two-step process: the general organization of the entire
+patrol and the task organization of various patrol elements. Normally, the nature
+of patrolling does not permit long preparation periods and rehearsals to
+specifically build a unit for each mission. Accordingly, the patrol leader must
+combine unit integrity considerations with proven concepts of patrol organization.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec9001">9001. GENERAL ORGANIZATION</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The patrol leader establishes a patrol headquarters and
+elements to accomplish the mission.</p>
+
+<p>The headquarters is composed of the patrol leader and
+the personnel who provide support for the entire
+patrol, such as a forward observer, corpsman, and
+radio operator.</p>
+
+<p>The major subdivisions of reconnaissance and combat
+patrols are elements. The existing infantry structure
+(squads and fire teams) is reinforced as required. For
+example, a reinforced platoon tasked to conduct a
+combat patrol that will raid an enemy outpost could be
+organized as follows:</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+  <li class="ifrst">• Platoon headquarters (command element)</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Patrol leader (platoon leader).</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Assistant patrol leader (platoon sergeant).</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Navigator.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Radio operator (company tactical net).</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Radio operator (patrol tactical net).</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Corpsman.</li>
+
+  <li class="ifrst">• The first squad (security element) provides security en route to the objective area (the point, flank security, and rear security) and at the objective area (the flanks and the objective rally point).</li>
+
+  <li class="ifrst">• The second squad (support element) supports by fire for the attack, covering fire for the withdrawal, and supporting fires to cover the crossing of danger areas.</li>
+
+  <li class="ifrst">• The third squad (assault element) provides the assault force to attack and seize the objective; searchers to clear the objective; pacers, compass man, navigator, and the assistant patrol leader en route and back from the objective area.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>Any attachments a patrol may have (i.e., demolition
+team, scout snipers, and machine gun squad) will be
+added to the element that supports its function. For
+example, the demolition personnel should go with the
+unit conducting the attack, and scout snipers and
+machine gunners should stay with the support squad.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec9002">9002. TASK ORGANIZATION</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The preceding paragraphs described the elements
+necessary for a patrol to accomplish its mission. These
+elements reflect the internal functions or tasks required
+for the patrol to succeed. Depending on the
+METT-T, there are various methods of grouping these
+elements together. Task-organization is the further
+subdivision of patrol elements into teams that are
+required to perform essential tasks. In creating teams,
+unit integrity of infantry units should be maintained.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol is organized so each individual, team, and
+element is assigned a specific task, but capable and
+prepared to perform other tasks. This may not be
+possible for certain specialist tasks requiring a trained
+technician.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1001"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_10_Patrol_Preparation">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 10. Patrol Preparation</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>For a patrol to succeed, all members must be well trained, briefed, and rehearsed.
+The patrol leader must have a complete understanding of the mission and a
+thorough understanding of the enemy and friendly situations. The patrol leader
+should make a complete reconnaissance of the terrain to be covered (either visual
+or map), and must issue an order to the patrol, supervise preparations, and conduct
+rehearsals.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec10001">10001. MISSION</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The mission assigned to a patrol must be clear and
+oriented toward one objective with a specific task and
+purpose. More than one primary objective or indefinite
+missions invites confusion, casualties, and failure.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec10002">10002. FACTORS INFLUENCING PATROL SIZE</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The circumstances under which patrolling by infantry
+units is conducted make it necessary for combat
+patrols to be able to fight offensively, security patrols
+to defend themselves, and reconnaissance patrols to
+move quickly and only fight if necessary to break
+contact or defend themselves. The size of a patrol
+depends on METT-T.</p>
+
+<p>Generally, a patrol should contain the least number of
+members needed to accomplish the mission. Combat
+missions ordinarily require larger patrols than reconnaissance
+missions.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec10003">10003. COMMANDER’S DUTIES</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>Determining Patrol Requirements</h5>
+
+<p>The need for conducting patrols derives from the
+commander’s stated mission (issued by higher level
+commander) and other specified and implied tasks
+(secondary or supporting efforts necessary to
+accomplish the stated mission). This requires
+analyzing the unit’s mission and determining the
+necessary reconnaissance and/or combat tasks that
+must be performed. By considering the mission, along
+with time available, the commander develops the
+overall concept of operations to include the patrol plan
+and the specific tasks for each patrol.</p>
+
+<h5>Assigning Units</h5>
+
+<p>When assigning patrol missions, maintaining the
+integrity of the existing unit while considering the
+skills and experience of the unit and its leader are
+critical factors to the infantry commander. To provide
+operational depth and equitable apportionment of
+hazardous assignments, the commander ensures that
+each of the subordinate leaders and units develops the
+skills and experience necessary to conduct successful
+patrols. Assignment of patrol units must consider the
+commander’s concept of operations as a whole and the
+plans for subsequent employment of assigned forces
+after completion of the assigned patrolling mission.</p>
+
+<h5>Providing Adequate Time</h5>
+
+<p>The commander must allow the patrol sufficient
+preparation time by completing the mission analysis,
+estimate, and preparation of orders. The commander
+should use warning orders to alert subordinates to
+possible requirements and afford them the opportunity
+for concurrent planning.</p>
+
+<h5>Providing the Patrol Leader Information</h5>
+
+<p>The following information should be provided:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• A simple, straightforward explanation of the
+mission, particularly for night patrols.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• General routes (defined by checkpoints) or exact
+routes (defined by avenues of approach or other
+terrain features) to follow.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Enemy composition, disposition, and strength.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Location and activities of friendly troops.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Outposts or other security elements through which
+the patrol is to pass.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Terrain conditions.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Missions and routes of other patrols.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1002"></span></p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Time patrol is to depart and return.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Method of reporting information while on patrol
+(radio, messenger), place where messengers are to
+be sent, and place where the patrol leader is to
+report upon completion of the patrol.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The challenge and password to be used for exiting
+and re-entering friendly lines.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Special instructions such as locations to be avoided
+and essential elements of information higher
+headquarters is seeking.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Report barrier/obstacle plan of friendly units if
+known; support available from friendly unit (e.g.,
+medical evacuation [MEDEVAC], react force).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Fire support available.</p>
+
+<h5>Providing Special Skills and Equipment</h5>
+
+<p>There will be situations when the unit assigned to
+conduct a patrol does not have the necessary technical
+skills or equipment organic to it to successfully
+accomplish the patrol mission. In these cases, additions
+(attachments) are made to the unit, such as&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Machine gun and/or shoulder-launched, multipurpose
+assault weapon (SMAW) team and/or squad.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Forward observers (mortar/artillery).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Radio operator(s).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Combat engineers.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Tracked vehicle crewman to assess the ability to
+traverse the terrain.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Corpsman.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Other personnel (snipers, translators) as required.</p>
+
+<h5>Providing Miscellaneous Support</h5>
+
+<p>The commander must ensure that the patrol leader is
+provided with the food, water, ammunition, radios and
+batteries, maps, special clothing, and any other items
+required by the unit (including attachments) needed for
+the mission. Post-patrol support such as debriefings by
+intelligence personnel must also be planned.</p>
+
+<h5>Reviewing the Patrol Leader’s Plan and
+Preparations</h5>
+
+<p>Once the patrol leader receives the mission, conducts
+visual and/or map reconnaissance, and develops the
+plan, the commander confirms the patrol leader’s
+understanding of the mission and plan for accomplishing
+it. This discussion between the patrol leader
+and commander ensures that the patrol leader understands
+the commander’s intent and is properly
+prepared to provide the patrol leader an opportunity to
+ask for clarification or additional support, if required.</p>
+
+<h5>Debriefing the Patrol</h5>
+
+<p>Upon return of the patrol, the commander receives the
+patrol report at a debriefing attended by the patrol
+leader and all patrol members. The debriefing should
+be conducted as soon as possible following the
+patrol’s return, while information is still fresh in the
+minds of the patrol members. A patrol report, based on
+the information collected during the debrief, is generated
+and forwarded to the next higher commander.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec10004">10004. PATROL LEADER DUTIES</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The patrol leader organizes and prepares the patrol by
+using the six troop-leading steps to make the best use
+of resources available. These steps are to&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p>1. Begin planning.</p>
+
+<p>2. Arrange for reconnaissance and coordination.</p>
+
+<p>3. Make reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p>4. Complete the plan.</p>
+
+<p>5. Issue the order.</p>
+
+<p>6. Supervise.</p>
+
+<h5>Begin Planning</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader begins by evaluating all factors
+affecting the mission. He looks for possible courses of
+action that lead to a decision, and then transforms this
+decision into an order. The first step includes making
+an initial assessment and decision on using available
+time, issuing a warning order and initial preparatory
+tasks, and initiating his estimate.</p>
+
+<p>The initial planning effort assesses the time, assistance,
+and information available, and plans the
+proper use of each. Time allowances include reconnaissance;
+completion of the estimate and order; troop
+preparation; and such briefings, rehearsals, and inspections
+as required before beginning the patrol.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader reviews the mission and the attachments
+and/or support available and decides what
+preparatory efforts must begin immediately. Proper
+use of subordinates to manage these initial tasks
+during this period reduces preparation time and frees
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1003"></span>the patrol leader for proper planning and reconnaissance.
+A warning order is issued using a modified
+five-paragraph order format (situation, mission,
+execution, administration and logistics, and command
+and signal [SMEAC]) as a checklist. (Refer to app. A
+for specific information that a patrol warning order
+should contain within each checklist item.)</p>
+
+<p>Once the initial preparations are set in motion, the
+patrol leader begins estimating by analyzing the
+mission; considering the friendly, enemy, and
+operating environments; considering each course of
+action available against what the enemy might do;
+comparing the courses of action in terms of mission
+accomplishment, capabilities, and probable casualties;
+and choosing one that becomes the basis for concept
+and order. While the patrol leader should use and
+organize notes, estimates must be done quickly and
+accurately, particularly for immediate situations. To
+organize thinking, the patrol leader uses METT-T,
+which consists of:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Mission—the mission assigned to the patrol and
+how it relates to the mission of the commander who
+is sending the patrol.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Enemy—what is known or suspected of enemy
+presence and capabilities, habits and characteristics,
+and fighting techniques.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Terrain and weather—including ground, vegetation,
+drainage, weather, and visibility.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Troops and support available—friendly situation
+and support available.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Time available—the constraints and impact of time
+on preparation and mission accomplishment.</p>
+
+<p>The estimate begins with mission analysis, which is
+the most important part of the entire planning process.
+Here, the patrol leader considers the specified tasks of
+the mission assigned and identifies other significant
+actions (specified and implied tasks) that must be
+undertaken to accomplish the stated mission. These
+tasks are arranged in sequence of accomplishment.
+The tasks and sequence create the framework for
+developing courses of action for the patrol concept of
+operations.</p>
+
+<h5>Arrange for Reconnaissance and
+Coordination</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader arranges a personal reconnaissance
+to observe as far forward as possible and also
+coordinates with the appropriate commanders for the
+patrol’s “passage of lines” (see <a href="#sec11001">paragraph 11001</a> for
+complete definition) and supporting fires. The patrol
+leader also coordinates with other patrol leaders who
+may be operating in the same or adjacent areas and
+requests that the commander assigning him the patrol
+mission coordinate the patrol action with adjacent
+commanders, local security, and night defensive fires,
+as appropriate. The patrol leader may delegate any or
+all of these arrangements to the assistant patrol leader
+if the patrol leader requires the time for planning.</p>
+
+<h5>Make Reconnaissance and Complete the
+Estimate</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader uses personal reconnaissance to
+answer questions that arise from the map reconnaissance
+and METT-T evaluation. Specific points include
+passage points, lanes through obstacles,
+locations of friendly listening posts and observation
+posts, possible approach and return routes, enemy
+positions (if any), and intermediate observation points
+on the way to the objective.</p>
+
+<p>In selecting approach and return routes, the patrol
+leader chooses routes that best use concealment and
+avoid opposition and obstacles. To lessen the chances
+of ambush by the enemy, the return trip is planned
+along a different route. In addition to personal
+reconnaissance and review of the map and aerial
+photographs, the advice of other patrol leaders who
+already are familiar with the terrain and the objective
+area should be considered.</p>
+
+<p>After compiling information about the situation and
+possible time constraint, the patrol leader completes an
+estimate. The first step is developing courses of action,
+each of which will provide for movement to the
+objective area, mission accomplishment, and the
+return, based on the tasks and their sequencing
+identified in mission analysis. While the eventual
+concept of operations is presented in order of
+occurrence, the patrol leader must develop the courses
+of action by either backward or forward planning. In
+situations where the objective is well defined and there
+is sufficient information to plan the action for mission
+accomplishment (reconnaissance or combat), the
+patrol leader begins the scheme for accomplishing the
+mission at the objective and then, planning backwards,
+considers the options for getting there and back.</p>
+
+<p>The following sections on movement to and return
+from the objective area, reconnaissance missions, and
+combat missions discuss methods and options available
+to the patrol leader in developing the courses of
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1004"></span>action. The principal variables between courses of
+action will be who, where, and how in the following:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Patrol task organization.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Routes to the objective area.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Observation point(s) (reconnaissance patrol), ambush
+site, form of maneuver, type of ambush
+(combat patrol), fire support plan.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Return routes.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader then mentally considers the progress
+of each course of action (a map or simple sketch is a
+useful aid) against expected and unexpected enemy
+action. By comparing the options against each other
+and prospective enemy opposition, the patrol leader
+chooses the course of action that has the best chance of
+success. Included in this mental preview process is the
+time to determine the patrol plan for unexpected
+contingencies (enemy attack/counterattack, casualty
+handling). These contingency actions, together with
+the selected course of action, become the patrol concept
+of operations.</p>
+
+<p>Once the patrol leader determines the scheme of
+maneuver, the fire support required to accomplish the
+mission is addressed including the fire power organic
+to the patrol and what additional indirect fire support
+will have to be provided by other units. When
+planning for indirect fire support, the patrol leader
+considers the following questions:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Will artillery, mortar, or close air support be
+required at the objective area (combat patrols)?</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• What artillery and mortar targets exist along the
+routes to and from the objective area that can be
+employed by the patrol if it encounters the enemy
+during movement (reconnaissance patrols and
+combat patrols)?</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• What additional fire support will be required to
+cover the patrol’s movement from the objective
+area back to the friendly area once the enemy is
+aware of the patrol’s actions at the objective area
+(combat patrols)?</p>
+
+<p>The effect that casualties have upon the patrol depends
+upon many factors. Generally, more casualties can be
+expected in a combat patrol than in a reconnaissance
+patrol. A patrol may continue on to the objective carrying
+its casualties, send them back with a detail of
+Marines, abort the mission and return the entire patrol
+with the casualties, or call their parent unit for
+assistance.</p>
+
+<p>Some factors that determine what action the patrol
+leader takes are: patrol’s mission; unit’s standing
+operating procedure for handling wounded; number of
+casualties and nature of their injuries; availability of
+aid, helicopters or other means of casualty evacuation.
+Helicopter evacuation should only be used for the
+most serious casualties. For infantry units conducting
+patrols in proximity to the enemy, helicopter evacuation
+of casualties may compromise the patrol’s mission
+and force the patrol to return to friendly positions
+before the mission is completed.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader determines the requirement for
+nuclear, biological, and chemical (NBC) defense
+equipment. Gas masks should always be carried due to
+the availability of riot control agents (RCAs) to the
+enemy. If chemical or biological agents have been
+employed in the area that the patrol must pass through,
+protective garments will have to be worn by patrol
+members for part of or the entire patrol. Wearing extra
+clothing and carrying extra equipment affects the
+speed of the patrol’s movement. A contingency plan
+for post patrol decontamination must be developed.</p>
+
+<h5>Complete the Plan</h5>
+
+<p>At this point, the patrol leader has completed the basic
+thinking necessary for accomplishing the assigned
+mission. The patrol leader prepares the patrol order to
+spell out the details, assign tasks to subordinates, and
+explain the entire endeavor for ease of understanding
+by the other members of the patrol.</p>
+
+<h5>Prepare the Order</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader’s order contains more detailed
+information than discussed in the warning order.
+Orders follow the prescribed five-paragraph order
+format but contain greater detail. The patrol order is a
+modified 5-paragraph order; the major modifications
+are to paragraphs 3a and 3c. The format for the order is
+contained in <a href="#AppxB">appendix B</a>.</p>
+
+<h5>Issue the Order</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader asks for a status report on the initial
+preparatory tasks assigned to subordinate leaders and
+specialists when the warning order was issued. When
+the patrol leader has completed planning and initial
+preparations have progressed to the point where the
+patrol order may be issued, the members of the patrol
+are assembled. Roll call is taken to ensure all patrol
+members are present, then the prepared order is issued.
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1005"></span>This will be the only opportunity for the patrol leader
+to issue detailed instructions. The mission, in particular,
+must be unmistakably clear so that once the
+patrol is committed, all subordinate leaders can act
+with unity of purpose.</p>
+
+<p>Whenever possible, the patrol leader should have a
+Marine, such as the navigator, build a terrain model
+using dirt, sand, twigs, etc., explaining the concept of
+operations for movement to the objective area, actions
+at the objective area, and the return. Terrain models
+provide patrol members with a clear and simple layout
+of the area of operations and key terrain.</p>
+
+<h5>Supervise</h5>
+
+<p>Inspections and rehearsals, vital to proper preparation,
+are conducted even though the patrol leader and patrol
+members are well experienced in patrolling. Inspections
+determine the patrol’s state of physical and
+mental readiness.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader inspects before rehearsals to ensure
+completeness and correctness of uniform and equipment.
+The following areas are checked:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Camouflage.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Identification tags, Geneva Convention cards.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Prescribed equipment, weapons, and ammunition
+are available and serviceable.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Tape and other items are used to “silence” equipment
+(prevent noise produced during movement).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Items that could provide information to the enemy
+(e.g., letters and papers) remain behind.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Unnecessary equipment and excess weight remain
+behind.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader questions each patrol member to
+ensure the following is known:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The mission, planned routes (primary and alternate),
+and the fire support plan of the patrol.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The individual’s role: what to do and when to do it.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• What others are to do and how their actions impact.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Challenges and passwords, codes, reporting times,
+radio call signs, frequencies, and any other pertinent
+details.</p>
+
+<p>There is usually a period of time between final rehearsal
+and departure. The patrol leader reinspects just
+before departure to ensure all equipment is still in
+working order and the unit is ready to embark on the
+mission.</p>
+
+<p>Rehearsals ensure the operational proficiency of the
+patrol. Plans are checked and needed changes are
+made. The patrol leader verifies the suitability of
+equipment. It is through rehearsals that patrol
+members become thoroughly familiar with the actions
+to take during the patrol.</p>
+
+<p>If the patrol will operate at night, both day and night
+rehearsals are conducted. Terrain similar to that over
+which the patrol will operate is used. All actions are
+rehearsed. If time is limited, the most critical phases
+are rehearsed. Action at the objective is the most
+critical phase of the patrol and is always rehearsed.</p>
+
+<p>An effective method is to talk the patrol through each
+phase, describing the actions and having each member
+perform individual duties. When satisfied, the patrol
+leader walks the patrol through all phases of the patrol
+using only the signals and commands to be used
+during the actual conduct of the patrol. Rehearsals
+continue until the patrol is thoroughly familiar with
+the plan. The rehearsal is also used to test the soundness
+of the patrol order and patrol organization.</p>
+
+<p>After the rehearsal, the patrol leader makes final adjustments
+to the plan and patrol organization based on
+what was learned during the rehearsal and from other
+sources, such as the S-2 and adjacent patrols. When
+this is completed, the patrol leader issues final instructions
+to subordinate leaders noting any changes
+made in the patrol organization or plan. While the
+subordinate leaders are briefing the remainder of the
+patrol members, the patrol leader reports to the commander
+stating that the patrol is ready to begin the
+mission. The patrol leader also coordinates the location
+and time that the patrol can test fire all weapons
+prior to departure.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1101"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_11_Movement_to_and_Return">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 11. Movement to and Return
+    from the Objective Area</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>This chapter provides guidance to patrol leaders for movement to and return from
+the objective area. Action in the objective area depends on whether the patrol is
+assigned a reconnaissance mission, combat mission or security mission. Chapters
+12 and 13 provide detailed guidance on these types of missions.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec11001">11001. PASSAGE OF LINES</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A passage of lines is an operation in which a force
+moves forward or rearward through another force’s
+combat positions with the intention of moving into or
+out of contact with the enemy. (JP 1-02)</p>
+
+<p>During the initial preparation for the patrol, the patrol
+leader selects a patrol assembly area and reconnoiters
+the area of passage designated by the commander. In
+coordination with the unit commander responsible for
+the area of passage, the patrol leader identifies gaps or
+lanes in minefields and wire obstacles and locates
+local security elements through which the patrol will
+pass. The patrol leader also checks the route from the
+patrol assembly area to the passage point or contact
+point where the patrol will depart friendly lines. If
+possible, both the route to the passage point and the
+route through the frontlines should be concealed from
+the enemy’s view.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader also reconnoiters the area for return
+passage of lines and coordinates with the unit
+commander responsible for the area of passage for
+passage points and lanes as necessary. The patrol
+leader observes these points from the direction that the
+patrol will use upon return to friendly lines, if
+possible, to aid in recognition upon return. The patrol
+leader provides the forward unit with information
+about the size of the patrol, general route, and
+expected time of return. The manner of challenge and
+recognition of the returning patrol should be
+coordinated in detail.</p>
+
+<p>Upon return to friendly forward local security squads
+and/or frontlines, the patrol leader leaves the patrol in
+a covered position and moves forward with a radio
+operator and at least one Marine for security to make
+contact with the friendly unit in the manner agreed.
+After contact is made and recognized, the patrol leader
+rejoins the patrol and takes them to the passage point,
+personally checking in each member.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec11002">11002. ORGANIZATION FOR MOVEMENT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The patrol’s task organization establishes the elements
+and teams needed to accomplish the mission in
+the objective area and to and from the objective. The
+patrol leader determines the formation(s) in which the
+patrol moves to the objective area.</p>
+
+<h5>Formations</h5>
+
+<p>The proper use of patrol formations is critical to the
+patrol’s success. The squad and fire team formations
+described in FMFM 6-5 (proposed MCWP 3-11.2),
+<cite>Marine Rifle Squad</cite>, also apply to infantry patrolling
+formations. Because the movement of the patrol must
+be concealed from the enemy, the patrol normally
+moves through terrain that provides concealment.
+Control of the patrol in this type of terrain is difficult;
+thus the column formation, which is easily controlled,
+is normally used. However, as various types of terrain
+are encountered, the patrol leader uses the same considerations
+in determining the appropriate formation
+used in other infantry operations.</p>
+
+<p>The standard squad and fire team formations are
+adaptable to a patrol. The patrol may change formations
+en route to match the situation and terrain.
+The patrol leader may have to sacrifice some control
+for better dispersion or give up some speed for greater
+stealth and more security. Other considerations
+include&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Visibility, weather, terrain, and vegetation will
+influence dispersion and control of individuals and
+units. These factors may also affect the enemy; if
+visibility is good for the patrol, it is also good for
+the enemy. Two pieces of luminous tape worn on
+the back of the collar will aid in control and
+movement on dark nights. The collar is turned
+down when near the enemy. The tape can also be
+worn on the back of the cap, but should be covered
+or removed when near the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1102"></span></p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Preserving the integrity of fire units (fire teams and, if
+attached, machine gun teams) is of primary importance. If team
+members are detached from a machine-gun team, the unit integrity
+is lost and effectiveness is reduced. The patrol leader must also
+position fire units so as not to mask their fires.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• All-around defense of the patrol must not be sacrificed under any
+circumstances. The conventional squad and platoon formations provide
+adequate firepower in any direction required. When attachments
+are made to the patrol, the attachments are positioned within the
+formation to enhance the firepower of the patrol. If a fire unit,
+such as a machine gun team or squad, is attached, it is incorporated
+into the all-around defense of the patrol by modifying the
+conventional formation (see <a href="#i_11-2">fig. 11-1</a>). It is permissible to employ
+machine gun teams individually during movement. However, assault
+rocket squads and teams should be employed primarily as rifle fire
+units for movement. Firing the SMAW or AT-4 from within a patrol
+formation can present a serious back-blast danger to patrol members
+and should only be fired on the patrol leader’s direction.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Time allotted for mission accomplishment is also a major
+consideration. In selecting the formations, the patrol leader
+must consider the speed of the movement required to meet the time
+constraints (if any) imposed on the patrol. If required to meet a
+time schedule, a formation that permits rapid movement should be
+used. Speed, however, must never be permitted to force the patrol
+leader to make rash tactical decisions.</p>
+
+<h5>Exercise of Control</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader is positioned for best control over the
+patrol. The assistant patrol leader moves at or near the
+rear of the patrol. Other subordinate leaders move with
+their elements. All patrol members assist by staying
+alert and passing on signals and orders. A signal to halt
+may be given by any patrol member, but the signal to
+resume movement is given only by the patrol leader.</p>
+
+<p>Arm-and-hand signals are the primary means of
+communication within a patrol and should be used
+exclusively when near the enemy. All members must
+know the standard infantry signals (refer to FMFM 6-5),
+as well as any special signals required, and be alert
+to receive and pass them to other members.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader should speak just loudly enough to
+be heard. At night, or when close to the enemy, the
+patrol leader halts the patrol and has subordinate
+leaders come forward. They speak in a low voice and
+then pass the information to their subordinates by
+moving from member to member.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp34" id="i_11-2" style="max-width: 28.8125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_11-2.jpg" alt="This sketch uses icons to represent a squad patrol formation arranged from top to bottom, with the top being the front and the bottom being the rear. The first fire team at the front is acting as the point, with an automatic rifleman and assistant present, as well as three riflemen, with one acting as a rear observer.  This point team may precede the main body of the squad by 100 meters. At the rear of the first fire team is the squad leader, followed by an 81 millimeter mortar team with forward observer and rear observer. A second fire team with team leader comes from behind, providing security. A rifleman protects the left flank while an automatic rifleman and assistant protect the right. A machine gun squad of seven men is at the rear of the second fire team. The third fire team comes after and includes an automatic rifleman and assistant. The team leader is just behind, with a rear observer coming in last to provide security, staying within 50 meters or visibility range of the last Marine of the patrol.">
+</figure>
+<p class="center strong sansserif small">Figure 11-1. Squad Patrol with Attached Mortar Forward Observer Team and Machine Gun Squad.</p>
+
+<p>Radios provide a means of positive control within a
+large patrol; however, radios should be used only
+when arm-and-hand signals or face-to-face contact
+between the patrol leader and subordinate leaders is
+impractical. When close to the enemy, words are
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1103"></span>spoken into the microphone with hands cupped over it
+in a low voice.</p>
+
+<p>Other sound signals may be used if the patrol leader is
+sure they serve the purpose intended. Planned sound
+signals are rehearsed before starting on the patrol.
+Sound signals used must be simple, natural sounds that
+are few in number and easily understood. Bird and
+animal calls are seldom satisfactory.</p>
+
+<p>Infrared equipment, such as the sniper scope and
+infrared filters for the flashlight, may be used as means
+of sending and receiving signals and maintaining
+control at night.</p>
+
+<p>Luminous tape may be used to assist in control at
+night. Small strips on the back of the cap or collar of
+patrol members aid in keeping visual contact with the
+front member. However, the luminous tape must be
+covered when near the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>An important aspect of control is accounting of
+personnel, especially after crossing danger areas,
+enemy contacts, halts, and exiting and re-entering
+friendly lines. The patrol leader may arrange for the
+last member to send up the count automatically after
+crossing danger areas, enemy contact, and halts. In
+large patrols or when moving in a formation other than
+a column, subordinate leaders check members and
+report the count to the patrol leader by the quickest
+method appropriate to the circumstances.</p>
+
+<h5>Navigation</h5>
+
+<p>One or more members are assigned as navigators for
+the patrol. Their function is to assist the patrol leader
+in maintaining direction by the use of the compass.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader assigns at least two members as
+pacers to keep track of the distance from point to
+point. The average of their count is used to approximate
+the distance traveled. Pacers are separated
+so they do not influence each other’s count. Pacers
+must know how to convert their own paces to meters.</p>
+
+<p>The route is divided into increments, with each
+increment starting at a recognizable point on the
+ground. The pacers begin their counts from zero at the
+beginning of each leg. This makes the pace count
+easier to keep and checks for accuracy.</p>
+
+<p>The pace count is sent forward when the patrol leader
+turns to the member behind and in a low voice says,
+“send up the pace” or uses the arm-and-hand signal of
+tapping his boot. This signal is passed to both pacers,
+who in turn send up the pace count in meters; for
+example, “two-hundred” or “one-seven-five.”</p>
+
+<p>Patrol members must understand that the counts of
+both pacers are sent forward. The patrol leader must
+know the counts of both men in order to check them.</p>
+
+<h5>Security</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol is dispersed consistent with control, visibility,
+cover, and concealment. Scouts are employed to
+the front, flanks, and rear of the patrol to provide
+security. For the patrol members traveling in the main
+body of the patrol, areas of responsibility are assigned
+to the front, flanks, and rear. Scouts are the eyes and
+ears of the patrol leader. They move when and where
+directed by the patrol leader and maintain contact with
+the patrol leader at all times, except when momentarily
+obscured by vegetation or other terrain features.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Front</i></h5>
+
+<p>Small patrols (squad size) may employ from one scout
+up to a fire team as the point, depending on the enemy
+situation, terrain, and route being followed by the
+patrol. Normally, squad-size patrols will use two
+scouts as the point. The point is responsible for
+investigating the route of advance immediately to the
+front of the patrol.</p>
+
+<p>The point moves as far ahead of the patrol as visibility
+and terrain permit. When visibility is good, the point
+may precede the main body by as much as 100 meters.
+The point travels right and left ahead of the patrol,
+searching the area over which the patrol will pass.</p>
+
+<p>The point maintains direction by knowledge of the
+general route to be followed and visual contact with
+the patrol leader. The patrol leader or the navigator
+ensures that the point is proceeding correctly.</p>
+
+<p>The point, which stays far enough ahead of the patrol
+to provide security, is not a trail breaker for the patrol.
+If the point loses contact with the patrol, the point
+waits for the main body to catch up or moves rearward
+if contact is not quickly regained.</p>
+
+<p>One of the navigators may be positioned with the
+point. One or more members works as the point while
+the other is the navigator.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1104"></span></p>
+
+<h5><i>Flank</i></h5>
+
+<p>Flank security for a patrol of squad size or less may be
+provided by using one or two members on either flank.
+If two scouts are assigned to a flank, one is positioned
+to observe the patrol leader and the other works farther
+out from the patrol. The scout who must observe the
+patrol leader remains within a maximum distance of
+100 meters. The scout farther out remains in sight of
+the inside scout but normally does not move more than
+20 or 25 meters away and remains prepared to relieve
+flank security regularly. Moving through dense woods
+or jungle may render the use of flank security
+impractical because of reduced visibility. In such
+cases, it moves with the patrol itself, but maintains
+observation to its assigned flanks.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Rear</i></h5>
+
+<p>A small patrol normally has only one rifleman
+assigned as rear security. An interval between the
+member assigned as rear security and the last Marine
+of the patrol is maintained at the limit of visibility, up
+to 50 meters. This member maintains rear security for
+the patrol by constantly observing to the rear.</p>
+
+<h5>Halting</h5>
+
+<p>Speed of movement is slower at night than in day
+patrols and reduces the danger of a Marine becoming
+separated from the patrol. The patrol occasionally
+halts to observe and listen for enemy activity; this is
+called a security halt. Upon signal, when reaching a
+danger area and periodically throughout movement en
+route, every member freezes in place, remains quiet,
+observes, and listens. It may be necessary to call a
+security halt just after departing friendly areas and just
+before entering friendly areas.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol may halt briefly to send a message, eat, rest,
+check direction, or make a reconnaissance. The area
+selected should provide adequate concealment and
+cover, as well as favor the defense. All-round security
+is established and the patrol leader ensures all members
+move out when the patrol resumes movement.
+(For extended halts, see paragraph 11005.)</p>
+
+<h5>Infiltration</h5>
+
+<p>The disposition of enemy forces may sometimes
+prevent a patrol from entering the enemy occupied
+area as a unit; however, pairs of scouts or fire teams
+may slip through without being discovered. (Refer to
+FMFM 6-5 for infiltration techniques and procedures).</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec11003">11003. CONTROL MEASURES FOR MOVEMENT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>Checkpoints</h5>
+
+<p>A checkpoint is a predetermined point on the surface
+of the Earth used as a means of controlling movement,
+a registration target for fire adjustment or reference for
+location (JP 1-02). Checkpoints are a means of control
+between the parent unit and the patrol. These locations
+are decided upon and coordinated before the patrol
+leaves, so that both the patrol members and parent unit
+will know the patrol’s location when it reports in. The
+parent unit can follow the progress of the patrol
+without transmitting coordinates over the radio that
+the enemy could monitor.</p>
+
+<h5>Rally Points</h5>
+
+<p>A rally point is an easily identifiable point on the
+ground where units can reassemble and reorganize if
+they become dispersed (MCRP 5-12C). It should
+provide cover and concealment, be defensible for at
+least a short time, and be easily recognized and known
+to all patrol members. All rally points are considered
+and identified as tentative rally points until they are
+occupied, found to be suitable, and designated as rally
+points by the patrol leader.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Initial Rally Point</i></h5>
+
+<p>The initial rally point is within friendly lines where the
+patrol can rally if it becomes separated before
+departing the friendly area or before reaching the first
+en route rally point. It may be the assembly area where
+the patrol waits while the patrol leader contacts the last
+friendly position through which the patrol will pass.
+The location of the initial rally point must be coordinated
+with the forward unit commander.</p>
+
+<h5><i>En route Rally Points</i></h5>
+
+<p>En route rally points are between the initial rally point
+and the objective rally point; and from the objective
+rally point back to the point where the patrol reenters
+friendly lines. They are determined as the patrol passes
+through a likely area that is suitable for a rally point.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Objective Rally Point</i></h5>
+
+<p>The objective rally point is located nearest the
+objective where the patrol makes final preparations
+prior to approaching the objective. It also serves as a
+location where the patrol reassembles after completing
+actions on the objective. The objective rally point must
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1105"></span>be suitable to accommodate those activities
+accomplished prior to actions on the objective. This
+position must provide the patrol concealment from
+enemy observation and, if possible, cover from enemy
+fires. It may be located short of, to a flank or beyond
+the objective. It should be out of sight, sound, and
+small-arms range of the objective area. The patrol
+leader’s reconnaissance of the objective is made from
+this position; it is the release point from which patrol
+elements and teams move to the objective to accomplish
+the mission.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Rally Point Selection</i></h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader selects likely locations for tentative
+rally points during reconnaissance or map study. A
+tentative rally point must be confirmed and announced
+after examination proves suitability. A tentative initial
+rally point and a tentative objective rally point are
+always selected and identified in the patrol order. If
+necessary, the patrol leader selects additional rally
+points en route as suitable locations are reached. When
+the patrol reaches a danger area that cannot be
+bypassed, such as an open meadow or stream, the
+patrol leader selects a rally point on both the near and
+far side. If good locations are not available, the patrol
+leader designates the rally points in relation to the
+danger area. The patrol leader will say, for example,
+“50 meters this side of the trail” or “50 meters beyond
+the stream.”</p>
+
+<h5><i>Rally Point Use</i></h5>
+
+<p>The initial rally point and en route rally points are
+designated to enable the patrol to reassemble if it is
+unavoidably separated or dispersed. Identifying
+features are pointed out. The patrol leader ensures that
+the information is passed to all patrol members. When
+crossing a danger area, a near side rally point and a far
+side rendezvous point are designated. These rally
+points should only be used when all other methods of
+retaining control of the patrol have failed. The success
+of the patrol may be jeopardized if it is dispersed and
+cannot rally expeditiously.</p>
+
+<p>If the patrol has left the friendly area and becomes
+dispersed, patrol members return to the last designated
+rally point (the initial or an en route rally point) unless
+the patrol leader gives other instructions.</p>
+
+<p>As previously noted, the patrol leader selects two rally
+points at the near and far sides of danger areas that
+cannot be bypassed. If the patrol becomes separated or
+dispersed at a danger area, and there has been no
+enemy contact, the patrol should reassemble at the
+rally point on the far side of it. If, however, the patrol
+is separated or dispersed at a danger area as a result of
+enemy contact, members who have already crossed the
+danger area assemble and reorganize at the rally point
+on the far side; members who have not crossed
+assemble and reorganize at the rally point on the near
+side. In the absence of the patrol leader and unless
+directed otherwise, the senior member at the rally
+point on the near side takes charge, attempts to move
+the rallied patrol members to the rally point on the far
+side, and rejoins the remainder of the patrol.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Rally Point Actions</i></h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader plans the actions to be taken at rally
+points and instructs the patrol accordingly in the patrol
+order. Planned actions at the initial rally point and en
+route rally points must provide for the continuation of
+the patrol as long as there is a reasonable chance to
+accomplish the mission. Plans for actions at rally
+points should provide for&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Recognition signals for assembly at rally points.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Minimum number of members and maximum amount of waiting time required before the senior member at the rally point moves the rallied patrol members onward toward the objective or returns to friendly lines.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Instructions for patrol members who find themselves alone at a rally point.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec11004">11004. PRECAUTIONS AT DANGER AREAS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A danger area is any place where the patrol is
+vulnerable to enemy observation or fire (open areas,
+roads, trails, and obstacles such as barbed wire,
+minefields, rivers and streams, and lakes). Any known
+or suspected enemy position the patrol must pass is
+also a danger area. The patrol leader plans for crossing
+each danger area and includes these plans in the order.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol reconnoiters the near side of a danger area
+first, then the patrol leader sends scouts to reconnoiter
+the far side. Once the scouts report that the far side is
+clear of the enemy, the remainder of the patrol crosses
+the danger area. As each individual or group crosses
+the danger area, they are covered by those remaining
+and by those who have successfully crossed. Enemy
+obstacles are avoided since they are usually covered
+by fire.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1106"></span></p>
+
+<p>In crossing a river, the near bank is reconnoitered first;
+then the patrol is positioned to cover the far bank.
+Scouts are sent across to the far bank. After the far
+bank has been reconnoitered and the scouts report that
+it is clear of the enemy, the patrol crosses as rapidly as
+possible. This may be done individually or in pairs. If
+crossing the river requires swimming, the patrol uses
+improvised rafts to float equipment, weapons, and
+ammunition across. (Refer to MCRP 3-02C, <cite>Water
+Survival Handbook</cite>.)</p>
+
+<p>A road or trail is crossed at or near a bend or where the
+road is narrow. Observation is restricted and, if the
+enemy is present, the patrol is exposed as short a time
+as possible. The near side is reconnoitered first, then
+scouts are sent across to reconnoiter the far side. This
+includes reconnoitering the tentative rally point on the
+far side. Once the scouts report “all clear,” the
+remainder of the patrol crosses rapidly and quietly.</p>
+
+<p>If the patrol must pass close to an enemy position, it
+takes advantage of battlefield noises to cover the
+sounds of movement. If supporting fires are available,
+the patrol leader can call for them to divert the
+enemy’s attention as the patrol passes.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec11005">11005. HIDE</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>When a patrol is required to halt for an extended
+period in an area not protected by friendly troops, the
+patrol moves into a location which, by the nature of
+the surrounding terrain, provides passive security from
+enemy detection. Such an assembly area is termed a
+<dfn>hide</dfn>. To establish a hide&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Cease all movement during daylight hours to avoid detection.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Hide the patrol for an extended period while the patrol leader conducts a detailed reconnaissance of the objective area.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Rest and reorganize after extended movement.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Reorganize after a patrol has infiltrated the enemy area in small groups.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader’s plan must include tentative hide
+locations when the patrol’s mission dictates an
+extended halt within enemy areas. These tentative
+locations must be confirmed by actual ground
+reconnaissance prior to occupation by the patrol. The
+plan for a hide includes both passive and active
+security measures.</p>
+
+<p>Passive security measures are&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoid built-up areas.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Select an area remote from all human habitation.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoid known or suspected enemy positions.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoid ridge lines, topographic crests, valleys, lakes, and streams.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoid roads and trails.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoid open woods and clearings.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Select areas offering dense vegetation, preferably bushes and trees that spread out close to the ground.</p>
+
+<p>Active security measures&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Establish security covering all likely avenues of approach into the site.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Establish communications (wire, radio, signal, runner) with posted security to provide early warning of enemy approach.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Select an alternate area for occupation if the original hide is compromised or found unsuitable.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Plan for withdrawal in the event of discovery.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Establish an alert plan with a certain percent of the personnel awake at all times.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Organize the elements of the patrol so necessary activities can take place with a minimum amount of movement.</p>
+
+<p>The size of the area physically occupied by a patrol in
+a hide and the number of security posts required are
+governed by the terrain, quantity and quality of cover
+and concealment, and size of the patrol.</p>
+
+<p>If the situation permits, a hide can also be used as the
+final preparation position and/or objective rally point.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec11006">11006. IMMEDIATE ACTIONS UPON ENEMY CONTACT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A patrol may make contact with the enemy at any
+time. Contact may be through observation, a meeting
+engagement or ambush. Contact may be visual, in
+which the patrol sights the enemy but is not itself
+detected. When this is the case, the patrol leader can
+decide whether to make or avoid physical contact,
+basing his decision on the patrol’s assigned mission
+and capability to successfully engage the enemy unit.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1107"></span></p>
+
+<p>When a patrol’s assigned mission prohibits physical
+contact (except that necessary to accomplish the
+mission), its actions are defensive in nature. Physical
+contact, if unavoidable, is broken as quickly as
+possible and the patrol, if still capable, continues its
+mission.</p>
+
+<p>When a patrol’s assigned mission permits or requires
+it to seek or exploit opportunities for contact (as in the
+case of a combat patrol), its actions are offensive in
+nature, immediate, and positive.</p>
+
+<p>In patrolling, contacts (visual or physical) are often
+unexpected at very close ranges, and short in duration.
+Effective enemy fire often provides leaders little or no
+time to fully evaluate situations and issue orders. In
+these situations, immediate action provides a means
+for swiftly initiating positive offensive or defensive
+action, as appropriate.</p>
+
+<p>Two types of physical contact with the enemy are
+meeting engagement and ambush. Meeting
+engagement is a combat action that occurs when a
+moving force, incompletely deployed for battle,
+engages an enemy at an unexpected time and place. It
+is an accidental meeting where neither the enemy nor
+the patrol expect contact and are not specifically
+prepared to deal with it. An ambush is a surprise attack
+from a concealed position.</p>
+
+<h5>Immediate Actions</h5>
+
+<p>Immediate actions are designed to provide swift and
+positive small unit reaction to visual or physical
+contact with the enemy. They are simple courses of
+action in which all Marines are well trained. Minimal
+signals or commands are required and they are
+developed as needed for the combat situation. The
+signals can, in many cases, be initiated by any member
+of the unit. It is not feasible to attempt to design an
+immediate action drill to cover every possible
+situation. It is better to know the immediate action drill
+for each of a limited number of situations that may
+occur during a patrol. Arm-and-hand signals
+associated with immediate actions—such as FREEZE,
+ENEMY IN SIGHT, and HASTY AMBUSH RIGHT
+or LEFT—are contained in FMFM 6-5 (proposed
+MCWP 3-11.2).</p>
+
+<h5><i>Immediate Halt</i></h5>
+
+<p>When the patrol detects the enemy but is not itself
+detected, the situation requires the immediate, in-place
+halt of the patrol. The first member visually detecting
+the enemy gives the silent signal for FREEZE. Every
+member halts in place, weapon at the ready, and
+remains absolutely motionless and quiet until further
+signals or orders are given.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Air Observation and/or Attack</i></h5>
+
+<p>These actions are designed to reduce the danger of
+detection from aircraft and casualties from air attack.</p>
+
+<p>When an enemy or unidentified aircraft that may
+detect the patrol is heard or observed, the appropriate
+immediate action drill is FREEZE. The first member
+hearing or sighting an aircraft that may be a threat
+signals FREEZE. Every member halts in place until
+the patrol leader identifies the aircraft and gives
+further signals or orders. Members of the patrol must
+not look up at the aircraft as sunlight can reflect off
+their faces even when camouflaged.</p>
+
+<p>When an aircraft detects a patrol and makes a low
+level attack, the immediate action drill air attack is
+used. The first member sighting an attacking aircraft
+shouts, “AIRCRAFT,” followed by the direction of
+the incoming attack: FRONT, LEFT, REAR or
+RIGHT. The patrol moves quickly into line formation,
+well spread out, at right angles to the aircraft’s
+direction of travel. As each member comes on line, the
+member hits the ground, using available cover, then
+positions the body perpendicular to the aircraft’s
+direction of travel, to present the shallowest target
+possible (see <a href="#i_11-8">fig. 11-2</a> on page 11-8). Between attacks
+(if the aircraft returns or if more than one aircraft
+attacks), patrol members seek better cover. Attacking
+aircraft are fired upon only on command of the patrol
+leader.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_11-8" style="max-width: 62.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_11-8.jpg" alt="The left half of this sketch shows an overhead view of an aircraft approaching four patrol members from the left. The patrol has moved into a line on the right from top to bottom, positioning themselves perpendicular to the aircraft's movement to spread out possible targets. The right half shows a view from the ground, with the aircraft approaching from the background. The patrol is prone on the ground and their bodies are positioned perpendicular to the aircraft's movement. The firing lines from the aircraft are shown to indicate how this formation forces the aircraft to dilute its attack over a wide area.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 11-2. Immediate Action, Air Attack.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h5><i>Meeting Engagement</i></h5>
+
+<p><b>Hasty Ambush.</b> This immediate action is used to
+avoid contact and to prepare to initiate an unplanned
+ambush on the enemy. It may often be a subsequent
+action after the command freeze. When the signal
+HASTY AMBUSH is given (by the point member,
+patrol leader or another authorized patrol member), the
+entire patrol moves quickly to the right or left of the
+line of movement, as indicated by the signal, and takes
+up the best available concealed firing positions (see
+<a href="#fig11-3">fig. 11-3</a> on page 11-9). The patrol leader initiates the
+ambush by opening fire and shouting, “FIRE”; thus
+ensuring initiation of the ambush if the weapon
+misfires. If the patrol is detected before this, the first
+member aware of detection initiates the ambush by
+firing and shouting. The patrol leader may decide not
+to initiate the ambush in order to avoid contact unless
+the patrol is detected. When used as an offensive
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1108"></span>measure, the enemy is allowed to advance until he is in
+the most vulnerable position before the ambush is
+initiated. An alternate means for initiating the ambush
+is to designate an individual (for example, point or last
+member) to open fire when a certain portion of the
+enemy unit reaches or passes that member.</p>
+
+<div class="parallel-page" id="fig11-3">
+ <div class="left-page">
+<img src="images/i_11-9a1.jpg" alt="This sketch uses icons to depict a patrol moving from the bottom to the top of the image, with an enemy approaching from the right (in a separate image).  At the head of the patrol is a point man.  Behind him are two security team members, one guarding the left flank and the other the right.  Following behind on the right is a radio operator and the patrol (or squad) leader, while on the left are four additional patrol members.">
+ </div>
+ <div class="right-page">
+<img src="images/i_11-9a2.jpg" alt="Sketch of a left-pointing arrow with 'ENEMY' on it. This arrow heads the text below.">
+<p class="hanging strong muchsmaller sansserif">
+• FREEZE is signaled by the
+individual who thinks he
+sees or hears the enemy.</p>
+<p class="hanging strong muchsmaller sansserif">
+• Once the enemy is identified,
+the PL signals HASTY AMBUSH
+if the situation permits.</p>
+<p class="hanging strong muchsmaller sansserif">
+• Patrol members move into
+a line formation stealthily,
+avoiding detection.</p>
+<p class="hanging strong muchsmaller sansserif">
+• The PL or first man detected
+by the enemy initiates the
+ambush. Remainder of patrol
+moves rapidly on line. The PL
+conducts an immediate
+assault or breaks contact.</p>
+<p class="hanging strong muchsmaller sansserif">
+• The PL normally gives the
+signal to initiate the ambush
+if the patrol is not detected.
+He wants to maintain the
+option of using the hasty
+ambush offensively or
+defensively.</p>
+ </div>
+</div><!--end parallel page-->
+
+<p class="center strong sansserif smaller">Figure 11-3. Immediate Action, Hasty Ambush.</p>
+
+<p><b>Immediate Assault.</b> This immediate action drill is
+used defensively to make and quickly break undesired
+but unavoidable contact (including ambush) and
+offensively to decisively engage the enemy (including
+ambush). When used in a meeting engagement,
+members nearest the enemy open fire and shout,
+“CONTACT,” followed by the direction of the
+incoming attack: FRONT, LEFT, REAR or RIGHT.
+The patrol moves swiftly into line formation and
+assaults (see <a href="#i_11-9b">fig. 11-4</a>).</p>
+
+<h5><i>Defensive Measures</i></h5>
+
+<p>When used defensively, the assault is stopped if the
+enemy withdraws and contact is broken quickly. If the
+enemy stands fast, the assault is carried through the
+enemy positions and movement is continued until contact
+is broken.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Offensive Measures</i></h5>
+
+<p>When used offensively, the enemy is decisively
+engaged. Escapees are pursued and destroyed until orders
+to break contact are given by the patrol leader. If
+the patrol is fired upon from beyond 50 meters, the
+patrol must break contact as quickly as possible and
+continue the mission. If it engages the enemy any
+longer than necessary to break contact, it may put the
+mission in jeopardy.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Fire and Maneuver</i></h5>
+
+<p>Fire and maneuver is one means to break contact. One
+portion of the patrol returns the enemy fire while
+another portion moves by bounds away from the
+enemy. Each portion of the patrol covers the other by
+fire until contact is broken by all.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Clock System</i></h5>
+
+<p>The clock system is another means to break contact.
+Twelve o’clock is the direction of movement of the
+patrol. The patrol leader shouts a direction and a
+distance. For example: “TEN O’CLOCK-TWO
+HUNDRED,” means the patrol should move in the
+direction of ten o’clock for 200 meters. Patrol
+members keep their same relative positions as they
+move so the original formation is not disrupted.
+Subordinate leaders must be alert to ensure that the
+members of their elements and teams receive the
+collect order and move as directed.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Counter Ambush</i></h5>
+
+<p>When a patrol is ambushed, the immediate action drill
+used depends on whether the ambush is a near ambush
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1109"></span>(the enemy is within 50 meters of the patrol) or a far
+ambush (the enemy is beyond 50 meters of the patrol).
+Fifty meters is considered the limit from which the
+ambushed patrol can effectively launch an assault
+against the enemy.</p>
+
+<p class="p2 break"><b>Near Ambush.</b> In a near ambush, the killing zone is
+under very heavy, highly concentrated, close range
+fires. There is little time or space for members to
+maneuver or seek cover. The longer they remain in
+the killing zone, the greater the chance they will
+become casualties. Therefore, if members in the killing
+zone are attacked by a near ambush, they
+immediately assault without order or signal directly
+into the ambush position, occupy it, and continue the
+assault or break contact, as directed. This action
+moves them out of the killing zone, prevents other
+elements of the ambush from firing on them without
+firing on their own members, and provides positions
+from which other actions may be taken (see <a href="#fig11-5">fig. 11-5</a>
+on page 11-10). Members not in the killing zone
+maneuver against the enemy as directed. The assault
+continues until all patrol members are outside of the
+killing zone.</p>
+
+<p><b>Far Ambush.</b> In a far ambush, the killing zone is also
+under very heavy, highly concentrated fires, but from
+a greater range. This greater range provides members
+in the killing zone maneuver space and some
+opportunity to seek cover at a lesser risk of becoming
+a casualty. If attacked by a far ambush, members in the
+killing zone, without order or signal, immediately
+return fire, take the best available positions, and
+continue firing until directed otherwise. Members not
+in the killing zone maneuver against the ambush force,
+as directed (see <a href="#fig11-6">fig. 11-6</a> on page 11-10). The assault
+is continued against the enemy or until the order to
+break contact is given.</p>
+
+<p>In each situation, the success of the counter ambush
+employed depends on the members being well trained
+in quickly recognizing the distance from which an
+ambush is initiated and well rehearsed in the proper
+reaction.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp57" id="i_11-9b" style="max-width: 69.0em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_11-9b.jpg" alt="This sketch, using icons, depicts a patrol with the same composition as the one in the previous figure, coming from the bottom of the image and heading toward the top, where an enemy is heading toward them from the opposite direction. The patrol members move to engage, with the left flank and right flank security teams moving to the left and right respectively, indicated by arrows from the icons. The point man is already at the front and the patrol leader and radio operator move forward together to maintain communications. The remainder of the squad moves outwards on either side of them to extend the front as much as possible to prevent the enemy from concentrating fire.">
+</figure>
+
+    <p class="hanging sansserif strong muchsmaller">• The individual patrol
+    member in contact
+    returns fire and
+    orients the patrol.</p>
+
+    <p class="hanging sansserif strong muchsmaller">• The patrol rapidly
+    deploys on line.</p>
+
+    <p class="hanging sansserif strong muchsmaller">• Based on the <abbr title="Platoon Leader">PL</abbr>’s
+    estimate of the
+    situation, the patrol
+    assaults the enemy
+    or breaks contact.</p>
+
+    <p class="hanging sansserif strong muchsmaller">• If the patrol is receiving
+    effective fire, the patrol
+    will assault or break
+    contact by fire and
+    movement.</p>
+
+<p class="center sansserif small strong">Figure 11-4. Immediate Action, Immediate Assault.
+  </p>
+
+<p class="break"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1110"></span></p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp75" id="fig11-5" style="max-width: 68.25em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_11-10a.jpg" alt="This sketch depicts a patrol with the same composition as the one in the previous two figures coming from the bottom of the image and heading toward the top, with the enemy (three arrow icons) ambushing them from the right. The right flank guard, radio operator, and two patrol members are closest to the enemy; they immediately return fire, indicated by dashed lines with arrows. The point man, patrol leader, and two patrol members continue forward past the killing zone.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif lt">
+• Individuals caught In the killing zone of a near ambush, without
+order of signal, immediately fire at the enemy in order to achieve
+fire superiority and aggressively assault through the position.
+<br><br>
+• The attack is continued to eliminate the ambush or break contact as
+directed.
+ </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p class="p1 center strong sansserif">Figure 11-5. Near Ambush.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp73" id="fig11-6" style="max-width: 66.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_11-10b.jpg" alt="This sketch depicts a patrol with the same composition as the one in the previous three figures, coming from the bottom of the image and heading toward the top, where an enemy is heading toward them from the opposite direction. The security teams covering the left and right flanks, the point man, and another patrol member are closest to the enemy; they spread out to the right and left and take cover to return fire. The radio operator and two others are farther from the enemy; a sweeping arrow shows them move around to the right side to flank the enemy.">
+</figure>
+    <p class="hanging muchsmaller strong sansserif">• Those caught in the
+    killing zone of a far ambush, return fire, get down, seek cover, and
+    establish a base of fire.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging muchsmaller strong sansserif">• Those not caught in the
+    killing zone, deploy to support those in the killing zone by fire and
+    maneuver as directed against the enemy.</p>
+
+<p class="center strong sansserif small">Figure 11-6. Far Ambush.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec11007">11007. PATROL LEADER’S ACTION IN A
+DEVELOPING SITUATION</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>While good patrolling depends on good planning, the
+patrol leader’s plan must be flexible. Every combat
+situation develops differently than expected, and the
+patrol leader must be ready to quickly adapt to the
+situation as it develops. One of the most difficult tasks
+in battle is to recognize the correct moment for making
+a decision. Generally, it is more difficult to determine
+the moment for making a decision than it is to
+formulate the decision itself. When the situation
+demands, decisions must be made promptly without
+waiting for more information. In a developing
+situation, the patrol leader should use the following
+questions as a guide for battlefield decisionmaking:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• How has the situation changed?</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• How does the change affect mission accomplishment and the immediate superior’s mission?</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Must a decision be made now?</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• What are the options?</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Which option best serves the mission and the unit as a whole?</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Which option offers the greatest chance of success?</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec11008">11008. RETURN FROM OBJECTIVE AREA</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>After performing actions in the objective area, the
+patrol reassembles at the objective rally point. This
+phase of the patrol is perhaps the most difficult and
+dangerous. Patrol members are experiencing fatigue,
+emotional letdown, and wounds; they may be low on
+water and ammunition. Above all, the enemy was
+likely alerted if not in pursuit. At this point, the patrol
+leader must move the patrol rapidly but carefully and
+maintain patrol security at a high level. In returning to
+friendly lines, the patrol neither uses nor travels near
+the same route used to get to the objective area. The
+enemy may have that route covered. For information
+on reentry of friendly lines, refer to <a href="#sec11001">paragraph 11001</a>.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1201"></span></p>
+
+
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_12_Reconnaissance_Patrols">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 12. Reconnaissance Patrols</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>The commander needs accurate, timely information about the enemy and the
+terrain the enemy controls to assist in making tactical decisions. Reconnaissance
+patrols are one of the most reliable means for obtaining this information. These
+patrols engage the enemy only when necessary to accomplish their mission or for
+protection. They generally avoid combat, accomplish the mission by stealth, and
+do not maintain contact with the unit that sent them out. A reconnaissance patrol
+is capable of carrying the search for information into the area occupied by enemy
+forces—usually beyond the range of vision of friendly ground observation
+posts—and examining objects and events at close range.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec12001">12001. GENERAL MISSIONS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>General missions for reconnaissance patrols include
+gathering information about location and characteristics
+of friendly or hostile positions and installations,
+terrain (routes, stream crossings), and obstacles.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec12002">12002. SPECIFIC MISSIONS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>Locate the Enemy</h5>
+
+<p>Reconnaissance patrols try to determine the&#x2060;—</p>
+
+
+
+<p class="hanging">• Location of enemy forces, installations, and equipment.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Identification of enemy units and equipment.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Strength of enemy forces.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Disposition of enemy forces.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Movement of enemy personnel and equipment.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• New or special types of weapons.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Presence of mechanized units.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Unusual enemy activity.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Presence of NBC equipment.</p>
+
+<h5>Reconnaissance of Enemy Wire
+Obstacles</h5>
+
+<p>A patrol with the mission of investigating enemy-emplaced
+wire obstacles employs a formation
+providing for all-around security and takes precautions
+against being observed by the enemy. The patrol
+leader and one Marine inspect each gap and establish
+its location by means of compass bearings to prominent
+objects in the rear of enemy or friendly positions
+or through the use of global positioning satellite
+receivers.</p>
+
+<h5>Reconnaissance of Contaminated Areas</h5>
+
+<p>A patrol with the mission of investigating a contaminated
+area reconnoiters and marks the area’s
+boundaries. Patrol members wear protective clothing
+and field protective masks. The patrol leader reports
+the extent of the area, the type of agent used, the
+terrain and vegetation and the method of marking the
+contaminated area. A sketch of the contaminated area,
+prepared by the patrol leader, should be included in the
+patrol report.</p>
+
+<h5>Reconnaissance of Enemy Minefields</h5>
+
+<p>Patrols assigned to reconnoiter enemy minefields are
+often composed of specially trained personnel. The
+type of mine is identified and the possibility of bypassing
+the area determined.</p>
+
+<h5>Reconnaissance of Terrain</h5>
+
+<p>The reconnaissance patrol is particularly suited for
+gathering information about the terrain within their
+area of operations. (Refer to MCRP 2-15.3B, <cite>Reconnaissance
+Reports Guide</cite>.) Commanders must
+know the location and condition of bridges, streams,
+and roads in order to make proper plans for the
+movement of troops. The following information
+should be obtained by a reconnaissance patrol
+assigned such missions:</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+  <li class="ifrst">• Bridges:</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Maximum load capacity.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Material used in construction (wood, stone, concrete or steel).</li>
+  <li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1202"></span>◦ Material used for abutments (dirt, wood, masonry, concrete).</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Type and number of supporting members of the bridge.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Condition and dimensions of bridge flooring.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Presence or absence of mines and demolition charges on the bridge and at entrances/exits.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Terrain crossed (ravine, stream, road).</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Primary use (rail, auto, foot).</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Location and type of an alternate crossing if bridge is unusable.</li>
+
+  <li class="ifrst">• Streams and fords:</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Width and depth of stream.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Composition of the bottom (mud, sand, gravel, rock).</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Speed of current in miles per hour.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Composition and gradient of banks.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Surrounding terrain and vegetation cover.</li>
+
+  <li class="ifrst">• Roads:</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Width.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Composition of surface.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Condition.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Road blocks.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Gradient/degrees of slopes.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Curves (location and length).</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Ditch and culvert locations.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Primary use and frequency of use.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec12003">12003. TYPES OF RECONNAISSANCE</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>Route</h5>
+
+<p>Route reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain
+detailed information of a specified route and all terrain
+from which the enemy could influence movement
+along that route. (Refer to MCRP 5-12C.) It is also
+described as a form of reconnaissance focused along a
+specific line of communications—such as a road,
+railway, or waterway—to provide new or updated
+information on route conditions and activities along
+the route. (Refer to MCRP 5-12A, <cite>Operational Terms
+and Graphics</cite>.)</p>
+
+<p>A route reconnaissance normally precedes the movement
+of forces. It provides detailed information about
+a specific route and the surrounding terrain that could
+be used to influence movement along that route.
+Considerations include trafficability, danger areas,
+critical points, vehicle weight and size limitations, and
+locations for friendly obstacle emplacement.</p>
+
+<p>The objective area is normally defined by a line of departure,
+a route, and a limit of advance.</p>
+
+<h5>Area</h5>
+
+<p>An area reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain
+detailed information concerning the terrain or enemy
+activity within a prescribed area such as a town, ridge
+line, woods or other features critical to operations.
+(Refer to MCRP 5-12C.) An area reconnaissance
+could also be made of a single point, such as a bridge
+or installation. (Refer to MCRP 5-12A.)</p>
+
+<p>Emphasis is placed on reaching the area without being
+detected. Enemy situations encountered en route are
+developed only enough to allow the reconnoitering
+unit to report and bypass.</p>
+
+<h5>Zone</h5>
+
+<p>A zone reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain
+detailed information concerning all routes, obstacles
+(to include chemical or radiological contamination),
+terrain, and enemy forces within a zone defined by
+boundaries. A zone reconnaissance is normally assigned
+when the enemy situation is vague or when
+information concerning cross-country trafficability is
+desired. (Refer to MCRP 5-12C.)</p>
+
+<p>The commander specifies specific routes or areas of
+interest within the zone. The zone to be reconnoitered
+usually is defined by a line of departure, lateral boundaries,
+and a limit of advance.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec12004">12004. TASK ORGANIZATION</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A reconnaissance patrol is organized around the
+current structure of the Marine rifle squad with one or
+more of the squad’s fire teams assigned as the
+reconnaissance element to reconnoiter or maintain
+surveillance over the objective. At least one fire team
+acts as a security element whose functions are to&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Secure the objective rally point (see <a href="#sec11003"><abbr title="paragraph">para.</abbr> 11003</a>).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Give early warning of enemy approach.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Protect the reconnaissance unit.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1203"></span></p>
+
+<p>Reinforcing the squad is based on METT-T. If two
+squads are required, then the mission should be
+assigned to a platoon.</p>
+
+<p>A company may send a reconnaissance patrol to
+specifically reconnoiter a given area (a riverbed or a
+bridge), or to maintain surveillance on a particular
+streambed for the next four nights. Reconnaissance
+patrols perform three basic functions en route to and
+from the objective:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provide control.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provide security while moving and in the objective area.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Conduct reconnaissance or surveillance.</p>
+
+<p>Depending on the size of the reconnaissance patrol, an
+element must be tasked to reconnoiter the area or zone.
+In the case of a surveillance mission, two teams are
+recommended to share the same task (so one could lay
+up and rest, while the other lays low and hides to
+maintain strict silence and no movement while surveillance
+is being maintained on the objective).
+Whatever the case, each unit that has a surveillance
+mission or reconnaissance mission must be thoroughly
+briefed as to what essential elements of information
+are to be collected as well as their location in the objective
+area.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol should be organized with one or two fire
+teams to actually conduct the reconnaissance mission
+and the remaining fire team to provide security. Each
+fire team should be prepared to assume either mission.
+A small area reconnaissance patrol needs only one fire
+team for the assigned mission. A patrol with a wider
+area reconnaissance mission should use two fire teams
+to physically conduct the mission and one fire team for
+cover and/or security.</p>
+
+<p>The security element for a reconnaissance patrol
+should be organized to cover the likely avenue of
+approach into the objective area, to protect the units
+conducting the reconnaissance, and to cover the
+objective rally point.</p>
+
+<p>The variations of the special organization for reconnaissance
+patrols illustrate the patrol leader’s
+flexibility in organizing the patrol to meet mission
+requirements. The patrol leader is not limited to the
+variations reflected herein but can choose any special
+organization as long as that task organization accommodates
+the requirement for command and control,
+reconnaissance, and security.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec12005">12005. SIZE OF RECONNAISSANCE PATROLS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A reconnaissance patrol should be kept to the minimum
+number of personnel required to accomplish the
+mission. A mission requiring a patrol to remain away
+from its unit for a considerable period of time, or one
+requiring a patrol to send back information by messenger,
+increases the size of the patrol. Reconnaissance
+patrols seldom exceed a squad in strength.
+Unit integrity should be preserved whenever possible.
+Intelligence personnel, interpreters, and other specialists,
+such as radio operators or engineers, are assigned
+to a patrol if the particular mission requires.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec12006">12006. RECONNAISSANCE EQUIPMENT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Patrol members are armed and equipped as necessary
+for accomplishing the mission. The automatic rifle in
+each fire team provides a degree of sustained firepower
+in case of enemy contact. The patrol should
+have at least two: pairs of binoculars, pairs of wire cutters,
+maps, compasses, and watches. Night observation
+equipment may be used. Pencils and small notebooks
+are carried so notes and sketches can be made. A
+message book with message blanks and overlay paper
+is mandatory.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec12007">12007. RECONNAISSANCE PATROL
+ACTIONS AT THE OBJECTIVE AREA</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>Route</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader halts and conceals the patrol near the
+objective area in the final preparation position. The
+patrol leader then conducts leader’s reconnaissance to
+confirm the plan for positioning the security teams and
+employing units assigned to the reconnaissance
+mission. The patrol leader returns to the patrol and
+positions the security to provide early warning of
+enemy approach and secure the objective rally point.
+The reconnaissance unit(s) then reconnoiters the
+objective area (route). The reconnaissance unit may
+move to several positions, along or adjacent to the
+specific route, in order to conduct a thorough reconnaissance.
+After completing the reconnaissance, each
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1204"></span>reconnaissance team moves to the objective rally point
+and reports to the patrol leader. The patrol then returns
+to friendly lines and the leader makes a full report.</p>
+
+<h5>Area</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader halts and conceals the patrol near the
+objective area in the final preparation position. The
+patrol leader then conducts leader’s reconnaissance to
+pinpoint the objective and confirm the plan for positioning
+the security teams and employing units
+assigned the reconnaissance mission. The patrol leader
+returns to the patrol and positions security to provide
+early warning of enemy approach and secure the
+objective rally point. The reconnaissance unit(s) then
+reconnoiters the objective area. The reconnaissance
+unit may move to several positions, perhaps making a
+circle around the objective area, in order to conduct a
+thorough reconnaissance. When the reconnaissance is
+completed, the patrol leader assembles the patrol and
+tells members what has been observed and heard.
+Other patrol members contribute observations. The
+patrol then returns to friendly lines and the patrol
+leader makes a full report.</p>
+
+<h5>Zone</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader halts the patrol at the final preparation
+position, confirms the plan, and conducts
+leader’s reconnaissance. The patrol leader positions
+the security team and sends out the reconnaissance
+team. When the entire patrol is used to reconnoiter the
+zone, it provides its own security. After completing
+the reconnaissance, each reconnaissance team moves
+to the objective rally point and reports to the patrol
+leader. The patrol then returns to friendly lines.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1301"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_13_Combat_Patrols">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 13. Combat Patrols</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>Combat patrols are assigned missions that usually include engaging the enemy.
+They are fighting patrols. Every combat patrol has a secondary mission: gaining
+information about the enemy and terrain. Combat patrols are employed in both
+offensive and defensive combat operations and they assist the parent unit in
+accomplishing its mission by inflicting damage on the enemy; establishing and/or
+maintaining contact with friendly and enemy forces; denying the enemy access to
+key terrain; and probing enemy positions to determine the nature and extent of
+enemy presence.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec13001">13001. TASK ORGANIZATION</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A combat patrol is organized around the current
+structure of the Marine rifle platoon. A combat patrol
+leader should use the unit’s normal organization (fire
+team, squad, and platoon) in assigning functions,
+patrol missions, and chain of command. Combat
+patrols must be able to perform the following four
+basic functions en route to and from the objective:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provide control.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provide security.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provide support by fire.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Attack or assault the objective.</p>
+
+<p>A rifle platoon could task-organize as a combat patrol
+as follows:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Platoon headquarters (patrol headquarters).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• First squad (security).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Second squad (support).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Third squad (assault).</p>
+
+<p>Every combat patrol must&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provide a control mechanism in the form of a headquarters.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Designate a unit (a fire team or squad) to provide security while moving en route to the objective or while at the objective. At the objective area, this unit isolates the objective area, secures the objective rally point, and covers the withdrawal.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Designate a unit to act as support. This unit provides the base of fire in the attack or covers withdrawals or advances.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Designate a unit(s) to conduct the attack or assault. This unit(s) engages the enemy at the objective area by fire and maneuver or movement. It also operates immediately in the objective area (searching, demolition, prisoners of war, etc.). <a href="#sec9001">Paragraph 9001</a> outlines the general organization of combat patrols. As in the case with reconnaissance patrols, the task organization of a combat patrol depends on the specific mission assigned. If any special requirements are generated because of the specific mission, the patrol is task-organized to fit the needs of the mission.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec13002">13002. EQUIPMENT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Combat patrols are armed and equipped as necessary
+for accomplishing the mission. In addition to binoculars,
+wire cutters, compasses, and other equipment
+generally common to all patrols, it usually
+carries a high proportion of automatic weapons and
+grenades. Communications with higher headquarters
+is important as success of the mission may depend on
+being able to call for supporting fires. Also, internal
+radio communications with the units and teams may
+be useful. However, the patrol must not be so overburdened
+with equipment as to impede movement or
+mission accomplishment.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec13003">13003. RAID PATROLS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A raid is a surprise attack on an enemy force or
+installation with the attacking force withdrawing after
+accomplishing its mission. Raids destroy or capture
+enemy personnel or equipment, destroy installations,
+or free friendly personnel who have been captured by
+the enemy. Patrolling techniques are used in planning
+and when moving to and from the objective. (Refer to
+MCWP 3-41.2, <cite>Raids</cite>.) Surprise, firepower, and
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1302"></span>violence of action are the keys to a successful raid.
+Patrols achieve surprise by attacking&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• When the enemy is least prepared (e.g., during periods of poor visibility such as darkness, rain, fog, or snow).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• From an unexpected direction. (This might be accomplished by approaching through a swamp or other seemingly impassable terrain.)</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• With concentration of firepower at critical points within the objective.</p>
+
+<h5>Planning</h5>
+
+<p>A successful raid requires detailed planning. The
+leader of a combat patrol engaged in raiding must
+anticipate probable situations and decide upon definite
+courses of action to meet them. Rehearsals are
+imperative.</p>
+
+<p>A raid patrol conducts such missions as destroying an
+enemy outpost or seizing prisoners from an observation
+post or lightly defended position.</p>
+
+<p>While preparing for the mission, the patrol leader
+requests fire support required for the accomplishment
+of the mission. If practical, artillery and mortars
+should be employed to isolate the objective to prevent
+movement of enemy reinforcements into the area.</p>
+
+<h5>Execution</h5>
+
+<p>The leader’s plan must be detailed and complete. All
+of the considerations outlined in <a href="#Chapter_11_Movement_to_and_Return">chapter 11</a> must be
+covered. Patrol formations must provide for ease of
+control and all-around security while moving to and
+from the objective area and provide for rapid and
+coordinated deployment of the various units once the
+objective area is reached. The leader’s plan usually
+includes the encirclement of the hostile position—either
+physically or by fire—in order to isolate it
+during the assault.</p>
+
+<p>The final simultaneous assault against the objective
+develops when enemy defensive fires at the objective
+are suppressed by either friendly fire superiority or
+surprise. The assault is covered by the fire of the unit
+assigned the function of support by fire.</p>
+
+<p>Grenades, SMAWs, and demolitions are most effective
+for clearing bunkers.</p>
+
+<p>Security units are posted to isolate the objective. The
+patrol leader signals them when the withdrawal
+begins. As a minimum, security is on each flank and to
+the rear (at the objective rally point).</p>
+
+<h5>Actions at the Objective</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader halts the patrol near the objective at
+the final preparation position. Security is established
+and the leader’s reconnaissance is made with appropriate
+subordinate leaders. When the leaders return
+to the patrol, they confirm previous plans or announce
+any changes. Movements are arranged so all units
+reach their positions simultaneously. This improves
+the patrol’s capability for decisive action, if prematurely
+detected by the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>The teams of the security element move to positions to
+secure the objective rally point, give early warning of
+enemy approach, block avenues of approach into—and
+prevent enemy escape from—the objective area.
+As the assault element moves into position, the security
+element informs the patrol leader of all enemy
+activity, firing only if detected or on the patrol leader’s
+order. Once the assault element commences action, the
+security element prevents enemy entry into or escape
+from the objective area. The security element covers
+the withdrawal of the assault element (and support
+element, if employed) to the objective rally point,
+withdrawing only upon order or prearranged signal.</p>
+
+<p>As the assault element approaches the objective, it
+deploys early enough to permit immediate assault if
+detected by the enemy. Each team uses stealth while
+moving into proper position. On command, or if one
+or more of the assault element is detected and fired
+upon by the enemy, the support element opens fire to
+neutralize the objective, then ceases or shifts fire according
+to prearranged plans and signals. As supporting
+fires cease or shift, the assault element assaults
+the objective. Demolition, search, and other teams are
+protected by the assault element while they work. On
+order, the assault element withdraws to the objective
+rally point.</p>
+
+<p>If a support element is employed, its leader deploys
+teams to provide fire support for the assault element.
+Each member of the support element must know the
+scheme of maneuver to be used by the assault element,
+specific targets or areas to be neutralized by fire, and
+the signals that will be employed to commence, shift,
+and cease fires. The support element withdraws on
+order of the patrol leader. At the objective rally point,
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1303"></span>the patrol leader quickly reorganizes the patrol and
+begins the return movement to friendly lines.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec13004">13004. CONTACT PATROLS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>General</h5>
+
+<p>Contact patrols establish and/or maintain contact to
+the front, flanks or rear by&#x2060;—</p>
+
+
+<p class="hanging">• Establishing contact with an enemy force when the definite location of the force is unknown.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Maintaining contact with enemy forces through direct and/or indirect fires, or observation.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoiding decisive engagement with the enemy.</p>
+
+<h5>Task Organization and Equipment</h5>
+
+<p>Task organization and equipment depend on the
+known enemy situation and anticipated enemy contact.
+A patrol sent out to establish contact with an enemy
+force is organized, armed, and equipped to overcome
+resistance of light screening forces in order to gain
+contact with the main enemy force. It is not organized
+and equipped to engage the main enemy forces in
+combat. Communication is paramount; radios must be
+reliable over the entire distance covered.</p>
+
+<h5>Actions at the Objective</h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader selects a series of objectives. Once
+an objective is reached, the patrol leader initiates a
+planned set of actions in order to establish and
+maintain contact with the enemy. These plans and
+actions are guided by the missions to establish or
+maintain contact—not to engage in decisive combat.
+Contact with the enemy is maintained for the purposes
+of surveillance, applying pressure, and preventing
+seizure of the initiative. If the contact patrol becomes
+decisively engaged with the enemy, many of the tasks
+originally assigned to the patrol cannot be accomplished,
+since the enemy has seized the initiative and
+friendly forces are not forced to react.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec13005">13005. AMBUSH PATROLS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>General</h5>
+
+<p>An ambush is a surprise attack from a concealed
+position upon a moving or temporarily halted target. It
+is one of the oldest and most effective types of military
+actions. Ambush patrols conduct ambushes of enemy
+patrols, resupply columns, and convoys. The intent of
+an ambush is to place the enemy in a dilemma where
+staying in the kill zone or attempting to move out of it
+prove equally lethal. The ambush may include an
+assault to close with and decisively engage the enemy,
+or the attack may be by fire only.</p>
+
+<h5>Purpose of Ambushes</h5>
+
+<p>Ambushes are executed for the general purpose of
+reducing the enemy’s overall combat effectiveness
+and for the specific purpose of destroying its units.
+The cumulative effect of many small ambushes on
+enemy units lowers enemy troop morale and harasses
+the enemy force as a whole.</p>
+
+<p>Destruction is the primary purpose of an ambush
+because loss of men killed or captured, and loss of
+equipment and supplies destroyed or captured, reduces
+the overall combat effectiveness of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Harassment, though less apparent than physical
+damage, is a secondary purpose of ambushes.
+Frequent ambushes force the enemy to divert men
+from other missions to guard convoys, troop
+movements, and carrying parties. When enemy patrols
+fail to accomplish their mission because they are
+ambushed, the enemy is deprived of valuable information.
+A series of successful ambushes causes the
+enemy to be less aggressive and more defensive
+minded. His men become apprehensive, overly
+cautious, reluctant to go on patrols, seek to avoid night
+operations, are more subject to confusion and panic if
+ambushed, and in general, decline in effectiveness.</p>
+
+<h5>Classification of Ambushes</h5>
+
+<p>A <dfn>deliberate ambush</dfn> is one in which prior information
+about the enemy permits detailed planning before the
+patrol departs for the ambush site. Information needed
+to plan a deliberate ambush includes the size,
+composition, and organization of the force to be
+ambushed; how the force operates; and the time it will
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1304"></span>pass certain points or areas. A deliberate ambush may
+be planned for such targets as&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Any force if sufficient prior information is known.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Enemy patrols that establish patterns by frequent use of the same routes or habitually depart and re-enter their own areas at the same point.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Logistic columns.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Troop movements.</p>
+
+<p>An <dfn>ambush of opportunity</dfn> is conducted when
+available information does not permit detailed
+planning before the patrol departs. This is the type of
+ambush that an infantry unit normally conducts. An
+ambush of opportunity should not be confused with a
+hasty ambush. An ambush of opportunity is a planned
+ambush; a hasty ambush is an immediate action. In
+planning for an ambush of opportunity, the patrol must
+be prepared to execute any of several courses of action
+based on the types of targets that may be ambushed
+and must rehearse prior to departure. The course of
+action taken is determined when the opportunity for
+ambush arises.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader may be directed to reconnoiter an
+area for a suitable ambush site, set up at the site
+selected, and execute an ambush against the first
+profitable target that appears.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol may depart just after dark, move to a
+specific point, observe until a designated time, ambush
+the first profitable target after that time, and return
+before daylight.</p>
+
+<p>A <dfn>hasty ambush</dfn> is an immediate action where the
+patrol makes visual contact with an enemy force and
+has time to establish an ambush without being
+detected. The actions for a hasty ambush must be well
+rehearsed and accomplished through the use of hand
+and arm signals given from the patrol leader.</p>
+
+<h5>Types of Ambushes</h5>
+
+<p>There are two types of ambushes: point and area. The
+<dfn>point ambush</dfn> is one where forces are deployed to
+attack along a single killing zone. The <dfn>area ambush</dfn> is
+one where forces are deployed as multiple related
+point ambushes.</p>
+
+<p>A point ambush, whether independent or part of an
+area ambush, is positioned along the enemy’s expected
+route of approach. Formation of the forces conducting
+the ambush is important because, to a great extent, the
+formation determines whether a point ambush is able
+to deliver the heavy volume of highly concentrated
+fire necessary to isolate, trap, and destroy the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>The ambush formation to be used is determined by
+careful consideration of possible formations and the
+advantages and disadvantages of each in relation to&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Terrain.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Visibility.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Forces.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Weapons and equipment.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Ease or difficulty of control.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Target to be attacked.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Combat situation.</p>
+
+<p>For a detailed discussion of ambush formation, see
+<a href="#AppxD">appendix D</a>.</p>
+
+<h5>Ambush Operation Terms</h5>
+
+<p>The <dfn>ambush site</dfn> is the location where an ambush is
+established.</p>
+
+<p>The <dfn>killing zone</dfn> is that portion of an ambush site
+where fires are concentrated to trap, isolate, and
+destroy the target. On little-traveled roads, an obstacle
+placed in a defile, in the woods, on a bridge or on a
+steep upgrade can be used effectively to force vehicles
+to halt, and thus render the occupants vulnerable to
+attack. Antitank mines may be emplaced and the
+occupants of the wrecked vehicle killed or captured
+while still dazed by the explosion.</p>
+
+<p>A <dfn>near ambush</dfn> is a point ambush where the attacking
+force is located within reasonable assaulting distance
+of the killing zone (50 meters is a guide). A near
+ambush is most often conducted in close terrain, such
+as a jungle or heavy woods.</p>
+
+<p>A <dfn>far ambush</dfn> is a point ambush where the attack force
+is located beyond reasonable assaulting distance of the
+killing zone (beyond 50 meters is a guide). A far
+ambush may be more appropriate in open terrain
+offering good fields of fire or when the target will be
+attacked by fire only.</p>
+
+<h5>Factors for a Successful Ambush Patrol</h5>
+
+<p>There are many factors that give the ambush its best
+chance of success. The ideal situation would be to
+position the ambush on favorable terrain and have
+detailed planning completed beforehand.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1305"></span></p>
+
+<p>The patrol leader of an ambush looks for the most
+favorable terrain in which the enemy is canalized
+between two obstacles with limited opportunity to
+attack or escape. Suitable areas include defiles, small
+clearings, bends in trails, and steep grades. Dense
+undergrowth adjacent to the ambush site permits
+observation from concealed positions. The ambush
+patrol should have maximum cover and concealment,
+not only for the firing positions, but for the routes of
+withdrawal. The enemy should be in an area offering
+as little protection from fire as possible. Favorable
+fields of fire include stretches of road, trail or open
+ground of at least 100 meters for machine guns and 15
+meters for rifle fire and grenades. The ambush site can
+be improved by constructing obstacles—such as felled
+trees, wire, land mines, or booby traps—to impede the
+enemy.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Planning</i></h5>
+
+<p>A deliberate ambush or an ambush of opportunity
+requires thorough planning.</p>
+
+<p>A deliberate ambush plan is based on extensive
+knowledge of the enemy and terrain, and is planned
+and rehearsed in great detail. A physical reconnaissance
+of the ambush site is made during the
+preparation phase and information gained is
+incorporated into the plan. All likely immediate
+actions of the enemy when ambushed are examined.
+Planned counteractions are developed and rehearsed.</p>
+
+<p>In planning an ambush of opportunity, any available
+information on the enemy and terrain is used. A
+tentative plan for the ambush that incorporates all
+anticipated actions is developed and rehearsed.
+However, the bulk of planning is done concurrently
+during the patrol leader’s reconnaissance of the
+prospective ambush site. In a rapidly developing
+situation, hasty ambush immediate action is employed.</p>
+
+<p>The route and ambush site considerations apply to
+both deliberate ambushes and ambushes of
+opportunity. A primary route that allows the patrol to
+enter the ambush site from the rear is planned.
+Entering the prospective killing zone is avoided. If the
+killing zone must be entered to place mines or
+explosives, care is taken to remove any tracks and
+signs that might alert the enemy and compromise the
+ambush. If mines or explosives are to be placed on the
+far side of the ambush site, or if the appearance of the
+site from the enemy’s viewpoint is to be checked, a
+wide detour is made around the killing zone. Care is
+taken to remove any tracks that might reveal the
+ambush. An alternate route from the ambush site to the
+objective rally point, as in other patrols, is planned.</p>
+
+<p>Maps and aerial photographs are used to carefully
+analyze the terrain. When possible, an on-the-ground
+reconnaissance of the ambush site is made prior to
+occupation. Obvious ambush sites are avoided as the
+element of surprise is even more difficult to achieve in
+these areas. An ambush site must provide for&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Favorable fields of fire.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Occupation and preparation of concealed positions.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Canalization of the target into the killing zone. (An ideal killing zone restricts the enemy on all sides, confining him to an area where he can be quickly and completely destroyed. Natural obstacles, such as cliffs, streams, embankments, or steep grades, are used whenever possible to force vehicles to slow down. Man-made obstacles, such as barbed wire, mines, and craters in the roads, are used to supplement natural obstacles.)</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Covered routes of withdrawal that enable the ambush force to break contact.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Avoidance of enemy pursuit by fire.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Occupation of Ambush Site</i></h5>
+
+<p>The surrounding area is searched for enemy patrols
+prior to occupation of the ambush site. Ambush
+formations are used to physically deploy the patrol in a
+manner to inflict maximum destruction upon the
+enemy and to provide maximum security to the patrol.
+Ambush formations are contained in <a href="#AppxD">appendix D.</a></p>
+
+<h5><i>Positions</i></h5>
+
+<p>The patrol is moved into the ambush site from the
+objective rally point. Security is positioned first to
+prevent surprise while the ambush is being established.
+Automatic weapons are then positioned so each
+can fire along the entire killing zone. If this is not
+possible, overlapping sectors of fire are provided to
+cover the entire killing zone. The patrol leader then
+selects his position, located so he can tell when to
+initiate the ambush. Riflemen and grenadiers are
+positioned and sectors of fire are assigned to cover any
+dead space left by the automatic weapons. The patrol
+leader sets a time by which positions are to be
+prepared. Patrol members clear fields of fire and
+prepare positions in that order, with attention to
+camouflage for both.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1306"></span></p>
+
+<h5><i>Suitable Objective Rally Point</i></h5>
+
+<p>An easily located objective rally point is selected and
+made known to all patrol members. The objective rally
+point is located far enough from the ambush site so
+that it will not be overrun if the enemy assaults the
+ambush. Routes of withdrawal to the objective rally
+point are reconnoitered. Situation permitting, each
+man walks the route he is to use and picks out checkpoints.
+When the ambush is to be executed at night,
+each man must be able to follow his route in the dark.
+After the ambush has been executed, and the search of
+the killing zone completed, the patrol is withdrawn
+quickly but quietly, on signal, to the objective rally
+point where it reorganizes for the return march. If the
+ambush was not successful and the patrol is pursued,
+withdrawal may be by bounds. The last group may
+arm mines, previously placed along the withdrawal
+route, to further delay pursuit.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Local Security</i></h5>
+
+<p>Security must be maintained. Security elements do not
+usually participate in the initial attack, but protect the
+rear and flanks, and cover the withdrawal.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Patience</i></h5>
+
+<p>The Marines of the ambush force must control
+themselves so that the ambush is not compromised.
+Patience and self-discipline are exercised by remaining
+still and quiet while waiting for the target to
+appear, particularly if the patrol occupies the ambush
+site well ahead of the arrival of the enemy. Patience is
+necessary so as not to alert the enemy to the presence
+of the ambush.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Surprise</i></h5>
+
+<p>Surprise must be achieved, or the attack is not an
+ambush. If complete surprise cannot be achieved, it
+must be so nearly complete that the target is not aware
+of the ambush until too late for effective reaction.
+Surprise is achieved by careful planning, preparation,
+and execution so that targets are attacked when,
+where, and in a way for which they are least prepared.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Coordinated Fires</i></h5>
+
+<p>Properly timed and delivered fires contribute heavily
+to the achievement of surprise, as well as to destruction
+of the enemy. The lifting or shifting of fires
+must be equally precise; otherwise, the assault is
+delayed and the enemy has an opportunity to recover
+and react. All weapons, mines, and demolitions are
+positioned and all fires, including those of available
+artillery and mortars, are coordinated to achieve the
+following results:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Isolation of the killing zone to prevent the enemy’s escape or reinforcement.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Surprise delivery of a large volume of highly concentrated fires into the killing zone.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Control</i></h5>
+
+<p>Close control of the patrol is maintained during movement
+to, occupation of, and withdrawal from the
+ambush site. This is best achieved through rehearsals
+and establishment and maintenance of good communications.
+When the enemy approaches, the temptation
+to open fire before the signal is given is resisted.
+The patrol leader must effectively control all elements
+of the ambush force. Control is most critical at the
+time the enemy approaches the killing zone. Control
+measures must provide for&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Early warning of enemy approach.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Fire control. Withhold fire until the enemy has moved into the killing zone, then open fire at the proper time.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Initiation of appropriate action, if the ambush is prematurely detected. Individual patrol members must be prepared to react if detected by the enemy prior to the initiation of the ambush.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Timely and orderly withdrawal of the ambush force from the ambush site and movement to the objective rally point.</p>
+
+<p>It is important to remember that an ambush patrol
+should have four distinct signals: one to open fire
+(with an alternate signal to open fire to be used at the
+same time as the primary); a signal to cease fire or
+shift fire; a signal to assault or search the killing zone;
+and a signal to withdraw. The signal to open fire
+should meet two criteria: first, it should be the firing of
+a weapon that will kill the enemy; secondly, it should
+be a weapon reliable in any weather condition. A good
+primary signal is a Claymore mine, and an alternate
+signal would be a closed bolt weapon (M16A2). Open
+bolt weapons (M240G, M249) should not be relied
+upon to initiate an ambush.</p>
+
+<h5>Execution of an Ambush</h5>
+
+<p>The manner in which the patrol executes an ambush
+depends primarily on whether the ambush’s purpose is
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1307"></span>harassment or destruction. To a lesser degree, the
+execution of the ambush is determined by whether the
+ambush is deliberate or an ambush of opportunity.</p>
+
+<p>When the primary purpose is harassment, the patrol
+seals off the area with security teams to prevent enemy
+reinforcement and escape. Maximum damage is
+inflicted with demolitions and automatic weapons fire.
+The patrol delivers a very heavy volume of fire for a
+short time and withdraws quickly and quietly. The
+patrol avoids being seen by the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>When the primary purpose of the patrol is destruction,
+the area is sealed off with security units. Maximum
+damage is inflicted with demolitions, antitank weapons,
+and automatic weapons fire from the support team
+or element. When these fires cease or shift, an assault
+is launched into the killing zone with heavy fire and
+violence to complete destruction. The assault unit
+provides security, while designated teams search and/or
+capture personnel and destroy vehicles and equipment.
+On the patrol leader’s command, or by prearranged
+signal, all units withdraw to the objective rally
+point and move out quickly.</p>
+
+<p>When the patrol’s primary purpose is to obtain
+supplies or capture equipment, security units seal off
+the area. Demolitions and weapons are used to disable
+vehicles. The assault unit must use care to ensure its
+fire does not damage the desired supplies or equipment.
+Designated teams secure the desired items; other
+teams then destroy enemy vehicles and equipment.</p>
+
+<p>The most successful ambush is one where the attacker
+is deployed and concealed in such a way that the
+enemy will unknowingly be surrounded by fire. The
+usual method is for the attackers to deploy themselves
+along a trail or route the enemy will travel. The enemy
+is permitted to pass by the center of the attacker’s
+force so that the attack can be made from the front,
+flank, and/or rear. One or two men are posted well
+forward and to the rear along the route to prevent any
+enemy from escaping. All fires should be delivered
+simultaneously on a prearranged signal.</p>
+
+<p>An effective method of luring the enemy is for an
+ambushing patrol to cut communication or electrical
+wire. The patrol then deploys and ambushes the line
+repair crew when it arrives. Since the line crew may be
+protected by riflemen, the attackers must be careful to
+engage the entire party.</p>
+
+<p>Vehicles and foot personnel moving on well-established
+transportation routes can sometimes be captured
+by altering or moving directional signs so as to divert
+the enemy into an area where he can be more readily
+attacked. The attack can best be accomplished at an
+obstacle, such as a stream or gully, that forces the
+enemy to stop or slow down.</p>
+
+<p>After the enemy has been ambushed and destroyed,
+the unit quickly withdraws over a prearranged route to
+the objective rally point. Speed is very important,
+since the noise of the ambush could alert other nearby
+enemy units.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec13006">13006. SECURITY PATROLS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>General</h5>
+
+<p>Security patrols are assigned missions that may or may
+not require them to engage the enemy. They are used
+in proximity to defensive positions, on the flanks of
+advancing units or in rear areas. Purposes of security
+patrols are to detect infiltration by the enemy, destroy
+infiltrators, and protect against surprise and ambush.</p>
+
+<p>In any situation where there is a threat of attack, such
+as a rear area threatened by guerrillas or a facility that
+is under threat of a terrorist attack, all Marines, not just
+the infantry, must know how to conduct a security
+patrol.</p>
+
+<p>In just the offensive operations, infantry units provide
+security patrols to screen their flanks, areas, and
+routes. Whereas, in defensive operations, security
+patrols are used to prevent the enemy from infiltrating
+an area, detect and destroy infiltrators, and prevent
+surprise attacks. In rear areas, particularly when there
+is guerrilla or terrorist threat, the requirement to
+conduct security patrols increases for all Marine air-ground
+task force (MAGTF) units ashore, particularly
+aviation and combat service support units.</p>
+
+<h5>Task Organization and Equipment</h5>
+
+<p>Generally, a Marine rifle squad or similar sized
+organization is considered ideal for security patrols.
+Communications are important to higher headquarters
+so that they receive information from the patrol; and
+communications are important to the patrol to request
+fire support, etc. The radio the patrol carries must have
+the range necessary for higher headquarters to be able
+to receive transmissions from anywhere along the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1308"></span>patrol route, and the patrol must have a secondary
+means of reporting (i.e., flare signals upon contact).</p>
+
+<h5>Patrol Procedures</h5>
+
+<p>All of the procedures presented in previous sections
+are to be used in security patrols.</p>
+
+<h5>Patrol Planning</h5>
+
+<p>Security patrol planning includes&#x2060;—</p>
+
+
+<p class="hanging">• Rehearsing prior to departing friendly lines.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Maintaining communications.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Support by organic weapons.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Reinforced if necessary.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Using varied routes and never establishing a routine pattern.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Staying within proximity of friendly units.</p>
+
+<h5>Patrol Techniques</h5>
+
+<p>Within rear areas, an irregular pattern of patrol is
+established and changed daily. Outside of friendly
+lines it would be prudent to establish a definite
+preplanned route for the patrol, of which all adjacent
+units know the route. The parent unit commander
+establishes frequent checkpoints for control. If checkpoints
+are designated, the patrol leader treats them as
+individual objectives to be searched and cleared.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol has a definite plan as to what to do if
+contact with enemy is made, how to break contact,
+how to defend itself, and how to call for supporting
+fires. It is imperative that patrol members know what
+to do if they become split or separated; i.e., location of
+rally points and how to be recovered.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec13007">13007. URBAN PATROLS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<h5>General</h5>
+
+<p>As national strategy continues to focus on regional
+vice global conflicts, the Marine Corps will continue
+to conduct urban operations in various operational
+environments. Cities and towns are often the center of
+economic and political power and are therefore
+extremely vulnerable to urban insurgent activities and
+violence. The lessons learned from recent operations
+in Somalia, as well as experiences gained by British
+forces in Northern Ireland, provide the foundations of
+urban patrolling.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Enemy Forces</i></h5>
+
+<p>Enemy forces in urbanized areas range from organized
+military forces to low intensity engagements with
+insurgents, such as terrorists or local gangs. For
+Marine Corps doctrine and tactics, techniques, and
+procedures (TTP) for dealing with the higher intensity
+threat in urbanized areas, refer to MCWP 3-35.3,
+<cite>Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain</cite>.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Common Threat Tactics</i></h5>
+
+<p>Cities provide cover and concealment for both friendly
+forces and enemy forces. However, enemy forces
+generally find active support only in certain areas of
+the town or city. The urban-based insurgent or terrorist
+usually lives in a friendly community or in one where
+the people are too frightened to withhold support or
+inform anyone about the situation. The insurgent or
+terrorist normally maintains close contact with leaders
+and others friendly to the cause. The enemy will often
+have efficient communication and intelligence systems,
+sometimes involving women and children to
+provide cover for its activities.</p>
+
+<p>The urban insurgent normally cannot, like his rural
+counterpart, establish bases and recruit large military
+units. He is generally an individual or a member of a
+relatively small group. He relies on the cover afforded
+by the city’s populace and terrorizing them to coerce
+loyalty or support.</p>
+
+<p>Urbanized areas tend to give the insurgent and/or
+terrorist many opportunities to initiate action and gain
+advantage. The normal presence of large numbers of
+people in cities provides the foe an opportunity to
+mass crowds quickly and manipulate demonstrations
+easily. The presence of women and children during
+mass demonstrations may restrict the courses of action
+available to friendly forces. Major incidents stemming
+from overreaction or excessive use of force by friendly
+forces may provide the insurgent with propaganda
+material. Publicity is easily gained in an urbanized
+area because major incidents can’t be completely concealed
+from the local population. Insurgent successes
+can be exploited to discredit the ability of host nation
+police, friendly forces, and the civil government, and
+gain recognition for the insurgents’ cause.</p>
+
+<p>The urban insurgent or terrorist can usually be
+expected to operate more boldly than his rural counterpart.
+This is reflected in the enemy’s tactics. A single
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1309"></span>sniper or bomber may be the norm in the urbanized
+area, whereas the rural threat is generally the more
+conventional ambush. In urbanized areas, explosive
+devices can be easily emplaced and used effectively
+against large groups or select individuals. Enemy
+forces may be expected to employ the following
+tactics in urbanized areas:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Using local communications, such as radio and newspapers, for propaganda purposes.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Disrupting industry and public services through strikes and sabotage.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Generating widespread disturbances designed to stretch the resources of the security force.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Creating incidents or massing crowds in order to lure the patrol or reaction force into a trap.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provoking security forces in the hope that they may react improperly, therefore discrediting the security force by means of propaganda.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Sniping at roadblocks, outposts, sentries, and patrols.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Attacking friendly bases with rockets and mortars.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Planting explosive devices, either against specific targets or indiscriminately, to cause confusion and destruction, and lower public morale and confidence.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Using ambush patrols.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Firing on friendly helicopters.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Principles of Urban Patrolling</i></h5>
+
+<p>Patrolling in an urban environment often presents
+conditions considerably different and often more
+complex than those encountered in rural and less
+inhabited areas. While the principles of patrolling are
+still relevant in an urban situation, the nature of urban
+patrolling has led to the development of six specific
+urban patrolling principles. They are&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<div class="sansserif small">
+<p class="narrow">1. <b>Depth.</b> The restrictive, canalizing nature of
+urbanized terrain usually limits a patrol’s ability to
+disperse laterally. To prevent the patrol from
+bunching up, patrols normally maintain dispersion
+along the length of a patrol formation.</p>
+
+<p class="narrow">2. <b>Mutual Support.</b> The positioning of units in-depth
+within the patrol enables one unit to cover
+another unit’s movement and facilitates immediate
+action during various situations. Aircraft, vehicles,
+and snipers also provide good mutual support.</p>
+
+<p class="narrow">3. <b>Deception and Pattern Avoidance.</b> Deception
+and pattern avoidance are normally a planning
+consideration of the headquarters directing the
+entire patrolling plan. By varying patrol routes,
+durations, and departure times, hostile actions
+commonly used against urban patrols—such as
+enemy ambushes, and roadblocks—are more
+difficult to plan and may be preempted.</p>
+
+<p class="narrow">4. <b>Intra-patrol Communication.</b> Elements of an
+urban patrol must have the means to communicate
+with each other. Ideally, each element will possess
+a radio enabling it to remain in continuous communication
+that facilitates rapid response and
+reporting to higher headquarters, reaction force
+coordination, and coordination of actions with other
+patrols or fire support agencies.</p>
+
+<p class="narrow">5. <b>Establishment of a Reaction Force.</b> The nature
+of urbanized terrain (its compartmentalization)
+makes urban patrols more vulnerable to a wider
+range of hostile actions. The requirement for
+immediate, coordinated reinforcement of a patrol is
+best satisfied by employment of an established
+reaction force. The reaction force requires superior
+mobility (relative to the enemy’s) and fire support to
+be effective for this task.</p>
+
+<p class="narrow">6. <b>Three-Dimensional Threat.</b> Patrolling in an
+urban environment requires constant attention to its
+three-dimensional aspect; hostile actions can
+originate from rooftops, streets, subsurface levels or
+combinations of all levels at once.</p>
+</div>
+
+<h5>Classification of Urban Patrols</h5>
+
+<h5><i>Mission</i></h5>
+
+<p>The vast majority of urban patrols are overt in nature,
+with their presence readily apparent to the local
+populace. Most urban patrols are combat vice reconnaissance
+patrols. The vast majority of urban patrols
+are security patrols. However, units may be assigned
+secondary tasks of reconnoitering specific or general
+areas along the patrol routes.</p>
+
+<p>Raids normally involve a swift penetration of an
+objective to secure information, confuse the enemy or
+destroy installations. Raids include a planned withdrawal
+upon completion of the assigned mission.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Movement</i></h5>
+
+<p>Means of movement are as follows:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Dismounted: movement on foot.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Vehicular: movement by motorized, mechanized or armored vehicle.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Helicopterborne: movement by helicopter, however, helicopterborne patrols will usually involve dismounted or vehicular movement after patrol insertion.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Combination: movement using a combination of methods.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1310"></span></p>
+
+<h5><i>Task-Organization</i></h5>
+
+<p>Units task-organize to meet the specific requirements
+of the mission and situation. The Marine rifle squad is
+ideally suited for urban patrolling and can easily
+integrate attached specialists required by specific
+missions. Specialists who may accompany urban
+patrols include&#x2060;—</p>
+
+
+<p class="hanging">• Interrogator-translator team (ITT) and counterintelligence team (CIT) Marines.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Explosive ordnance disposal (EOD) personnel.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Members of host nation or allied military forces.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Interpreters.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Local community leaders.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Local law enforcement officers.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Public affairs personnel escorting media representatives.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Dismounted Patrol Organization</i></h5>
+
+<p>Patrols should maintain unit integrity (fire team and/or
+squad) in organizing elements for an urban patrol.
+Similar to reconnaissance patrols, the vulnerability of
+urban patrols necessitates that all elements must
+provide for their own security in addition to the combat
+aspect of the mission. Combined assault and
+security teams are an effective method to organize for
+all-around security.</p>
+
+<h5>Urban Patrol Base Operations</h5>
+
+<p>Urban patrols may operate from an established patrol
+base that may be located within the unit’s assigned
+area of operations or an area designated for a patrol.
+The patrol base should be located in a building used
+exclusively for this purpose. Patrol bases may also be
+located within a larger site that houses other agencies,
+such as a higher headquarters’ command echelon.</p>
+
+<p>If located within a larger site, the patrol base will be
+included in the overall facility security plan. If
+isolated, the patrol base must consider the following
+security factors:</p>
+
+<ul class="index">
+  <li class="ifrst">• External security:</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Barrier plan.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Sentry posts.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Local security patrols.</li>
+
+  <li class="ifrst">• Internal security:</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Covered positions for all Marines.</li>
+  <li class="isub1">◦ Contingency plan for hostile actions against patrol base.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<h5>The Reaction Force</h5>
+
+<p>The high probability of an urban patrol becoming
+involved in a hostile or volatile incident requires the
+establishment of a dedicated reaction force for rapid
+reinforcement, support or extraction of the patrol.
+Ideally, the reaction force is&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Large enough and task-organized in a manner that it can meet and quickly defeat the expected threat. Reaction forces are normally tiered with a lead element (normally one-third of the unit’s size) and a main body force (the other remaining two-thirds of the force). Reaction force response times routinely are determined in advance by higher headquarters.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Ready to respond immediately.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Motorized or mechanized and supported by close air support and other fire support.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Familiar with the area of operations.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Briefed on the patrol’s plans and monitors the status of patrols in progress.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Task-organized to be multimission capable.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Able to communicate with the higher headquarters, fire support assets, patrol base, and the patrol.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Controlled by higher headquarters, once employed.</p>
+
+<h5>Patrol Preparation</h5>
+
+<h5><i>Planning</i></h5>
+
+<p>Higher headquarters will&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Designate the area for patrol.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provide intelligence briefs and updates.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Ensure liaison with allied forces and the civilian populace.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provide special equipment and personnel required for the mission (scout snipers, public affairs officer, interpreters, etc.)</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Provide urban maps, photos, terrain models as required.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Consider deception and pattern avoidance when issuing mission.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Prescribe rules of engagement (ROE).</p>
+
+<h5><i>Intelligence Brief</i></h5>
+
+<p>An intelligence brief is conducted by the S-2 officer or
+representative prior to a patrol conducting its mission.
+The brief addresses the situation relevant to the specific
+patrol (e.g., routes, areas, updated enemy situations).</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1311"></span></p>
+
+<h5><i>Coordination</i></h5>
+
+<p>Higher headquarters will effect liaison with adjacent
+and allied forces, as well as civil authorities and other
+agencies, having a possible effect on the patrol. The
+patrolling unit generally follows the same procedures
+as those used during patrol planning and execution in a
+jungle or forest environment.</p>
+
+<h5><i>The Urban Patrol Order or Warning Order</i></h5>
+
+<p>The Urban Patrol or Warning Orders use the same
+format and considerations as noted in this publication
+for patrolling. They rely heavily on a detailed terrain
+model, photographs, and subterranean construction to
+ensure complete understanding of the plan.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Rehearsals</i></h5>
+
+<p>The limited size of the patrol base usually precludes
+the need for full-scale rehearsals. Immediate action
+drills, such as crossing danger areas, are rehearsed in
+as much detail as possible, despite the limited available
+space.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Inspections</i></h5>
+
+<p>Initial and final inspections are conducted in the same
+manner as other patrols. Attached personnel must be
+fully integrated into the patrol and familiar with the
+plan and unit standing operating procedures (SOPs).</p>
+
+<h5>Conducting an Urban Patrol</h5>
+
+<h5><i>Movement</i></h5>
+
+<p>Individual and unit movement considerations are
+generally the same as those for other patrols.
+However, urban environments require consideration of
+additional factors. Because of these factors, an urban
+patrol leader should&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Ensure that each movement within a patrol takes place under the observation or cover of another individual or element of the patrol.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Know where cover can be taken in the event of a hostile incident or action.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Be prepared for contact with civilians, especially children, during the patrol and be aware that they may intentionally attempt to distract patrol members.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Expect the presence of vehicles (both moving and stationary) along the patrol route.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Expect members of the patrol to be approached by dogs and what action to take if threatened.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Patrol Formations</i></h5>
+
+<p><b>Squad-sized Patrols.</b> The need for immediate fire
+power outweighs the dangers of becoming canalized.
+In contrast to other types of patrols, the headquarters
+element of an urban patrol will normally locate at the
+lead of the patrol column. This allows the patrol leader
+greater flexibility through control of two combined
+assault and security (A&amp;S) teams. The leaders of these
+elements tactically stagger their members on each side
+of the road (see <a href="#i_13-12">fig. 13-1</a> on page 13-12).</p>
+
+<p>A&amp;S teams follow in trace of the headquarters element
+and maintain unit integrity on separate sides of
+the street. One unit will remain slightly to the rear to
+create a staggered interval between Marines on either
+side of the street. This allows A&amp;S teams to take
+lateral routes in support of headquarters element without
+having to cross a street to do so.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_13-12" style="max-width: 92.8125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_13-12.jpg" alt="This sketch uses icons to  identify three squads on patrol with direction of movement from left to right. The headquarters (HQ) unit with five members is in the front while two assault & security teams, A & B, with four members each, follow from behind on the left and right sides. The unit members are staggered so that they are not all in one line.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 13-1. Squad-sized Dismounted Urban Patrol Formation.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p><b>Platoon-sized Patrols.</b> Squads will generally travel
+abreast of each other, moving along parallel routes.
+The interval between squad-sized units and/or teams is
+situation-dependent, but is usually between 100 and
+150 meters (roughly two city blocks; this often prevents
+visual contact between the units). The intent is to
+create less of a target to an aggressor, yet still allow
+the patrol to quickly react to an incident. Individuals
+within units or teams will move in a staggered column
+as in a squad-sized patrol. (See <a href="#i_13-13">figure 13-2</a>, which is
+located on page 13-13).</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp77" id="i_13-13" style="max-width: 62.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_13-13.jpg" alt="This sketch shows three platoons on patrol with direction of movement from left to right. The HQ unit of 14 members is in the front; the two A&amp;S teams of 13 members each follow from behind on the left and right sides of the HQ unit (top and bottom of the figure). Dark grey rectangles between the platoons span the width of the sketch and represent blocks of urban buildings. The platoon members are staggared so they are not in a line, and the platoons are staggered so one A&amp;S unit is ahead of the other.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 13-2. Platoon-sized Dismounted Urban Patrol Formations.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h5><i>Night</i></h5>
+
+<p>Night patrols will generally be at least squad-sized and
+will generally use the same formation as that for day
+patrols. At night, it may be necessary to close distances
+between individuals or elements to maintain
+control. Consideration should be given to the use of
+night vision devices and thermal weapons sights.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Navigation, Control, and
+Security Measures</i></h5>
+
+<p>The patrol leader is ultimately responsible for the
+navigation. The headquarters element normally functions
+as the base unit during movement. The designated
+navigator is normally assigned from within the
+headquarters element. City maps are often inaccurate
+or outdated; however, when used with aerial photographs
+and other navigational aids, they can be effective
+for urban navigation.</p>
+
+<p>Checkpoints and phase lines should be related to
+major streets (alleys, buildings, bridges) for easy identification.
+Arrival at checkpoints and crossing of phase
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1312"></span>lines should be relayed to higher headquarters using
+established brevity or codewords. A detailed patrol
+overlay is issued to both the reaction force and higher
+headquarters to keep them advised of routes and control
+measures used. A terrain model should be maintained
+at higher headquarters to aid in supervision and
+control of the patrol.</p>
+
+<p class="p1">The use of camouflage should be limited to avoid
+frightening and confusing the local populace. The
+often overt nature of urban patrols may negate the
+need for camouflage. Patrols are sometimes deployed
+to show force presence and usually move on the urban
+street in plain view.</p>
+
+<p>During daylight, patrols will routinely vary their rate
+of movement ranging from short halts to brief periods
+of double-timing. The British term for this urban patrolling
+technique is <dfn>hard-targeting</dfn>, meaning it makes
+the patrol harder for an enemy to target. Altering the
+rate of movement is intended to frustrate the enemy’s
+ability to coordinate an attack or ambush against a
+targeted patrol.</p>
+
+<p>Patrols should use short security halts, with Marines
+taking up mutually supporting firing positions.
+Marines must always work in pairs, ensuring mutual
+support. The last Marine in the element will provide
+rear security, but stays in his buddy’s sight.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Individual Tasks</i></h5>
+
+<p>Individuals may be assigned collateral tasks performed
+throughout the patrol that may increase the
+patrol’s situational awareness. Individual tasks may
+include&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Vehicle spotter: looks for suspicious or known insurgent vehicles.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Personnel spotter: observes and attempts to recognize previously identified enemy in crowds.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Talker: attempts to gain information from casual conversations with the local populace. (Talkers are usually subordinate leaders or Marines with foreign language skills.)</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Searcher: conducts physical searches of vehicles and personnel while other patrol members provide cover and security.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Marksman: engages point targets when the tactical situation does not permit massed or high volume fire. Other patrol members provide security to cover the marksman’s engagement.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Departure of Friendly Lines</i></h5>
+
+<p>Urban patrols must vary their departure times to
+prevent being ambushed while exiting the patrol base.</p>
+
+<p>Individual elements will usually depart exits at staggered
+times and at different movement rates, especially
+where sentries cannot provide cover. (This
+technique is used when the environment adjacent to
+the patrol base is dangerous.)</p>
+
+<p>Once an element has exited friendly lines, a short halt
+is conducted in a predetermined, covered initial rally
+point 50 to 100 meters from the base. This ensures all
+elements are in position before the patrol continues.</p>
+
+<p class="break"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1313"></span></p>
+
+<p class="p1">Exit points, routes from the base, departure techniques,
+and locations of IRPs should be varied
+constantly to avoid setting a pattern. This pattern
+avoidance may also include using vehicles to insert
+patrols away from the urban patrol base and employing
+empty vehicles as part of a deception plan.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Danger Areas</i></h5>
+
+<p>Urban patrols may encounter hundreds of danger areas
+during a single patrol. The three-dimensional threat
+requires keen situation awareness by every patrol
+member. Many danger areas can be dealt with simply
+by avoidance, while others require an adjustment of
+patrol formation, movement rate, etc. In the urban
+environment, places to be treated as danger areas are
+points that pose a major threat to the patrol, such as
+local political and religious headquarters, weapons
+containment areas, roads and routes that canalize
+movement and direct fire, and any area with a history
+of repeated contact.</p>
+
+<p>Near and far side rally points are designated and
+briefed during the issuance of the patrol order. Squad-sized
+formations may use the A&amp;S teams to provide
+flank security for the headquarters element and for
+each other. The headquarters element identifies the
+danger area and takes up a position on the near side of
+intersection. Individuals provide all-around security
+(see <a href="#i_13-14a">fig. 13-3</a> on page 13-14).</p>
+
+<p>Two Marines (one from each A&amp;S team) are
+designated to move through the headquarters element
+and establish respective firing positions on the near
+side of the danger area covering the patrol’s near side
+flanks. They are followed by a second pair (again, one
+Marine from each A&amp;S team) that moves across to the
+far side of the danger area and establishes respective
+firing positions covering the patrol’s far side flanks
+(see <a href="#i_13-14b">fig. 13-4</a> on page 13-14).</p>
+
+<p class="break"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1314"></span></p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_13-14a" style="max-width: 62.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_13-14a.jpg" alt="Four dark rectangles at the corners of this sketch represent buildings at an urban intersection. Three squads squads between the left buildings are shown by directional arrow moving left to right. The HQ unit with five members is in the front while two A&amp;S teams with four members each follow from behind on the left and right sides of the HQ unit. The three squads approach the four-way intersection identified as a danger area.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 13-3. Approaching Danger Area.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+<br>
+<br>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_13-14b" style="max-width: 62.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_13-14b.jpg" alt="Continuing from the previous figure, the direction of movement continues from left to right. Dashed lines indicate that one member from each A&amp;S team moves through the HQ unit and takes a position on the near side of the intersection behind buildings. Dashed lines show an additional member of each A&amp;S team moves to the far side of the intersection on their respective side in position behind buildings. Arrows from these A&amp;S team members run diagonally through the cross street showing that they provide coverage of the side street that crosses the danger area.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 13-4. Securing Flanks.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>Once near and far side flank security is established, the
+headquarters element moves across to the far side of
+danger area (see <a href="#i_13-15a">fig. 13-5</a> on page 13-15).</p>
+
+<p>The remaining A&amp;S team members then cross the
+danger area and join the headquarters element on the
+far side (see <a href="#i_13-15b">fig. 13-6</a> on page 13-15).</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1315"></span></p>
+<br>
+<br>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_13-15a" style="max-width: 108.25em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_13-15a.jpg" alt="Continuing from the previous figure, the HQ unit, shown by a dashed arrow, moves through the four-way intersection through the danger area. The remaining members of the A&amp;S teams not providing flank security cover the rear of the HQ unit as it moves forward (left to right).">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 13-5. HQ Element Moves Through.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+<br>
+<br>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_13-15b" style="max-width: 62.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_13-15b.jpg" alt="Continuing from the previous figure, after the headquarters unit has crossed the four-way intersection, dashed arrows indicate the members of the A&amp;S teams not providing flank security cross the intersection. They resume covering the rear of the HQ unit.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 13-6. A&amp;S Elements Move Through.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1316"></span></p>
+<br>
+<br>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_13-16" style="max-width: 109.0em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_13-16.jpg" alt="Continuing from the previous figure, the HQ unit remains in place while the A&amp;S team members that provided security for the flanks rejoin their original groups. The other A&amp;S team members cover their movements. Movement of the A&amp;S members is shown by dashed arrows. When reassembled on the other side of the intersection, the patrol resumes its movement to the right, as indicated by an arrow at the bottom of the sketch.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure 13-7. Patrol Resumes Movement Along Intended Route.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>Once the trail A&amp;S team members cross the danger
+area, they take up rear security and cover the
+movements of the near and far side flank security
+teams as they return to their positions in the patrol
+formation. The near side security team should collapse
+back first, followed by their far side counterparts. The
+patrol then resumes its advance away from the danger
+area (see <a href="#i_13-16">fig. 13-7</a>).</p>
+
+<h5>Interaction with Local Populace</h5>
+
+<p>Urban patrols must interact with the local populace.
+Patrols are at first a novelty to the civilians but can
+quickly become an unwelcome intrusion. The
+movement of the patrol must be fast enough to prevent
+the enemy from massing their fires upon it, but
+deliberate enough to ensure adequate security and
+mutual support. Patrol members must realize that they
+are usually the only Marines the local populace will
+encounter and that an inappropriate gesture, comment
+or act could lead to the deterioration of rapport
+between U.S. forces and the general population.
+Marines must remember that the vast majority of the
+individuals with whom they come in contact will be
+noncombatants attempting to survive in trying
+political, economic, and social situations.</p>
+
+<p>Hostile incidents often seem to occur spontaneously,
+but there are usually indications that can alert Marines
+to imminent danger. The most obvious are the sudden
+alteration of normal routines, patterns, and attitudes of
+the local populace or other unusual activity. Some
+examples include&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Observers on rooftops, in windows, etc., who are obviously tracking the patrol.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The unusual absence of pedestrian traffic and people on porches.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Stores, markets or street vendors closed suddenly or without explanation.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Changes in civilian attitude toward patrol members.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Unknown individuals or vehicles in the patrol area.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Unfamiliar vehicles parked in the patrol area (possible car bomb).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Roadblocks.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Children throwing rocks at patrols to possibly draw the patrol’s attention away from a more serious danger, such as a deliberate ambush.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Vehicles riding unusually low due to overloading (possibly ferrying people, weapons, explosives).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Agitators trying to provoke an incident with patrol members.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1317"></span></p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Absence of the usual stray dogs (dogs are adept at sensing danger and avoiding it).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Anti-American graffiti suddenly appearing in the patrol area.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Pictures of enemy leaders and martyrs posted in the patrol area.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Civilian workers failing to appear at U.S. or friendly bases.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Normal deliveries and pick-ups conducted late or early without reason.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Sudden change of civilian sentiment in newspaper articles, radio broadcasts or other media.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Women and children leaving to live elsewhere.</p>
+
+<h5>Immediate Actions Upon Enemy Contact</h5>
+
+<h5><i>Reaction to Sniping</i></h5>
+
+<p>Snipings are often executed from a single firing point,
+but coordinated snipings delivered from multiple
+points are not uncommon.</p>
+
+<p>Patrol element or team leaders should constantly try to
+identify likely firing points and anticipate their own
+reactions to a possible shooting. Normally, snipers in
+an urban environment have a detailed withdrawal plan.
+Once a patrol comes into contact with a sniper, the
+patrol leader must immediately assess the situation
+and maneuver his patrol accordingly. The patrol’s mission,
+location, size, <abbr title="Rules of Engagement">ROE</abbr>, and location of the threat
+often determine whether the patrol will attempt to neutralize
+the targeted sniper. If the patrol leader decides
+to kill or capture the sniper, he uses planned and
+rehearsed immediate actions to maneuver and counter
+the sniper’s assault. The goal is to kill the sniper or cut
+off his escape and capture him. There are three immediate
+reactions to neutralizing a sniper: initial contact,
+immediate follow-up, and subsequent follow-up.</p>
+
+<p><b>Initial Contact.</b> The initial contact is made when the
+sniper fires the first shot. The patrol must react
+immediately and positively to get behind the firing
+position in order to kill or capture the gunman. The
+period of contact ends when the gunman is killed or
+captured, or the patrol element or team leader on the
+scene ends it. The following technique is the same for
+both squad- and platoon-sized patrols:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The element or team in contact attempts to identify the firing position and maneuvers designated marksman into position to return well-aimed and controlled fire. Other members of the patrol take up positions to cover the marksman’s engagement.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The patrol element or team leader in contact sends initial contact report to the patrol leader, who notifies higher headquarters.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The element or team leader in contact determines appropriate cut-off positions and relays them to flanking elements or teams.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The patrol element or team leader in contact continues to observe the firing point, but does not enter it due to the possibility of booby traps. Flank elements or teams set up along likely escape routes.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The incident ends when either the sniper ceases fire or is neutralized.</p>
+
+<p><b>Immediate Follow-Up.</b> Regardless of the fate of the
+gunman, isolation of the firing point is necessary to
+prevent reinforcement and preserve forensic evidence
+(scent, spent casings, etc.). If not under fire, members
+of the patrol element or team cordon off the area surrounding
+the firing point. Flanking elements or teams
+maintain their positions and prevent civilians from
+entering the area. The patrol leader moves to link-up
+with the element or team in contact (if not his own),
+and makes an estimate of the situation. The patrol
+leader sends a SPOTREP to higher headquarters.</p>
+
+<p><b>Subsequent Follow-Up.</b> The aim of the subsequent
+follow-up is to use follow-on forces to clear the
+building of remaining resistance or to obtain evidence
+that can be used to capture the gunman. The patrol
+leader establishes a position where he can brief
+arriving units (reaction force commander, S-2 representative,
+EOD personnel, etc.). Once the arriving
+units have been briefed, recommendations are made to
+higher headquarters via radio. No one is allowed into
+the cordon without the patrol leader’s approval.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Reaction to Becoming
+Decisively Engaged</i></h5>
+
+<p>If a patrol becomes decisively engaged from numerous
+firing positions, the following immediate action
+should be taken:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• All patrol members move to available cover and return accurate fire on identified firing points.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The patrol leader assesses the situation and makes a decision to either request the reaction force or break contact.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• If the reaction force is requested, the patrol will maintain its position until the reaction force arrives. The patrol should use fire and maneuver to gain better tactical positioning and support the arrival of the reaction force. When the reaction force arrives, its commander may decide to either clear occupied buildings or cover the patrol during its extract.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1318"></span></p>
+
+<h5><i>Reaction to Bomb Threat or Discovery</i></h5>
+
+<p>The use of command-detonated explosive devices is a
+common ambush tactic employed by a terrorist or
+insurgent in an urban environment. The appropriate
+response to a reported threat or an actual discovery
+generally involves four steps (known as the four Cs)&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<div class="sansserif narrow">
+<p>1. The patrol leader <b>CONFIRMS</b> the presence of
+the suspicious item.</p>
+
+<p>2. Without touching or moving anything suspicious,
+patrol elements or teams <b>CLEAR</b> the immediate
+danger area to a minimum of 100 meters. The area
+is cleared from the suspected device outward, inform
+civilians as to the reason for evacuation.</p>
+
+<p>3. A&amp;S teams establish a <b>CORDON</b> to secure the
+cleared area. Avenues of approach are cordoned
+off to keep people out and to protect EOD or
+engineer personnel clearing the device. The assistant
+patrol leader acts as the cordon commander
+and informs the patrol leader when the cordon is
+secure. An effective cordon technique is to tape off
+the area with engineer tape, creating both a physical
+and psychological boundary.</p>
+
+<p>4. <b>CONTROL</b> of the area is maintained throughout
+the bomb clearing operation by the patrol leader.
+The patrol leader sends a report to a superior concerning
+details of the device (if known) and the area
+affected. The patrol leader coordinates with arriving
+personnel (EOD, engineers, etc.). The patrol leader
+maintains communication with the assistant patrol
+leader and keeps the Marines informed of the progress
+of the clearing operation.</p>
+</div>
+
+<h5><i>Reaction to a Bomb Detonation</i></h5>
+
+<p>Bombs may be used by an insurgent as a means of
+initiating an ambush on mounted or dismounted
+patrols, in which case the actions for decisive engagement
+apply. Immediate action in response to an
+isolated explosion is similar to that used in reaction to
+a sniping and breaks down into the same three phases:</p>
+
+<p><b>Initial Contact.</b> The patrol leader attempts to identify
+the likely initiation point and sends an initial contact
+report to higher headquarters. If the bomb was
+command-detonated, the patrol leader sends his A&amp;S
+teams deep to cut off the bombers’ escape routes. Any
+casualties are moved a minimum of 100 meters from
+explosion and out of the line of sight to it.</p>
+
+<p><b>Immediate Follow-Up.</b> The A&amp;S teams may need to
+maneuver to positions behind the likely initiation point
+to cut off escape. Once in position, personnel checks
+are conducted and any suspects are detained. The
+patrol leader coordinates requests for required support
+(MEDEVAC, reaction force, etc.).</p>
+
+<p><b>Subsequent Follow-Up.</b> Due to the possibility of
+secondary detonations, the four Cs (confirm, clear,
+cordon, and control) can be conducted as in reaction to
+a bomb discovery or bomb threat.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Civil Disturbances</i></h5>
+
+<p>Urban patrols must prepare to react to spontaneous
+aggression by the local populace. In many cases, civil
+disturbances are organized by the enemy to draw
+dismounted patrols into a targeted area, or to distract
+them from enemy activity occurring elsewhere. Civil
+disturbances are generally divided into two categories:
+minor aggressive actions, and full-scale rioting.</p>
+
+<p><dfn>Minor aggressive actions</dfn> are activities characterized
+by rock-throwing or use of devices such as Molotov
+cocktails and may either be directed at the patrol or
+take place between different ethnic factions of the
+population. Minor aggressive actions are normally
+spontaneous in nature and may have minimal or
+limited objectives for the insurgents.</p>
+
+<p><dfn>Full-scale rioting</dfn> events are usually in response to
+another major event or incident that may enflame the
+populace. Full-scale riots are well-planned and
+orchestrated, with clear objectives or targets in mind.
+At times, patrols will need to attempt to maintain
+control of a civil disturbance situation; however,
+dismounted and mobile small unit patrols should
+generally avoid potential flashpoints. Procedures to
+handle civil disturbances are as follows:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The patrol leader reports the incident to headquarters and attempts to diffuse the crowd by talking to crowd leaders.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• If the patrol leader determines the size of the disturbance is too large for the force to handle, the patrol should move away from the disturbance to a safer, more remote covered area and occupy positions to observe and report the situation to higher headquarters. To prevent the patrol from being pursued by the crowd, the patrol should move quickly and change direction, often at road junctions, to gain distance from it.</p>
+
+<p>Patrol members should maintain dispersion to create a
+more difficult target. They should face the crowd at all
+times to see and avoid any projectiles thrown. Individual
+self-discipline must be maintained throughout the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1319"></span>disturbance. Marines charging into the crowd or
+throwing objects back at the crowd will only worsen
+the situation. If pursued or trapped, the patrol leader
+may consider using riot control agents (combat
+support, pepper gas, etc.) to disperse or slow a crowd’s
+movement. The use of riot control agents must be
+authorized under the established <abbr title="Rules of Engagement">ROE</abbr>. If the patrol
+leader believes the situation is deteriorating beyond
+the patrol’s ability to control it, the patrol leader
+should request the reaction force, which may be better
+equipped to handle a large riot or mob.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Break Contact</i></h5>
+
+<p>As with patrols in rural areas, the patrol leader may be
+forced to break contact as a result of decisive engagement
+with the enemy. On the basis of his estimate of
+the situation, the patrol leader will normally break
+contact in one of the following ways:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• As a patrol, with elements providing cover for movement as defined by clock direction and distance.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• As individual units/teams taking separate routes out of the area, then linking up at a designated rally point a safe distance away from the engagement.</p>
+
+<p>As in any contact with enemy forces, smoke may be
+employed to screen movement. Fire support agencies
+can be utilized to suppress targets; riot control agents
+can be employed to disrupt enemy movement.</p>
+
+<h5>Reentry of Friendly Lines</h5>
+
+<p>The reentry of a dismounted patrol into an urban patrol
+base is no different from that of a patrol conducted in a
+rural area. The same planning considerations and control
+methods apply.</p>
+
+<h5>Missions Related to Urban Patrolling</h5>
+
+<h5><i>House Calls</i></h5>
+
+<p>House calls missions are usually part of a coordinated
+effort to collect information within the area of operations.
+They involve obtaining up-to-date information
+on particular houses and occupants. When possible,
+local police should accompany patrols to do the actual
+talking to the occupants. If this is not possible, a technique
+that may be used by an urban patrol is&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• A&amp;S elements move to provide cover around the target house.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The headquarters element provides security just outside the house.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The patrol leader and one Marine for security enter the house, if invited. If not invited, they talk to the occupants on the doorstep. Patience and tact are required in requesting information. An interpreter should be present when language differences exist.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Vehicle Checkpoints</i></h5>
+
+<p>Urban terrorists or insurgents commonly use vehicles
+to transport personnel, weapons, explosives, and
+equipment. Civilian vehicles are often used for these
+purposes, creating the requirement to check as many
+vehicles as possible. While permanent, fortified
+checkpoints may be conducted along approaches into
+an urbanized area, dismounted patrols can be
+employed to establish hasty vehicle checkpoints to
+stop vehicles and to keep the enemy off-guard. The
+two common types of vehicle checkpoints patrols
+establish are hasty and deliberate.</p>
+
+<p><dfn>Hasty checkpoints</dfn> are deployed anywhere based upon
+the decision of the patrol leader. Patrols must not set
+patterns through the frequent use of the same sites.</p>
+
+<p><dfn>Deliberate checkpoints</dfn> are tasked by higher headquarters
+to achieve a specific purpose. Time and locations
+are carefully considered to avoid setting patterns.</p>
+
+<p>The general layout for a squad-sized, two-way dismounted
+checkpoint is depicted in <a href="#i_13-20">figure 13-8</a> on page
+13-20. The technique is as follows:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The A&amp;S teams are positioned stealthily in blocking positions on both sides of the road.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Both the patrol leader and assistant patrol leader act as “talkers” for each direction of traffic (with local police or interrogator or translator Marines acting as interpreters) while a two-man team from the headquarters element physically searches the vehicles.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Obstacles or parked vehicles may be employed to create a staggered roadblock in center of the checkpoint to slow approaching vehicles.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The checkpoint location should be sited so that approaching vehicles cannot see it until they have passed a security team, and they have no escape route then available.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Signs announcing the checkpoint should be displayed a safe distance from the search area for safety to both drivers and Marines.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Normally higher headquarters will issue criteria that
+determines which vehicles are searched, but random checks of cars should normally be made as well. While the vehicle is being searched the driver should accompany the searcher around the vehicle.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1320"></span></p>
+
+<p class="p2 center strong sansserif"><span class="small u">VEHICLE CHECKPOINT</span><br>
+    <span class="muchsmaller u">EQUIPMENT</span></p>
+
+    <ul class="index xxs strong sansserif">
+    <li class="isub0">STOP SIGNS</li>
+    <li class="isub0">BARRIERS</li>
+    <li class="isub0">RADIOS AND WIRE PHONES</li>
+    <li class="isub0">CONCERTINA WIRE</li>
+    <li class="isub0">LIGHTS</li>
+    <li class="isub0">SURVEILLANCE EQUIPMENT</li>
+    <li class="isub0">FLEX CUFFS</li>
+    <li class="isub0">MEGAPHONES</li>
+    <li class="isub0">WHISTLES</li>
+    </ul>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp83" id="i_13-20" style="max-width: 55.3125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_13-20.jpg" alt="This sketch depicts checkpoints on a road running from the top to the bottom through a forest (tree icons). Icons show vehicles approaching from either direction must pass by a 'back stop team' equipped with a radio and deployed in a hidden position in the trees. Vehicles then come up to a stop sign accompanied by a traffic sentry. Farther along the road is a physical barrier, indicated by 'XXXXX', that is guarded by another sentry. Covering the gap between the stop sign and the barrier is another sentry, hidden from view.  In the center, where both sides of the checkpoint meet, is a central 'search area'.  Providing overwatch of that area is a 'local protection sentry'.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="center strong smaller sansserif">
+DISMOUNTED SQUAD-SIZE HASTY URBAN CHECKPOINT</p>
+
+<p class="center strong small sansserif">Figure 13-8. Dismounted Squad-sized Hasty Urban Vehicle Checkpoint.
+  </p>
+
+<p class="p1 hanging">• Vehicle occupants should be made to exit the vehicle
+and then searched. Whenever possible,
+women should be searched by female police or female
+Marines.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• All patrol members should conduct themselves with
+courtesy and politeness. If nothing is found, an
+apology for the inconvenience is recommended.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• A hasty vehicle checkpoint should not be conducted
+any longer than 30 minutes for security reasons.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• The <abbr title="Rules of Engagement">ROE</abbr> should dictate whether or not action
+should be taken against vehicles that fail to stop at
+the checkpoint. Failure of a vehicle to stop does not
+automatically give authorization to fire.</p>
+
+<h5><i>Observation Posts</i></h5>
+
+<p>Urban observation posts are established to provide
+extended security, not only for patrol bases but also for
+patrols operating within the observation post’s sector
+of observation. Observation posts can be established in
+conjunction with sniper operations and for providing
+overwatch for patrols operating within their sector of
+observation. Observation posts are normally
+positioned on dominating terrain or in buildings
+outside the patrol base itself.</p>
+
+<p>Insertion to the observation posts and conduct of observation
+may be either overt or clandestine in nature.
+Overt observation posts usually will be hardened
+positions to increase security. A patrol provides cover
+while the observation post is being inserted. A
+clandestine observation post relies on stealth of
+insertion and occupation for protection. It is normally
+positioned in abandoned buildings to cover sectors of
+observation that overt observation posts cannot. Because
+of their nature, clandestine observation posts are
+difficult to successfully establish and should not be
+manned for an extended period of time. Orders establishing
+observation posts (and patrols) must address
+the method of extraction as well as actions upon compromise/attack.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1321"></span></p>
+
+<h5><i>Cordon and Search</i></h5>
+
+<p>The cordon and search mission involves isolating a
+predesignated area by cordoning it off and systematically
+searching for enemy personnel, weapons, supplies,
+explosives or communications equipment.
+While large-scale cordon and search operations are
+planned and rehearsed in advance and normally entail
+extensive coordination with local law enforcement
+agencies, a squad-sized urban patrol may often conduct
+a cordon and search of a point target—searching
+one house or building identified by intelligence as a
+possible weapons cache.</p>
+
+<p>The basic principle of a search of a populated area is to
+conduct it with limited inconvenience to the population.
+The populace may be inconvenienced to the point
+where they will discourage urban guerillas or insurgents
+from remaining in the area, but not to the point
+that they will assist the enemy as a result of the search.</p>
+
+<p>Upon receiving intelligence that warrants the searching
+of a building or a specific tasking from higher
+headquarters, A&amp;S elements of the patrol move to
+establish an inner cordon around the target building to
+seal it off, with the primary intent of preventing
+movement out of the targeted building.</p>
+
+<p>On order, the designated reaction force deploys to establish
+an outer cordon, oriented outward some distance
+from the inner cordon and covering routes
+leading into the area in order to prevent outside interference/reinforcement.
+The reaction force maintains a
+reserve to reinforce either cordon or react to unfolding
+events (civil disturbance in response to the operation).</p>
+
+<p>Once the cordons have been established, the patrol
+leader, with the assistance of local police or interpreters,
+informs the local populace that a building is
+about to be searched, that a house curfew is in effect
+(if permitted by higher headquarters), and that all
+occupants should remain indoors. Occupants of the
+target house are instructed to gather at a central location
+to stay out of the way of the search party.</p>
+
+<p>The headquarters element, having linked up with any
+required assistance (explosive ordnance disposal
+(EOD), ITT, etc.) now acts as the search party and
+accompanies local police. A female searcher should be
+included in the party, if necessary.</p>
+
+<p>Occupants are searched and screened first for possible
+enemy personnel. Apprehended persons are evacuated
+as soon as possible.</p>
+
+<p>The head of the household should accompany the
+search party throughout the operation to be able to
+counter incriminating evidence and possible accusations
+of theft and looting against Marines. If possible,
+a prominent member of the local community should
+act as a witness.</p>
+
+<p>Buildings are best searched from top to bottom.
+Ideally, the search is conducted with the assistance of
+combat engineers using mine detectors to locate
+hidden arms and ammunition.</p>
+
+<p>If the targeted building is empty or the occupant
+refuses entry, it may be necessary to forcefully enter
+the premises to conduct a search of the dwelling. If an
+unoccupied house containing property is searched,
+arrangements should be made with the local community
+to secure it until its occupants return. Unnecessary
+force and damage to property should be
+avoided during the search.</p>
+
+<h5>Motorized Urban Patrols</h5>
+
+<p><a id="chg4"></a>The advantages of motorized urban patrols is their
+ability to capitalize on the speed, mobility, and
+protection offered by various vehicles. They may be
+motorized, mechanized or armored vehicles or a combination.
+Generally, motorized urban patrols possess
+greater combat power than dismounted patrols and can
+cover larger areas faster than dismounted patrols.</p>
+
+<p>The disadvantages of motorized urban patrols is that
+they are restricted to roads and are vulnerable to ambush
+by the enemy. They are also restricted in their
+ability to interact with the local populace.</p>
+
+<p>Motorized patrols are generally organized in the same
+manner as dismounted patrols (see <a href="#fig13-9">fig. 13-9</a>). Unit
+integrity is maintained when assigning personnel to
+specific vehicles.</p>
+
+<p>The urban patrolling principles apply to motorized
+patrols in much the same manner as dismounted
+patrols. Mutual support and depth are achieved by
+maintaining constant observation between vehicles
+and coordinating support with any dismounted patrols
+in the area. All-around security is achieved through the
+use of constant observation as well as the vehicle’s
+mobility and firepower. Positive communications between
+units or teams are maintained through vehicle
+radios. Patrol routes and speeds are varied to promote
+deception or pattern avoidance.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1322"></span></p>
+
+<table id="fig13-9" class="sansserif strong muchsmaller">
+<tr>
+ <td class="tdl vlt r pad5">DRIVER<br>
+TEAM LDR/VEHICLE CDR<br>
+GUNNER<br>
+A-GUNNER<br>
+ </td>
+ <td class="tdl r pad5">DRIVER<br>
+PATROL LDR<br>
+TEAM LDR/VEHICLE CDR<br>
+GUNNER<br>
+A-GUNNER<br>
+ </td>
+ <td class="tdl vlt pad5">DRIVER<br>
+TEAM LDR/VEHICLE CDR<br>
+GUNNER<br>
+A-GUNNER<br>
+ </td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+ <td class="tdc r pad1">A &amp; S TEAM A</td>
+ <td class="tdc r pad1">HQ UNIT</td>
+ <td class="tdc pad1">A &amp; S TEAM B</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdc r pad5"><img src="images/i_13-22.jpg" alt="Image of military wheeled vehicle.">
+</td>
+<td class="tdc r pad5"><img src="images/i_13-22.jpg" alt="Image of military wheeled vehicle.">
+</td>
+<td class="tdc pad5"><img src="images/i_13-22.jpg" alt="Image of military wheeled vehicle.">
+</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<p class="center strong sansserif small">
+Figure 13-9. Organization of a Squad-sized Motorized Patrol.
+</p>
+
+<p>The canalizing nature of streets and alleys force
+vehicular patrols to use a traveling overwatch movement
+technique to reduce vulnerability to ambushes.
+All vehicles travel at a moderate rate of speed with the
+lead vehicle stopping only to investigate potential
+danger areas. If vehicles must stop in danger areas,
+designated crew members will dismount to provide
+security. The gunner will remain at the ready and in
+the turret while the driver remains in the driver’s seat
+with the vehicle running.</p>
+
+<p>Vehicles should move at a high rate of speed only
+when responding to an incident. At all other times,
+vehicle speed should be between 15 to 20 mph to
+allow for quick reaction and good observation.
+Distances between vehicles should be approximately
+50 meters (one half to one city block) or such that
+visual contact and mutual support are ensured. Particular
+care is taken at major road junctions and other
+danger areas to ensure individual vehicles do not
+become isolated.</p>
+
+<p>Vehicles with doors removed generally enhance observation
+and overall security, yet expose Marines to
+thrown objects, theft and concealment.</p>
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1401"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="Chapter_14_Information_and_Reports">
+    <span class="smcap">Chapter 14. Information and Reports</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>It is necessary that patrol leaders and all patrol members be trained in observing
+and reporting their observations accurately. The leader of a patrol should have all
+members of the patrol immediately signal or report any information obtained.
+These reports should not be restricted to information about the enemy, but should
+also include information about the terrain, such as newly discovered roads, trails,
+swamps, and streams. The leader includes all information in the report to the
+officer dispatching the patrol. (Refer to MCRP 2-15.3, <cite>Reconnaissance Reports
+Guide</cite>, for detailed report formats.)</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec14001">14001. REPORTING</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>The officer dispatching the patrol instructs the patrol
+leader on whether and when messages are to be sent
+back during the patrol and what communication means
+to use. Messages may be oral or written. They must be
+accurate, clear, and complete. Every message should
+answer the question what, where, and when. For a
+detailed discussion on reporting, see paragraph 6002.</p>
+
+<h5>Verbal Messages</h5>
+
+<p>A patrol leader sending a verbal message should make
+it simple, brief, and avoid using numbers and names.
+The messenger should accurately repeat the message
+back to the patrol leader before leaving.</p>
+
+<h5>Written Messages</h5>
+
+<p>In preparing written messages, the patrol leader must
+distinguish between fact and opinion. Information
+about the enemy should include: strength; armament
+and equipment; actions; location and direction of
+movement; unit destination, if known; time enemy
+was observed; and the patrol’s location when the
+observation was made. Use of an overlay or sketch
+may often simplify the message.</p>
+
+<h5>Messengers</h5>
+
+<p>A messenger team is given exact instructions as to
+where to deliver the message and the route to take.
+Any information obtained along the route should be
+reported at the time the message is delivered.
+Messengers must be given all practical assistance. If in
+danger of capture, the messenger immediately destroys
+the message.</p>
+
+<h5>Radio and Signals</h5>
+
+<p>If the patrol is provided with a radio, a definite radio
+schedule for checking in must be arranged before
+departure of the patrol. The patrol leader takes every
+precaution to ensure that codes and copies of messages
+are not captured by the enemy. If a close reconnaissance
+of enemy lines is required, the radio should be
+left in a concealed location at a safe distance from the
+enemy. Once a report is sent by radio, the patrol
+should immediately leave the area to avoid the possibility
+of detection by enemy locating devices.
+Pyrotechnics (flares, colored smoke, grenades) and
+air-ground panels may also be used by patrols for
+reporting information by a prearranged signal.</p>
+
+<h5>SALUTE Report</h5>
+
+<p>Information must be reported as quickly, accurately,
+and as completely as possible. An established method
+to remember how and what to report about the enemy
+is to use the acronym SALUTE:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li><b>S</b>ize</li>
+  <li><b>A</b>ctivity</li>
+  <li><b>L</b>ocation</li>
+  <li><b>U</b>nit</li>
+  <li><b>T</b>ime</li>
+  <li><b>E</b>quipment</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p>An example of such a report is: “Seven enemy
+soldiers, unit unknown, traveling SW, crossed road
+junction on BLACK RIDGE at 211300 August
+carrying one machine gun and one rocket launcher.”</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec14002">14002. CAPTURED ITEMS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Every patrol should make a practice of searching
+enemy casualties, prisoners, and installations first for
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1402"></span>booby traps, then for equipment, papers, maps,
+messages, orders, diaries, and codes. Search
+techniques should be practiced often in order to reduce
+the time exposed to potentially dangerous situations.
+Items found are collected by the patrol leader and
+turned in with the patrol report. The items found are
+marked as to time and place of capture. When
+possible, captured items should be linked to a specific
+prisoner who possessed the items or to the place where
+the items were found. When this is done, the enemy
+prisoner of war tag and item tag are marked accordingly.
+The patrol leader must impress upon the
+members of the patrol the importance of turning in all
+documents and equipment. Furthermore, the patrol
+leader must ensure all information gathered by the
+patrol is quickly disseminated.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec14003">14003. PRISONERS</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>A patrol normally does not capture prisoners unless
+required by the mission. If prisoners are taken, the “5S
+and T” rule applies. This memory aid stands for:
+search, segregate, silence, speed, safeguard, and tag.</p>
+
+<p><b>Search.</b> Prisoners are body-searched thoroughly for
+weapons and documents as soon as they have been
+captured. This search must include the helmet, body
+armor, and gas mask. These items are left with the
+prisoner for protection until the patrol is completed.
+Weapons, equipment, and documents are tagged and
+immediately sent to the patrol leader.</p>
+
+<p><b>Segregate.</b> Prisoners are segregated into isolated
+groups: officers, noncommissioned officers (NCOs),
+privates, deserters, and civilians. By segregating prisoners,
+it makes it more difficult for leaders to organize
+escapes and issue orders to subordinates.</p>
+
+<p><b>Silence.</b> Silence is essential. Do not allow prisoners to
+talk to each other.</p>
+
+<p><b>Speed.</b> Speed is required in getting prisoners to the
+commander who dispatched the patrol. Timely
+information secured from prisoners is essential.</p>
+
+<p><b>Safeguard.</b> Prisoners are safeguarded as they are
+moved. They are restrained, but not abused. If the
+patrol will soon reach friendly positions, prisoners are
+not given cigarettes, food or water until they have been
+questioned by interrogators. If the patrol will not
+return to a friendly position for a lengthy time, the
+prisoners are given food, water and medical aid.</p>
+
+<p><b>Tag.</b> Equipment and personal effects recovered from
+prisoners are tagged so that they may later be matched
+back to specific individuals.</p>
+
+<hr class="sectop">
+<h4 id="sec14004">14004. PATROL REPORT</h4>
+<hr class="secbot">
+
+<p>Every patrol leader makes a report when the patrol
+returns. Unless otherwise directed, the report is made
+to the person ordering the patrol. If the situation
+permits, the report is written and supported by
+overlays and/or sketches. The patrol leader’s report
+should be a complete account of everything of military
+importance observed or encountered by the patrol
+while on the assigned mission. It should include the
+following information:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Size and composition of patrol.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Tasks and purpose (mission).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Time of departure.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Time of return.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Routes, out and back (show by sketch, azimuth,
+trace on map).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Terrain (general description to include any man-made
+or natural obstacles and critical terrain
+features which, if occupied by either enemy or
+friendly forces, would allow them to control the
+surrounding area).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Enemy (size, activity, location, unit, time, equipment).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Any map corrections (show on map).</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Miscellaneous information not covered elsewhere
+in report.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Results of enemy encounters.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Condition of patrol, including disposition of any
+dead or wounded.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• Conclusion and recommendations.</p>
+
+<h5 id="sec14005">14005. PATROL CRITIQUE</h5>
+
+<p>After the patrol has rested and eaten, the patrol leader
+should hold a critique. Constructive criticism is made.
+It is an excellent time to prepare for future patrols by
+going over lessons learned as a result of the patrol.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1501"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="AppxA">
+    <span class="smcap">Appendix A. Patrol Warning Order</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>The warning order is issued as soon as practical with all available information
+included to assist patrol members in preparation.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p class="p2">1. <span class="u">Situation.</span> Friendly and enemy situation information necessary for initial preparation.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="u">Mission.</span> Statement of what the patrol is to accomplish, and the purpose for
+accomplishing it. When, how, and where will be discussed in the patrol order.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="u">Execution</span></p>
+
+<p class="indent5">a. <span class="u">Task Organization.</span> General patrol organization and assignment of responsibilities if known; otherwise, promulgate in the patrol order.</p>
+
+<p class="indent5">b. <span class="u">Tasks.</span> Alert subordinate leaders to patrol tasks (e.g., stream crossing, helicopter rappelling, demolitions) requiring preparation prior to departure.</p>
+
+<p class="indent5">c. <span class="u">Coordinating Instructions</span></p>
+
+<p class="indent10">(1) Time schedule and location for individual preparation, rest, briefings, inspection, rehearsal, and departure.</p>
+
+<p class="indent10">(2) Time, place, uniform, and equipment for receiving the patrol order.</p>
+
+<p class="indent10">(3) Tasks for subordinate leaders to direct and supervise the initial preparation which may include drawing ammunition, rations, and special equipment; conducting immediate action drills or other necessary individual or unit training; meeting and briefing attachment personnel; reconnoitering the area for passage of lines; and coordinating with the necessary unit leaders.</p>
+
+<p class="indent10">(4) Preliminary guidance to specialists and key individuals regarding their roles and organization within the patrol.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="u">Administration and Logistics</span></p>
+
+<p class="indent5">a. Individual uniform, equipment, weapons, and prescribed load of rations, water, and ammunition.</p>
+
+<p class="indent5">b. Crew-served weapons (if required) and guidance regarding distribution of weapons and ammunition during movement.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1502"></span></p>
+
+<p class="indent5">c. Special equipment requirements (wire cutters, demolitions, radios, flashlights, infrared equipment, mines, binoculars) and their distribution during movement.</p>
+
+<p class="indent5">d. Restricted or prohibited items.</p>
+
+<p>5. <span class="u">Command and Signal</span></p>
+
+<p class="indent5">a. Designation of assistant patrol leader and his role in preparation.</p>
+
+<p class="indent5">b. Designation of navigators and radio operators (if required).</p>
+
+<p class="indent5">c. Brief outline of patrol leader’s schedule for preparation, and where he can be reached.</p>
+
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1601"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="AppxB">
+    <span class="smcap">Appendix B. Patrol Order</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+<p>A patrol order follows a warning order. Any of the following subjects that
+have been addressed in the warning order may be omitted with the exception
+of the mission statement. A patrol order is more detailed than a 5-paragraph
+squad order in that a great deal of attention is given to individual duties.</p>
+
+<p>The patrol order also provides orientation information, both enemy and
+friendly, that impacts the patrol and enemy forces. This information can
+include, but is not limited to, weather, terrain, visibility, NBC considerations,
+local population situation, terrain model and/or map orientation, and
+behavior.</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>1. <span class="u">Situation</span></p>
+<p class="indent5">a. <span class="u">Enemy Forces</span></p>
+<p class="indent10">(1) Composition, disposition, and strength are based on size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment (SALUTE).</p>
+<p class="indent10">(2) Capabilities and limitations to defend, reinforce, attack, withdraw, and delay (DRAW-D).</p>
+<p class="indent10">(3) Enemy’s most probable course of action.</p>
+<p class="indent5">b. <span class="u">Friendly Forces</span></p>
+<p class="indent10">(1) Mission of next higher unit (task and commander’s intent).</p>
+<p class="indent10">(2) Adjacent unit missions (task and intent). Also identify left, front, right, and rear.</p>
+<p class="indent5">c. <span class="u">Attachments and Detachments.</span> (date and time effective).</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="u">Mission.</span>
+    The mission is the task to be accomplished, and its purpose (who, what, where, when, and why). For patrols, specify if the mission or time has priority.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="u">Execution</span></p>
+<p class="indent5">a. <span class="u">Commander’s Intent and Concept of Operations</span></p>
+<p class="indent10">(1) Commander’s intent.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(2) The concept of operations tells the where, how, and who and lays out the patrol leader’s general scheme of maneuver and fire support plan. It outlines the following:</p>
+<p class="indent15"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1602"></span>(a) Task organization of the patrol.</p>
+<p class="indent15">(b) Movement to the objective area, to include navigation method.</p>
+<p class="indent15">(c) Actions in the objective area.</p>
+<p class="indent15">(d) The return movement, to include navigation method.</p>
+<p class="indent15">(e) Use of supporting forces (including illumination, if required).</p>
+<p class="indent5">b. <span class="u">Subordinate Element Missions.</span> Subordinate element missions (task and purpose) are assigned to elements, teams, and individuals, as required.</p>
+<p class="indent5">c. <span class="u">Coordinating Instructions.</span>
+    This paragraph contains instructions common to two or more elements, coordinating details, and control measures applicable to the patrol as a whole. At a minimum, it includes&#x2060;—</p>
+
+<p class="indent10">(1) Time of assembly in the assembly area.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(2) Time of inspections and rehearsals (if not already conducted).</p>
+<p class="indent10">(3) Time of departure and estimated time of return.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(4) Location of departure and reentry of friendly lines and the actions associated with departure and reentry.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(5) Details on the primary and alternate routes to and from the objective area.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(6) Details on formations and order of movement.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(7) Rally points and actions at rally points.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(8) Final preparation position and actions at this position.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(9) Objective rally point and actions at this point.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(10) Actions at danger areas.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(11) Actions in the event of enemy contact.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(12) Details on actions in the objective area not covered elsewhere.</p>
+<p class="indent10">(13) Estimated time of patrol debriefing upon return.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="u">Administration and Logistics</span></p>
+<p class="indent5">a. Changes/additions to uniform, equipment, and prescribed loads from that given in the warning order.</p>
+<p class="indent5"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1603"></span>b. Instructions for handling wounded and prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>5. <span class="u">Command and Signal</span></p>
+<p class="indent5">a. <span class="u">Command Relationships.</span> Identify key leaders and chain of command.</p>
+<p class="indent5">b. <span class="u">Signal.</span> Challenge and password, arm and hand signals, special signals, and radio frequencies and call signs.</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1701"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="AppxC">
+    <span class="smcap">Appendix C. Patrol Evaluation Checklist</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<p>This appendix provides a comprehensive checklist of critical patrolling
+steps, techniques, and procedures to aid unit leaders to critique patrol
+performance during training. Unit leaders may use the list as they observe
+the performance of a patrol to provide the patrol leader with a detailed
+analysis of the performance.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1702"></span></p>
+
+<table class="sansserif smaller">
+<tr><td class="tdc vlb l t"><b>Warning Order</b></td>
+    <td class="tdc vlb l t">Yes</td>
+    <td class="tdc vlb l t r vlt">&emsp;No&thinsp;</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL ensure all patrol members were present before issuing the warning order?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL issue a brief statement on the enemy situation?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL issue a brief statement on the friendly situation?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL state the mission in a clear, positive manner?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL list all members of the patrol including attachments?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the chain of command for the patrol covered fully?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Were all members of the patrol assigned positions and duties in particular squads and teams?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Were all the necessary individual duties assigned?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL follow established principles in organizing the patrol into squads and teams?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was each patrol member assigned a particular weapon to carry on patrol?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL list all special equipment needed to accomplish the mission?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was required special equipment assigned to the proper element to carry?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL select uniform and equipment common to all based on METT-T?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdc l t r" colspan="3"><b>Coordination with Adjacent Units</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL coordinate with other patrols operating to the right and left?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the route out and back coordinated?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the time of departure and return coordinated?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Were call signs and frequencies coordinated?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was a signal for the FPF coordinated so as not to approach friendly lines during this time?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdc l t r" colspan="3"><b>Coordination With Front Line Units</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the coordinator pass the size of the patrol?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the time of departure and return coordinated?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the coordinator give a general area of operations for the patrol?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the coordinator ask for information on known or suspected enemy positions and/or obstacles?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the coordinator ask about information on the latest enemy activity?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the coordinator ask for detailed information on friendly fire support available and the unit’s barrier plan?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the location of the IRP established and coordinated?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the coordinator ask the forward unit to monitor their patrol frequency?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the current challenge and password confirmed?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the coordinator request that all information coordinated be passed on to any relieving unit?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdc l t r" colspan="3"><b>Patrol Order</b></td></tr>                                                  <tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>General</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL check to ensure all patrol members were present before issuing the patrol order?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL issue the patrol order in a forceful, confident manner?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1703"></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL make maximum use of available visual aids in issuing the patrol order (i.e., terrain model, sand table, map board, chalkboard)?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL issue the patrol order in correct sequence?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL issue the entire patrol order without allowing interruptions by patrol members?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL adequately answer all questions asked by patrol members?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did paragraph 1a (Enemy Situation) include</b>&#x2060;—</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">A weather forecast for the period of operation?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">A description of the terrain over which the patrol was to operate?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Identification or description of enemy units known to be in the area of operations?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Known locations of enemy units?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Recent activity of enemy units?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Strength of enemy units in the operating area?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did paragraph 1b (Friendly Situation) include</b>&#x2060;—</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Mission of the next higher unit?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Locations, missions, and planned actions of units on right and left?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Fire support available to support the patrol (as per the coordination)?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Missions and routes of other patrols operating in the immediate area?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did paragraph 1c (Commander’s Intent) include</b>&#x2060;—</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">All views and ideas of what the commander wants to be accomplished?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">The final result desired by the commander?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did paragraph 1c (Attachments and Detachments) include</b>&#x2060;—</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">All attachments to patrol and effective time of attachment?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">All detachments from patrol and effective time of detachment?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did paragraph 2 (Mission) include, at a minimum</b>—</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Who was to conduct the patrol?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">What the patrol was tasked to do (i.e., conduct a point recon patrol)?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Where the action was to take place?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Why the action was to take place (i.e., the purpose)?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did paragraph 3a (Commander’s Intent and Concept of Operations) include</b>&#x2060;—</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">A complete concept of operations?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">A detailed description of the mission of elements?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">A detailed description of the mission of teams?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">A detailed description of the duties of specific individuals (i.e., navigator, compass man, pace man, corpsman, APL)?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Time of departure and time of return?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Type of formations and order of movement to be used?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1704"></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Description of the route and alternate routes(s) to include azimuths and distances between checkpoints as a minimum?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Techniques to be used in the departure from friendly areas?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Techniques to be used for the reentry into friendly areas?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Location of the IRP and a tentative ORP, to include grid coordinates and recognizable terrain features?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Method for designating and passing rally points?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Actions to be taken at rally points if their use became necessary?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Actions to be taken in the event of enemy contact?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Actions to be taken at danger areas?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Complete, detailed description of actions to be taken at the objective?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Times and locations for rehearsals and the order of priority for rehearsals?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Times and locations for inspections and the methods of conduct (to include uniform and equipment to be worn and/or carried)?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Where, when, and by whom the debriefing is to be conducted?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did paragraph 4 (Administration and Logistics) include</b>—</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Rations to be carried or reference to the warning order if there is no change?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Arms and ammunition to be carried or reference to the warning order if there is no change?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Uniform and equipment to be worn and carried or reference to the warning order if there is no change?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Method for handling wounded or dead?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Method for handling prisoners?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did paragraph 5a (Signal) include</b>—</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Complete description of all signals, code words, frequencies, and call signs to be used within the patrol?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Were signals adequate?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Radio call signs to be used?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Primary and alternate frequencies to be used?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Call signs and frequencies to be used with other units in the area of operations (if applicable)?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Required reports to be transmitted to higher headquarters, along with occasions for reporting?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Code words and brevity codes to be used between the patrol and higher headquarters?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Current challenge and password to be used in friendly held areas?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Current challenge and password to be used forward of FEBA?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did paragraph 5b (Command) include</b>—</td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Chain of command or reference to the warning order if there is no change?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Location of the PL during all stages of operation?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Location of the APL during all stages of operation?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1705"></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdc l t r" colspan="3"><b>Inspection Rehearsal</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>General</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL adequately use the allotted inspection time?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the inspection conducted in an orderly manner?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>During the inspection, did the PL check the following:</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Completeness and correctness of uniform?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Completeness of all equipment necessary to accomplish the mission?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Operational condition of equipment?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Did the PL question members to ensure they knew—</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">The mission of the patrol?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">The concept of operations?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Their individual duties and responsibilities?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Chain of command and succession?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Duties and responsibilities of key personnel?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL utilize the rehearsal area to conform as much as possible to area of operations?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t r" colspan="3"><b>Were the following major actions rehearsed:</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Actions at the objective?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Actions at danger areas?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Actions on enemy contacts?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Departure and reentry of friendly lines?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL critique each action after it had been rehearsed?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Were interpatrol communications and control measures checked at rehearsal?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL maintain control of the patrol during the rehearsal?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdc l t r" colspan="3"><b>Movement</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL use proper formations for movement?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL adequately control the point team?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL check the compass men?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the PL aware of his position at all times?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was light and noise discipline enforced?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the rate of movement appropriate for the mission?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL make full use of pace?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL make full use of count?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was proper security maintained during movement?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL select and pass proper rallying points?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL ensure that all members knew location of rallying points?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL properly use arm and hand signals?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1706"></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL recognize and halt the patrol a safe distance from a danger area?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">If the PL conducted a map check, did he conduct it properly (light discipline, security, etc.)</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did designated individuals reconnoiter the far side of a danger area properly?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Were support teams emplaced properly?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL use a proper formation in crossing the danger area?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Were reports made on enemy contact and at checkpoints?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdc l t r" colspan="3"><b>Actions on Enemy Contact</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL halt patrol a safe distance from a tentative ORP?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL issue an adequate frag order before departing to look for a tentative ORP?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL take appropriate personnel to look for the ORP?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL select a suitable ORP?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL secure the site adequately?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the patrol occupy the ORP as stated in the patrol order or subsequent frag order?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the patrol occupy the ORP in an orderly manner?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL maintain control of the patrol during occupation of the ORP?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL issue a satisfactory contingency plan to the APL before departing on a leader’s recon?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL take appropriate personnel on a leader’s recon?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL maintain or ensure that the patrol leader had communications with the patrol?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the patrol avoid being detected by the enemy during the leader’s recon?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">If contact was made, did the PL take appropriate action?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was security maintained during the leader’s recon?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL ensure the objective was kept under surveillance?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Were appropriate orders given to surveillance teams?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">If a leader recon proved a tentative ORP unsuitable, did the PL move the ORP?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was a satisfactory leader’s recon conducted?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the ORP move conducted in a satisfactory and orderly manner?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">On return to the ORP, did the PL issue appropriate frag order and allow enough time for dissemination?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdc l t r" colspan="3"><b>Actions at Objective</b></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL issue a frag order for action at the objective?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was security emplaced prior to the teams departing from the ORP?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL employ the terrain at the objective to the best advantage?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was stealth maintained while moving into the objective?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL exercise positive control of squads, teams, and individuals at the objective?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1707"></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Were actions at the objective in accordance with the details outlined in the patrol order?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did the PL make use of supporting arms at the objective?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was the action at the objective successful?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was withdrawal from the objective accomplished quickly and orderly?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Did units withdraw according to the details reflected in the patrol order?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t">Was reorganization at the ORP completed in an expeditious and orderly manner?</td>
+    <td class="l t"></td>
+    <td class="l t r"></td></tr>
+<tr><td class="tdl l t b">Did the patrol withdraw from the ORP quickly and quietly?</td>
+    <td class="l t b"></td>
+    <td class="l t r b"></td></tr>
+</table>
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1801"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="AppxD">
+    <span class="smcap">Appendix D. Ambush Formations</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<p>Formations discussed here are identified by names
+which correspond to the general pattern formed on the
+ground by deployment of the assault element.</p>
+
+<h4>Line Formation</h4>
+
+<p>The assault element is deployed generally parallel to
+the route of movement of the enemy. This positions
+the assault element parallel to the long axis of the
+killing zone and subjects the target to heavy flanking
+fire. The size of the force which can be trapped in the
+killing zone is limited by the area the assault element
+can effectively cover. The enemy is trapped in the
+killing zone by natural obstacles, mines, demolitions,
+and direct fires. (See <a href="#i_d-01">fig. D-1</a>.)</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp92" id="i_d-01" style="max-width: 67.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-01.jpg" alt="A sketch of a curving route with a right-pointing arrow shows target movement. Above the route is a narrow but long area, parallel to the direction of movement, restricting the enemy's flank with any combination of terrain, mines, or man traps. An assault unit is positioned below the target at the objective rallying point and is facing upward to trap the enemy. Below (behind) the assault unit and to the right and left are security teams providing protection for the flanks.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-1. Line Formation<br>
+    (Harassing or Destruction Ambush).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>A disadvantage of the line formation is the chance that
+lateral dispersion of the target may be too great for
+effective coverage. The line formation is appropriate
+in close terrain that restricts enemy maneuver, and in
+open terrain where one flank is protected by natural
+obstacles or can be protected by mines and demolitions.
+Similar obstacles can be placed between the
+attack force and the killing zone to provide protection
+from possible enemy counter attack. When an ambush
+is deployed in this manner, access lanes are left so that
+the enemy can be assaulted. (See <a href="#i_d-02">fig. D-2</a>.)</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp97" id="i_d-02" style="max-width: 72.1875em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-02.jpg" alt="This sketch is similar to the prior: a curving route with a right-pointing arrow to show target movement, restricted by terrain features. Added to this sketch are three man traps between the assault unit and the enemy that provide cover to the assault unit; space between the man traps provides access lanes for the assault unit. As with the prior sketch, security teams are stationed to the sides and below the assault unit.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-2. Line Formation (Access Lanes
+    for Assault of Target).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>The main advantage of the line formation is its relative
+ease of control under all conditions of visibility.</p>
+
+
+<h4>L Formation</h4>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-03" style="max-width: 67.0625em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-03.jpg" alt="A straight stretch of a trail or stream extends from left to right with an arrow showing a target's movement to the right.  An assault unit is positioned parallel to the direction of movement as well as in front of the enemy, forming an L shape.  Both legs of the L fire at the target, indicated by line arrows, when the target comes into range to create a killing zone.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-3. “L” Formation (Destruction Ambush).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>The “L” shaped formation is a variation of the line
+formation. This formation is very flexible because it
+can be established on a straight stretch of a trail or
+road (see <a href="#i_d-03">fig. D-3</a>) or at a sharp bend in a trail or a road
+(See <a href="#i_d-04">fig. D-4</a> on page D-2). The long side of the assault
+element is parallel to the killing zone and delivers
+flanking fire. The short side of the attack force is at the
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1802"></span>end of, and at right angles to, the killing zone and
+delivers enfilading fire that interlocks with fire from
+the long side. When appropriate, fire from the short
+side can be shifted to parallel the long side if the
+enemy attempts to assault or escape in the opposite
+direction. In addition, the short side prevents escape
+and reinforcement. (See <a href="#i_d-05">fig. D-5</a>.)</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-04" style="max-width: 66.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-04.jpg" alt="A curved stretch of a trail or stream extends from left-to-right across the sketch, bending upward; it contains an arrow showing a target's movement to the right. An assault unit is positioned parallel to the direction of movement as well as in front of the enemy at the beginning of the curve, forming a bent L shape. Arrows from both legs of the L indicate firing at the target when it comes into range to create a killing zone.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-4. “L” Formation<br>
+    (Bend of Trail or Stream).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-05" style="max-width: 62.5em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-05.jpg" alt="This sketch has two parts. They are simplified versions of Figures D-3 and D-4 showing only the outline of the assault unit with no target displayed. In both sketches the assault unit's long leg parallel to the direction of travel remains in place; the short leg can move forward or backward of the direction of travel, indicated by arrows that extend from the assault unit.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-5. “L” Formation.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h4>“Z” Formation</h4>
+
+<p>The “Z” shaped formation is another variation of the
+line formation.</p>
+
+<p>The assault element is deployed as in the “L” formation,
+but with an additional side so that the formation
+resembles a “Z”. (See <a href="#i_d-06">fig. D-6</a>).</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-06" style="max-width: 69.8125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-06.jpg" alt="This sketch is similar to  Figure D-3, but adds a downward perpendicular extension to the assault unit at the left end. This extension mirrors the short side of the previous L shape, creating a new Z shape. If the target assaults through the attack force, the extension can move forward or backward, shown by arrows from the extension in both directions, creating an alternate killing zone on the other side of the assault unit.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-6. “Z” Formation.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>The additional wing may serve any of the following
+purposes:</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• To engage an enemy force attempting to relieve or
+reinforce the enemy unit engaged in the kill zone.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• To seal the end of the killing zone.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• To restrict a flank.</p>
+
+<p class="hanging">• To prevent an envelopment.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1803"></span></p>
+
+<h4>“T” Formation</h4>
+
+<p>In the “T” shaped formation, the assault element is
+deployed across (perpendicular to) the enemy’s route
+of movement so that its position forms the crossing of
+a “T” at the top. (See <a href="#i_d-07">fig. D-7.</a>)</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp57" id="i_d-07" style="max-width: 67.75em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-07.jpg" alt="This sketch depicts, with an arrow, a target's direction of travel from the top to the bottom of the image, forming the long portion of the T shape. On both sides, the flanks are restricted by any combination of terrain, mines, or man traps, illustrated by outlined areas. Forward of the target's direction of movement, at the bottom of the image, the assault unit is positioned on either side of the target's path, creating the crossing of an upside-down T shape. Security teams are deployed behind and to both sides; all units are gathered around the objective rallying point at the bottom of the image.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-7. “T” Formation.
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>This formation can be used day or night to establish an
+ambush to interdict movement through open areas that
+are hard to seal off.</p>
+
+<p>A small force can use the “T” formation to harass,
+slow, and disorganize a larger force. When the lead
+elements of the enemy are engaged, they will normally
+attempt to maneuver right or left to close with the
+ambush. Mines and other obstacles placed to the
+flanks of the killing zones slow the enemy’s movements
+and permit the ambush force to deliver heavy
+fire and withdraw without becoming decisively
+engaged.</p>
+
+<p>The “T” formation can be used to interdict small
+groups attempting night movement across open areas.
+For example, the assault element is deployed along an
+avenue of approach with every second man facing the
+opposite direction. The attack of the enemy approaching
+from either direction requires only that every
+second man may shift to the opposite side of the formation.
+Each man fires only to his front and only when
+the enemy is at a very close range. Attack is by fire
+only and each man keeps the enemy under fire as long
+as it remains to his front.</p>
+
+<p>If the enemy attempts to escape in either direction
+along the killing zone, each Marine takes the enemy
+under fire as the enemy comes into the Marine’s sector
+of fire. The “T” formation is very effective at halting
+infiltration. But it has one chief disadvantage; there is
+a possibility that the ambush will engage a superior
+force at night while spread out. (See <a href="#i_d-08">fig. D-8</a>.)</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-08" style="max-width: 70.125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-08.jpg" alt="This sketch uses icons to depict the assault unit lined up left-to-right, with security teams at both ends. The enemy is represented by a wide arrow that crosses the assault unit line from above and below. Smaller line arrows pointing upwards and downwards from the assault team indicate that every other man faces the opposite direction, so the team can detect the enemy's approach from either direction.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-8. “T” Formation (Target Approaching
+    from Either Direction).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h4>The “V” Formation</h4>
+
+<p>The “V” shaped formation is deployed along both
+sides of the enemy’s route of movement so that it
+forms a “V”; care is taken to ensure that neither group
+(within the “V”) fires into the other.</p>
+
+<p>This formation subjects the enemy to both enfilading
+and interlocking fire. The “V” formation is best suited
+for fairly open terrain but can also be used in close
+terrain. When established in close terrain, the legs of
+the “V” close in as the lead element of the enemy force
+approaches the apex of the “V”, and opens fire at a
+close range.</p>
+
+<p>Here, even more than in open terrain, all movement
+and fire must be carefully coordinated and controlled
+to ensure that the fire of one wing does not endanger
+the other wing. The wider separation of forces makes
+this formation difficult to control, and there are few
+sites that favor its use. Its main advantage is that it is
+<span class="pagenum" id="Page_1804"></span>difficult for the enemy to detect the ambush until it is
+well into the killing zone. (See <a href="#i_d-09">figs. D-9</a> and <a href="#i_d-10">D-10</a>.)</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp63" id="i_d-09" style="max-width: 69.8125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-09.jpg" alt="This sketch uses a verical arrow to indicate the target's movement from the bottom to the top. Assault units are positioned at 45-degree angles on either side of the direction of travel, forming an upside-down V shape. Security teams are behind the assault units to protect their flanks. As the enemy moves toward the apex of the V, it enters the killing zone.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-9. “V” Formation (Open Terrain).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-10" style="max-width: 69.8125em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-10.jpg" alt="This sketch continues Figure D-9. Here, the assault units have moved to positions that parallel to the target's upward direction of travel. The legs of the V have closed in from the 45-degree angle to parallel the path, reducing distance to the target. Security teams remain behind the assault units.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-10. “V” Formation (Close Terrain).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<h4>Triangle Formation</h4>
+
+<p>The triangle is a variation of the “V” formation and
+can be varied in three ways:</p>
+
+<h4>Closed Triangle Formation</h4>
+
+<p>(See <a href="#i_d-11">fig. D-11</a>.) The assault element is deployed in
+three teams, positioned so that they form a triangle (or
+closed “V”). An automatic weapon is placed at each
+point of the triangle and positioned so that it can be
+shifted quickly to interlock with either of the others.
+Men are positioned so that their sectors of fire overlap.
+Mortars may be positioned inside the triangle.</p>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp88" id="i_d-11" style="max-width: 68.0625em;">
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-11.jpg" alt="Sketch depicts three assault teams positioned so that they form the sides of a triangle. In the center, inside of the triangle, is a mortar position. An automatic weapon is placed at each point of the triangle, indicated by line arrows aiming outward. Dashed line arrows indicate that the weapon can be repositioned to change its direction of fire.">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    Figure D-11. Closed Triangle Formation
+    (Night Ambush).
+  </figcaption>
+</figure>
+
+<p>When deployed in this manner, the triangle ambush is
+used to interdict night movement through open areas.
+When enemy approach is likely to be from any direction,
+this formation provides all-around security,
+and security forces are deployed only when they can
+be positioned so that if detected by an approaching
+enemy, they will not compromise the ambush. Attack
+is by fire only, and the enemy is allowed to approach
+within close range before fire is initiated.</p>
+
+<p>The advantages of the closed triangle formation are
+ease of control, all-around security, and the enemy can
+be brought under the fire of at least two automatic
+weapons, regardless of the direction they approach.</p>
+
+<p>Disadvantages are that it requires a force of platoon
+size or larger to reduce the danger of being overrun by
+an unexpectedly large force and that one or more sides
+of the triangle may come under enfilade fire. The lack
+of dispersion, particularly at the points, increases the
+danger from enemy mortar fire.</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1805"></span></p>
+
+<h4>Open Triangle Harassing Formation</h4>
+
+<p>This variation of the triangle ambush enables a small
+force to harass, slow, and inflict heavy casualties upon
+a large force without itself being decisively engaged.
+The assault element is deployed in three teams, positioned
+so that each team becomes a corner of a triangle
+containing the killing zone. (See <a href="#i_d-12a">fig. D-12</a>.)</p>
+<br>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-12a" style="max-width: 77.25em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET IS THINLY SURROUNDED. FIRST TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-12a.jpg" alt="This is the first of five sketches of figure D-12 that show the target as a wide, dark arrow pointing left. Three assault teams face the target, positioned around the target in an open triangle, two teams above and one below. The team ahead of the enemy opens fire, indicated by a line arrow from the assault team towards the target.">
+</figure>
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-12b" style="max-width: 76.375em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET ATTACKS. TEAM WITHDRAWS. SECOND GROUP OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-12b.jpg" alt="The second sketch continues the action. A dark arrow indicates the target attacks the assault team that had fired on it first. That team withdraws, illustrated by  a white arrow pointing away from the center field of action. The assault team below the target commences firing, indicated by an upward arrow towards the target.">
+</figure>
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-12c" style="max-width: 76.0em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET SHIFTS ATTACK. SECOND GROUP WITHDRAWS. THIRD TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-12c.jpg" alt="The third sketch shows the target now engaging both assault teams that fired upon it, indicated by black arrows from the target towards the teams. Both assault teams withdraw, indicated by white arrows pointing away from the field of action. The third assault team attacks, indicated by a line arrow towards the target's rear.">
+</figure>
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-12d" style="max-width: 97.625em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET SHIFTS ATTACK. THIRD TEAM WITHDRAWS.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-12d.jpg" alt="In the fourth sketch, the target attacks all three the assault teams, indicated by dark arrows. The three assault teams withdraw, indicated by white arrows pointing away from the center field of action. The three assault teams remain in the triangle formation.">
+</figure>
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-12e" style="max-width: 45.8125em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET IS PULLED APART. SUFFERS LOSSES, BUT AMBUSH FORCES NOT  DECISIVELY ENGAGED.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-12e.jpg" alt="In the last sketch, all three assault teams have withdrawn, remaining in the triangle formation. White arrows point towards the assault teams from the center field of action. The target icon has disappeared, indicating that it has been pulled apart.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="center strong sansserif small">
+Figure D-12. Open Triangle Formation.
+</p>
+
+<p class="p2">When the enemy enters the killing zone, the team to
+the enemy’s front opens fire on the leading element.
+When the enemy counterattacks, the group withdraws
+and the team on the enemy’s flank opens fire. When
+this team is attacked, the team to the opposite flank
+opens fire. This process is repeated until the enemy is
+pulled apart. Each team reoccupies its position, if possible,
+and continues to inflict the maximum damage
+possible without becoming decisively engaged.</p>
+
+
+<h4>Open Triangle Destruction Formation</h4>
+
+<p>The assault element is again deployed in three teams,
+positioned so that each team is a point of the triangle,
+200 to 300 meters apart. The killing zone is the area
+within the triangle. The enemy is allowed to enter the
+killing zone; the nearest team attacks by fire. As the
+enemy attempts to maneuver or withdraw, the other
+teams open fire. One or more teams, as directed,
+assault or maneuver to envelop or destroy the enemy.
+(See fig. <a href="#i_d-13a">D-13</a> on page D-6.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1806"></span></p>
+<br>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-13a" style="max-width: 35.5em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    200–300 METERS BETWEEN TEAMS.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-13a.jpg" alt="This is the first of five sketches in this figure. Three assault teams, identified by ovals, form an open triangle, two on the top and one on the bottom. The inner area of the triangle is identified as the killing zone.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-13b" style="max-width: 44.0em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    TARGET ENTERS KILLING ZONE. NEAREST TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-13b.jpg" alt="In the second sketch, the target, represented by a black right pointing arrow, has moved from the left to the center of the triangle. The lower assault team fires at the target, indicated by a line arrow from the team towards the target.">
+</figure>
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-13c" style="max-width: 42.25em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    TARGET ATTEMPTS TO MANEUVER OR ESCAPE. NEAREST TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-13c.jpg" alt="In the third sketch, the Target's direction of travel has changed towards the upper left. The lower and upper right assault teams fire at the target, indicated by line arrows.">
+</figure>
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-13d" style="max-width: 40.375em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    EACH TEAM ATTACKS AS THE TARGET ATTEMPTS TO MANEUVER OR ESCAPES.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-13d.jpg" alt="In the fourth sketch, the target's direction of travel has changed to head to the lower left. The assault team at the upper left fires at the target, indicated by a line arrow.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-13e" style="max-width: 41.25em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif muchsmaller">
+    ONE OR MORE TEAMS MAY ASSAULT TO ENVELOP OR DESTROY THE TARGET.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-13e.jpg" alt="In the final sketch, the assault team at the bottom has changed position, moving upwards and left to confine the target between two teams.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="center sansserif strong">
+Figure D-13. Open Triangle Formation (Destruction Ambush).
+</p>
+
+<p class="p2">This formation is suitable for platoon-size or larger
+ambush forces. A smaller force would be in too great a
+danger of being overrun. Another disadvantage is that
+control, in assaulting or maneuvering, is very difficult.
+Very close coordination and control are necessary to
+ensure that assaulting or maneuvering teams are not
+fired on by another team. The ambush site must be a
+fairly level open area that provides concealment
+around its border for the ambush force.</p>
+
+<h4>The Box Formation</h4>
+
+<p>The “box” formation is similar in purpose to the open
+triangle ambush. The assault element is deployed in
+four teams, positioned so that each team becomes a
+corner of a square or rectangle containing the killing
+zone. It can be used for a harassing or destruction
+ambush in the same manner as the variations of the
+open triangle formation. (See <a href="#i_d-14a">figs. D-14</a> on page D-7
+and <a href="#i_d-15a">D-15</a> on page D-8.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1807"></span></p>
+<br>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-14a" style="max-width: 36.9375em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET IS THINLY SURROUNDED, ONE TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-14a.jpg" alt="This is the first of five sketches comprising Figure 14. Four attack teams (ovals) are at each corner of a rectangle, facing the center, forming an open box. In the center is the target, a left-pointing arrow. The upper left attack team fires at the target, indicated by a line-arrow from the corner towards the target.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-14b" style="max-width: 38.625em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET ATTACKS, TEAM WITHDRAWS. A REAR TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-14b.jpg" alt="The four assault units (ovals) remain in a rectangle formation. The Target attacks the upper left assault team, shown by a line arrow towards the team from the Target. The team withdraws, shown by a white arrow pointing away from the center of action. The attack team at the opposite corner, lower right, fires at the target, indicated by a line arrow.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-14c" style="max-width: 40.1875em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET SHIFTS ATTACK. TEAM WITHDRAWS. SECOND FORWARD TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-14c.jpg" alt="In the third sketch, the four assault teams remain in a rectangle formation. The target has now engaged the teams in the upper-left and lower-right, both of which proceed to withdraw. The assault team at the lower-left attacks, indicated by a line arrow towards the target.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-14d" style="max-width: 41.6875em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET AGAIN SHIFTS ATTACK. TEAM WITHDRAWS. SECOND REAR TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-14d.jpg" alt="In the sketch, the assault teams remain in a rectangle formation. The target attacks the lower left assault team, shown by an arrow towards the team from the target. The three teams that previously attacked withdraw, shown by white arrows pointing away from the center of action. The remaining attack team in the upper right fires at the exposed rear of the target, indicated by a line arrow from the team towards the target.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-14e" style="max-width: 36.0625em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET ATTACKS AND IS PULLED APART. SUFFERS LOSSES. AMBUSH FORCES NOT DECISIVELY ENGAGED.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-14e.jpg" alt="In the last sketch, the four attack teams remain in a rectangle formation. The target is now trying to engage four separate assault teams simultaneously; it is pulled apart into four smaller arrows.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="center strong sansserif">
+Figure D-14. Box Formation (Harassing Ambush).
+</p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1808"></span></p>
+<br>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-15a" style="max-width: 33.75em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    200-300 METERS BETWEEN TEAMS.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-15a.jpg" alt="Five images in sequence illustrate the ambush. In this first sketch, four assault teams (ovals) are positioned at the corners of a rectangle, the center of which is identified as the killing zone.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+
+<figure class="figcenter illowp91" id="i_d-15b" style="max-width: 29.25em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET ENTERS KILLING ZONE. NEAREST TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-15b.jpg" alt="In the second sketch, the four assault teams remain in the corners. The target, a thick black arrow, enters the killing zone from the upper left, heading towards the lower right. The assault team in the lower left fires at the target, indicated by a line arrow from the team towards the target.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-15c" style="max-width: 31.75em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    TARGET ATTEMPTS TO MANEUVER OR ESCAPE. NEAREST TEAM OPENS FIRE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-15c.jpg" alt="In the third sketch, the assault teams remain in the corners. The target arrow is smaller than before and its direction of movement now points towards the upper right. Both assault teams on the left fire at the target, indicated by line arrows towards the target.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp98" id="i_d-15d" style="max-width: 30.5em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    SUCCESSIVE TEAMS ATTACK AS TARGET ATTEMPTS TO MANEUVER OR ESCAPE.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-15d.jpg" alt="In the fourth sketch, the assault teams remain in the corners. The target arrow is shown successively moving from the upper right to the lower right, then to the lower left. All four assault teams fire at the target, indicated by line arrows from the teams towards the target.">
+</figure>
+
+<hr>
+<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_d-15e" style="max-width: 31.8125em;">
+  <figcaption class="sansserif">
+    ONE OR MORE TEAMS MAY ASSAULT TO ENVELOP OR DESTROY THE TARGET.
+  </figcaption>
+  <img class="w100" src="images/i_d-15e.jpg" alt="In the final sketch, three assault teams (ovals) remain in position at the corners of the box. The target arrow attempts to depart the killing zone heading to the left. The assault team from the upper left closes in on the target, pinning the target between itself and the lower left assault team.">
+</figure>
+
+<p class="center strong sansserif">
+Figure D-15. Box Formation (Destruction Ambush).
+</p>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1901"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="AppxE">
+    <span class="smcap">Appendix E. Acronyms</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<table class="smaller">
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl pad3">A&amp;S</td>
+<td class="tdr pad3">assault and security</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl pad3">CIT</td>
+<td class="tdr pad3">counterintelligence team</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl pad3">EOD</td>
+<td class="tdr pad3">explosive ordnance disposal</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl pad3">ITT</td>
+<td class="tdr pad3">interrogator-translator team</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">MAGTF</td>
+<td class="tdr">Marine air-ground task force</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">MEDEVAC</td>
+<td class="tdr">medical evacuation</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl vlt pad3">METT-T</td>
+<td class="tdr pad3">mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">NBC</td>
+<td class="tdr">nuclear, biological, chemical</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl pad3">NCO</td>
+<td class="tdr pad3">noncommissioned officer</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl pad3">OTL</td>
+<td class="tdr pad3">overserver-target line</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">RCA</td>
+<td class="tdr">riot control agents</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl pad3">ROE</td>
+<td class="tdr pad3">rules of engagement</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl vlt">SMAW</td>
+<td class="tdr">shoulder-launched multipurpose assault weapon</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl vlt">SMEAC</td>
+<td class="tdr">situation, mission, execution, administration and logistics, and command and signal</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">SOP</td>
+<td class="tdr">standing operating procedures</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl pad3">SPOTREP</td>
+<td class="tdr pad3">spot report</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td class="tdl">TTP</td>
+<td class="tdr">tactics, techniques, and procedures</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+<div class="chapter">
+<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_2001"></span></p>
+  <h3 class="nobreak" id="AppxF">
+    <span class="smcap">Appendix F. References</span>
+  </h3>
+</div>
+
+<table class="smaller">
+<colgroup>
+  <col style="width: 15%;">
+  <col style="width: 85%;">
+</colgroup>
+<tr><td class="tdl" colspan="2"><b>Joint Publication (JP)</b></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt pad3">1-02</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad3">DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl" colspan="2"><b>Fleet Marine Force Manual (FMFM)</b></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt pad3">6-5</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad3">Marine Rifle Squad (proposed MCWP 3-11.2)</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl" colspan="2"><b>Marine Corps Warfighting Publications (MCWP)</b></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">3-15.3</td>
+    <td class="tdr">Scout Sniping (under development)</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">3-35.3</td>
+    <td class="tdr">Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT)</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt pad3">3-41.2</td>
+    <td class="tdr pad3">Raids (under development)</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl" colspan="2"><b>Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRP)</b></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">2-15.3A</td>
+    <td class="tdr">Reconnaissance Patrol Leader’s Planning Handbook (under development)</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">2-15.3B</td>
+    <td class="tdr">Reconnaissance Reports Guide</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">3-02C</td>
+    <td class="tdr">Water Survival Handbook (under development, currently exists as Fleet Marine Force Manual 0-13)</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5-12A</td>
+    <td class="tdr">Operational Terms and Graphics</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr><td class="tdl vlt">5-12C</td>
+    <td class="tdr">Marine Corps Supplement to the DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop">
+
+<div class="chapter transnote">
+<h3 style="display: none; visibility: hidden;">Transcriber's Note</h3>
+<p class="h4head">Transcriber’s Note:</p>
+
+<p>The case of the title for Chapter 7 was adjusted for consistency
+with remaining chapters. Extraneous punctuation was removed; where
+missing or unprinted, expected punctuation was added. Misspelled
+words were corrected. Line spacing was adjusted to context. In
+Chapter 13 and Appendix D, some illustrations were moved to be closer
+to the text that references them.</p>
+
+<p>The <a href="#notvalid1">email address</a> and <a href="#notvalid2">website address</a> provided in the 'To Our Readers' section are no longer valid.</p>
+
+<p>The following were changed:</p>
+
+<ul>
+  <li>Changed ‘deleted’ to ‘detected’ in <a href="#table2-2">Table 2-2</a>.</li>
+  <li>Added word ‘a’ to ‘columns to pass a given point’ in <a href="#chg2">Section 3001</a>.</li>
+  <li>Changed ‘PI’ to ‘PL’ in <a href="#fig11-3">Figure 11-3</a>.</li>
+  <li>Deleted word ‘a’ from ‘advantages of a motorized urban patrols’ in <a href="#chg4">Chapter 13</a>.</li>
+</ul>
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div style='text-align:center'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 78401 ***</div>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/78401-h/images/cover.jpg b/78401-h/images/cover.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de791fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/cover.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-1.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de9c19e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-1.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-2.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-2.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5045c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-2.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-3a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-3a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0948028
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-3a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-3b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-3b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..927da91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-3b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-4.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-4.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60c1e36
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-4.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-5a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-5a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cc000f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-5a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-5b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-5b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76ed44f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-5b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-5c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-5c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..094dc60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-5c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-6a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-6a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aeefa75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-6a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_02-6b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_02-6b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e2636f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_02-6b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_04-1.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_04-1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..48a3e55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_04-1.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_04-2.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_04-2.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..127a5ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_04-2.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_04-3a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_04-3a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73ae31e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_04-3a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_04-3b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_04-3b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e2ec4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_04-3b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_04-3c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_04-3c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4659fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_04-3c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_04-4a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_04-4a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1910260
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_04-4a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_04-4b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_04-4b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..998f39c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_04-4b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_04-6.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_04-6.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5cc2a14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_04-6.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-1.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d9e589
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-1.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-10.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-10.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e260dd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-10.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-2a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-2a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40a9f78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-2a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-2b_1.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-2b_1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43cd437
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-2b_1.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-2b_2.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-2b_2.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a32e88e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-2b_2.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-3.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-3.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cfedaf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-3.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-5a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-5a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ebf0934
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-5a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-5b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-5b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5294838
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-5b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-5c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-5c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4332cde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-5c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-5d.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-5d.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f94466
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-5d.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-5e.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-5e.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..406499a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-5e.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-5f.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-5f.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0cd04b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-5f.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-5g.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-5g.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..abf3497
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-5g.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-6a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-6a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bff8619
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-6a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-6b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-6b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29896ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-6b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-7a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-7a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95bd661
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-7a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-8.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-8.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4875cf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-8.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_05-9.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_05-9.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0c2dc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_05-9.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_06-1.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_06-1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c98f920
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_06-1.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_06-2a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_06-2a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c753748
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_06-2a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_06-2b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_06-2b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..496132a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_06-2b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_06-3.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_06-3.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e32967
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_06-3.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_06-4a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_06-4a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4d5566
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_06-4a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_06-4b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_06-4b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6484fd8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_06-4b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_06-4c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_06-4c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e2d653d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_06-4c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_06-4d.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_06-4d.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e04914
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_06-4d.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_06-5.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_06-5.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6896e6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_06-5.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_07-1.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_07-1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..af79b6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_07-1.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_07-2a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_07-2a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ce3e8c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_07-2a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_07-2b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_07-2b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b7ab7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_07-2b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_07-2c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_07-2c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe94107
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_07-2c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_07-3a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_07-3a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..46df95e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_07-3a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_07-3b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_07-3b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..49a4ba5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_07-3b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_07-3c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_07-3c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3386ef2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_07-3c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_07-4.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_07-4.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9aeb5bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_07-4.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_07-5.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_07-5.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..622624f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_07-5.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_08-2.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_08-2.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..602ee99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_08-2.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_11-10a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_11-10a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db711ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_11-10a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_11-10b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_11-10b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f851c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_11-10b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_11-2.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_11-2.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40c61db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_11-2.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_11-8.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_11-8.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e1b0844
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_11-8.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_11-9a1.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_11-9a1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92fd636
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_11-9a1.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_11-9a2.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_11-9a2.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..423200c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_11-9a2.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_11-9b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_11-9b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..623f56f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_11-9b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_13-12.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_13-12.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a773539
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_13-12.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_13-13.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_13-13.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da8ba22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_13-13.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_13-14a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_13-14a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f06fdea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_13-14a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_13-14b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_13-14b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cb7bc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_13-14b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_13-15a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_13-15a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e82af7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_13-15a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_13-15b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_13-15b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12dd58f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_13-15b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_13-16.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_13-16.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2436a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_13-16.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_13-20.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_13-20.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..567983c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_13-20.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_13-22.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_13-22.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d45a959
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_13-22.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-01.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-01.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ffa4cb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-01.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-02.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-02.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..24bed55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-02.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-03.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-03.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bab1537
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-03.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-04.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-04.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae5a769
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-04.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-05.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-05.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d41c284
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-05.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-06.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-06.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f1a60eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-06.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-07.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-07.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..79bfaa2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-07.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-08.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-08.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92b1173
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-08.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-09.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-09.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf5ac84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-09.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-10.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-10.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e003b29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-10.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-11.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-11.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..377770b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-11.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-12a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-12a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8dfd49f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-12a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-12b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-12b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65bdd22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-12b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-12c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-12c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d79993
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-12c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-12d.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-12d.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..318bbd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-12d.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-12e.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-12e.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64e9736
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-12e.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-13a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-13a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da399eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-13a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-13b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-13b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1feda97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-13b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-13c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-13c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..10d49b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-13c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-13d.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-13d.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1609507
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-13d.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-13e.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-13e.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9fb97a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-13e.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-14a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-14a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47147c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-14a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-14b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-14b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..859c985
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-14b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-14c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-14c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..22ebcdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-14c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-14d.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-14d.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2513d16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-14d.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-14e.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-14e.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f6fd4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-14e.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-15a.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-15a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e27005d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-15a.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-15b.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-15b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae850a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-15b.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-15c.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-15c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..753b6c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-15c.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-15d.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-15d.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ed0a74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-15d.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/i_d-15e.jpg b/78401-h/images/i_d-15e.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b3cd60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/i_d-15e.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/signature.jpg b/78401-h/images/signature.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73e53a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/signature.jpg
diff --git a/78401-h/images/usmc_logo.jpg b/78401-h/images/usmc_logo.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bfdaf1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/78401-h/images/usmc_logo.jpg
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c72794
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This book, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..98d9130
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for eBook #78401
+(https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/78401)